Tsunami

Warning Center
Reference Guide
 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide
U.S. Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning System Program
2007
Printed in Bangkok, Thailand

Citation:
U.S. Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning System Program (US IOTWS). 2007. Tsunami Warning Center
Reference Guide supported by the United States Agency for International Development and part-
ners, Bangkok, Thailand. 311 p.

This publication is made possible through support provided by the United States Agency for Inter-
national Development (USAID) under the terms and conditions of a Participating Agency Program
Agreement with the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).

The views expressed in this document do not necessarily reflect the views of the United States
Agency for International Development or the United States Government. This publication may be
reproduced or quoted in other publications as long as proper reference is made to the source.

The U.S. Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning System (US IOTWS) Program is part of the international
effort to develop tsunami warning system capabilities in the Indian Ocean following the December
2004 tsunami disaster. The U.S. program adopted an “end-to-end” approach—addressing regional,
national, and local aspects of a truly functional warning system—along with multiple other hazards
that threaten communities in the region. In partnership with the international community, national
governments, and other partners, the U.S. program offers technology transfer, training, and infor-
mation resources to strengthen the tsunami warning and preparedness capabilities of national and
local stakeholders in the region.

U.S. IOTWS Document No. 26-IOTWS-07

 Chapter 1
Introduction to the Tsunami Warning Center
Reference Guide
In the aftermath of the Great Sumatra Earthquake and Indian Ocean Tsunami of
December 26, 2004, countries of the Indian Ocean basin formed an Intergovernmental
Coordination Group (ICG) for the development of an Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning
System (IOTWS). An effective end-to-end tsunami early warning system could have
saved thousands of lives that were lost in the devastating tsunami. The ICG/IOTWS
was formed under the auspices of the United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cul-
tural Organization (UNESCO) Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission (IOC).
Subsequently, ICGs have also been established in the Caribbean, Atlantic, and Mediter-
ranean basins to guide the development of tsunami warning centers in those areas. A
tsunami warning system can only be successful if it spans the continuum of activities
associated with an “end-to-end” approach. An end-to-end tsunami warning system
begins with the rapid detection of a tsunami wave and ends with a well prepared
community that is capable of responding appropriately to a warning (Figure 1-1).

Figure 1-1. Overview of an End-to-End Tsunami Warning System

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 1-1

 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

The operation of a tsunami warning center is a vital part of an end-to-end tsunami

warning system. A tsunami warning center is not only involved in acquiring and
processing data for detecting a tsunami, but also in formulating and disseminat-
ing tsunami warnings and connecting with communities at risk to ensure that they
understand the warning and have the capacity to respond. Tsunami warning centers
must develop partnerships with international organizations; national, subnational, and
local agencies; community leaders and organizations; businesses; and local citizens to
ensure warnings are received and understood by local communities.

Under a U.S. IOTWS Program supported by the United States Agency for International
Development (USAID), the National Oceanic and Administration (NOAA) is contrib-
uting to this international effort to develop an end-to-end tsunami warning system
through the transfer of appropriate technologies and operational procedures from its
nearly 40-year involvement and leadership in the ICG for the Pacific Tsunami Warn-
ing and Mitigation System. This Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide is one of
NOAA’s contributions to the development of an effective end-to-end tsunami warning
system for the Indian Ocean.

Purpose of the Guide

The purpose of this Guide is to serve as a reference for countries that are establish-
ing new or maintaining and enhancing existing tsunami warning centers as part of
an overall end-to-end tsunami warning system. This document describes a concept
of operations for a National Tsunami Warning Center (NTWC) or Regional Tsunami
Watch Provider (RTWP) and also provides outreach and education resources for these
centers. Additionally the Guide is designed to assist individuals, organizations, and
governmental entities who operate or interact with a tsunami warning system. Some
of the groups and individuals who will find the information contained in this docu-
ment useful include, but are by no means limited to:
 International policy makers
 National government policy decision makers
 Government agency planners
 National and local government preparedness officials
 Disaster responders, including nongovernmental organizations (NGO)
 Television, radio, and newspaper reporters and editors
 Tsunami warning center staff members

This Guide describes the key operational components of a tsunami warning center
and the relationship of each component within an end-to-end tsunami warning
system. The document incorporates lessons learned from the two NOAA operational
tsunami warning centers: the West Coast/Alaska Tsunami Warning Center (WC/ATWC)
in Palmer, Alaska, and the Pacific Tsunami Warning Center (PTWC), based in Hawaii.

1-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

PTWC works closely with other regional and national centers, including those oper-
ated by France, Russia, and Japan, and NOAA’s WC/ATWC. As a result, the Guide is a
concept of operations (CONOPS) based on guidance established by the IOC.

This document is not an operations manual and does not provide step-by-step
instructions for establishing a tsunami warning system. Furthermore, this Guide does
not set forth warning system operational procedures and shift duties, sometimes
referred to as Standard Operating Procedures (SOP). SOPs are unique to each tsunami
warning center and are coordinated through the IOC for that respective basin ICG.

The Guide documents and communicates overall quantitative and qualitative aspects
of a tsunami warning system, with a specific focus on NTWCs. The concept of opera-
tions for an RTWP is very similar to that of a national center, but the RTWP CONOPS
must satisfy a broader multilateral legal framework and requires more extensive inter-
national cooperative agreements.

Organization of the Guide

This Guide is organized into chapters that provide
an overview of the operational and organizational
Tip
requirements of a tsunami warning center, followed Given the complexity of the information
presented and the diversity of the
by one chapter for each of the seven key operational
audience, this Guide is designed to help
components (Figure 1‑2). Each chapter begins with a
the reader move smoothly through the
general overview of the component and its role in an
text by providing visual clues wherever
end-to-end tsunami warning system. Sections within
possible. These include figures and tables,
each chapter describe subcomponents essential for the summaries of key points, tip boxes, and
operation of a tsunami warning center. Throughout examples or case studies.
the document, critical information and examples are
highlighted in tip boxes.

Chapter 1 - Introduction
Chapter 1 is this introduction, which provides a description of the purpose and
intended use of the Guide as well as some of its limitations. This chapter has intro-
duced the meaning of an end-to-end tsunami warning system and the vital role of a
tsunami warning center within that system.

Chapter 2 - Overview of the Operational and Organizational

Requirements of a Tsunami Warning Center
Chapter 2 provides an overview of the key operational and organizational require-
ments of a tsunami warning center as they currently exist at the two NOAA
tsunami warning centers and at the Japan Meteorological Agency (JMA). The
operational requirements of a tsunami warning center are presented as a “systems
description” in the context of a people-centered multi-hazard early warning system.
The organizational requirements of a tsunami warning center include staffing,

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 1-3

 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Local Seismic
Networks

GLOSS Tide Gage

Networks

Local Tide Gage

Networks

Figure 1-2. Key Operational Components of a Tsunami Warning Center

documentation, and interoperability requirements and performance measures. The

chapter provides an overview of the various links in the end-to-end chain. These
include data collection and monitoring, decision making and warning issuance, and
working with partners to get warnings “all the way to the beach.” The chapter is a
blueprint for the operation of a tsunami warning center and its contribution within a
successful end-to-end tsunami warning system.

Chapters 3 to 9 - Descriptions of Each Operational

Component
Chapters 3 through 9 present more detailed information on the key operational
aspects and components of the various systems including data, equipment, products,
telecommunications, outreach strategies and tools that comprise a full, people-
centered tsunami warning system. The information in these chapters is derived from

1-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

various sources, including PTWC, WC/ATWC, JMA, UNESCO, World Meteorological

Organization (WMO), U.S. Geological Survey, University of Hawaii, University of
Washington, and Harvard University, just to name a few.

Appendices
The appendices consist of such resources as a list of acronyms (Appendix A), glossary
of terms (Appendix B), position descriptions for tsunami warning center staff posi-
tions (Appendix C), a list of working documents a center should develop and main-
tain (Appendix D), and lists of references and additional resources for each chapter
(Appendix E).

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 1-5

 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

1-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Chapter 2
Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s
Operational and Organizational Requirements
A tsunami is a series of ocean surface waves generated by a submarine earthquake,
submarine volcanic eruption, landslide, or meteor impact. Offshore earthquakes are
by far the most common cause of tsunamis. Currently there is no global tsunami early
warning system, although an ocean-wide system has been operational in the Pacific
basin under the auspices of the Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission (IOC)
of United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) for
more than 40 years.

Within the IOC’s Intergovernmental Coordination Group (ICG) framework, there

are two types of operations centers. A National Tsunami Warning Center (NTWC)
operates within the legal framework of the country in which it resides and serves.
It provides warnings, watches, and advisories to its citizenry and public and private
agencies. A Regional Tsunami Watch Provider (RTWP), through international agree-
ments (which include meeting IOC/ICG requirements), provides tsunami forecasts
and other information to another or several other countries in a particular region or
oceanic basin. An RTWP may also serve a dual role as the NTWC for the country in
which it resides. For the purpose of this Guide, the term “tsunami warning center”
will be used as a generic term for either an NTWC or RTWP, unless the requirements
discussed are specific to either type of operations center.

The United Nations International Strategy for Disaster Reduction provides a frame-
work for an effective tsunami early warning system that is people-center and
integrates four interrelated elements: (1) knowledge of risks faced, (2) technical moni-
toring and warning service, (3) dissemination of meaningful warnings to those at
risk, and (4) public awareness and preparedness to act. While tsunami warning cen-
ters are focused primarily on monitoring and warning, they play a vital role in pro-
viding technical input and developing community partnerships for the other elements
of risk reduction that are essential for an effective tsunami early warning system.

The Pacific Tsunami Warning Center (PTWC), based in Ewa Beach, Hawaii, serves as
the operational headquarters for the Pacific Tsunami Warning and Mitigation System
(PTWS). PTWC works closely with other regional and national centers in monitoring
seismological and sea level stations and instruments around the Pacific Ocean to eval-
uate potentially tsunamigenic earthquakes. The PTWS disseminates tsunami informa-
tion and warning messages to over 100 locations across the Pacific. Regional tsunami
warning centers operated by the United States, France, Russia, and Japan provide
regional warnings to Alaska, the U.S. west coast, and Canada; French Polynesia; and

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 2-1

 Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

Tip the northwest Pacific, respectively. The tsunami

warning system in the Pacific is one of the most
successful international scientific programs with a
In recent years new shorthand terminology
has been used to describe the entire direct humanitarian aim: to mitigate the effects of
process required to detect, warn, and elicit tsunamis to save lives and property.
protection measures for a natural hazard.
Increasingly this comprehensive process The heart of a tsunami warning system is its opera-
is referred to as “end to end,” meaning tions center. The primary mission of a full-service
from initial to final steps required for a NTWC or RTWP is to provide accurate and timely
successful system. The term “end to end” tsunami warnings and bulletins to coastal popula-
does not always translate accurately, and tions in its area of responsibility (AOR) 24 hours
some cultures prefer to refer to the process per day, 7 days per week. To accomplish this mis-
as “beginning to end”. In the case of a
sion, a tsunami warning center detects and analyzes
tsunami system this of course means from
earthquakes throughout its adjacent ocean basin.
the beginning, i.e. earthquake detection,
Earthquakes that are above a previously established
to the end, i.e. evacuation or cancellation
threshold activate the center’s alarm system and ini-
of the warning.
tiate an earthquake and tsunami investigation that
includes the following four basic steps:
 Locate and characterize the earthquake’s source and its probability of creating a
tsunami via the collection of data from seismic networks
 Review automated earthquake analysis, and if necessary, modify (by the duty sci-
entist or watch stander) the automated results
 Obtain continuous sea level data from tide gage sites, and where available, data
from Deep Ocean Assessment and Reporting of Tsunamis (DART™) buoys, to
verify the existence of a tsunami and to calibrate models
 Prepare and disseminate information to appropriate emergency management
officials and others

Initial tsunami warning bulletins are based solely on seismic data. Once an initial tsu-
nami warning bulletin has been issued, the nearest tide gages and tsunami detectors
are monitored to confirm the existence or nonexistence of a tsunami, and its degree
of severity. Tsunami warning bulletin text includes warning/watch extent, earthquake
parameters, evaluation, and the tsunami estimated time of arrival (ETA) for sites
throughout the center’s AOR. Bulletins should be updated every 30 minutes when
possible to minimize rumors and confusion. However, routine updates should not
delay the issuance of additional warnings.

As an integral part of the international community, an NTWC or RTWP should issue

tsunami bulletins in collaboration with neighboring NTWCs (and RTWPs where
appropriate) whenever time permits. The NTWC issues bulletins to state or province
departments of emergency services, federal disaster preparedness agencies, and many
other recipients in its AOR. Earthquakes large enough to be felt near the coast, but
below the tsunami warning threshold size, should prompt informational messages to
these same recipients to help prevent needless evacuations.

2-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

Tsunami history and pre-event modeling, along with observed tsunami amplitudes,
are taken into account in determining the extent of danger to a center’s AOR. The
center may refrain from issuing a warning, or issue the warning for only selected
areas, if tsunami history (and modeling, if available) indicates there is no danger or
danger only to selected areas. Historical events have shown that tsunami damage is
possible to a site if waves reach 50 centimeters (cm) or more in amplitude. Therefore,
if a tsunami is expected to reach 50 cm or more, or if the tsunami potential cannot
be accurately judged, warnings should be continued. Tsunamis cannot be predicted
exactly, so the 50-cm cutoff is considered general guidance.

Operational Components of a Tsunami Warning Center

The key operational components of a tsunami warning center are to provide real-time
monitoring, alert of seismic and tsunami activities, timely decision making, and dis-
semination of tsunami warnings, advisories and information (Figure 2-1). The chain

Local Seismic
Networks

GLOSS Tide Gage

Networks

Local Tide Gage

Networks

Figure 2-1. Key Components of a Tsunami Warning Center End-to-End Chain

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 2-3

 Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

begins with data collection and ends with saving lives. Each country decides how the
information received from its RTWP, if it has one, will be utilized. In some cases the
RTWP warning products by prior bilateral agreement, may go to an NTWC for direct
in-country distribution. In these instances the receiving country is depending upon
the RTWP for data monitoring and warnings. At the other extreme of the spectrum of
service, RTWP products may be used simply as one of many inputs to a fully devel-
oped NTWC’s decision process. In such cases the country is relying on its own NTWC
for data collection and warning decisions, as well as notification and dissemination.

As can be seen in Figure 2-1, and discussed throughout this document, there are
numerous technologies and human intervention points in the end-to-end system.
These components are all linked through an overarching system that cascades from
international to national to local levels. These components are summarized below and
can be thought of as links in a chain, with each being crucial to the overall strength
of the chain.

Earth Data Observations (Chapter 3)

Earth data observations are an essential component of the hazard detection and fore-
cast capacity of a tsunami warning center. The rapid detection and characterization of

T
tsunami-generating earthquakes provides the first indica-
tion of a potential tsunami in an end-to-end tsunami warn-
ing system. Initial seismic-based warnings based on data
ip
from networks of seismic gages are subsequently refined Initial tsunami warnings
by the detection of tsunami-generated changes in sea level, are based on earthquake

measured by coastal tide gages and buoys. magnitude and location.

The refinement of initial seismic-based warnings with data

on sea level changes can greatly increase the credibility of the warnings by decreas-
ing false alarms. To make this refinement, the tsunami warning center must have a
basic understanding of the mechanisms that cause changes in sea level, and how a
tsunami wave registers on a tide gage. A tsunami warning center must utilize seis-
mic and sea level data from international, and sometimes local, networks in order to
detect earthquakes and the potential generation of a tsunami.

Data and Information Collection (Chapter 4)

The timely collection of data and information from locally maintained and interna-
tional earth data observation networks is a crucial function of NTWCs and RTWPs.
Several telecommunications connections are required to collect data and information
needed to detect a tsunami. Some data, especially seismic and sea level data from
international networks, are available in real time through the internet and satellite
downlinks. Data from locally maintained networks often require alternate com-
munications paths such as land lines, wireless telephone, or radio. Seismic and sea
level data are of little value to the center if the data are not received in time to allow
analysis. Thus, the second link in the chain, data communications (discussed in sev-
eral sections of Chapter 4), is critical to the success of the end-to-end system. This

2-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

requires the use of international communication methods like the World Meteorologi-
cal Organization’s (WMO) Global Telecommunications System (GTS), and also alter-
nate ways of obtaining seismic, tide gage, and DART buoy data.

The center should also acquire, in the most effective and

efficient way, real-time earthquake and tsunami informa-
tion released by other tsunami warning centers and earth-
Tip
Communications are
quake observatories, such as the U.S. Geological Survey the lifeblood of a multi-
(USGS) National Earthquake Information Center (NEIC), hazard warning center.
the PTWC, Japan Meteorological Agency, West Coast/ All aspects of operations,
Alaska Tsunami Warning Center (WC/ATWC), and RTWPs from collecting data
coordinated by the UNESCO IOC. Information should be to disseminating
acquired from other NTWCs through faxes, posted on warnings to developing
Internet web sites, the GTS, and other alternate public and community connections
all depend on effective
non-public information sources. In all cases, the commu-
communications.
nications programs must be continually maintained and
upgraded by an Information Technology Officer (ITO) on,
or available to, the center staff.

Tsunami Detection Requirements (Chapter 5)

The next crucial link in the end-to-end chain, as discussed in depth in Chapter 5,
is the forecast of whether a tsunami has or has not been generated from a seismic
event, and the refinement of the forecast by sea level data. This requires incorporat-
ing seismic and sea level data from the communications channels into an integration
and analysis subsystem that integrates all the necessary input information together,
and analyzes this information as input to a decision making subsystem.

A decision making subsystem that is composed of useful aids to the operational

watch stander is needed to assist making quick decisions on the issuance of seis-
mic information bulletins and tsunami warning products. This may be an automated
system or one that is an interactive man-machine mix. Tsunami forecast models, and
the computer systems they run on, must be developed, adapted, and upgraded at the
center by good computer programmers.

Tsunami Warning System Decision Support (Chapter 6)

Once the tsunami’s existence and its amplitude have been forecasted there must be a
system to assess the potential impact of the tsunami. As discussed in Chapter 6, this
tsunami prediction subsystem should have an appropriate historical database, with
possible inundation areas under different scenarios of tsunami occurrences. This sub-
system should quickly generate the necessary forecasts to expedite the determination
of the possible impact of a tsunami. This is necessary for the issuance of credible
warnings that cover only areas actually affected, if possible, with few “false alarms”
that lead to unnecessary and costly evacuations.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 2-5

 Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

A large part of this decision support system includes local inundation maps for vari-
ous tsunami amplitudes. These maps often are generated locally, and updated as new
technologies (such as better inundation mapping or higher resolution topographic
data) become available. Increasingly, it also entails running “what if” scenarios to
produce probabilities of various degrees of impact from the seismic event.

Warnings and Other Products (Chapter 7)

Once the decision is made to issue a warning or other bulletin, the NTWC and RTWP
products should not cause confusion. For this reason the products sent to constitu-
ents should adhere as closely as possible to international standards and formats. This
includes standards for warnings, watches, advisories, and information statements.
Lead times for each type of product should be established by centers in conjunction
with the needs of their customers. Product examples are illustrated in Chapter 7. The
basic definitions of these warning and other products are described below.

Tsunami Warning: A Tsunami Warning is issued by NTWCs when a potential tsu-

nami with significant widespread inundation is imminent or expected. Warnings
alert the public that widespread, dangerous coastal flooding accompanied by power-
ful currents is possible and may continue for several hours after arrival of the initial
wave. Warnings also alert emergency management officials to take action for the
entire tsunami hazard zone. Appropriate actions to be taken by local officials may
include the evacuation of low-lying coastal areas, and the repositioning of ships to
deep waters when there is time to do so safely. Warnings may be updated, adjusted
geographically, downgraded, or canceled. To provide the earliest possible alert, initial
warnings are normally based only on seismic information.

Tsunami Watch: A Tsunami Watch is issued by RTWPs and NTWCs to alert emer-
gency management officials and the public of an event that may later impact the
Watch area. The Watch may be upgraded to a Warning or Advisory (or canceled)
based on updated information and analysis. Therefore, emergency management offi-
cials and the public should prepare to take action. Watches are normally issued based
on seismic information without confirmation that a destructive tsunami is under way.

Tsunami Advisory: A Tsunami Advisory is issued by RTWPs and NTWCs for the
threat of a potential tsunami that may produce strong currents or waves dangerous to
those in or near the water. Coastal regions historically prone to damage due to strong
currents induced by tsunamis are at the greatest risk. The threat may continue for
several hours after the arrival of the initial wave, but significant widespread inunda-
tion is not expected for areas under an Advisory. Appropriate actions to be taken by
local officials may include closing beaches, evacuating harbors and marinas, and the
repositioning of ships to deep waters when there is time to do so safely. Advisories
are normally updated to continue the Advisory, expand or contract affected areas,
upgrade to a Warning, or cancel the Advisory.

2-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

Information Statement: An Information Statement is issued by centers to inform

emergency management officials and the public that an earthquake has occurred.
In most cases, Information Statements are issued to indicate there is no threat of a
destructive tsunami affecting the issuing tsunami warning center’s AOR and to pre-
vent unnecessary evacuations, as the earthquake may have been felt in coastal areas.
An Information Statement may, in appropriate situations, caution about the possibility
of destructive local tsunamis. Information Statements may be reissued with additional
information, though normally these messages are not updated. However, a Watch,
Advisory, or Warning may be issued for the area, if necessary, after analysis and/or
updated information becomes available.

Bulletin Content: Tsunami bulletins, i.e. warning, watch, advisory, or statement as

appropriate, should be issued by the RTWP or NTWC, in general, when an earth-
quake with the magnitude 6.5 or greater occurs, or when a quake strong enough to
cause concern among coastal residents occurs. IOC/ICG has agreed that warning,
watch, advisory, and information products should contain:
 Earthquake Information
 Origin time (UTC)
 Coordinates (latitude and longitude) of the epicenter
 Location (name of geographical area)
 Magnitude (M)
 Depth (only for an earthquake occurring at a depth of 100 km or more) below
the ocean floor
 Tsunami Information
 Evaluation of tsunamigenic potential based on the empirical relationship
between M of earthquake and generation/nongeneration of tsunami in the
NTWC’s or RTWP’s AOR basin(s).
 Estimated tsunami travel times to reach the respective coasts in the NTWC’s or
RTWP’s AOR (only for an earthquake of M greater than or equal to 7.0). This is
best handled by specifying forecast points that are well known to emergency
managers and the populace.

Dissemination and Notification (Chapter 8)

Tip
A comprehensive information dissemination program is critical
to an effective end-to-end tsunami warning system. If the proper
stakeholders are not identified, and if they do not receive crucial
warnings, the end-to-end system will have failed to deliver the If the people in harm’s
message to the last mile, to the beach. As discussed in detail in way do not receive and
Chapter 8, bulletin recipients and communications methods should properly respond to

be identified and established well in advance of any events. The an accurate tsunami
warning, then the system
entire dissemination system should be tested on a routine basis.
has failed.
Dissemination processes should take advantage of all technologies
available to the center and be automated as much as possible to

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 2-7

 Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

decrease the time required to issue warnings and improve efficiency in providing
warnings. Whenever possible, there should be redundant communications paths to
ensure receipt of critical data and complete dissemination of important bulletins.

After the initial bulletin has been issued, the center must monitor recorded tsunami
effects via coastal tide gages and DART detectors to confirm the existence or non-
existence of a tsunami, and its degree of severity. In coordination with neighboring
NTWCs and RTWPs, the center should issue a cancellation, extension, or final bulle-
tin as appropriate.

Bulletin thresholds may vary somewhat due to local circumstances. However, a center
should strive to adhere as closely as possible to the generally accepted values rec-
ommended by IOC/IOTWS – II (January 2006), and used by the current operational
NTWCs and RTWPs.

In addition to international dissemination via GTS, and use of regional satellite based
dissemination systems, such as the Emergency Managers Weather Information Net-
work (EMWIN), Radio and Internet for the Communication of Hydro-Meteorological
and Climate-Related Information (RANET), and GEONETCast (a global network of
satellite based data dissemination systems providing environmental data to a world-
wide user community), some of the more local communications channels should be
used for dissemination include:
 Dispatching short text messages via Short Message Service (SMS) to mobile
phones.
 Sending electronic or telephonic faxes to relevant disaster management agencies.
 Transmitting relevant information to mass media and mass media broadcasting
systems consisting of radio, television, and print media.
 Assisting emergency management officials in alerting the targeted public through
public announcement systems using sirens, alarms, and all hazards alert broadcast
systems.
 Alerting the public through conventional phones and SMS based text messages
using cell broadcast tower technology to reach all mobile phone users in an area at
risk.
 Automated updating of earthquake and tsunami web pages.

Successful end-to-end systems require cooperation at all levels, a commitment of all

stakeholders to work together during a tsunami warning, and over the long term,
a sustained effort of activity to keep awareness and preparedness at high levels. A
mechanism to build organizational support and long-term commitment is through
Tsunami Coordination Committees (TCC) that bring together stakeholders from warn-
ing centers, emergency management and first responders, tsunami scientists, other
government agencies, nongovernmental organizations, and the private sector. The
TCC’s mission is to enable and advocate for policies, procedures, and programs that

2-8 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

are needed to save lives and property from tsunamis. TCCs are discussed in Chap-
ter 8, in the section on NTWC and RTWP community preparedness programs. Due to
the infrequent nature of tsunamis, it is also strongly advised that a tsunami warning
system be embedded in a multi-hazards framework to ensure sustainability.

An NTWC or RTWP might not be directly responsible for some of the links in the
end-to-end chain. In many cases, other government agencies and private groups will
be charged with taking tsunami warning center products and notifying the popu-
lace. These authorities must provide understandable safety messages to the public
to ensure that persons at risk move to safe areas. Even when not directly charged
with notification and action planning, the tsunami warning center can contribute to
stronger links in the overall chain if the center understands and works with the other
groups to ensure the warnings get all the way to the beach and proper actions are
taken. A tsunami warning center will usually work with two distinct groups:
 Partners are generally other government and nongovernment groups that play
some role in the detection, warning, and preparedness process. These will include:
 Domestic and international data providers
 Government and private entities (including the mass media) that serve as com-
munications conduits for product dissemination
 Government and private sector groups that train and educate other NTWC and
RTWP partners and customers
 Business and economic groups like coastal hotel operators
 Customers are those groups and individuals that rely on the NTWC or RTWP and
its partners for timely and accurate tsunami watches and warnings, for protection
of their lives and the opportunity to minimize the impact on their property. Cus-
tomers include:
 General public
 Nongovernmental organizations (NGO) and other private sector groups that
must respond to events
 Government agencies that must respond to events

A center’s outreach and education program must recognize these two distinct classes
of constituents since each has unique requirements. The NTWC may even have to
employ different techniques to identify and deal with the major groups that comprise
each of these two categories. These constituents are also discussed in Chapter 8 in
the section on NTWC and RTWP community preparedness programs.

Community Connections (Chapter 9)

The final link in the end-to-end chain is the action taken by those that will be
affected by a tsunami warning. For local tsunamis that can come ashore in 10 minutes
or less, alerts should reach the public within minutes to be effective. For distant tsu-
namis, which could take hours to reach shore, tsunami warning centers and national

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 2-9

 Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

Tip
disaster management organizations have ample time to
organize evacuations, so that no one should ever lose
their life from a distant tsunami.
A warning that fails to
generate the proper
Local preparedness and commitment is the key for suc-
response is not an
cess, because ultimately, warning systems will be judged
effective warning—it is
on their ability to reach people on the beaches and to lead
an exercise in futility.
them safely inland or to higher ground before the first
tsunami waves hit.

The goal and focus of NTWC and RTWP outreach should be to educate the public
and other partners about tsunami safety and preparedness and promote the center’s
tsunami warning program through public events, media workshops, and the public
school system. During actual tsunami events, the tsunami warning center should
have a designated public affairs officer to coordinate media response. During annual
tsunami exercises, the public affairs officer is responsible for notifying the media.
A center’s public affairs officer should also provide media training and guidance to
agency representatives, respond to media requests, organize news conferences, coor-
dinate briefings and tours at the warning centers, develop informational materials,
assist with briefings of government officials, and plan outreach activities. Chapter 9
will discuss public outreach and education extensively, with the hope that tsunami
warning centers will be a strong partner and resource to other groups.

Organizational Capacity Requirements of a Tsunami

Warning Center
A tsunami warning center’s operations require constant attention and must be pro-
vided the resources needed to conduct 24/7 operations as well as maintain all the
earth data gages, computers, computer programs, and communications needed to ful-
fill its mission. Both NTWCs and RTWPs should maintain up-to-date documentation
including a concept of operations, standard operating procedures, and agreements
with partners and customers. Finally, the goal for each RTWP should be to maintain
or exceed the capability and interoperability requirements as defined by the IOC and
the applicable ICG.

Staffing Requirements
In addition to staffing around-the-clock operational shifts, additional resources are
needed for staff training and conducting or integrating research into center opera-
tions. This is the only way to ensure that a center keeps pace with advances in
technology and science. To meet its full mission, an NTWC requires several criti-
cal positions to ensure that all necessary functions are accomplished. Experience at
PTWC and WC/ATWC shows that an NTWC should have a staff of at least 17 people
to be effective. That experience has also shown that the staffing structure depicted in
Figure 2-2 is the minimum necessary to ensure an effective NTWC.

2-10 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

Warning Center Director

Administrative Warning
Science Officer
Assistant Coordination Officer

Electronics Operational Watch Information

Technicians (2) Standers (10) Technology Officer

Figure 2-2. Organizational Chart for 24/7 NTWC

Description of each of the functions depicted in Figure 2-2 and the major duties and
knowledge required for each position are detailed in Appendix C

Equipment and Maintenance Requirements

At a minimum, a tsunami warning center maintenance program consists of com-
puter hardware and software maintenance. This includes local area network and
communications hardware and software maintenance and upgrades. Technicians
may also be called upon to maintain fiscal plant systems such as backup generators,
telephone systems, etc., and install and maintain seismic and coastal tide gages at
remote locations. The latter often requires expert knowledge in order to locate good
observational sites.

The size of a maintenance program is heavily impacted by the number of earth data
gages deployed and maintained by a center. Some centers may be able to function
without the need to augment international seismic and coastal sea-level gage net-
works. Centers that have a local tsunami threat and must deploy their own gages will
require additional electronics technicians, sufficient financial and travel resources,
and adequate spare equipment to properly maintain the local equipment. For large
centers that must maintain numerous pieces of equipment, it is recommended that a
system be established to track routine and emergency maintenance so that staffing
can be adjusted to meet workloads, and poorly performing equipment can be identi-
fied and replaced.

Communications Requirements
Communications hardware and software are crucial to the success of a tsunami warn-
ing center. This includes the communications systems for collecting earth data obser-
vations, and the often different systems for collaborating with other centers and

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 2-11

 Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

disseminating critical warning messages to government

agencies and the public. Once identified and integrated
into center operations, these pathways must be continu-
Tip
Proper documentation,
ally tested to make sure they will be performing as needed e.g. CONOPS,
during actual events. When tests indicate a failure, the Operations Manual,
problem should be resolved as quickly as possible as the User’s Guide. etc., must
next event can occur at any time. be kept up-to-date to be
useful and effective.

Documentation Requirements for

Tsunami Warning Centers
To be effective, an NTWC or RTWP requires documen-
tation that clearly states the center’s mandate, authority, and relationship to other
government agencies. Equally important are references that document the center’s
concept of operations, standard operating procedures, and agreements with part-
ners and customers. In June 2007, the UNESCO IOC Tsunami Coordination Unit
recommended that NTWCs and RTWPs include, at a minimum, the following
documentation.

NTWC/RTWP Concept of Operations (CONOPS): This is a document that is global,

basinwide, or countrywide in scope, depending upon the AOR of the center. It should
be a high-level document for decision makers and describe the system and how
it functions in general terms. It should identify who is involved and clearly define
their roles and responsibilities. It should be maintained by the IOC or the applicable
country.

Operations Manual: This document details how a particular NTWC or a Disaster

Management Office’s Emergency Operations Center (EOC) works to carry out its roles
and responsibilities. The manual should be designed to be used by the duty people at
that center. It should include information on emergency management plans and stan-
dard operating procedures (SOP), such as criteria for action, data streams, communi-
cations links, analysis software, messaging software, notification and dissemination
methods, and general troubleshooting. It should be maintained by the NTWC or EOC
as appropriate. SOPs can be defined as:
 A set of written instructions describing a routine, or repetitive activity conducted
by an organization. The instructions are stakeholder agreed-upon steps that will
be used in coordinating the Who, What, When, Where, and How aspects of the
Tsunami Emergency Response Plan (TERP) described later in this chapter.
 A mechanism for operating effective and reliable warning systems and disaster
management systems. The NTWC SOPs must be linked at all levels from interna-
tional to national to local warning institutions, and must be simultaneously con-
nected to the corresponding Disaster Management Office’s SOPs, and vice versa.

SOPs should cover a number of CONOPS activities to enable an end-to-end response

process. SOPs can range from data processing, analysis, and warning communication

2-12 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

procedures to action checklists for conducting public coastal evacuations, coordinat-

ing stakeholder organizations, and establishing the roles and jurisdictions for govern-
ment, nongovernment, and private-sector agencies.

SOPs also should facilitate good decision-making by describing in detail the actions
taken by an agency to carry out its responsibilities, as defined in the system’s
CONOPS document. The existence and use of SOPs are especially essential for rapid,
efficient tsunami response since tsunamis are rapid-onset disasters with little time to
prepare. Because of this, all responses need to be preplanned, well practiced, and
automatically enacted to minimize loss of life through quick public notification.

Examples of operations manuals for tsunami warning centers include: PTWC and WC/
ATWC Operations Manual (2006), USGS NEIC Earthquake Response Plan (2006), and
the Japan Meteorological Agency’s Manual on Operations and Systems for Tsunami
Warning Service (2007).

Examples of operations manuals for EOCs include: The Guide to the National Civil
Defense Emergency Management Plan - New Zealand (2006), The British Columbia
(Canada) Tsunami Warning and Alerting Plan (2001), California (USA) Local Plan-
ning Guidance on Tsunami Response (Second Edition, 2006), Wakayama Prefecture
(Japan) Plan of Mobilization and Transmittal of Tsunami Forecast (2007), and Kushi-
moto City (Japan) Municipal Local Tsunami Response Procedures (2007).

Operations Troubleshooting Manual: This document should provide details on

what actions to take when a system has failed. This can be computer hardware fail-
ure, communications link failure, a software problem, etc. It should be maintained by
the NTWC or RTWP as appropriate. Examples these manuals include PTWC’s Opera-
tions Troubleshooting Manuals and the USGS NEIC Earthquake Analysts Manual
(Draft 2006)

Tsunami Warning System Users Guide: This guide should contain general infor-
mation for customers on tsunamis and the tsunami threat, tsunami warning center
procedures, and the criteria for action, along with sample messages. It should include
a general description of that center’s system: seismic data, sea level data, warning
center message dissemination, public safety actions, and public responses, including
evacuation. It should also include guidance on what the user or customer can expect
from the tsunami warning center, including how to interpret messages for action,
definitions of terms, and what to do when warnings are issued. For RTWPs, the
document may be maintained by the IOC. For a national system, it should be main-
tained jointly by the NTWC and partners. The users guide can be divided into two
parts, with each part published separately: a national guide and a supplemental local
response users guide.

Examples of tsunami warning system users guides include: PTWS Users Guide (new
edition in August 2007), current WC/ATWC Operations Plan (Users Guide), Users
Guide for the IOTWS (February 2007).

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 2-13

 Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

NTWC/RTWP Stakeholder Contacts: This document generally comprises contacts

responsible for overall tsunami mitigation, for tsunami warning operations, and for
tsunami emergency response operations.
 For RTWPs, these are Tsunami Warning Focal Points for 24/7 action on tsunami
emergencies, and national stakeholders or ICG Tsunami National Contacts respon-
sible for tsunami mitigation. The document should be maintained by IOC for
the global system; an efficient means will be by secure website that is password
protected, or other easily accessed, secure method. At the international level, the
stakeholder group is the ICG.
 For NTWCs, the document should be similar but involve emergency response as
well. Documents should be maintained by the NTWC and EOC national, provin-
cial, district, and/or local levels of government.

Tsunami Warning System Directives: This is a collection of official, authoritative

documents covering national or local procedures and responsibilities. Descriptions
are in more detail than CONOPS, but less detail than operations manuals. Directives
describe the authority, coordination, roles, and responsibilities of services and orga-
nizations involved. They should be maintained by each country or local authority
that carries out procedures. Examples of NOAA’s NWS Tsunami Directives (2006) can
be found at: [Link] NDS 10-7 Tsunami
Warning Services.

Tsunami Emergency Response Plans (TERP): NTWCs and their NDMO partners,
must create and customize written Tsunami Emergency Response Plans (TERP) to
meet their specific needs. The documents form the basis on which to conduct rou-
tine drills to ensure response procedures can be effectively enacted by a 24/7 duty
staff. These can range from stakeholder familiarization workshops, agency and multi-
agency drills, tabletop scenario exercises, and functional communications tests, to
full-scale response agency field deployment exercises, which may or may not include
public evacuations. Documents and drills also ensure the consistency of actions as
duty staff may turn over several times between actual tsunami events.

NTWC and DMO TERPs, and their accompanying SOPs and checklists, should also
describe procedures, protocols, and expected actions for tsunami emergencies. For
the NTWC, this may mean procedures followed when a tsunami alert is received from
international RTWPs, or how an NTWC monitors earthquakes and evaluates their tsu-
namigenic potential. The goal of the NTWC is to then issue an urgent local, regional,
and/or distant tsunami warning to its DMO and/or its citizens.

For the DMO, this means the immediate alerting of communities and households, and
as required, the evacuation of people out of the predesignated tsunami evacuation
zone. For a local tsunami warning and evacuation order, these decisions and actions
may have to take place immediately, within minutes after an earthquake is felt.

2-14 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

Together, these are the minimum documentation requirements for establishing a fully
functioning, efficient tsunami warning center.

Capability and Interoperability Requirements of an RTWP

The initial goal of the IOC is for RTWPs to be interoperable within each basin
(Pacific Ocean, Indian Ocean, Caribbean, North Atlantic, and Mediterranean), with
the end goal being a fully interoperable tsunami warning system for the globe. Recip-
ient countries should make bilateral arrangements with as many individual RTWPs as
they choose and their ICG permits.

Initially each of the four ICGs is defining RTWP minimum capability requirements,
with the hope that these requirements will converge quickly to a set of requirements
that has global consensus.

Based upon 40 years of PTWS experiences and the requirements defined by the
IOTWS IOC/WG5 in August 2007, it is recommended that an RTWP have the
capability to perform the following functions:
 Operate 24 hours per day, 7 days per week
 Have access to seismic and sea-level data in real time via more than one communi-
cations path
 Produce standardized seismic (location, magnitude, depth) parameters in a reason-
able amount of time (as agreed upon in bilateral agreements with NTWCs served)
 Use the scale Mwp (moment magnitude from p waves) to allow intercomparison of
earthquake magnitudes from other sources
 Maintain or have access to tsunami scenarios for their AOR
 Be able to determine which countries in their AOR might be affected, and the level
of hazard, based on standardized or otherwise agreed upon thresholds (magnitude
and amplitude), i.e., which countries are at risk and which are outside the risk
zone
 Revise their predictions in light of additional seismic and sea level data
 Provide products in standardized format in accordance with global practices
 Transmit products on the GTS in a timely manner, and have one or more backup
dissemination paths in place and tested
 Provide NTWCs with predicted tsunami arrival times, at a minimum.
 Arrange with another RTWP to provide backup service in the event of a major
communications failure or other catastrophe at the RTWP
 Provide NTWCs access to all RTWP products

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 2-15

 Chapter 2: Overview of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Operational and Organizational Requirements

 Collaborate with other affected RTWPs and NTWCs before issuing products (as
time permits).
 Coordinate cancellation messages with neighboring centers.

RTWP Performance Indicators

Each RTWP should work with the NTWCs that they have bilateral agreements with
to quantify their performance indicators. Recommended performance indicators are
provided in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1. Recommended Performance Indicators for Regional Tsunami Watch Providers

1. Elapsed time from earthquake to Watch issuance (The goal is to reduce elapsed time
to less than 20 minutes.)
a. Accuracy of earthquake parameters – location, depth, magnitude
2. Elapsed time from issuance to receipt at serviced NTWC
3. Percentage of served countries that receive timely Watch products
4. Elapsed time to tsunami detection
5. Elapsed time to tsunami evaluation
6. Accuracy of forecast
a. Countries affected
b. Hazard level from scenarios
7. Elapsed time to cancellation
8. Reliability of RTWP office (power, computers, communications, 24/7 operations)
9. Trained and competent staff
10. Regular exercising of the system

2-16 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Chapter 3
Earth Data Observations
Earth data observations, in particular seismic and sea level data, are needed to
detect the occurrence of a tsunami. This chapter describes the seismic and sea level
data, the types of instruments used to collect these data, and the forces behind
tsunami-generating earthquakes. Earth data observations are needed by National
Tsunami Warning Centers (NTWC) and Regional Tsunami Watch Providers (RTWP)
(Figure 3‑1). In addition to local seismic and sea level data networks, these data are
also available in real time for use by tsunami warning centers through international
observation networks. This chapter should be read by those who need to understand
the types of earth data that are necessary for a warning center to function and the
importance of maintaining instruments to detect tsunamis.

Local Seismic
Networks

GLOSS Tide Gage

Networks

Local Tide Gage

Networks

Figure 3-1. Components of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Earth Data Observation Requirements

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-1

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

How Do Earth Data Observations Fit Into an End-to-End

Tsunami Warning System?
Earth data observations are part of the hazard detection and forecast component of
an end-to-end tsunami warning system. The rapid detection and characterization of
tsunami-generating earthquakes provides the first indication of a potential tsunami in
an end-to-end tsunami warning system. Initial seismic-based warnings based on data
from networks of seismic gages are subsequently refined by the detection of tsunami-
generated changes in sea level, measured by tide gages and buoys.

The refinement of initial seismic-based warnings with data on sea level changes can
greatly increase the credibility of the warnings by decreasing false alarms. To make
this refinement, tsunami warning centers must understand the mechanisms that cause
changes in sea level, and how a tsunami wave registers on a tide gage. While critical,
tide gages do have limitations due to local bathymetry and other factors. Deep ocean
buoys, where available, usually provide a better assessment of the nature of a tsunami.

Critical seismic and sea level data must be received rapidly at tsunami warning cen-
ters to be of any use in the warning process. Thus, data collection communications
systems are crucial to the success of the warning system.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains sections that discuss the following topics:
 Seismic data requirements for tsunami detection: This section highlights the
importance of seismic data in the success of the end-to-end warning process.
 Physical forces that generate tsunamis: This section presents discussions on the
types of faults and seismic waves, locating earthquake hypocenters, and the dis-
tinction between earthquake magnitude and earthquake intensity.
 Instruments used to detect seismicity: This section describes the various types
of seismometers and their strengths and weaknesses in accurately measuring the
intensity of strong, damaging, tsunamigenic earthquakes.
 Seismic network and processing requirements: This section discusses neces-
sary seismic data network and processing equipment for a center to issue a tsu-
nami warning within 5 minutes of the occurrence of a tsunamigenic earthquake.
 Sea level data requirements for tsunami detection: This section highlights the
importance of sea level data in the success of the end-to-end warning process.
 Causes of sea level variations and detection of the tsunami wave signal: This
section discusses the various physical forces that cause changes in sea level, and
describes the characteristic signal of a tsunami in sea level gage recordings.

3-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

 Using tide gages to measure changes in sea level: This section surveys various
types of tide gages, their strengths and weaknesses, and the importance of mul-
tiple-use gages in constructing a sustainable warning system.
 Coastal tide gage network and processing requirements: This section dis-
cusses tide gage data network and processing requirements for NTWCs and
RTWPs.
 Using tsunameter buoys to detect a tsunami wave signal: This section provides
an overview of the Deep Ocean Assessment and Reporting of Tsunamis (DART™)
II system, including operating modes and real-time transmission of data.

What Are the Most Important Points to Remember about

Earth Data Observation Requirements for NTWCs and
RTWPS?
 Two types of data are critical to tsunami warning center operations.
 Seismic data, received with minimum delay, are required to issue initial timely
warnings.
 Sea level data, again with little delay in receipt, are needed to adjust and
cancel warnings, in form of observed values for real-time verification and as
input to models, as an event unfolds. Sea level data come from tide gages and
from DART buoys in the open ocean.
 Run-up data can also be invaluable in assessing the local impact of a tsunami.
 International seismic gage networks and international sea level gage networks can
be accessed by tsunami warning centers as a source of earth data observations.

Seismic Data Requirements for Tsunami Detection

A tsunami, in the ocean or other body of water, is a wave train generated by a verti-
cal displacement of the water column. Earthquakes, landslides, volcanic eruptions,
explosions, and even the impact of meteorites, can generate tsunamis. Tsunami waves
can cause severe property damage and loss of life where they impact the coastline.

The vast majority of tsunamis are caused by subduction zone earthquakes at locations
where tectonic plates converge on the sea floor. Knowing the type and the strength
of an earthquake is critical in determining its potential for generating a tsunami. As
a result, seismic data play a crucial role in the tsunami warning process. To produce
accurate moment magnitudes, NTWCs and RTWPs require reliable, broad frequency,
low noise, high dynamic range, digital seismic data in real time. Seismologists employ
data from networks of seismometers to determine whether an earthquake is a strike
slip, a normal slip, or a thrust (reverse) fault. While thrust faults cause the majority of
tsunami events, tsunamis can be generated by strike slips or oblique slip faults. As a
result, warnings should not be prevented or canceled based on that criterion alone.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-3

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Internationally coordinated networks like the Global Seismic Network (GSN) are suffi-
ciently robust to support warnings for teleseismic events, i.e. earthquakes at distances
greater than 1,000 km from the measurement site, provided they are properly tele-
metered, interrogated with sufficient frequency, and properly maintained. However,
NTWCs may find that national or local networks are also required, especially if the
center’s area of responsibility (AOR) includes local tsunami sources. In this case, the
NTWC will require a seismometer installation and maintenance program, and a com-
munications program to obtain and process data in real time. If resources or other
factors do not permit an NTWC to conduct equipment and communications programs,
the center will work to obtain data from regional network operators.

Important Points to Remember about Seismic Data

 Most tsunamis are generated by subduction zone earthquakes at locations where
tectonic plates converge on the sea floor.
 NTWCs and RTWPs require seismic data to rapidly detect potential tsunamigenic
events and issue initial timely warnings.
 There are international seismic gage networks that warning centers can access,
although in some instances, existing networks may not meet a center’s require-
ments for rapid detection and warning of local tsunami events. In these cases, a
center may need to establish and maintain gages that augment the available inter-
national networks.
 A center should have real-time access to multiple networks via multiple commu-
nications channels to ensure that all seismic events are captured in the event of a
network or communications problem.
 Real-time data collection by robust and reliable communications channels is essen-
tial to the success of a tsunami warning program.

Physical Forces that Generate Tsunamis

A variety of physical forces may contribute to the generation of tsunamis. This section
provides a detailed discussion of the following topics:
 Types of faults
 Plate tectonics
 Seismic waves

3-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Types of Faults
The Normal Fault
The normal fault, despite its name, is not the most common of faults (Figure 3-2).
What is normal about it is that its movement tends to follow the gravitational pull on
the fault blocks involved (Figure 3-2). The fault plane on the normal fault is gener-
ally very steep. In a normal fault the two
involved blocks are (by gravity) pulling
away from one another, causing one
of the fault blocks to slip upward and
the other downward with respect to
the fault plane (it is hard to deter-
mine whether both or just one block
has moved.). The exposed upward
block forms a cliff-like feature known
as a fault scarp. A scarp may range
from a few to hundreds of meters Figure 3-2. A Normal Slip Fault
in height, and its length may exceed
300 kilometers.

The Reverse or Thrust Fault

The reverse fault is a normal fault except
the general movement of the fault blocks is
toward each other, not away from each other
as in the normal fault (Figure 3-3). This forms
an expression on the surface with material
overlaying other material.

The Strike-Slip or Transcurrent Fault

Probably the best known and most studied Figure 3-3. A Reverse or Thrust Fault
fault is the strike-slip or transcurrent fault type,
as exemplified by the San Andreas Fault in
California (Figure 3-4). Movement on a strike-
strip fault is generally horizontal (Figure 3-4).
On the surface, scarps form as hills crossing
this fault zone are torn apart by movement over
time. Anything crossing this fault zone is either
slowly torn apart, or offset.

For a comprehensive discussion on fault plane

solutions, with effective animations, see the
web site: [Link]
free/00071/ authored by Arild Andresen of the Figure 3-4. Strike-Slip or Transcurrent Fault
University of Oslo, Norway.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-5

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Plate Tectonics
Figure 3-5 illustrates the main features of plate tectonics, which include:
 The Earth’s surface is covered by a series of crustal plates (see Figure 3-5).
 The ocean floors are continually moving, spreading from the center, sinking at the
edges, and being regenerated.
 Convection currents beneath the plates move the crustal plates in different
directions.
 The source of heat driving the convection currents is radioactivity deep in the
Earth.

Figure 3-5. Cross Section of the Earth’s Plate Tectonic Structure

(Source: U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) Map, “This Dynamic Planet”)

Mid-Oceanic Ridges
The mid-oceanic ridges rise 3000 meters from the ocean floor and are more than
2000 kilometers wide, surpassing the Himalayas in size. These huge underwater
mountain ranges have a deep trench that bisects the length of the ridges and in
places is more than 2000 meters deep. Research into the heat flow from the ocean
floor during the early 1960s revealed that the greatest heat flow was centered at
the crests of these mid-oceanic ridges. Seismic studies show that the mid-oceanic
ridges experience an elevated number of earthquakes. All these observations indicate
intense geological activity at the mid-oceanic ridges.

Deep Sea Trenches

The deepest waters are found in oceanic trenches, which plunge as deep as 35,000
feet below the ocean surface. These trenches are usually long and narrow, and run
parallel to and near the ocean margins. They are often associated with and parallel
to large continental mountain ranges. There is also an observed parallel association
of trenches and island arcs. Like the mid-oceanic ridges, the trenches are seismically
active, but unlike the ridges they have low levels of heat flow.

3-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Island Arcs
Chains of islands are found throughout the oceans and especially in the western
Pacific margins; the Aleutians, Kuriles, Japan, Ryukus, Philippines, Marianas, Indo-
nesia, Solomons, New Hebrides, and the Tongas, are some examples. These “Island
arcs” are usually situated along deep sea trenches on the continental side of the
trench, i.e., on the overriding plate subduction zone.

These observations, along with many other studies of our planet, support the theory
that below the Earth’s crust (i.e., the lithosphere: a solid array of plates, as depicted in
Figure 3-6) lies a malleable layer of heated rock known as the asthenosphere, heated
by radioactive decay of elements such as uranium, thorium, and potassium. Because
the radioactive source of heat is deep within the mantle, the fluid asthenosphere cir-
culates as convection currents underneath the solid lithosphere. This heated layer is
the source of lava we see in volcanoes, the source of heat that drives hot springs and
geysers, and the source of raw material which pushes up the mid-oceanic ridges and
forms new ocean floor.

Figure 3-6. The Major Tectonic Plates of the Earth.

(Source: USGS Map, “This Dynamic Earth”)

Magma continuously wells upward at the mid-oceanic ridges, producing currents

of magma flowing in opposite directions below the lithosphere, which generates
the forces that pull the sea floor apart at the mid-oceanic ridges. As the ocean floor
spreads apart, cracks appear in the middle of the ridges, allowing molten magma
to surface to form the newest ocean floor. As the ocean floor moves away from the
mid-oceanic ridge, it eventually comes into contact with a continental plate and is

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-7

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

subducted underneath the continent. These subduction zones are where the likeli-
hood of undersea earthquakes, and hence tsunami generation, is highest. Figures 3-7a
through 3-7d, from USGS Circular 1187, depict the process of tsunami generation via
subduction where two tectonic plates collide.

Figure 3-7a. Friction retards movement of the Figure 3-7b. The overriding plate is slowly
overriding plate in a subduction distorted.
zone.

Figure 3-7c. The overriding plate rebounds and Figure 3-7d. Tsunami waves spread out from
displaces ocean upwards. the source region.

Seismic Waves
While most of the plate-tectonic energy driving fault ruptures is taken up by static
deformation, up to 10 percent may dissipate immediately in the form of seismic
waves. A seismic wave can be distinguished by a number of properties, including the
speed of travel, the direction it moves particles as it passes, and where the wave does
and does not propagate.

The first two wave types, P and S, are called body waves because they travel or
propagate through the body of the Earth (Figure 3-8, a and b). The latter two types,
L and R, are called surface waves because they travel along Earth’s surface and their
amplitude decreases with depth into the Earth.

3-8 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

The mechanical properties of the rocks that body waves

travel through quickly organize the waves into two types.
Compressional waves, also known as primary or P waves,
ip T
S waves travel at only
travel fastest, at speeds between 1.5 and 8 kilometers per about 60 to 70 per cent
second in the Earth’s crust. They propagate by alternately the speed of P waves
compressing and expanding the rock. The rock particles
move in the same direction as the wave is propagating.
When P waves travel through the air, they are called “sound waves”. Shear waves,
also known as secondary or S waves, travel more slowly, usually at 60 to 70 percent
of the speed of P waves. S waves can travel only in solids, and the particles vibrate at
right angles to the direction of propagation of the wave.

P waves shake the ground in the direction they are propagating, while S waves shake
perpendicularly or transverse to the direction of propagation, as shown in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8. Particle Motion (in Red) Associated with Seismic Wave Types
(Source: S. Baxter, Delaware Geological Survey Publication Number 23 – Earthquake Basics)

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-9

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Table 3-1. lists all four waves that are created by earthquakes, and their
characteristics.

Table 3-1. Seismic Waves

Wave Type
(and names) Particle Motion Typical Velocity Other Characteristics
P, Compressional, Alternating VP ~ 5–7 km/s in P motion travels fastest in
Primary, Longitudinal compressions typical Earth’s crust; materials, so the P-wave is
(“pushes”) and >~ 8 km/s in Earth’s the first-arriving energy on a
dilations (“pulls”) mantle and core; seismogram. Generally smaller
which are directed in and higher frequency than the S
~1.5 km/s in water;
the same direction and Surface-waves. P waves in a
as the wave is ~0.3 km/s in air. liquid or gas are pressure waves,
propagating (along including sound waves.
the ray path);
and therefore,
perpendicular to the
wavefront.

S, Shear, Secondary, Alternating transverse VS ~ 3–4 km/s in S-waves do not travel through
Transverse motions (perpendicular typical Earth’s crust; fluids, so do not exist in Earth’s
to the direction of outer core (inferred to be
>~ 4.5 km/s in Earth’s
propagation, and the primarily liquid iron) or in air or
mantle;
ray path); commonly water or molten rock (magma).
approximately ~ 2.5–3.0 km/s in S waves travel slower than
polarized such that (solid) inner core. P waves in a solid and, therefore,
particle motion is in arrive after the P wave.
vertical or horizontal
planes.

L, Love, Surface Transverse horizontal VL ~ 2.0–4.4 km/s in Love waves exist because of the
waves, Long waves motion, perpendicular the Earth depending Earth’s surface. They are largest
to the direction of on frequency of the at the surface and decrease in
propagation and propagating wave, amplitude with depth. Love
generally parallel to the and therefore the waves are dispersive, that is,
Earth’s surface. depth of penetration the wave velocity is dependent
of the waves. In on frequency, generally with
general, the Love low frequencies propagating
waves travel slightly at higher velocity. Depth of
faster than the penetration of the Love waves
Rayleigh waves. is also dependent on frequency,
with lower frequencies
penetrating to greater depth.

R, Rayleigh, Motion is both in VR ~ 2.0–4.2 km/s in Rayleigh waves are also

Surface waves, Long the direction of the Earth depending dispersive and the amplitudes
waves, Ground roll propagation and on frequency of the generally decrease with depth
perpendicular (in a propagating wave, in the Earth. Appearance and
vertical plane), and and therefore the particle motion are similar
“phased” so that the depth of penetration to water waves. Depth of
motion is generally of the waves. penetration of the Rayleigh
elliptical—either waves is also dependent
prograde or retrograde. on frequency, with lower
frequencies penetrating to
greater depth.

Source: Purdue University Website

([Link] waves/[Link])

3-10 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Important Points to Remember about the Physical Forces that

Generate Tsunamis
 Most tsunamis are generated by subduction-zone earthquakes at locations where
tectonic plates converge on the sea floor.
 Most of the plate-tectonic energy driving fault ruptures is taken up by static defor-
mation but up to 10 percent may dissipate immediately in the form of seismic
waves.
 The two most important of the four seismic wave types are the P waves and the
S waves.
 Compressional (or primary) P waves, travel fastest, at speeds between 1.5 and
8 kilometers per second in the Earth’s crust.
 Shear (or secondary) S waves, travel more slowly, usually at 60 to 70 percent of
the speed of P waves. S waves can travel only in solids, and the particles vibrate at
right angles to the direction of propagation of the wave.

Locating Earthquake Epicenters and Hypocenters

Although seismic wave speeds vary by a factor of ten or more in the Earth, the ratio
between the average speeds of a P wave and of its following S-wave is quite constant.
This fact enables seismologists to estimate the distance (in kilometers) the earthquake
is from the observation station by multiplying the difference (in seconds) between the
two observations by the factor 8 kilometers per second (km/s), or

distance from observation = (S-P) * 8 km/s.

The dynamic, transient seismic waves from any substantial earthquake will propa-
gate all around and entirely through the Earth. With a sensitive enough detector, it is
possible to record the seismic waves from even minor events occurring anywhere in
the world. The monitoring of nuclear test-ban treaties relies on our ability to detect a
nuclear explosion anywhere if it is equivalent to an earthquake of Richter Magnitude
3.5. Seismic networks established specifically for this purpose can also be extremely
valuable to tsunami warning programs.

Wave Travel Times

Charles J. Ammon, on the Penn State Earthquake Seismology website, uses the anal-
ogy of an automobile trip to conceptualize wave travel times. If you have to travel
120 miles and you drive 60 miles per hour, you will get to your destination in
2 hours; if you are forced to drive at 30 miles per hour, it will take you twice as long
to arrive. The mathematical formula we use in this problem is

driving time = (distance of trip) / (driving speed)

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-11

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Ammon further suggests that to apply this idea to earthquake studies, think of the
earthquake location as the starting point for the trip and the seismometer as the place
where the trip concludes. Faster waves will travel the distance quicker and show up
on the seismogram first.

travel time = (distance from earthquake to seismometer) / (seismic wave speed)

Travel time is a relative time. It is the number of minutes, seconds, etc. that the wave
took to complete its journey. The arrival time is the time when we record the arrival
of a wave; it is an absolute time, usually referenced to Universal Coordinated Time (a
24-hour time system used in many sciences).

Seismic Wave Speed

Seismic waves travel fast, on the order of kilometers per second. The precise speed
that a seismic wave travels depends on several factors, the most important being the
composition of the rock. Because the speed depends on the rock type, scientists have
been able to use observations recorded on seismograms to infer the composition or
range of compositions of the planet. But the process is not always simple, because
sometimes different rock types have the same seismic-wave velocity, and other fac-
tors also affect the speed, particularly temperature and pressure. Higher temperature
tends to lower the speed of seismic waves, and higher pressure tends to increase
the speed. Pressure increases with depth in Earth as the weight of the rocks above
increases with increasing depth. In general, temperature also increases with increas-
ing depth, effectively lowering the wave’s velocity. Usually, the effect of pressure
overshadows that of temperature and in regions of uniform composition, velocity gen-
erally increases with depth.

The two seismic wave types discussed below each include ranges of speed that is the
range of values observed in common terrestrial rocks. The specific speed depends on
composition, temperature, and pressure.

Compressional or P-Waves
P-waves are the first waves to arrive on a complete seismic record of ground shaking
because they travel the fastest (the name derives from the abbreviation for primary [P],
or the first wave to arrive). They typically travel at speeds of about 1 to 14 km/s. The
slower value corresponds to a P-wave traveling in water, while the higher number
represents the P-wave speed near the base of Earth’s mantle.

The velocity of a wave depends on the elastic properties and density of a material.
Elasticity is defined in terms of a material’s modulus, which is a measure of how easy
or difficult it is to deform the material. For example, the bulk modulus is a measure
of how a material changes volume when pressure is applied. Foam rubber has a
lower bulk modulus than steel. The shear modulus is the elastic modulus we use for
the deformation which takes place when a force is applied parallel to one face of the
object while the opposite face is held fixed by another equal force. The bigger the

3-12 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

shear modulus the more rigid is the material since for the same change in horizontal
distance (strain) you will need a bigger force (stress). This is why the shear modulus
is sometimes called the modulus of rigidity.

If we let κ represent the bulk modulus of a material, µ the shear-modulus, and ρ the
density, then the P-wave velocity, which we represent by α, is defined by:

P-waves are sound waves, although seismology is interested in frequencies lower than
humans’ range of hearing (the speed of sound in air is about 0.3 km/s). The vibration
caused by P waves is a volume change, alternating from compression to expansion
in the direction that the wave is traveling. P-waves travel through all types of media:
solid, liquid, or gas.

Secondary or S-Waves
Secondary, or S waves, travel slower than P waves and are also called “shear” waves
because they do not change the volume of the material through which they propa-
gate; they shear it. S-waves are transverse waves because the particle motion is in the
direction “transverse,” or perpendicular, to the direction that the wave is traveling.

The S-wave speed, call it β, depends on the shear modulus and the density

While slower than P-waves, S-waves move quickly. Typical S-wave propagation speeds
are on the order of 1 to 8 km/s. The lower value corresponds to the wave speed in
loose, unconsolidated sediment; the higher value occurs near the base of Earth’s
mantle.

An important distinguishing characteristic of an S-wave is its inability to propagate

through a fluid or a gas, because fluids and gasses cannot transmit a shear stress, and
S-waves are waves that shear the material.

In general, earthquakes generate larger shear waves than compressional waves, and
much of the damage close to an earthquake is the result of strong shaking caused by
shear waves.

Using P and S Waves to Locate Earthquakes

We can use the fact that P and S waves travel at different speeds to locate earth-
quakes. Assume a seismometer is far enough from the earthquake that the waves
travel roughly horizontally, which is about 50 to 500 km for shallow earthquakes.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-13

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

When an earthquake occurs, the P and S waves travel outward from the rupture with
the P-wave arriving at the seismometer first, followed by the S-wave. Once the S-wave
arrives, we can measure the time interval between the detection of P and S waves.

The travel time of the P-wave, Tp, is

distance from earthquake / (P-wave speed)

The travel time of the S-wave, Ts is

distance from earthquake / (S-wave speed)

The difference in the arrival times of the waves is

deltaT = Tp – Ts or

deltaT = [distance from earthquake / (S-wave speed)] –

[distance from earthquake / (P-wave speed)]

which equals
distance from earthquake * (1 / (S-wave speed) - 1 /
(P-wave speed))

We can measure that difference from a seismogram, and if we also know the speed
that the waves travel, we could calculate the distance. For the distance range 50 to
500 km, the S-waves travel about 3.45 km/s and the P-waves around 8 km/s. The
value in parentheses is then equal to about (1/3.45 - 1/8) or about 1/8. Thus the quick
estimate of the distance between the earthquake and the seismometer for earth-
quakes in this distance range is about 8 times the difference in the arrival times of
the S and P waves. The earthquake can be in any direction, but it must be located on
a circle surrounding the seismometer, with a radius about 8 times the observed wave
travel-time difference (in kilometers).

If we have two other seismometers that recorded the same earthquake, we could
make a similar measurement and construct a circle of possible locations for each seis-
mometer. Since the earthquake epicenter (location at the surface) must lie on each
circle centered on a seismometer, we plot three or more circles on a map and find
that the three circles intersect in the vicinity of a single location—the earthquake’s
epicenter. This is depicted in Figure 3-9, which shows that using seismometer read-
ings at Berkeley, California; the Lamont-Doherty Earth Observatory in New York;
and Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, the earthquake epicenter is indicated on the west coast of
South America.

3-14 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Figure 3-9. Locating Earthquake Epicenter

Along subduction zones, the often somewhat linear orientation of sensors can make
it more difficult to accurately pinpoint the epicenter, as shown in Figure 3-10b below,
compared to the more favorable instrument spacing in Figure 3-10a.

Figure 3-10a. Optimally placed sensors Figure 3-10b. Sensors on a subduction zone

In practice, seismologists use better estimates of the speed than the simple rule of
thumb in the above example, and solve the problem using algebra and successive iter-
ation routines on computers instead of geometry. They also can factor the earthquake
depth (hypocenter) and the time that earthquake rupture initiated (called the “origin
time”) into the problem.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-15

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Some other methods of solving for the earthquake location include:

 Locating with P only. The location has four unknowns (t, x, y, z) so with 4+P
arrivals, the problem can be solved. However, the P arrival time has a non-linear
relationship to the location, so we can only solve numerically.
 Grid search. All locations on a grid are tested and the misfit mapped out, and the
earthquake location is (at least in theory) where the minimum misfit is.
 Linearization (i.e., restructuring the problem so that the residuals are a linear
function of the changes needed to the hypocentral distance). The most common
approach assumes a starting location of the station with the earliest recorded
arrival (i.e., the nearest station to the event) and assumes that small changes to
this location will give the hypocenter. With this assumption we can reduce the
required changes in location to a set of linear equations, which can be solved rela-
tively easily. Having found the model adjustment needed to our first guess we now
have a solution. However, we only have the approximate solution as we linearized
the problem. So now we take the solution and use it as a new starting location
and repeat the process. We continue to do this until there is little change between
iterations. While we assume we have the solution, we cannot be certain whether
we have found the true minimum or a local minimum of the solution.
 Single station method. If a network utilizes 3-component stations, an approximate
location can be found from a single station. This is not just an interesting observa-
tion; rather, this method can be used to help constrain the search for multi-station
location methods.

Determining the Earthquake Hypocenter

An earthquake’s hypocenter is often located at some depth in the earth. The
corresponding epicenter is the point at the earth’s surface above the hypocenter.
Figure 3‑11 depicts the relationship between an earthquake epicenter and its
hypocenter.

Figure 3-11. Earthquake Hypocenter and Epicenter

3-16 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Mathematically, the hypocenter is determined by setting up a system of linear

equations, one for each station. The equations express the difference between the
observed arrival times and those calculated from the previous guess of (or initial)
hypocenter location, in terms of small steps in the three hypocentral coordinates (lati-
tude, longitude, and depth) and the origin time. We must also have a mathematical
model of the crustal velocities (in kilometers per second) under the seismic network
to calculate the travel times of waves from an earthquake at a given depth to a sta-
tion at a given distance. The system of linear equations is solved by the method of
least squares, which minimizes the sum of the squares of the differences between
the observed and calculated arrival times. The process begins with an initial guessed
hypocenter; performs several hypocentral adjustments, each found by a least squares
solution to the equations; and iterates to a hypocenter that best fits the observed
set of wave arrival times at the stations of the seismic network. This is the primary
method that tsunami warning centers use to locate earthquakes. Other methods for
locating the earthquake hypocenter include analysis of the phases of the P and S
waves that are reflected by the earth’s crust as discussed by Stein and Wysession in
“An Introduction to Seismology, Earthquakes, and Earth Structure.”

Important Points to Remember about Locating Earthquake Epicenters

and Hypocenters
 Although seismic wave speeds vary by a factor of ten or more in the Earth, the
ratio between the average speeds of a P wave and of its following S-wave is quite
constant.
 We can use the fact that P and S waves travel at different speeds to locate the
epicenter of an earthquake on the earth.
 By measuring the S-wave and P-wave arrival times at 3 or more stations, circles
drawn around each station will overlap at a unique point, indicating the earth-
quake location.
 If a network utilizes 3-component stations, an approximate location can be found
from a single station.
 An earthquake’s hypocenter is often located at some depth in the earth. The
corresponding epicenter is the point at the earth’s surface above the hypocenter
 The depth of the earthquake is very important as deep earthquakes do not
normally produce tsunamis.

Earthquake Intensity and Magnitude

Mercalli Intensity Scale
Earthquakes are measured by their intensity and by their magnitude. An earthquake’s
intensity readings are based on observed effects, for example, ground shaking and
damage. An earthquake’s intensity differs depending on the distance from the earth-
quake’s epicenter. The ranking system used to measure seismic intensity is called

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-17

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

the Modified Mercalli scale. Michele Stefano de Rossi and François-Alphonse Forel
formulated the Rossi-Forel Scale, a simple 10-degree scale of earthquake intensity, in
1878. The Mercalli scale originated from the widely used Rossi-Forel scale, which was
revised by Italian volcanologist Giuseppe Mercalli in 1883 and 1902.

In 1902, the 10-degree Mercalli scale was expanded to twelve degrees by Italian
physicist Adolfo Cancani. It was later completely rewritten by German geophysicist
August Heinrich Sieberg and became known as the Mercalli-Cancani-Sieberg (MCS)
scale. This scale, in turn, was modified and published in English by Harry O. Wood
and Frank Neumann, in 1931, as the Mercalli-Wood-Neuman (MWN) scale. It was later
improved by Charles Richter, the father of the Richter magnitude scale. The scale is
known today as the Modified Mercalli Intensity Scale.

The Modified Mercalli Intensity Scale (abbreviated MM or Io) assigns an intensity or

rating to measure the effects of an earthquake at a particular location. The intensity
of any one earthquake can be very different from place to place. This is because the
amount of damage caused by an earthquake at a particular location depends on the
geology of the location. The population density and the methods used to construct
buildings near the location are also important in the Modified Mercalli scale.

Earthquake intensities are subjectively rated with Roman numerals ranging from I
(not felt) to XII (buildings nearly destroyed). A full description of all twelve categories
is given in Table 3-2. Although it is a qualitative measure of earthquake size, seismol-
ogists still mail questionnaires to local residents after an earthquake asking them to
rate the effects of the earthquake at their home.

As you can see from Table 3-2, rating the intensity of an earthquake’s effects does not
require any instrumental measurements. Seismologists can use newspaper accounts,
diaries, and other historical records to make intensity ratings of past earthquakes, for
which there are no instrumental recordings. Such research helps promote our under-
standing of the earthquake history of a region, and estimate future hazards.

While the Modified Mercalli scale is effective for measuring the intensity of an earth-
quake in an inhabited area of a developed country, it is of no use in the middle of a
desert or in any other place without trees, houses and railways. Descriptions such as
“Resembling vibrations caused by heavy traffic” depend very much upon the observer
having felt heavy traffic in the past. Even then, what one person in a small town con-
siders to be “heavy” will most certainly differ from what a person living adjacent to a
major urban road system would describe as “heavy.”

While the Modified Mercalli scale is useful, something else is required in order to
compare the magnitude of earthquakes wherever they occur. The intensity scale dif-
fers from the Richter Magnitude Scale in that the effects of any one earthquake vary
greatly from place to place, so there may be many Intensity values (e.g., IV in one
neighborhood, VII in another) measured for the same earthquake. Each earthquake,
on the other hand, should have only one magnitude, although the various methods of
calculating it may give slightly different values (e.g., 4.5 vs. 4.6).

3-18 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Table 3-2. Modified Mercalli Intensity Scale

Intensity Description
I People do not feel any Earth movement.
II A few people might notice movement if they are at rest and/or on the upper floors of tall
buildings.
III Many people indoors feel movement. Hanging objects swing back and forth. People
outdoors might not realize that an earthquake is occurring.
IV Most people indoors feel movement. Hanging objects swing. Dishes, windows, and doors
rattle. The earthquake feels like a heavy truck hitting the walls. A few people outdoors may
feel movement. Parked cars rock.
V Almost everyone feels movement. Sleeping people are awakened. Doors swing open or close.
Dishes are broken. Pictures on the wall move. Small objects move or are turned over. Trees
might shake. Liquids might spill out of open containers.
VI Everyone feels movement. People have trouble walking. Objects fall from shelves. Pictures fall
off walls. Furniture moves. Plaster in walls might crack. Trees and bushes shake. Damage is
slight in poorly built buildings. No structural damage.
VII People have difficulty standing. Drivers feel their cars shaking. Some furniture breaks. Loose
bricks fall from buildings. Damage is slight to moderate in well-built buildings; considerable
in poorly built buildings.
VIII Drivers have trouble steering. Houses that are not bolted down might shift on their
foundations. Tall structures such as towers and chimneys might twist and fall. Well-built
buildings suffer slight damage. Poorly built structures suffer severe damage. Tree branches
break. Hillsides might crack if the ground is wet. Water levels in wells might change.
IX Well-built buildings suffer considerable damage. Houses that are not bolted down move off
their foundations. Some underground pipes are broken. The ground cracks. Reservoirs suffer
serious damage.
X Most buildings and their foundations are destroyed. Some bridges are destroyed. Dams are
seriously damaged. Large landslides occur. Water is thrown on the banks of canals, rivers,
lakes. The ground cracks in large areas. Railroad tracks are bent slightly.
XI Most buildings collapse. Some bridges are destroyed. Large cracks appear in the ground.
Underground pipelines are destroyed. Railroad tracks are badly bent.
XII Almost everything is destroyed. Objects are thrown into the air. The ground moves in waves
or ripples. Large amounts of rock may move.

Full descriptions are from Richter, C.F., 1958. Elementary Seismology. W.H. Freeman and Company, San Francisco,
pp. 135-149; 650-653

Earthquake Magnitude Scales

Earthquake magnitude is a measure of energy released by an earthquake. There are
many magnitude scales; all are logarithmic, but each is calculated using different
types of seismic waves and constants. All of the magnitude scales are extensions of
the original Richter magnitude scale (ML) designed for southern California. Some of
the more common scales are listed in Table 3-3. The choice of the most appropriate
scale depends on what will be done with the data. For example, ML is popular with
engineers because it calculates the magnitude using a period of wave that is similar
to the resonance frequency of most buildings, so it is closely related to the amount of
damage caused by the earthquake.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-19

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Table 3-3. Earthquake Magnitude Scales

Term Type of Wave Period Range

ML Local magnitude (Richter scale) Regional S and surface waves 0.1–1 sec

Mj JMA (Japan Meteorological Agency) Regional S and surface waves 5–10 sec

mb Body wave magnitude Teleseismic P waves 1–5 sec

Ms Surface wave magnitude Surface waves 20 sec

Any (depends on
Mw Moment magnitude All waves
quake size)

Mwp P-wave moment magnitude Long-period P waves 10–200 sec

Mm Mantle magnitude Teleseismic surface waves > 200 sec

The Richter Magnitude Scale

The Richter scale is designed to allow easier comparison of earthquake magnitudes,
regardless of the location. It was originally developed by Charles Richter and Beno
Gutenberg to make more quantitative measurements of the relative sizes of earth-
quakes in southern California. Today, modified versions of the scale are used to mea-
sure earthquakes throughout the world.

C.F. Richter was a geologist living and working in California, U.S.A., an area sub-
jected to hundreds of earthquakes every year. He took the existing Mercalli scale
and tried to add a “scientific” scale based on accurate measurements that could be
recorded by seismographs (instruments used to measure vibration) regardless of their
global location. By measuring the speed, or acceleration, of the ground when it sud-
denly moves, he devised a scale that reflects the “magnitude” of the shock, which is
related to the earthquake’s energy release. An earthquake detected only by very sen-
sitive people registers as 3.5 on his scale, while the largest earthquake ever recorded
reached 8.9 on the Richter scale.

The Richter scale of earthquake magnitude is logarithmic. This means that each
whole-number step represents a tenfold increase in measured amplitude. Thus, a
magnitude 7 earthquake is 10 times larger than a 6, 100 times larger than a magni-
tude 5, and 1000 times larger than a 4 magnitude. This is an open-ended scale, since
it is based on measurements and not descriptions.

To understand the forces of an earthquake, it can help to concentrate just upon the
upward movements. Gravity is a force pulling things down toward the earth. This
accelerates objects at 9.8 meters per second per second (m/s/s). To make something,
such as a tin can, jump up into the air requires a shock wave to hit it from underneath
accelerating faster than 9.8 m/s/s. This roughly corresponds to 11 (very disastrous) on
the Mercalli Scale, and 6.5 or above on the Richter scale. In everyday terms, the tin
can must be hit by a force greater than you would experience if you drove your car
into a solid wall at 35 kilometers (22 miles) per hour.

3-20 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

The Richter magnitude is related to the maximum amplitude of the S-wave measured
from the seismogram. Because there is a great range in the sizes of different earth-
quakes, the Richter scale uses logarithms. Thus, a magnitude 7 (M 7) earthquake has
wave amplitudes 10 times as large as a magnitude 6 earthquake, and releases over
30 times more energy. A comparison of the Modified Mercalli scale with the Richter
scale is given in Table 3-4.

As noted by J. Louie of the University of Nevada Reno Seismology Department

([Link] the equation for Richter Magnitude is:
ML = log10A(mm) + (Distance correction factor)

Here A is the amplitude, in millimeters, measured directly from the photographic

paper record of the Wood-Anderson seismometer, a special type of instrument. The
distance factor comes from a table found in Richter’s (1958) book Elementary Seismol-
ogy. The equation behind this nomogram, used by Richter in Southern California, is:
M = log10A(mm) + 3log10[8∆t(s)] - 2.92

Thus, after wave amplitude is measured, its logarithm is scaled according to

the distance of the seismometer from the earthquake, estimated by the S-P time
difference. The S-P time, in seconds, makes ∆t.

Seismologists try to get a separate magnitude estimate from every seismograph

station that records the earthquake, and then calculate the average. This accounts for
the usual spread of around 0.2 magnitude units reported from different seismological
labs right after an earthquake. Each laboratory calculates the averages from the
different stations that it has access to, and it can take several days before the different
organizations come to a consensus on what was the best magnitude estimate.

Table 3-4. Mercalli Scale comparison with Richter Scale

Richter Magnitude Energy (joule) Mercalli Degree
< 3.5 < 1.6 E+7 I
3.5 1.6 E+7 II
4.2 7.5 E+8 III
4.5 4 E+9 IV
4.8 2.1 E+10 V
5.4 5.7 E+11 VI
6.1 2.8 E+13 VII
6.5 2.5 E+14 VIII
6.9 2.3 E+15 IX
7.3 2.1 E+16 X
8.1 > 1.7 E+18 XI
> 8.1 . XII

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-21

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

The Moment Magnitude Scale

For very large earthquakes (magnitude greater than 7), most magnitude scales satu-
rate as higher frequency energy is registered at a similar level for a magnitude 8 as,
for example, a magnitude 7 event. This is because larger quakes rupture for a longer
time and generate longer period waves that are not taken into account by magnitude
scales such as ML, mb, and Ms.

For these larger events, seismologists use a different measure of the earthquake
size, called the moment magnitude. The moment magnitude comes from the seismic
moment. It is directly related to the size of the earthquake rupture area or fault plane,
and does not saturate for large events. For smaller events, the Richter and moment
magnitudes are similar.

Seismic Moment
Seismic moment has been the standard measure for earthquake magnitude for the
last 20 years or so. It is a physically meaningful number, unlike the magnitudes
scales. Seismic moment is related to the area of the fault plane that slips, the amount
of slip, and the rigidity of the fault.

To get an idea of the seismic moment, consider the elementary physics concept of
torque. A torque is a force that changes the angular momentum of a system. It is
defined as the force times the distance from the center of rotation. Earthquakes are
caused by internal torques, from the interactions of different blocks of the earth on
opposite sides of faults. After some rather complicated mathematics, it can be shown
(J. Louie, 9 Oct. 1996, [Link] that the moment of an earth-
quake is simply expressed by:

The formula above, for the moment of an earthquake, is fundamental to seismo­

logists’ understanding of how dangerous faults of a certain size can be.

Imagine a chunk of rock on a lab bench. The rigidity, or resistance to shearing, of

the rock is a pressure in the neighborhood of a few hundred billion dynes per square
centimeter (cm2). (Scientific notation makes this easier to write.) The pressure acts
over an area to produce a force, and as shown in the equation below, the cm-squared
units cancel. Now if it is estimated that the distance over which the two parts grind

3-22 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

together before they fly apart is about a centimeter, then the moment, in dyne-cm can
be calculated:

Again it is helpful to use scientific notation, since a dyne-cm is a very small amount
of moment.

J. Louie also provides an excellent example to illustrate this concept. He considers a

second case, the Sept. 12, 1994, Double Spring Flat earthquake, which occurred about
25 km southeast of Gardnerville, Nevada, USA. The first requirement is to convert the
15-kilometer length and 10-km depth of that fault to centimeters. Because 100,000
centimeters equal 1 kilometer:

Because multiplying by 1 does not change the value, kilometer units are changed into
centimeter units by:

Using scientific notation, it is evident that this earthquake, the largest in Nevada in
28 years, had 2 x 1012, or 2 trillion, times as much moment as breaking the rock on
the lab table.

There is a standard way to convert a seismic moment to moment magnitude. The

equation is:

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-23

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

This equation (meant for energies expressed in dyne-cm units) can be used to
estimate the magnitude of the tiny earthquake made on a lab table:

Negative magnitudes are allowed on Richter’s scale, although such earthquakes are
certainly very small.

Take the moment found for the Double Spring Flat earthquake and estimate its
magnitude:

The magnitude 6.1 value is about equal to the magnitude reported by the University
of Nevada Reno Seismological Lab, and by other observers.

Seismic Energy
Both the magnitude and the seismic moment are related to the amount of energy that
is radiated by an earthquake. Richter, working with Dr. Beno Gutenberg, early on
developed an equation to express the relationship between magnitude and energy.
The relationship is:
logES = 11.8 + 1.5M

giving the energy ES in ergs from the magnitude M. Note that ES is not the total
“intrinsic” energy of the earthquake, transferred from sources such as gravitational

3-24 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

energy or to sinks such as heat energy. It is only the amount radiated from the earth-
quake as seismic waves, which ought to be a small fraction of the total energy trans-
ferred during the earthquake process.

Dr. Hiroo Kanamori at the California Institute of Technology derived a relationship

between seismic moment and seismic wave energy:
Energy = (Moment)/20,000

For this equation, the moment is in units of dyne-cm, and energy is in units of ergs.
(Dyne-cm and ergs are unit equivalents, but have different physical meaning.)

Look at the seismic wave energy yielded by the two examples, in comparison to that
of a number of earthquakes and other phenomena. For this we’ll use a larger unit
of energy, the seismic energy yield of quantities of the explosive TNT (We assume
1 ounce of TNT, exploded below ground, yields 640 million ergs of seismic wave
energy):

Richter TNT for Seismic

Magnitude Energy Yield Example (approximate)
-1.5 6 ounces Breaking a rock on a lab table
1.0 30 pounds Large construction site blast
1.5 320 pounds
2.0 1 ton Large Quarry or Mine Blast
2.5 4.6 tons
3.0 29 tons
3.5 73 tons
4.0 1,000 tons Small Nuclear Weapon
4.5 5,100 tons Average Tornado (total energy)
5.0 32,000 tons
5.5 80,000 tons Little Skull Mtn NV Quake 1992
6.0 1 million tons Double Spring Flat NV 1994
6.5 5 million tons Northridge, CA Quake, 1994
7.0 32 million tons Hyogo-Ken Nanbu Japan 1995
7.5 160 million tons Landers, CA Quake, 1992
8.0 1 billion tons San Francisco, CA Quake, 1906
9.2 5 billion tons Anchorage, AK Quake, 1964
9.5 32 billion tons Chilean Quake, 1960
10.0 1 trillion tons (San Andreas-type fault circling Earth)
12.0 160 trillion tons Fault Earth in half through center, or
Earth’s daily receipt of solar energy

160 trillion tons of dynamite is a frightening yield of energy. Consider, however, that
the Earth receives that amount in sunlight every day.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-25

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Practical Ways of Estimating Magnitude

Most seismologists prefer to use the seismic moment to estimate earthquake mag-
nitudes. Finding an earthquake fault’s length, depth, and its slip can take several
days, weeks, or even months after a big earthquake. Geologists’ mapping of the
earthquake’s fault breaks, or seismologists’ plotting of the spatial distribution of after-
shocks, can give these parameters after a substantial effort. But some large earth-
quakes, and most small earthquakes, show neither surface fault breaks nor enough
aftershocks to estimate magnitudes the way we have above. However, seismologists
have developed ways to estimate the seismic moment directly from seismograms
using computer processing methods. The Centroid Moment Tensor Project (CMT)
at Harvard University has been routinely estimating moments of large earthquakes
around the world by seismogram inversion since 1982.

Moment magnitude is the most commonly reported, because is relates the size of the
earthquake to the seismic moment. The problem with moment magnitude is that it
takes a few tens of minutes to calculate as it uses long-period surface waves recorded
at large distances. This is no problem for academics, but for tsunami warnings and
other hazard mitigation uses, this time can be a big problem.

P-wave Moment Magnitude

The determination of the tsunamigenic potential of
an earthquake as quickly as possible is the para-
Tip
Mw from P-waves is preferred
mount concern of tsunami warning centers. The by tsunami warning centers
broadband moment magnitude from P-waves (Mwp) because it can be computed
can be calculated shortly after the arrival of the first soon after the arrival of the first
P waves, which is very important for timely tsunami P-waves from an earthquake.

warnings.

Mwp was originally developed by Tsuboi et al. (1995), and has been shown to give
quick and accurate size estimates for both regional and teleseismic earthquakes
for any depth, and distances up to 100 degrees. Mwp is calculated from P-waves
recorded on the vertical component of broadband seismometers. The P-wave section
of the displacement seismogram, including the pP (reflection phase) contribution, is
integrated. The first peak, or the first peak and trough, of this integrated seismogram
is used to determine the seismic moment from the formula

Mo = Max ( | p1 |, | p1 – p2 | ) (4πρα3r) / FP (1)

Where Mo is the seismic moment, p1 and p2 are the first peak and trough values on
the integrated displacement seismogram, ρ and α are the density and P-wave velocity
along the propagation path (ρ = 3.4 x 103 kilograms/meter3, α = 7.9 km/s), r is the
epicentral distance, and FP is the radiation pattern. Mwp is computed from (1) by
using the standard moment magnitude formula,

Mw = (log Mo – 9.1)/1.5 (2)

3-26 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Where Mo is in Newton meter (N . m) instead of dyne cm (as used earlier), and adding
0.2 (to account for the radiation pattern FP as explained by Tsuboi et. al.) to the
average Mw to obtain Mwp.

Whitmore et. al. (2002) found a definite trend when Mwp calculations using the
above technique were compared to 416 earthquakes assigned Mw by the highly accu-
rate, but slow, Harvard CMT Mw. The study showed only minor Mwp deficit trends
when compared to epicentral distance or hypocentral depth. However, Mwp was
shown to have a magnitude-dependent bias when compared to CMT Mw. In general,
Mwp is higher than CMT Mw for earthquakes less than magnitude 6.8, and lower for
those over 6.8. Results were considered consistent enough to add a linear correction.
This gives the equation shown in (3):

Mwp corrected = ( Mwp initial – 1.03)/0.843 (3)

It should also be noted that there are some problems with the Mw from P-waves
(Mwp) technique for earthquakes larger than about 8.0. However, for earthquakes
above this magnitude, the decision to warn is often almost automatic.

Important Points to Remember about Earthquake Intensity and

Magnitude
 An earthquake’s intensity is based on observed effects, for example, ground shak-
ing and damage. An earthquake’s intensity differs depending on the distance from
the earthquake’s epicenter. The ranking system used to measure seismic intensity
is called the Modified Mercalli scale.
 Earthquake magnitude is a measure of energy released by an earthquake. There
are many magnitude scales; all are logarithmic, but each is calculated using differ-
ent types of seismic waves and constants. They are designed to allow easier com-
parison of earthquake magnitudes, regardless of the location.
 Most seismologists prefer to use the seismic moment to estimate earthquake
magnitudes.
 The seismic moment can be estimated directly from seismograms using computer
processing methods. The Centroid Moment Tensor Project (CMT) at Harvard
University has been routinely estimating moments of large earthquakes around the
world by seismogram inversion since 1982.
 However, the CMT method takes too much time to be of use in tsunami warnings.
 The broadband moment magnitude from P-waves (Mwp) can be calculated shortly
after the arrival of the first P waves, which is very important for timely tsunami
warnings.
 Thus, the moment magnitude from P-waves is generally used by tsunami warning
centers because it is quick and fairly accurate.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-27

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Instruments Used to Detect Seismicity

Various types of instruments are used to detect seismicity. This section describes seis-
mometers and considerations for their proper installation. Special emphasis is placed
on broadband sensors since they are preferred by most tsunami warning systems.

Seismometers
Seismometers are instruments that measure ground motion (caused by seismic
waves) at a specific location. The ground motion caused by earthquakes includes a
wide range of amplitudes, from a few millimicrons to several meters. It can be verti-
cal (moving up and down) and horizontal (moving east to west or north to south).
Because of this variability, different kinds of seismometers have been developed over
the years that will record specific frequency bands. In addition, many sensors can
be configured (or programmed) to constrain response to specific frequencies and
amplitude ranges. Seismologists often use three kinds of seismometers: short-period,
broadband, and strong-motion sensors.
 Broadband seismometers can detect motion over
a wide range (or band) of frequencies and usually
Tip
over a large range of amplitudes (the dynamic range). Tsunami warning
centers usually rely on
Broadband sensors respond to frequencies from
broadband seismometers.
0.01 hertz (Hz) to 50 Hz. These are the sensors most
used by tsunami warning programs.
 Short-period seismometers measure signals mainly above 1 Hz (cycles/second).
These sensors are used to measure local earthquakes and P waves from teleseisms.
 Strong-motion sensors are designed to measure the large-amplitude, high-
frequency seismic waves typical of large local earthquakes. These seismic waves
result in the strong ground motion we feel during a large earthquake. Strong
ground motion is often to blame for the structural damage that occurs during an
earthquake. The data seismologists record with strong-motion sensors is used to
improve the design of earthquake-resistant buildings and to understand earth-
quake-induced geologic hazards like liquefaction and landslides. The range of
motions of interest for strong motion applications includes accelerations from
0.001 to 2 times the gravitational force (g), and frequencies from 0 to 100 Hz.
Strong motion sensors are a type of seismometer used to record the strong ground
motion typical of large earthquakes (> 5.0 in magnitude). These sensors are spe-
cifically designed to stay on-scale during the strongest ground motion possible.

There are two basic types of seismic sensors:

 Inertial seismometers, which measure ground motion relative to an inertial
reference (a suspended mass)
 Strainmeters or extensometers, which measure the motion of one point of the
ground relative to another

3-28 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Since the motion of the ground relative to an inertial reference is in most cases much
larger than the differential motion within a vault of reasonable dimensions, inertial
seismometers are generally more sensitive to earthquake signals. However, at very
low frequencies, it becomes increasingly difficult to maintain an inertial reference,
and for the observation of low-order free oscillations of the Earth, tidal motions, and
quasi-static deformations, strainmeters may outperform inertial seismometers. Strain-
meters are conceptually simpler than inertial seismometers, but their technical real-
ization and installation may be more difficult. This section is concerned with inertial
seismometers only. For a more comprehensive description of inertial seismometers,
recorders, and communication equipment, see the book Instrumentation in Earth-
quake Seismology by Havskov and Alguacil (2002).

An inertial seismometer converts ground motion into an electric signal, but its prop-
erties cannot be described by a single scale factor, such as output volts per millimeter
of ground motion. The response of a seismometer to ground motion depends not
only on the amplitude of the ground motion (how large it is) but also on its time
scale (how sudden it is). This is because the seismic mass has to be kept in place by
a mechanical or electromagnetic restoring force. When the ground motion is slow,
the mass will move with the rest of the instrument, and the output signal for a given
ground motion will therefore be smaller. The system is thus a high-pass filter, e.g.
one that passes high frequencies well but attenuates frequencies below a certain
level, for the ground displacement. This must be taken into account when the ground
motion is reconstructed from the recorded signal.

Site selection for a permanent station is always a compromise between two conflict-
ing requirements: infrastructure and low seismic noise. The noise level depends on
the geological situation and on the proximity of sources, some of which are usually
associated with the infrastructure. A seismograph installed on solid basement rock
can be expected to be fairly insensitive to local disturbances, while one sitting on a
thick layer of soft sediments will be noisy even in the absence of identifiable sources.
As a rule, the distance from potential sources of noise, such as roads and inhabited
houses, should be very much larger than the thickness of the sediment layer. Broad-
band seismographs can be successfully operated in major cities when the geology is
favorable. In unfavorable situations, such as in sedimentary basins, only deep mines
and boreholes may offer acceptable noise levels.

Installation Considerations for a Typical Broadband Seismometer

Station
This section describes important considerations in the installation of a broadband
seismometer inside a building, vault, or cave (the seismic station). The two aspects of
the installation that have the most influence on the overall performance of the broad-
band seismometer are the construction of the seismic pier (the concrete base that
serves as the foundation for the instrument), and the application of thermal insulation
around the sensor and pier.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-29

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Much of the following discussion comes from Guidelines for Installing Seismic Broad-
band Stations ([Link]
and Seismic Sensors and Their Calibration by Erhard Wielant (Nov 2002)
([Link] For more complete information, refer to
the International Handbook of Earthquake and Engineering Seismology, Academic
Press, ed. W. H. Lee et al., July 2003.

Construction of the Seismic Pier

The first step in constructing the seismic pier is to mark the orientation of the sensor.
This is best done with a geodetic gyroscope, but a magnetic compass will do in most
cases. The magnetic declination must be taken into account. Since a compass may be
deflected inside a building, the direction should be taken outside and transferred to
the site of installation. A laser pointer may be useful for this purpose. When the mag-
netic declination is unknown or unpredictable (such as at high latitudes or in volcanic
areas), the orientation should be determined with a sun compass.

Typically, the broadband seismometer is capable and responsive to nanoradian tilts.

As a practical matter, a human hair placed under the corner of a level football field
would cause such a tilt. Thus, site selection on low-porosity hard rock is critical.
Any unconformity beneath or within the pier will add to the ambient noise. Clay
soils, which swell in contact with moisture, or micrometer air pores within sand are
capable of causing tilts. While construction or structural piers are often built upon
compacted gravel, sand, or dirt, these underlying materials are capable of causing the
seismic pier to reactively tilt, and thus increase ambient noise.

Considering that the seismic pier bears less than 20 kilograms (kg) seismometer
mass, and encompasses a cubic meter of volume, strength and costs are not of con-
cern. The primary concern is that the pier affects neither the response of the earth
nor the seismometer. The concrete pier should simply hold, and grossly level the
seismometer. The concrete mixture should be as homogeneous as possible. Steel rein-
forcement (re-bar), wire mesh, and rock aggregates all have different coefficients of
thermal expansion and should not be used in a seismic pier. To ensure that no other
concrete (either the vault floors or walls) comes into contact with the pier, a 4-inch
gap should be maintained around the perimeter of the pier. This gap is needed to
minimize any contact with the pier that could potentially induce tilts.

Thermal Insulation of the Broadband Seismometer

Prior to installing the seismometer to the pier, small glass plates should be cemented
under the feet of the pier to isolate the seismometer from stray currents. After instal-
lation, the seismometer should be tested, and wrapped with a thick layer of thermally
insulating material. The type of material is not critical, although alternate layers of
fibrous material and heat-reflecting blankets appear to be most effective.

Proper thermal insulation has perhaps the biggest impact on the overall performance
of the seismometer and is inexpensive and easy to install. This is key to achieving a

3-30 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

thermal time constant of sufficient length to significantly

attenuate the diurnal thermal signature. TipThe most important
Insulating just the seismometer with a 4-inch-thick foam
considerations for
box will result in a thermal time constant on the order of
installation of a broad­
1000 seconds, limited ultimately by heat conduction through
band seismometer are:
the pier. Insulating the entire exposed portion of the pier Location
with a 4-inch foam box will achieve a longer time constant. Pier construction
Insulation
Typical broadband seismometers dissipate 1 to 2 watts of
heat, and typical accelerometers dissipate a few milliwatts
of heat. Owing to their low power dissipation, they can be heavily insulated without
an excessive rise in the operating temperature. If the seismometer is insulated to high
R values (greater than about 80), either the temperature will need to be monitored, or
the theoretical temperature rise for the pier and insulation geometry must be calcu-
lated to insure that the seismometer will not be subjected to temperatures in excess
of its normal operating range.

The temperature sensitivity of a 24-bit resolution

data logger is typically about 2 percent as large Tip
as the temperature sensitivity of a broadband The Imperial unit for R-value is: ft 2 · ˚F · h/Btu
seismometer. Thus, temperature stability is not The SI unit for R-value is: K · m2/W
as critical for the data logger as it is for the
broadband seismometer.

Sensor and Seismograph

There are several electronic and communications components that must be installed
once the pier is in place. While the actual sensor may vary from installation to instal-
lation, the basic components are often the same. Information in this section comes
mainly from the University of Washington’s Pacific Northwest Seismic Network web-
site ([Link]

Sensor
The ground motion sensor is often a 3-component force balance accelerometer. It can
be configured to have a 4-g full scale reading. The digitizer is located in the sensor
housing. The power supply and internet communications hardware are enclosed in
a separate housing. The sensor needs to be bolted to a level concrete floor or placed
outdoors in a small vault.

Optimal signals are those not affected by the response of structures. Thus, the best
locations for the sensors will be either away from buildings or located within build-
ings of only 1 or 2 floors with a footprint smaller than 6000 square feet. The sensor
should be located in a basement or ground floor.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-31

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

An additional consideration is noise. The unit should be located away from existing
or potential vibrational sources. It should not be located near devices such as motors,
fans, compressors, and generators. Natural vibration, such as wind noise, can also be
a problem. The unit should not be located near tall trees or poles. Indoor installations
are ideally in a room without loose items (such as chairs or desks) that will move
around during an earthquake and contaminate the recording of the ground motion.

Digitizer
The analog signal produced by the accelerometer will be digitized by the seismo-
graph. The seismograph will send logical data packets out through an RS-232 port. A
low-voltage serial cable connects the digitizer to the internet communications hard-
ware, a terminal server, enclosed in the power supply housing.

The sensor and digitizer has two external connections:

 Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver
 serial data

The power supply will be installed indoors, near internet connections, even when
the sensor is installed in an outdoor vault. Cabling to vaults must be buried in rigid
conduit.

Component Technical Needs

GPS Antenna
 Mounted outside, usually on exterior wall close to roof line
 Cable routed from antenna to seismograph
 Cable length must be no longer than 65 feet.

Sensor/Seismograph
 Installed in external vault, or
 Mounted inside building
 Bolted to level concrete floor
 Located in basement or ground floor of a 1- or 2-story building
 Located in a seismically quiet area (no motors, fans, pumps, etc. nearby)

Internet Interface
 Internet protocol (IP) address should be assigned prior to installation
 RJ-45 type 10Base-T Ethernet connection
 AC power

Data Acquisition
 Access through firewalls to specified IP address and port number
 Data are acquired on computers dedicated to seismic data acquisition and are
maintained at a high security level

3-32 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Important Points to Remember about Seismic Instruments

 There are two kinds of seismometers: inertial sensors and strain meters. Tsunami
warning programs use inertial sensors.
 There are three basic types of inertial seismometers: short-period, strong-motion,
and broadband sensors. Tsunami warning programs utilize broadband seismom-
eters because these instruments can detect over a large range of frequencies and a
large range of amplitudes (dynamic range).
 The three most important considerations for seismometer installation are:
 Location away from ambient shaking sources, including the ocean.
 Seismic pier placed on solid bedrock whenever possible.
 Thermal insulation to shield instruments from large ambient temperature
fluctuations.

Seismic Network and Processing Requirements for Tsunami

Warning Centers with a 5-Minute Response Need
To produce accurate moment magnitudes, NTWCs and RTWPs require reliable,
broad-frequency, low-noise, high dynamic-range, digital seismic data in real time.
The timeliness of the data is crucial to issuing an initial bulletin within 5 minutes of
an earthquake. This is especially important for centers with local tsunami sources.
Seismic network data density and timing requirements are as follows:

Tip
 Twelve evenly distributed seismometers within 900 km
(2‑minute P-wave travel time) of all coastal source areas.
 Assume 80 percent data availability (9 to 10 sites operating Anticipate that about
at a time) 20 percent of gages will be
out of service at all times.
 Up to 30 seconds of data latency
 Above conditions will provide 9 to 10 P-wave observations
within 2 ½ minutes after the earthquake occurrence or O-time. With an adequate
processing system, a correct hypocenter location can be produced at this time.
 60 seconds further to record the P-wave will provide data with which to compute
a moment magnitude.
 Moment magnitude and hypocenter available at 3 ½ minutes after O-time.
 30 seconds for experienced professional analyst review.
 60 seconds to compose and send bulletin

The above procedure results in 5 minutes total since O-time.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-33

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Seismic network data quality requirements include:

 Digital, broadband seismic data for data processing
 Seismometers should have flat velocity responses from 0.1 seconds to 130 seconds
for accurate magnitude results.
 The seismic network cannot be reliant on one external network for all data feeds.
 The network must be maintained with at least 80 percent up-time.
 In any 900-km radius, at least 8 stations must be operating.
 Seismic data latency cannot exceed 30 seconds.

Seismic data processing capabilities include:

 Process seismic data to produce P-wave arrival times and appropriate magnitude
parameters.
 Trigger alarms based on strong ground shaking at a single station or pair of
stations.
 Produce immediate hypocenter locations given sufficient number of P arrivals
(5 to 7 arrivals).
 Support a graphical user interface which allows analyst to review and alter data in
real time and support relocation of events interactively.
 Compute moment magnitude within 60 seconds of P-arrival for a given station.
 Interact directly with product generation software to produce bulletins with mini-
mal analyst effort.
 The USGS Earthworm seismic data processing system should be used as the base
processing architecture for interoperability with other tsunami warning centers,
availability of source code, and easy sharing of modules and processes.

Data Redundancy
Observational Networks
The process of locating earthquake hypocenters has advanced considerably from the
old days of drawing intersecting arcs on a globe or wall map to find an epicenter.
Today, the task of locating earthquakes relies on computers with sophisticated pro-
grams. From the knowledge of seismograph station positions and measured arrival
times of an earthquake’s seismic waves, the point in time and space from whence the
waves originated—the hypocenter—may be calculated.

The certainty and accuracy of a computer program’s capability to determine an earth-

quake hypocenter depends on many factors. The number of seismograph stations
recording an event and their distribution around the event are critical to accurately
locating a hypocenter. Thus, an earthquake that occurs within a network will have a
more accurately determined position than one that occurs outside and away from the

3-34 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

network. Moreover, the configuration of operating seismograph stations changes as

the network grows, as stations are moved to new locations, and as stations are tem-
porarily out of service.

Seismic station outages of the Global Seismic Network (GSN), as measured at the
Pacific Tsunami Warning Center (PTWC) and the West Coast/Alaska Tsunami Warn-
ing Center (WC/ATWC), average about 10 to 25 percent of the network at any time.
For this reason, an NTWC or RTWP should not be reliant on a single seismic net-
work in any critical region, and should strive for redundancy.

Each network (local or global) should strive to have multiple communications paths
for interrogation of individual seismic sites, and transmission of real-time data. If a
network uses the internet or a satellite as the primary method of data transmission,
then a telephone dial backup capability should be considered only if other alternate
means are not available, e.g. dedicated circuits, alternate Internet Service Providers
(ISP), etc.

It is also desirable to design networks with an approximate 20 percent outage reality

in mind, i.e., network design should provide sufficient density to make the network
effective even with one-fifth of the gages out at any one time.

Observational Platforms
Full redundancy of individual seismometers is usually not practical from a budget-
ary standpoint. Whether or not this is the case, serious consideration of redundant
or alternate interrogation communications methods should be considered. Whenever
possible, some form of backup power to sites is also highly desirable.

Important Points to Remember about Seismic Network Requirements

 The USGS Earthworm seismic data processing system should be used as the base
processing architecture for interoperability with other centers, availability of
source code, and easy sharing of modules and processes.
 In any 900-km radius, at least 8 seismic stations must be operating at all times.
 Centers should assume that about 20 percent of the gages in any network will be
unavailable at all times.
 A warning center requires access to multiple networks via multiple communica-
tions paths to ensure that a seismic event is never missed.
 Seismometers should have flat velocity responses from 0.1 seconds to 130 seconds
for accurate magnitude results.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-35

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Sea Level Data Requirements for Tsunami Detection

A tsunami, in the ocean or other body of water, is a wave train generated by a verti-
cal displacement of the water column. Earthquakes, landslides, volcanic eruptions,
explosions, and even the impact of cosmic bodies such as meteorites can generate
tsunamis. Where they impact a coastline, tsunami waves can cause loss of life and
severe property damage.

Tsunamis may have wavelengths in excess of 100 km and periods of minutes to over
an hour, depending on the generation mechanism. As a result of its long wavelength
compared to the water depth, a tsunami behaves like a shallow-water wave and prop-
agates at a speed that is equal to the square root of the product of the acceleration
of gravity (9.8 meters per second squared) and the water depth. In a typical ocean
depth of 4,000 meters, a tsunami travels at about 200 meters per second, or over
700 km per hour.

Because the rate at which a wave loses its energy is inversely related to its wave-
length, tsunamis not only propagate at high speeds, they can also travel great dis-
tances without loss of energy. Tsunamis are only about a meter high, at the most, in
the open ocean. However, where they impact the coast, amplitudes are significantly
higher and can be as large as 10 meters (30 meters in extreme cases). Wave refrac-
tion, caused by segments of the wave moving at different speeds as the water depth
varies, can cause extreme amplification in localized areas.

The ability to warn a vulnerable population of the approach of a tsunami depends

on a variety of measurements, initially seismic network data, but also on a network
of tide gages to monitor the progress of the wave and thereby forecast the time of
arrival at a distant coast. Real-time data transmission without any significant time
delays is essential because of the high speed at which a tsunami wave propagates and
the time needed by a tsunami warning center to implement decision-making and miti-
gation procedures before a warning is issued to the relevant authorities.

Numerous international sea level monitoring networks provide essential real-time

data that can be accessed by NTWCs and RTWPs. Many of these networks are coor-
dinated by the Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission (IOC) of the United
Nations Education, Scientific, and Cultural Organization (UNESCO).

Tip
The most extensive and notable is the Global Sea Level
Observing System (GLOSS), conducted under the auspices
of the Joint Technical Commission for Oceanography and
Marine Meteorology (JCOMM) of the World Meteorologi- Local tsunamis are
cal Organization (WMO) and the IOC. caused by near shore
earthquakes with little
In some instances; however, these international networks time for action!
may not meet a tsunami warning center’s requirements
for rapid detection and warning of local tsunami events.

3-36 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

For example, NTWCs may require more sea level gages than the RTWPs in order to
more rapidly detect and evaluate locally generated tsunamis, as well as to more finely
monitor impacts along their coast from distant tsunamis. In these cases, a center
will need to establish and maintain gages that augment the available international
networks.
 Tsunami warning centers should strive to deploy gages that meet international
requirements and recommendations since the data will also be useful to other
NTWCs and RTWPs, researchers, and other user groups.
 Local network data should be made readily available to all interests, both in real
time, and as historical datasets, which are valuable for improving and fine-tuning
models.

There are two basic types of sea level gages: coastal tide gages and open ocean
buoys. Tide gages are generally located at the land-sea interface, usually in loca-
tions somewhat protected from the heavy seas that are occasionally created by storm
systems. Tide gages that initially detect tsunami waves provide little advance warn-
ing at the actual location of the gage, but can provide coastal residents where the
waves have not yet reached an indication that a tsunami does exist, its speed, and its
approximate strength.

Open ocean buoy systems equipped with bottom pressure sensors are now a reli-
able technology that can provide advance warning to coastal areas that will be first
impacted by a teletsunami, before the waves reach them and nearby tide gages. Since
the tsunami waves will not yet be modified by local bathymetry, open ocean buoys
often provide a better forecast of the tsunami strength than tide gages at distant
locations.

Important Points to Remember about Sea Level Data

 Sea level data are needed to adjust and cancel warnings, via both observed values
for real-time verification and as input to models as an event unfolds.
 Sea level data come from tide gages and from DART buoys in the open ocean.
 International sea level gage networks can be accessed by tsunami warning centers
as a source of sea level data. In some instances, international networks may not
meet a tsunami warning center’s requirements for rapid detection and warning
of local tsunami events. In these cases a tsunami warning center may need to
establish and maintain gages that augment the available international networks.
 Real-time data collection by robust and reliable communications channels is essen-
tial to the success of a tsunami warning program.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-37

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Causes of Sea Level Variations and Detection of the Tsunami

Wave Signal
Sea level measurement has many different facets and requires significant technical
expertise and experience. Data must be carefully calibrated, checked and evaluated.
Measurements should be tied to local benchmarks that in turn are integrated within
a country’s national leveling network as well as the global network using modern
geodetic techniques. Recorded data must be archived, documented, and protected
for future studies. Sea level data that are managed in this manner serve as a valu-
able resource for a wide range of studies from refining tsunami models to monitoring
impacts of global climate change.

Variations in sea level are caused by a combination of physical factors that are usually
distinguished by their period. The various components of sea level include:
 Surface gravity waves with periods of 1 to 20 seconds
 Seiches and tsunamis with periods of minutes to over an hour
 Tides centered around 1/2 and 1 day
 Meteorological effects of several days
 Interannual and decadal variability
 Long-term trends in the mean level caused by geological and climatological effects

The magnitudes of these components vary enormously:

 Surface gravity waves can have amplitudes up to 30 meters.
 Tsumanis tend to be less than 1 meter in the deep ocean but may be several
meters near the coast.
 Tides are relatively small in the ocean but may be 10 meters near the coast.
 Storm surges may be on the order of a few meters in shallow seas.

As noted by UNESCO in Manuals and Guides 14, IOC Manual on Sea Level
Measurement and Interpretation, Volume IV: An Update to 2006, any instantaneous
measurement of sea level in a series may usually be considered the sum of three
component parts:
Observed Sea Level = Mean Sea Level + Tide + Meteorological Residuals

Each of these component parts is controlled by separate physical processes, and the
variations of each part are essentially independent of the variations in the other parts.
There are many ways of defining these components. An acceptable set of definitions is:
 Tides are the periodic movements of the seas which have coherent amplitudes and
phase relationships to some periodic geophysical force.

3-38 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

 The dominant forcing is the variation in the gravitational field on the surface of
the earth due to the regular movements of the earth-moon and earth-sun sys-
tems. These cause gravitational tides.
 There are also weak tides generated by periodic variations of atmospheric pres-
sure and on-shore off-shore winds which are called meteorological tides.
 Meteorological residuals are the non-tidal components that remain after remov-
ing the tides by analysis. They are irregular, as are the variations in the weather.
 Sometimes the term surge residual is used, but more commonly surge is used
to describe a particular event during which a very large nontidal component is
generated.
 Mean sea level (MSL) is the average level of the sea, usually based on hourly
values taken over a period of at least a year; for geodetic purposes, the mean level
may be taken over several years. The frequency with which different observed
hourly levels occur over a long period of observation has a definite pattern.
Where semidiurnal tides are dominant, the most frequent levels are near to Mean
High and Mean Low Water Neap levels. Figure 3-12 shows some examples of tidal
characteristics at different locations.

Figure 3-12. Tidal Characteristics at Five Stations Showing Different Regimes

(Source: UNESCO Manual of Sea Level Measurement and Interpretation Vol. 1 – Basic Procedures, 1985)

Figure 3-12 shows five different patterns of tidal characteristics at different locations:
diurnal, at Karumba, Australia; mixed, at Musay’id in the Persian Gulf; semi-diurnal
with strong spring-neap modulation at Kilindini in the Indian Ocean; semidiurnal
with weather modulation at Bermuda, in the North Atlantic Ocean; and gross shallow
water distortions at Courtown, in the Irish Sea.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-39

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Tides are calculated from the hydrodynamic equations for a self-gravitating ocean
on a rotating, elastic Earth. The driving force is the small change in gravity due to
motion of the moon and sun relative to Earth. Small variations in gravity arise from
two separate mechanisms related to the rotation of the moon about the Earth. These
mechanisms include the following:
 The moon and Earth rotate about the center of mass of the Earth-moon system.
This gives rise to a centripetal acceleration at Earth’s surface that drives water
away from the center of mass and toward the side of Earth opposite the moon
(point C in Figure 3-13).
 At the same time, mutual gravitational attraction of mass on Earth and the moon
causes water to be attracted toward the moon (point A in Figure 3-13).

If the Earth was an ideal ocean planet with no land, and if the ocean was very deep,
the two processes would produce a pair of bulges of water on Earth, one on the
side facing the moon, one on the side away from the moon (Figure 3-13). (The figure
assumes an ocean of uniform depth, with negligible friction between the ocean and
the underlying planet.)

Figure 3-13. Model of Gravitational Attraction on a Planet Completely Covered by Ocean

(Source: University of Tennessee website, [Link]

The realistic situation is considerably more complicated, as a result of the following

conditions:
 The Earth and moon are not static, as depicted in Figure 3-13, but instead are in
orbit around the common center of mass for the system.
 The Earth is not covered with oceans, the oceans have varying depths, and there
is substantial friction between the oceans and the Earth.

One additional complication of a realistic model of gravity’s effects on the Earth’s

tides is that not only the moon but other objects in the solar system influence the
Earth’s tides. Most of their tidal forces are negligible on Earth, but the differential
gravitational force of the sun does influence our tides to some degree. The effect of
the sun on Earth tides is less than half that of the moon.

3-40 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Particularly large tides are experienced in the Earth’s oceans when the sun and the
moon are lined up with the Earth at new and full phases of the moon. These are
called spring tides (the name is not associated with the spring season). The degree
to which Earth’s tides are enhanced is about the same whether the sun and moon
are lined up on opposite sides of the Earth (full lunar phase) or on the same side
(new lunar phase). Conversely, when the moon is at first quarter or last quarter phase
(meaning that it is located at right angles to the Earth-sun line), the sun and moon
interfere with each other in producing tidal bulges and tides are generally weaker;
these are called neap tides. Figure 3-14 illustrates spring and neap tides.

Figure 3-14. Competition Between the Sun and Moon in Producing Tides
(Source: University of Tennessee website, [Link]

A tsunami creates a fourth

component that is not normally
present in the observed sea
level. Fortunately for tsunami
warning center watch standers,
the signature of tsunami waves
at sea level gages is generally
quite distinctive, as illustrated in
Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15. Tsunami Signal

(Source: UNESCO Manual of Sea Level Interpretation Vol. 4, 2006)

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-41

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Important Points to Remember about Causes of Sea Level Variations

 Variations in sea level contain contributions from different physical sources that
are usually distinguished by their period. Components include:
 Surface gravity waves with periods of 1 to 20 seconds
 Seiches and tsunamis with periods of minutes to over an hour
 Tides centered around 1/2 and 1 day
 Meteorological effects of several days
 Interannual and decadal variability
 Long-term trends in the mean level caused by geological and climatological
effects
 A tsunami creates a component that is not normally present in the observed sea
level. Fortunately, the signature of tsunami waves at sea level gages is generally
quite distinctive and thus recognizable.

Using Tide Gages to Measure Changes in Sea Level

Four basic types of tide gages are used to measure changes in sea level. These are
discussed extensively in the 2006 update to the UNESCO publication Manuals and
Guides 14, Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission, Manual on Sea Level Mea-
surement and Interpretation Volume IV, and will be summarized in this section.

In addition, there are direct measuring devices based on resistance or capacitance

rods, but these have found less widespread use because of their lack of robustness
in harsh climates. Recent advances in technologies, such as GPS reflection meth-
ods, have led to other elaborate ways of measuring sea level, which are now being
deployed in some areas.

Most systems for measuring sea level have a precision approaching 1 cm, given suf-
ficient care and attention. This value is adequate for the measurement of most of the
hydrodynamic processes. This level of precision does not, however, imply sufficient
accuracy for adequate measurement of the mean sea level, which also depends on the
long-term stability of the measuring system. Fortunately for tsunami warning systems,
such high accuracy is not a priority because what is most important is the change
that occurs in water level as the tsunami waves arrive.

There are practical constraints that govern the choice of an instrument for a particu-
lar application. These include:
 Cost
 Degree of difficulty of installation
 Ease of maintenance and repair
 Availability of support facilities or services

3-42 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

The installation of a highly complex electronic instrument with sophisticated soft-

ware control would be unwise without technical support staff who possess the ability
to maintain its operation. Another important consideration in the choice of an instru-
ment is its suitability for the site at which it is to be located.

T
Traditionally, permanent sea level stations
around the world have been primarily
ip
devoted to tide and mean sea level appli-
cations. This has been the main objective GLOSS is an international program
conducted under the auspices of the Joint
of the Global Sea Level Observing System
Technical Commission for Oceanography
(GLOSS). Because of this focus, not only are
and Marine Meteorology (JCOMM) of
wind waves filtered out from the records
the World Meteorological Organisation
by mechanical or mathematical procedures, (WMO) and the Intergovernmental
but any oscillation between wind waves Oceanographic Commission (IOC).
and tides (e.g. seiches, tsunamis etc.) has
not been considered a priority; in fact, these
phenomena are not properly monitored,
owing to the standard sampling time of more than 5 to 6 minutes. If this range of
the spectrum should be covered from now on, it would be necessary to consider this
when choosing a new instrument and designing the sea level stations.

Groups such as the Permanent Service for Mean Sea Level (PSMSL) and the GLOSS
Technical Committee can provide advice on the design and installation of tide gages.
An important consideration is the correct installation and a thorough knowledge, by
the maintenance technicians, of the problems that any particular sensor can present
and how to avoid them with adequate operation.

Stilling Well and Float Gage

A stilling well gage is probably the most common of all sea-level recording systems
on a worldwide basis. These gages were at one time employed at every port instal-
lation and were the primary technology by which sea level records were compiled.
Recent stilling well installations are less common, since they require a considerable
amount of costly engineering work, so that they have often been superseded by one
of the other technologies discussed later in this section. In some circumstances it may
not be possible to install a well, e.g. on a shelving beach, and other methods have to
be adopted.

The function of a well is to filter out, or to “still,” the wave activity, so that the tides
and longer-period processes can be recorded accurately. A stilling well usually con-
sists of a float gage in the well that drives a pen-and-chart recorder or, in more recent
years, a shaft encoder such that the readings of sea level height can be digitized
automatically. It is not uncommon for other types of instrument, such as a pressure
sensor, to also be placed in the well. The well itself is a vertical tube about 1 meter
(m) in diameter constructed of concrete, coated steel, or plastic, with a hole or, less
frequently, a pipe connection to the sea. The ratio of the hole diameter or pipe length

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-43

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

and diameter to that of the well gives it the characteristics of a low-pass mechanical
filter (Noye 1974a, b, c). Care has to be exercised in trying to measure processes such
as tsunami waves, as the frequency response is not 100 percent for periods less than
or equal to 4 hours. The stilling well suffers from amplitude attenuation and a phase
lag at shorter periods, which are critically dependent on the design of the well and
sometimes difficult to change. A schematic diagram of a float gage in a stilling well is
shown in Figure 3-16, below. The float wheel is shown driving a pen recorder, but the
same pulley could equally drive a digital shaft encoder or a potentiometer, which can
then be recorded by a local data logger or interfaced to a telemetry system. The well
is shown with a conical inlet at its base, since this is the most common configuration
and is to some extent self-cleaning. Many other configurations of the inlet are accept-
able, and although the conical orifice does restrict the inflow relative to the outflow,
this does not appear to have a significant effect on the records even in the presence
of waves.

Figure 3-16. Basic Float-Operated Tide Gage in a Stilling Well.

(Source: IOC Manual of Sea Level Measurement and Interpretation Vol. 4, 2006)

3-44 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Pressure Systems
Instruments that measure subsurface pressure instead of sea level directly have found
widespread use. Knowledge of seawater density and gravitational acceleration is
required to make the conversion from pressure to sea level, but in spite of this, the
instruments have many practical advantages as sea level recorders. The most com-
monly used types are the pneumatic bubbler gages and pressure sensor gages, in
which sensors are mounted directly in the sea. The two types have much in common
and a choice of which type is suitable is usually based on practical considerations at
a proposed site.

The pneumatic bubbler tide gage has been successfully used worldwide for several
decades. It replaced many of the float-operated harbor gages as the primary stan-
dard for sea level measurement in countries such as the US and the United Kingdom,
although in the US they have been superseded by acoustic gages.

Figure 3-17 shows the basic essentials of a bubbler system. Air is passed at a metered
rate along a small-bore tube to a pressure point fixed underwater, well below the
lowest expected sea level. The pressure point normally takes the form of a short ver-
tical cylinder with a closed top face and open at the bottom. A small bleed hole is
drilled about halfway down its length, and metered air is entered through a connec-
tion on the top surface.

Figure 3-17. Components of a Bubbler System

(Source: IOC Manual of Sea Level Measurement and Interpretation, Vol. 4, 2006)

As air from the tube enters the pressure point, it becomes compressed and pushes
the water down inside the chamber until the level of the bleed hole is reached, at
which time the air bubbles out through the hole and back to the surface. Provided
that the rate of air flow is low and the air supply tube is not unduly long, the pressure

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-45

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

of air in the system will equal that of the pressure due to the depth of the sea water
above the bleed hole coupled with atmospheric pressure. A pressure-recording instru-
ment connected into this supply tube at the landward end records the changes in
water level as changing pressures, according to the law:
h = (p-pa)/(ρg)
where h = height of sea level above the bleed hole
p = measured pressure
pa = atmospheric pressure
ρ = seawater density
g = gravitational acceleration

Most pneumatic instruments use a pressure sensor as part of the recording equipment
to monitor the changes in pressure and hence sea level. It is common to use a sensor
operating in the differential mode, sensors being so constructed that the system pres-
sure is opposed by atmospheric pressure. Hence, the resultant pressure experienced
by the sensor becomes (p–pa), making the measured pressure directly proportional
to the sea level height. Knowledge of the seawater density (ρ) is important. This is
normally obtained from separate water sampling, and, where the water is well mixed,
can be considered constant. In estuarine locations, the density may change during a
tidal cycle or seasonally, and density corrections will have to be included in the data
processing. Several other effects on the measured pressure have to be considered.
These include a “static” effect, which is a function of the height of the gage above sea
level, and a “dynamic” effect, which results from the dynamics of gas flow. The latter
can be calculated in terms of tube length and radius and the minimum air-flow con-
sistent with preventing water from entering the system.

The effect of waves on the system is to introduce a positive bias during storm condi-
tions (i.e. sea level is measured too high). These effects can perturb the sea level mea-
surements at the sub-centimeter level during average conditions, but measurements
may be incorrect by several centimeters under extreme waves. In common with all
pressure measuring systems, there is a need to establish a datum for the observed
time series. This datum can be achieved in several ways including:
 From a knowledge of the exact depth of the pressure point bleed hole during
installation, combined with accurate calibration of the pressure transducer
 Using datum level switches similar to those for stilling wells, which trigger at a
known sea level
 Having a parallel system, called a B gage, with a second and more accessible pres-
sure point fixed near mean sea level

Comparison of the differences between the two bubbling systems when both are
submerged gives an accurate measure of the datum, so the third method is the most
accurate.

3-46 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Air is normally supplied to a bubbler from a compressor to afford continuous opera-

tion of the installation. In the event of electrical supply failure, a reserve air capacity
capable of sustaining the system for at least several days is necessary. For sustained
operation under fault conditions, an alternative low-power backup system in the form
of a pressure transducer mounted directly in the sea is necessary. Transducers, com-
pressors, data loggers etc. can be purchased from the major gage manufacturers with
ready-to-go packages. An all-bubbler system has an advantage in that most compo-
nents are underwater and all components are both robust and, if damaged, relatively
inexpensive to replace.
Pressure sensors can be fixed directly in the sea to monitor subsurface pressure in
a similar fashion to the bubbler gage. The sensor is connected by a cable that car-
ries power and signal lines to an onshore control and logging unit. In the sea, the
active sensor is usually contained within a copper or titanium housing, with the cable
entering through a watertight gland. Material used for the housing is chosen to limit
marine growth.

The assembly is contained in an outer protective tube to provide a stable fixation to

a sea wall or rock outcrop, as depicted in Figure 3-18a and b. Where this is not pos-
sible, the pressure sensor may be placed securely on the sea bed, but this method has
disadvantages, as deployment and maintenance usually require a diving team.

Figure 3-18a. Pressure Gage Mounted Directly Figure 3-18b. Pressure Gage Attached
in the Sea to a Pier in Port Stanley
(Source: IOC Manual of Sea Level Measurement and Harbor
Interpretation, Vol. 4, 2006) (Source: IOC Manual of Sea Level Measurement
and Interpretation, Vol. 4, 2006)

Pressure-based instruments can be operated from batteries for periods of a year or

more, as they consume a very small amount of power. This can be advantageous even
where electrical supplies are available but subject to long periods of failure. There-
fore, they have been used extensively in remote areas, such as oceanic islands, where
access is limited. In polar regions, pressure-based instruments to measure sea level

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-47

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

offer the best alternative if the area is ice covered or if the gage is to be left unat-
tended for long periods. The main disadvantage is the lack of a fixed datum level,
which has to be found by alternative means. Pressure sensors are available in two
varieties that provide either an absolute or a differential signal. If an absolute trans-
ducer is employed, the sensor provides a measurement of the total pressure including
sea level and atmosphere. Therefore, a separate barometer is required, usually in the
form of an identical transducer open to the atmosphere. Both sensors are synchro-
nized to the same clock so they can readily be subtracted to yield sea level (with sub-
sequent correction for density and acceleration due to gravity). Differential pressure
transducers have a vented cable in which the reference side of the transducer is open
to the atmosphere. Vented systems are known to suffer from occasional blockage and
are used less frequently in hazardous environments. In addition, a record of baro-
metric pressure is valuable for oceanographic studies, so the two-transducer option is
most frequently employed.

Acoustic Systems
Acoustic tide gages depend on measuring the travel time of acoustic pulses reflected
vertically from the sea surface. This type of measurement can theoretically be made
in the open with an acoustic transducer mounted vertically above the sea surface,
but in certain conditions the reflected signals may be lost. To ensure continuous and
reliable operation, the sensor is located inside a tube that provides some degree of
surface stilling and protects the equipment. Some sensors even constrain the acoustic
pulses within a narrow vertical tube which is contained inside the previous one. This
outer tube does not completely filter out wave action but, by averaging a number of
measurements, the desired filtering is achieved. The velocity of sound in air varies sig-
nificantly with temperature and humidity (about 0.17 percent per °C), and some form
of compensation is necessary to obtain sufficient accuracy. The simplest method is to
measure the air temperature continuously at a point in the air column and use this to
calculate the sound velocity. To account for temperature gradients in the air column,
temperature sensors may be required at a number of different levels. A more accurate
method of compensation is by use of an acoustic reflector at a fixed level in the air
column. By relating the reflection from the sea surface to that from the fixed reflector,
direct compensation for variation in sound velocity between the acoustic transducer
and the fixed reflector can be achieved; however, this still does not account for any
variation in sound velocity between the fixed reflector and the sea surface. To achieve
full compensation would require, in principle, a number of fixed reflectors covering
the full tidal range, but none of the known acoustic sensors has this possibility.

Acoustic Gages with Sounding Tubes

The U.S. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), National Ocean
Service (NOS) initiated a multi-year implementation of a Next-Generation Water Level
Measurement System (NGWLMS) over a decade ago, both within the U.S. national
tide-gage network and at selected sites around the world (Gill et al. 1993). These sys-
tems were operated alongside existing (float or bubbler) tide gages at many stations

3-48 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

for a minimum period of 1 year to provide datum ties and data continuity. Dual
systems were maintained at a few stations for several years to provide a long-term
comparison. Tide gages using the same technology have been deployed in a number
of other countries, such as Australia, where they are known as SEAFRAME systems
(Lennon et al. 1993). The NGWLMS tide gage uses a sensor that sends a shock wave
of acoustic energy down a 1/2-inch-diameter PVC sounding tube and measures the
travel time for the reflected signals from a calibration reference point and from the
water surface. Two temperature sensors give an indication of temperature gradients
down the tube. The calibration reference allows the controller to adjust the measure-
ments for variations in sound velocity due to changes in temperature and humidity.
The sensor controller performs the necessary calculations to determine the distance
to the water surface. The sounding tube is mounted inside a 6-inch-diameter PVC
protective well that has a symmetrical 2-inch-diameter double cone orifice to provide
some degree of stilling. The protective well is more open to the local dynamics than
the traditional stilling well and does not filter waves entirely. In areas of high veloc-
ity tidal currents and high-energy sea swell and waves, parallel plates are mounted
below the orifice to reduce the pull-down effects (Shih and Baer 1991). Figure 3-19 is
a schematic of a typical NGWLMS installation.

Figure 3-19. NOAA/NOS NGWLMS Tide Gage

(Source: IOC Manual of Sea Level Measurement and Interpretation, Vol. 4, 2006)

To obtain the best accuracy, the acoustic sensor is calibrated using a stainless steel
tube of certified length, from which the zero offset is determined. The NGWLMS gages
have the capability of handling up to 11 different ancillary oceanographic and meteo-
rological sensors. The field units are programmed to take measurements at 6‑minute
intervals, with each measurement consisting of 181 1-second-interval water level
samples centered on each tenth of an hour. Software in the instrument rejects outliers,
etc., which can occur as a result of spurious reflections. Measurements have a typical
resolution of 3 millimeters (mm). The instrument contains the necessary hardware for
telephone and satellite communications. Most comparisons with conventional stilling
well gages show small differences, on the order of a few mm, for the various tidal and

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-49

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

datum parameters, which are generally within the uncertainty of the instrumenta-
tion. Such differences are very small when compared to typical tidal ranges and even
seasonal and interannual sea level variations. NGWLMS systems are considered suffi-
ciently accurate for mean sea level studies. A modern version of the NGWLMS is called
a Sea Ranger, which is claimed to have a number of advantages over the earlier tech-
nology, including self calibration (IOC 2004).

Acoustic Gages without Sounding Tubes

Several acoustic instruments have been produced that operate without a sounding
tube. These gages are normally located inside an existing stilling well or inside a
plastic tube some 25 cm in diameter. Some of them may operate in the open air, but
are not normally employed for high-quality sea level measurements. These acoustic
instruments operate at a frequency of 40 to 50 kilohertz (kHz) and have a relatively
narrow beam width of 5°. The manufacturer’s measurement range is approximately
15 m with an overall accuracy of 0.05 percent.

Contradictory experiences have been experienced with this type of acoustic sensor,
from problems in achieving the stated accuracy under all environmental conditions to
the high-quality and continuous operation of 15 tide gages in the REDMAR network
(Spain), most of them installed in 1992 and still in operation. A crucial aspect of this
type of sensor is the dependence of the velocity of sound on the environmental con-
ditions, such as the air temperature. On the other hand, tubes tend to increase the
temperature-gradient between the instrument and the sea surface unless special pre-
cautions are taken to ensure that the air is well mixed in the tube. A complementary
and necessary method is to compensate for sound velocity variations using a reflec-
tor mounted at a suitable distance below the transmitter, as is the case for the Sonar
Research and Development (SRD) gages employed in the REDMAR network. A careful
design of the installation, avoiding different ambient conditions along the tube and
following the maker’s requirements about the minimum distance to the water surface,
become crucial for the final accuracy of the data.

The performance of one of these SRD sensors over an existing stilling well inside
a hut or small building in Santander, Spain, has been nearly perfect and continu-
ous over 15 years. The conditions of this installation are probably ideal, perhaps
because the temperature inside the building is rather homogeneous. Data from this
acoustic sensor have in fact helped to correct malfunctions of the float gage that
operates inside the same stilling well. Studies of mean sea levels from 12 years of
data in Spain, comparing this type of acoustic sensor (SRD) with the traditional float
gages, has shown their high quality and has even helped to identify reference jumps
in the older float gages. Nevertheless, because the success of the SRD sensors in the
REDMAR system appears unique, it seems likely that radar gages will replace this
type of acoustic sensor everywhere, in the near future.

3-50 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Radar Systems
Radar tide gages have become available during the last few years from several manu-
facturers. Although this technology is relatively new, radar gages are being purchased
and installed by a number of agencies as replacements for older instruments or for
completely new networks. The reason is that they are as easy to operate and main-
tain as acoustic sensors, without their main disadvantage: their high dependence on
the air temperature. Radar gages have a relatively low cost, and the engineering work
necessary to install them is relatively simple compared to other systems. The instru-
ments are supplied with the necessary hardware and software to convert the radar
measurements into a sea-level height. In addition, the output signals are often com-
patible with existing data loggers or can be interfaced to a communication network.
Like many modern systems, they can be set up using a portable computer.

The active part of the gage is located above the water surface and measures the
distance from this point to the air-sea interface. A diagram and photograph are
shown in Figure 3-20a and b, respectively. The gage has to be mounted in such a way
that there are no restrictions or reflectors in the path of the radar beam, between
the gage mounting and the sea surface. It has to be positioned above the highest
expected sea level and preferably above the highest expected wave height, so as to
prevent physical damage.

Figure 3-20a. Comparison of a Radar and a Bubbler Gage

(Source: Woodworth and Smith 2003)

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-51

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Figure 3-20b. OTT Kalesto Radar Tide Gage at a Test Installation, Liverpool, England
(Source: IOC Manual of Sea Level Measurement and Interpretation, Vol. 4, 2006)

A radar gage has many advantages over traditional systems in that it makes a direct
measurement of sea level. The effects of density and temperature variations, even in
the atmosphere, are unimportant. The main constraint is that the power consump-
tion may be relatively large in radar systems if used on a continuous basis in a rapid
sampling mode. Averages are typically taken over periods of minutes. This may limit
its use in some applications (e.g. tsunami warning) where observations are required
on a continuous high-frequency (e.g. 15-second) basis. In such areas, pressure gages
may be more appropriate, although work and research is still being done concern-
ing this particular application. The WC/ATWC notes that averages can be specified by
the user. WC/ATWC utilizes 15-second data samples at radar gages and considers the
radar gages ideal for high-frequency usage.

Radar gages fall into two categories: (1) those that transmit a continuous frequency
and use the phase shift between transmitted and received signal to determine sea
level height (frequency modulated continuous waves [FMCW]), and (2) those that
use pulsed transmissions and time-of-flight measurement. The OTT Kalesto, Miros
and Radac instruments use the FMCW method, and the VEGA and SEBA systems are
examples of the pulsed-transmission type. Both types of gages have undergone initial
tests and inter-comparisons by various agencies in different countries. Details of these
tests can be found in IOC Workshop Report No 193. In principle, the instruments are
self calibrating as far as a datum value is concerned; however, to provide confidence
that the datum remains constant over long time periods, alternative means are being
investigated. These take the form of a reflector that can be placed in the radar beam
at appropriate intervals. The reflector is placed at a known distance below the contact

3-52 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

point of the installation for a short period. Over a period of a year or more, the datum
value can be verified and used to adjust the measurements, if necessary.

Initial indications suggest that these instruments can provide acceptable measure-
ments for the purposes of GLOSS. As with all tide gages, practical considerations
related to a particular application often dominate other considerations. For example,
they may have very limited application in polar regions. They have not yet been
used extensively in extremely hostile environments, such as on remote islands where
extreme waves may overtop the gage by several meters. However, for a normal appli-
cation in which a stilling well or bubbler gage is presently in use, they appear to
operate satisfactorily. The WC/ATWC has used a radar gage at Shemya, Alaska (a very
hostile environment) for more than 4 years. Waves overtop the gage several times a
year. WC/ATWC reports that the radar gage is far superior to traditional stilling well
installations in difficult environments.

Multiple-Use Platforms
The University of Hawaii Sea Level Center (UHSLC) has been providing high-fre-
quency tide gage data for tsunami warning to the Pacific Tsunami Warning Center
(PTWC) for 25 years. This has led to an emphasis on multiple-use platforms that
have the stability and accuracy to measure long-term sea level variability and trends,
and the range, durability, and sampling capability to monitor tsunamis. Serving this
dual purpose has resulted in a robust system, where (1) station malfunctions can be
detected and addressed quickly given the immediate access to the data, and (2) ongo-
ing maintenance in support of sea level monitoring ensures the sustainability of the
stations between infrequent tsunami events.

The basic configuration used by the UHSLC for a tide gage station that can also be
used for tsunami warning includes the following:
 Sensors – No single sensor provides optimal measurements of both mean and
high amplitude fluctuating components of sea level. A combination of sea level
sensors should be used. The primary sea level sensor is a pulsed radar, with
sampling fast enough (3 minute averages or shorter) to serve also as a second-
ary tsunami sensor. The primary tsunami sensor is a vented pressure transducer
reporting 1 minute or shorter averages. The pressure time series, converted to
water level, is usually adequate to fill any short gaps that may occur in the radar
record. In many cases, a station with a preexisting float gage is also retrofitted
for tsunami monitoring. In these situations the float gage is maintained as a third
sensor that provides a backup for sea level monitoring. Water level switches and a
tide staff are also included to monitor the stability of the data over time.
 Power – All UHSLC stations rely on batteries charged by solar panels for power.
At many remote sites, local power is not an option. More importantly, local power
is susceptible to failure in the event of a local earthquake or tsunami inundation
event, in which case it is advantageous to be isolated from the power grid. Most of
the UHSLC stations are at low to mid latitudes, making solar a viable option. This
may not be the case at high-latitude sites.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-53

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

 Siting – Because tide gages require a stable platform, most of the UHSLC stations
are located on piers or docks within harbors or atoll lagoons. In terms of tsunami
monitoring, this has the disadvantage of not sampling the wave signal in an open
coast setting. Tsunami amplitudes and frequencies within a protected harbor are
likely to be significantly different than along an unprotected coast. This is of par-
ticular concern for tsunami modelers who may be trying to assimilate tide gage
data. On the other hand, unprotected sites tend to be exposed to swell and low
frequency wave energy that may in some cases mask a small tsunami event or
limit the early detection of a larger event. In addition, the station is less likely to
be destroyed during a tsunami if it is situated in a harbor. For these reasons, siting
a station within a harbor is a better option if the main concern is to determine
whether a tsunami threat is present.
 Communications – The UHSLC tsunami monitoring experience in the Pacific has
been in the context of a basin-wide warning system. Given that the Pacific is such
a large area, transmitting data from the station to the warning center within an
hour or so of collection is typically sufficient for monitoring the basin-wide extent
of a tsunami event. As a result, the UHSLC uses the Geostationary Operational
Environmental Satellite (GOES) satellite in the Pacific, with the transmission of
2‑ to 4-minute averages every hour.
 Following the December 2004 tsunami, UHSLC is transitioning to 1-minute
averages transmitted every 15 minutes for basin-wide monitoring. This trans-
mission rate has been accomplished using the Japanese Meteorological Agency
(JMA) and European Meteorological Satellite (EUMETSAT) geostationary satel-
lites in the Indian Ocean, and the GOES in the Pacific.
 For stations located within a 1-hour travel time of a known tsunami generation
site, 15-second sampling with a 5-minute transmission cycle is under consider-
ation. At present, this may be feasible on the GOES system but not for stations
using either the JMA or EUMETSAT downlinks. For these stations, and in sup-
port of partners installing national tsunami warning systems, UHSLC plans to
use the International Mobile Satellite Organization Broadband Global Area Net-
work (INMARSAT BGAN) system. This application is currently under develop-
ment in the Indian Ocean.

Important Points to Remember about Tide Gages

 Four types of tide gages are commonly used to measure sea level variations. These
types are:
 Stilling well and float: in which the filtering of the waves is done through the
mechanical design of the well.
 Pressure systems: in which subsurface pressure is monitored and converted to
height based on knowledge of the water density and local acceleration due to
gravity. Such systems have additional specific application to ocean circulation
studies in which pressure differences are more relevant than height differences

3-54 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

 Acoustic systems: in which the transit time of a sonic pulse is used to com-
pute distance to the sea surface.
 Radar systems: similar to acoustic transmission, but using radar frequencies.
Early results suggest that these systems will dominate in the future as they per-
form well in harsh environments.
 Multiple-use platforms have the stability and accuracy to measure long-term sea
level variability and trends, and the range, durability, and sampling capability to
monitor tsunamis. Serving this dual purpose can ensure the sustainability of the
stations/networks between infrequent tsunami events.

Coastal Tide Gage Network and Processing Requirements

Several decades of experience at a number of national and regional centers have led
to the determination of requirements for density, quality, and processing capabili-
ties of sea level gage network(s) to adequately support a tsunami warning program.
These guidelines were developed by the GLOSS program based on science principles,
and also the compelling requirement to issue time-critical products to protect life and
property. The following sections are based on the very different needs of teletsunami
and local tsunami warning programs.

Tip
Each nation or jurisdiction will have to assess its needs in
terms of early warning requirements. As the subregional and
national sea-level data messages are available for immediate
retransmission to the PTWC and the JMA using WMO’s GTS Warn on seismic data,
facilities, they can be used by these and other tsunami warning and update or cancel on
sea level data.
centers to help confirm the existence of a major tsunami, or to
cancel a tsunami watch or warning.

It cannot be overemphasized that the free and open real-time data exchange and the
use of sea-level data to verify forecast models is the most beneficial path for all coun-
tries to follow. Sea-level data are invaluable to efforts to reduce false alarm rates by
detecting small tsunamis. With this in mind, there is a compelling need to establish
performance standards for the installation and maintenance of sea level gages.

Coastal Tide Gage Network Requirements

NTWCs may require more tide gages than RTWPs in order to more rapidly detect and
evaluate locally generated tsunamis as well as finely monitor impacts from distant
tsunamis along their coast.

Tip
Additionally, it is recommended that, when possible, these
sites be configured within existing multipurpose coastal
sea level stations (for sustainability) and into the core
network of sea-level stations being developed worldwide MULTI-USE equals
under the Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning System Sustainability

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-55

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

initiative. To this end, the following station performance standards are recommended
for both subregional and national in situ sea level stations:
 Independent power and communications, i.e., solar and satellite
 Fault-tolerant redundant sensors (multiple sensors for tsunami, tides, and climate)
 Local logging and readout of data (local backup of data)
 Warning center event trigger (ramping up of sampling and transmission on event
detection)
 Establishment of a system of surveying benchmarks (tides, engineering, and
climate)
 Locating gages in protected areas that are responsive to tsunamis, such as harbors
(sustainability and filtering)

The use of multiple-use water level stations maximizes the likelihood of continuous
operation of the sea-level measurement network. The specifications for these stations
should be designed for long-term sea level monitoring and configured for a sub­
regional and national tsunami monitoring system.

Coastal Tide Gage Data Quality

Data recovered from a tide gage always provide time series with a particular sampling
interval. Even analogue charts are digitized to provide levels at regular points in time.
Until recently, most data acquired this way have been archived and distributed by
data assembly centers (DAC) in a quality controlled (QC) and fully documented form.
This results in “delayed-mode” data sets. Such QC methods are well established.

Sea level data are required for many purposes, and in many applications, no time
is available to perform a full QC. For example, during the World Ocean Circulation
Experiment (WOCE), the UHSLC was established as the “fast delivery” DAC, with the
British Oceanographic Data Centre (BODC) as the “delayed mode” DAC. The UHSLC
was tasked with the assembly, QC, and distribution of sea level data from WOCE gages
within several weeks, comparable to the delay, at the time, in the delivery of satellite
altimeter data. Meanwhile, BODC had the task to assemble and supply sea level data
from the WOCE network to the full extent of QC within 18 to 24 months from data
collection. More recently, there has been an emphasis on making as many GLOSS
gages as possible deliver data in near real time, typically within an hour. This require-
ment has arisen for several reasons. First, with real-time data, it is immediately obvi-
ous when problems with a gage have occurred. Second, the data become available for
many other applications within operational oceanography, e.g. for flood warning or
for assimilation of sea level data into ocean circulation models. The data are also then
useful for tsunami warning systems in certain areas. The GLOSS program has defined
the UHSLC as the “GLOSS Real-Time Center” in addition to its existing role as the
“Fast Center,” responsible for producing hourly values for monitoring and models.

3-56 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

If sea level data are used in near-real-time applications, then the operational system
has to be robust enough to not be perturbed when bad data are recorded (e.g. data
spikes). One way to guard against bad data is to have continuous human oversight of
the data stream (such as occurs in the UK Storm Tide Forecasting Service for flood
warning). Real-time quality control (RTQC) software is now being developed by sev-
eral groups; for example, in Europe, the Spanish Ports Authority (Puertos del Estado)
has developed an automatic QC of sea level data for detection of spikes, gaps, etc.
before data is displayed on the public webpage and assimilated into a storm surge
forecasting system. Information about this software and the algorithms for spike
detection can be obtained through GLOSS.

Coastal Tide Gage Processing Requirements

The current specifications for the basin-wide (regional) in situ sea level component
of tsunami warning systems requires data collection and transmission standards that
include “sampling of 1-minute averages and a continuous 15-minute transmission
cycle via the World Meteorological Organization’s (WMO) Global Telecommunica-
tions System (GTS) to the JMA, PTWC, and other appropriate warning centers/watch
providers.” These guidelines were developed in consultation with existing tsunami
warning center scientists and technicians from PTWC and JMA, and with JMA and
EUMETSAT geostationary satellite operators.

IOC has been following these guidelines in establishing or enabling sea level stations
for the IOTWS core stations. However, subsequent Intergovernmnetal Core Group
(ICG) meetings in Europe, and the Caribbean and U.S. IOTWS Program team meet-
ings identified the need for subregional and national data collection and transmission
standards.

The proposed standards from the ICGs require:

Subregional sites within 1 hour travel time of the tsunamigenic zones:
 Sampling of 15-second averages, and a continuous transmission cycle of 5 minutes.
 Immediate transmission via WMO’s GTS to JMA, PTWC, and other appropriate
warning centers. (However, it is noted that the European and Japanese geostation-
ary meteorological satellites cannot be used since they are limited to a 15-minute
transmission cycle.)

National sites within 100 km of tsunamigenic areas:

 Sampling of 15-second averages, and a continuous or 1-minute transmission cycle
for sites within 100 km of the tsunamigenic zones.
 Immediate transmission via WMO’s GTS to JMA, PTWC, and other appropriate
warning centers and regional watch providers.
 Standards should include data reports that cover a greater time period than the
transmission frequency, i.e., redundant data transmission.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-57

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Coastal Tide Gage Processing Software

The software package TideTool provides end users with the ability to decode, dis-
play, and manipulate sea level data broadcast over the WMO’s GTS. The software uti-
lizes the Tcl/Tk software package, specifically the BLT extension. Tcl/Tk is an open
source, platform-independent software package offering a
powerful shell programming language and graphical toolkit.

The software application was developed by the PTWC to

Tip
Many tsunami
provide an operational tool for real-time continuous tsunami
warning centers use
monitoring in the Indian Ocean. Its primary users would be the software package
national meteorological and hydrological services (NMHS), “TideTool” to process
or other agencies with a downlink from the GTS or to a data coastal tide gage data.
file containing those data formatted in a similar manner. It
has been tested under Linux, Windows 2000, and Windows
XP environments in Indonesia and Malaysia. A manual providing information on its
installation and use is available.

Important Points to Remember about Coastal Tide Gage Networks

and Processing Requirements
 Various international sea level gage networks already exist and are available to
NTWCs and RTWPs through the GTS.
 Sea level data are needed by tsunami warning centers in real time, with minimal
delays.
 Free and open data exchange is critical.
 NTWCs may need more dense sea-level gage networks and more frequent data
transmissions than RTWPs.
 Computer software called TideTool provides the ability to decode, display, and
manipulate sea-level data broadcast over GTS.
 Multi-use gages are much more sustainable considering the infrequent occurrence
of tsunamis in any one region.

Using Tsunameter Buoys to Detect a Tsunami Wave Signal

NOAA has placed Deep-ocean Assessment and Reporting of Tsunami (DART™) buoys
at sites in the Pacific and Atlantic Oceans that have a history of generating destruc-
tive tsunamis that impact coastlines of the United States. The purpose of the DART
buoy network is to ensure early detection of tsunamis, regardless of how the tsu-
nami was generated (Bernard 2005), and to acquire data critical for real-time tsunami
forecasting. NOAA has completed installation of 35 DARTs and plans to have com-
pleted a full network of 39 stations by April 2008. The current operational array is
shown in Figure 3-21. Originally developed by NOAA’s Pacific Marine Environmental
Laboratory (PMEL) and operated by NOAA’s National Data Buoy Center (NDBC), as
part of the U.S. National Tsunami Hazard Mitigation Program, the DART Project is an

3-58 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Tip
effort to maintain and improve the capability for the
early detection and real-time reporting of tsunamis in
the open ocean.
DARTs are standardized:
Coastal sea level tide gages are invaluable for refining 1. All utilize the same type of
tsunami warnings, but due to nearshore bathymetry, pressure transducer, and
sheltering, and other localized conditions, they do
2. All transmit data using the
not necessarily always provide a good estimate of the
same FORMAT
characteristics of a tsunami. Also, the first tide gages
to receive the brunt of a tsunami wave do so without
advance verification that a tsunami is under way. With these shortcomings in mind,
the United States and several other countries have begun deployment of tsunameter
buoys in the Pacific, Indian, and Atlantic Oceans and other tsunami-prone basins
(Figure 3-21), creating an interoperable, standardized network. Sources of potentially
damaging tsunamis are widespread, as are the coastal communities they threaten.
With costs and budgets limiting the number of DART systems available to deploy and
maintain, it is vital that they be positioned to provide high-quality observations at the
earliest possible time. Site selection of the DART buoys must address the following:
 Optimization of site locations based on scientific considerations
 Logistical deployment needs and maintenance considerations
 Modeling and detection requirements imposed by potential sources of tsunamis
 Identification of at-risk coastal communities.

Figure 3-21. Current Operational Array of Tsunameter

Buoys

When a tsunami event occurs, the first information available about the source of
the tsunami is based only on the available seismic information for the earthquake
event. As the tsunami wave propagates across the ocean and successively reaches
the DART systems, these systems provide standardized reports of sea level informa-
tion measurements back to the tsunami warning centers, where the information is

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-59

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

processed and used in models to produce a new and more refined estimate of the
tsunami effects. The result is an increasingly accurate forecast of the tsunami that
can be used to issue watches, warnings, or evacuations, or prevent false alarms.
DARTs also detect tsunamis that are generated by landslides, both above and below
water, which may not be detected by the seismic network. Hence, the DART array
fills in for deficiencies in the seismic array for tsunami warnings.

DART II System Overview

DART II, the second-generation DART system, consists of an anchored seafloor
bottom-pressure recorder (BPR) and a companion moored surface buoy for real-time
communications (Gonzalez et al., 1998). The BPR monitors water pressure with a
resolution of approximately 1 mm of sea water, with 15-second averaged samples. An
acoustic link transmits data from the BPR on the seafloor to the surface buoy. The
moored system is shown Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22. Components of DART System

3-60 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

The BPR collects temperature and pressure at 15-second intervals. The pressure
values are corrected for temperature effects and the pressure converted to an esti-
mated sea-surface height (height of the ocean surface above the seafloor) by using a
constant 670 millimeters per square inch
absolute (mm/psia).
Iridium uses a Motorola 9522 L-band
The DART II system has two data report- trans-ceiver from NAL Research at
2400 baud.
ing modes, standard and event. The system
operates routinely in standard mode, in GPS is a Leadtek model 9546 receiver
which four spot values (of the 15-second Buoy:
data) at 15-minute intervals of the esti- • Fiberglass over foam.
mated sea surface height are reported at • Computer is 32-bit, 3.3 volt Motorola
scheduled transmission times. When the 68332
internal detection software (Mofjeld) identi- • System electronics use 2560 watt-
fies an event, the system ceases standard- hour D-cell battery pack.
mode reporting and begins event-mode
Mooring is 19 mm 8-strandplaited
transmissions. In event mode, 15-second nylon line with rated breaking strength
values are transmitted during the initial of 7100 kg.
few minutes, followed by 1-minute aver- Acoustic modems on tsunameter
ages. Event mode messages also contain and buoy:
the time of the initial occurrence of the • Benthos ATM-880 Telesonar with
event. The system returns to standard AT‑421LF directional transducer.
transmission after 4 hours of 1-minute real- • Powered by 1800 watt-hour
time transmissions if no further events are batteries.
detected. For additional information on the
Tsunameter:
message content, see the Data Formats sec- • Pressure sensor is a 0-10000
tion in Chapter 4. psi model 410K Digiquartz
Paroscientific unit.
A significant capability of DART II is the • Tilt sensor is Geometrics 900-45 to
two-way communications between the determine orientation.
BPR and the tsunami warning centers and • Uses Alkaline D-cell battery with
NDBC using the Iridium commercial satel- 1560 watt-hour capacity.
lite communications system (Meinig et al., • Uses same computer as buoy.
2005). The two-way communications allow
centers to set stations in event mode in
anticipation of possible tsunamis or retrieve the high-resolution (15-second intervals)
data in 1-hour blocks for detailed analysis. DART II systems transmit standard mode
data, containing 24 estimated sea-level height observations at 15-minute intervals,
once every 6 hours. The two-way communications allow for real-time troubleshooting
and diagnostics of the systems. NDBC receives the data from the DART II systems,
formats the data into messages under the SXXX46 KWBC header, and then delivers
them to the National Weather Service (NWS) Telecommunications Gateway, which
then distributes the data in real time via NWS communications and nationally and
internationally via the GTS.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-61

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

DART II Surface Buoy

The surface mooring is 2.5 m in diameter and made of fiberglass over foam disk
buoy, with a gross displacement of 4000 kg. The mooring line is a 19-mm 8-strand
plaited nylon line with a rated breaking strength of 7,100 kg and is deployed with a
scope of 0.985. This maintains a tight watch circle to keep the buoy positioned within
the narrow cone of the acoustic transmission. Two downward looking transducers are
mounted on the buoy bridle at a depth of 1.5 m below the sea surface. A multilayered
baffle system of steel, lead, and syntactic foam shields the transducers and cushions
them with rubber pads for a soft mount. Deployed U.S. DART and Chilean Hydro-
graphic and Oceanographic Service of the Chilean Navy (SHOA) buoys are shown in
Figures 3-23a and 3-23b.

The DART II surface buoy relays information and commands from the tsunameter
and the satellite network. The buoy contains two identical electronic systems to pro-
vide redundancy in case one of the units fails. The standard-mode transmissions are
handled by both electronic systems on a preset schedule. The event-mode transmis-
sions, due to their importance and urgency, are immediately transmitted by both sys-
tems simultaneously.

Figure 3-23a. U.S. DART II Buoy Figure 3-23b. Chilean SHOA Buoy

Surface Buoy Modem and Acoustic Transducer

The Benthos Telesonar acoustic modems and transducers are the same as used in the
tsunameter. To improve the reliability of data transmission, two identical systems are
used on the buoy.

3-62 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Surface Buoy Computer

The computer is the same type used in the tsunameter. It processes messages from
both the satellite and the tsunameter.

Surface Buoy Iridium Transceiver

A Motorola 9522 L-Band Iridium transceiver from NAL Research provides data con-
nectivity via the Iridium Satellite Network. The buoy computer connects to the trans-
ceiver using an RS232 serial port. Data is transferred at 2400 baud, similarly to the
familiar dialup modem connections. A typical standard-mode report takes approxi-
mately 30 seconds, including the time it takes to complete the connection, transmit
the data, and disconnect.

Surface Buoy GPS

A Leadtek model 9546 GPS receiver is used to maintain the buoy’s computer clock’s
accuracy to within ~1 second of Greenwich Mean Time. Additionally, a GPS position
is reported once per day to monitor buoy position.

Surface Buoy Batteries

The buoy’s fiberglass well houses the system electronics and power supply, which is
made up of packs of D-cell alkaline batteries. The computer and Iridium transceiver
are powered by 2,560 watt-hour batteries; the acoustic modem is powered by
1,800 watt-hour batteries. These batteries will power the buoy for at least 2 years.
The buoy is designed to mitigate the potentially dangerous buildup of hydrogen gas
that is naturally vented from alkaline cells. Design features include: 1) hydrogen
getters (such as those from HydroCap Corp); 2) pressure relief valves; and 3) spark-
free components such as fiberglass or plastic.

DART II Tsunameter
The tsunameter includes a computer that reads pressure readings, runs a tsunami
detection algorithm, and sends and receives commands and data to and from the
buoy via an acoustic modem.

Pressure Sensor
The DART II pressure sensor is a 0- to 10,000-psi model 410K Digiquartz® unit man-
ufactured by Paroscientific, Inc. The transducers use a very thin quartz crystal beam,
electrically induced to vibrate at its lowest resonant mode. The oscillator is attached
to a Bourdon tube that is open on one end to the ocean environment, as shown in
Figure 3-24. The pressure sensor outputs two frequency-modulated square waves,
proportional to the ambient pressure and temperature. The temperature data is used
to compensate for the thermal effects on the pressure-sensing element. This pressure
transducer is used in all DART II stations and also by the Japanese in their cabled
observatories.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-63

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

As a tsunami wave crest passes over the instrument, the increased pressure causes the
Bourdon tube to uncurl, stretching the quartz crystal and increasing the vibrational
frequency. Conversely, the passage of a tsunami trough reduces the pressure, allow-
ing the Bourdon tube to curl more tightly, thereby compressing the quartz crystal and
lowering the vibrational frequency. These quartz-crystal vibrational frequency changes
can be measured very precisely by the electronics system of the tsunami gage, and
the frequency changes are then converted into the corresponding changes in tsunami
height. For periods greater than a minute or so, and for deployments at depths of
5000 m, the transducer is sensitive to changes in wave height of less than a millimeter.

Figure 3-24. Bottom Components of DART II System

Reciprocal Counter
The high-resolution precision reciprocal counting circuit continuously measures the
pressure and temperature signals simultaneously, integrating them over the entire
sampling window, nominally set to 15 seconds. There is no dead period between the
sampling windows. The circuit has a sub-millimeter pressure and sub-millidegree
temperature least-count resolution. The reference frequency for the reciprocal counter
is derived from a low-power, very stable, 2.097152-megaHertz (MHz), temperature-
compensated crystal oscillator. A real-time calendar-clock in the computer also uses
this reference for a time base. At the end of each sampling window, the computer
reads the pressure and temperature data and stores the data in a flash memory card.
A 15-second sampling period generates about 18 megabytes of data per year.

Computer
The embedded computer system in both the buoy and the tsunameter was designed
around the 32-bit, 3.3-volt Motorola 68332 microcontroller, and was programmed
in C. It was built to be energy efficient for long-term battery-powered deployment.
The computer has 4 megabytes of flash memory, a 12-bit A/D converter with 8 input
channels, two RS232 channels, a hardware watchdog timer, a real-time clock, and
512 bytes of RAM. The embedded computer implements and regulates the primary
functions of the surface and seafloor units: transmitting data communications, run-
ning the tsunami detection algorithm, storing and retrieving water column heights,
generating checksums, and conducting automatic mode switching.

3-64 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Acoustic Modem and Transducer

A Benthos11 ATM-880 Telesonar acoustic modem with an AT-421LF directional trans-
ducer has a 40° conical beam that is used to transmit data between the tsunameter
and the surface buoy. Modems transmit digital data via multiple frequency shift keying
(MFSK) modulated sound signals with options for redundancy and convolutional
coding. Transducers are baffled to minimize ambient noise from entering the receiver.

Tilt Sensor
Each tsunameter has a Geometrics 900-45 tilt sensor mounted in the base of one of
the housings. This is used to determine the orientation of the acoustic transducer
when the system has settled on the seafloor. If the tilt is greater than 10 degrees, the
tsunameter can be recovered and redeployed. The watch circle of the surface buoy
could carry it out of the acoustic projection cone from the tsunameter if the angle
from the vertical is too great.

Batteries
The tsunameter computer and pressure measurement system uses an alkaline D-cell
battery pack with a capacity of 1560 watt-hours. The acoustic modem in the tsuna-
meter is powered by similar battery packs that can deliver over 2,000 watt-hours of
energy. These batteries are designed to last for 4 years on the seafloor; however, this
is based on assumptions about the number of events that may occur and the volume
of data request from the shore. Battery monitoring is required to maximize the life of
the system.

Tsunami Detection Algorithm

Each DART II tsunameter is designed to detect and report tsunamis autonomously.
The Tsunami Detection Algorithm works by first estimating the amplitudes of the
pressure fluctuations within the tsunami frequency band, and then testing these
amplitudes against a threshold value. The amplitudes are computed by subtracting
predicted pressures from the observations, in which the predictions closely match the
tides and lower frequency fluctuations. If the amplitudes exceed the threshold, the
tsunameter goes into event mode to provide detailed information about the tsunami.

Data Communications
This subsection describes all the messages that are sent and received to and from the
DART II systems. Telemetry describes how the data is physically transported over the
distance between the hardware components. Content refers to the information con-
tained in the messages. Format describes how the message is formatted.

Workstation – to – Buoy
A DART II innovation is the ability to send messages from a workstation on land to
the buoy and the tsunameter. This bi-directional communication enables commands
to be sent to the DART II system.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-65

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Telemetry
The warning center issues commands that are queued in a server until the DART II
buoy is in listen mode.

Content
Once the connection is established, the following commands can be sent:
 Turn on deployment mode for 30 minutes in the tsunameter
 Download 1 hour of high-frequency data (15-second data)
 Trip tsunameter into event mode
 Turn acoustic modem on or off
 Turn on event mode
 Turn off event mode
 Reboot tsunameter computer
 Change tsunami detection threshold (30- to 90-mm range)
 Reboot buoy computer
 Get engineering data from tsunameter

Tsunameter – to – Buoy
Telemetry
The Benthos Telesonar acoustic modems use the water itself as the medium for the
transmission of acoustic signals. The acoustic modems on the DART II systems are
configured to operate in the 9-to 14-kHz frequency band at 600 baud, using MFSK
and error-correcting coding. The communication uses a modified x-modem protocol.
Entire packets of data with many blocks are sent without requesting an acknowledge-
ment from the receiver after each block. Missing or erroneous blocks are requested
to be resent again as individual blocks. If the system is unable to connect, a maxi-
mum of two retries are attempted. Most importantly, the modified x-modem protocol
greatly reduces power consumption, and efficiently supports high data throughput
and integrity.

Content
Standard Mode
Normally, the tsunameter is in its low-power standard mode, and transmissions are
made only once every 6 hours. Standard-mode messages contain the following data:
 Message ID, a sequential number
 Message status: C = corrupted, I = intact
 Date= month day year
 Time= hour minute second

3-66 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

 Main battery voltage, or error code

 Acoustic modem digital signal processor battery voltage
 Acoustic modem battery voltage
 Four values for water column height in mm, corresponding to 15-minute intervals
 Number of tries to deliver tsunameter data
 Checksum delimiter
 Checksum

Event Mode
When the tsunameter first detects an event and enters event mode, it immediately
transmits an alert to the buoy, which causes it to turn on the Iridium transceivers for
immediate transmission of data to the warning centers. The first event mode message
contains the following data:
 The exact time that the event was detected
 A message ID
 The average water column height that triggered the event mode, along with three
height deviations.
 Check sums and other data verification values that insure the integrity of the data
transmission.

Following the initial message, the tsunameter sends messages on a predetermined

schedule. The initial message contains 15-second height values. Ensuing messages
are similar, but include 15 1-minute average height values, where the 1-minute values
consist of the average of four 15-second height values. Once in event mode, the stan-
dard mode stops transmitting every 6 hours, and is replaced with an extended-report-
ing mode for additional data redundancy. This mode transmits messages that consist
of 120 1-minute average values, which are transmitted every hour. After the Tsu-
nami Detection Algorithm is in non-triggered status, standard mode is resumed, and
extended reporting mode is stopped.

Format
The format of the messages is a space-delimited text string of values, followed by an
asterisk, followed by a checksum. The deviation values are coded as four hexadeci-
mal digits.

Buoy – to – Satellite
Telemetry
Each DART II buoy sends its data to the Iridium Satellite Network using an Iridium
transceiver. The radio frequency transmission is in the 1565 to 1626.5 MHz range, and

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-67

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

the data transmission rate is at 2.4 kilobits per second. The satellite communication
also uses a modified x-modem protocol.

Content
Event Mode
In event mode, both communication systems relay the data from the tsunameter.

Standard Mode
In standard mode, that is, no tsunami detected, the surface buoy relays the data it
receives from the tsunameter using both systems. These timed transmissions occur
once every 6 hours. Receiving these timed water-column height data ensures that
each DART II system is functioning properly. If data are not received from the tsu-
nameter, the buoy sends GPS coordinates instead of water column height data. The
reported position is checked to ensure that the buoy has not parted from its anchor.

Deployment Mode
The tsunameter will enter into deployment mode prior to deployment. This mode
enables the user to verify that the system is working on the seafloor before leav-
ing the site. Deployment mode will transmit data to the buoy every other minute
for 4 hours. Once the buoy has received a few messages, it will transmit these mes-
sages through the Iridium system. The data will show the tilt of the tsunameter,
a quality parameter of the acoustic modem channel, and four 15-second pressure
measurements.

Listen Mode
The buoy listens for an Iridium call with a 20 percent duty cycle. The redundant
systems will turn on their respective Iridium transceivers at alternate times for
3 minutes out of 15 minutes. This yields a maximum inaccessibility of only 6 minutes.
This scheme is employed to control the buoy power requirements by decreasing the
standby power draw of the Iridium transceivers.

Format
Data sent from the buoys to the satellite are formatted as text messages sent over a
voice-grade telephone connection, just like a normal dialup link.

Satellite to Ground Stations

Telemetry
DART II makes use of the Iridium Satellite Network. Data from each DART II system
is downloaded and stored on a server via the Iridium Gateway and Router-based
Unrestricted Digital Interworking Connectivity Solution (RUDICS) server. The warn-
ing centers monitor this data stream in real time and are responsible for issuing
warnings. In addition, the data is posted to a web server, and can be viewed by
anyone with a browser.

3-68 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Content
Normally, sea level or tide data are relayed from the satellite to ground stations,
ensuring that the systems are working. Immediately after an event is detected, trans-
missions increase in frequency, and the data include both averages and deviations
along with time stamps. Commands can be sent from workstations on the ground to
both the buoys and the tsunameter’s computer.

Format
No messages are stored in the satellite network; rather, messages are simply relayed
from the buoy to servers or workstations. The format of the messages is text using
transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP).

Site Characteristics
To reliably send and receive the acoustic packets to and from the tsunameter, which
might be submerged between 1,000 and 6,000 meters below the buoy, the tsuname-
ter must be located on a relatively flat portion of the ocean floor. The buoy must be
moored such that it stays within a 40-degree cone whose vertex is at the tsunameter,
and whose base encompasses the buoy. Outside of this cone, the signal-to-noise ratio
deteriorates rapidly, and data integrity will be compromised. The mooring needs to
be strong enough to withstand harsh ocean conditions of wind, waves, currents, fish
bites, and vandalism.

DART II Performance Characteristic/Specification Summary

Mandatory Characteristic Specification
Measurement sensitivity Less than 1 millimeter in 6000 meters; 2 * 10-7
Sampling interval, internal record 15 seconds
Sampling interval, event reports 15 and 60 seconds
Sampling interval, tidal reports 15 minutes
Two-way end-to-end communications On demand, tsunami warning center trigger
Tsunami data report trigger Automatically by tsunami detection algorithm
Data flow, BPR to warning center Less than 3 minutes after triggered event

Desired Characteristic Specification

Reliability and data return ratio Greater than 80 percent
Maximum deployment depth 6000 meters
Minimum deployment duration 1 year
Operating Conditions Beaufort 9
Theoretical Battery Life, buoy Greater than 2 years
Theoretical Battery Life, tsunameter Greater than 4 years
Maximum status report interval Less than 6 hours

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 3-69

 Chapter 3: Earth Data Observations

Important Points to Remember about Tsunameter Buoys

 NOAA developed the DART (Deep-ocean Assessment and Reporting of Tsunami)
buoys to improve tsunami warnings via overcoming many of the shortcomings of
tide gage data and seismic data in forecasting tsunami impacts.

 DART II, the second generation DART system, consists of an anchored seafloor
bottom-pressure recorder (BPR) and a companion moored surface buoy for real-
time communications.

 DART II sensors provide standardized reports of sea level information measure-

ments back to the tsunami warning centers, where the information is processed
and used in models to produce revised and more refined estimates of the tsunami,
including what its effects are expected to be.

 Under normal conditions (no tsunami) the BPR sends data hourly comprising four
15-minute values that are single 15-second averages.

 If two 15-second water level values exceed the predicted values, the system will
go into the tsunami response mode. Data will be transmitted for a minimum of
3 hours, giving high-frequency data on short intervals with 100 percent repeated
data for redundancy for the first hour.

 A significant capability of DART II is the two-way communications between the

BPR and the tsunami warning centers and NDBC using the Iridium commercial
satellite communications system.

 The two-way communications allow centers to set stations in event mode in antici-
pation of possible tsunamis or retrieve the high-resolution (15-second intervals)
data in 1-hour blocks for detailed analysis.

3-70 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Chapter 4
Data and Information Collection
The collection of data and information from locally maintained and international earth
data observation networks is a crucial function of National Tsunami Warning Centers
(NTWC) and Regional Tsunami Watch Providers (RTWP). NTWCs and RTWPs have
three basic data and information collection requirements. These requirements are:
 Collect seismic and sea-level observational data
 Receive event impact reports from national, state, and local agencies and the public
 Share data and information with other NTWCs and RTWPs

This chapter describes data and information collection requirements, in particular the
communications systems for collecting seismic and sea level data needed to detect the
occurrence of a tsunami (Figure 4-1).

Local Seismic
Networks

GLOSS Tide Gage

Networks

Local Tide Gage

Networks

Figure 4-1. Components of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Data and Information Collection Requirements

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-1

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

Several telecommunications connections are required to collect data and information

needed to detect a tsunami. Some data, especially seismic and sea level data from
international networks, are available in real time through the internet and satellite
downlinks. Data from locally maintained networks often require alternate communi-
cations paths such as land lines, wireless telephone, or radio. This chapter should be
read by persons who need to understand the types of communications methods nec-
essary to collect and share data and information, and the importance of maintaining
these communications programs and their backups.

How Do Data and Information Collection Fit into an End-to-

End Tsunami Warning System?
Data and information collection systems are part of the hazard detection and fore-
cast component of an end-to-end tsunami warning system. The rapid detection and
characterization of tsunami-generating earthquakes provides the first indication of
a potential tsunami in an end-to-end tsunami warning system. Initial seismic-based
warnings based on data from networks of seismic gages are subsequently refined
by the detection of tsunami-generated changes in sea level measured by tide gages
and buoys. In both cases these data must be received at a center with as little delay
as possible. Critical seismic and sea level data must be received rapidly at tsunami
warning centers to be of any use in the warning process. Thus, data collection com-
munications systems are crucial to the success of the warning system. Use of backup
networks and backup communications paths are needed to ensure a robust program.

What Is in this Chapter?

This chapter contains sections that discuss the following topics:
 Primary data and information collection through the Global Telecommuni-
cations System (GTS): This section describes the World Meteorological Organi-
zation’s (WMO) GTS, the primary earth data collection system, including general
message formats, and the Message Switching System.
 Other data and information collection communications channels: This section
briefly discusses methods other than GTS for retrieving earth observation data,
including internet, telephone dial-up, etc.
 Accessing international seismic networks: This section discusses methods for
accessing the Global Seismic Network and local seismic networks.
 Accessing international tide gage networks: This section discusses communica-
tions requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs to access the Global Sea Level Observ-
ing System, an international sea-level monitoring network.
 Backup communications for data and information collection: This section dis-
cusses the communications connections with other centers, and the importance of
backup communications channels.
 Data collection formats: Tide gage data, Deep Ocean Assessment and Reporting
of Tsunami (DART™) buoy, and seismic data formats are discussed in this section.

4-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

What Are the Most Important Points to Remember about

Data and Information Collection for NTWCs and RTWPs?
 Critical seismic and sea level data must be received rapidly at tsunami warning
centers to be of any use in the warning process.
 Seismic and sea level data from international networks are available in real time
through the internet and satellite downlinks.
 Data from locally maintained networks often require alternate communications
paths such as land lines, wireless telephone, or radio.
 Backup networks and backup communications paths are needed to ensure a
robust program.

Primary Data and Information Collection through the

Global Telecommunications System
The primary data collection pathway for NTWCs and RTWPs is the Global Telecom-
munications System of the World Meteorological Organization. The GTS distributes
a wide range of earth data observations with standardized data formats and content.
Data and information are routed using a message switching system (MSS) consisting
of hardware and software systems. An overview of the GTS is given in Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2. Basic Structure of the GTS

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-3

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

The GTS connects meteorological and other centers throughout the world. Its primary
purpose is to distribute meteorological, hydrological, and other data, products, alerts,
and warnings to the global meteorological community, composed of member nations
of the WMO. The structure of the GTS makes use of terrestrial communications cir-
cuits to disseminate data, products, and bulletins over a tiered network. The three
tiers of the GTS are the World Meteorological Centers (WMC), the Regional Telecom-
munications Hubs (RTH), and the National Meteorological Centers (NMC).

The three WMCs and the RTHs are interconnected through the Main Telecommunica-
tions Network (MTN). The NMCs are connected to the RTHs and other NMCs through
numerous Regional Meteorological Telecommunications Networks (RMTN). The NMCs
are connected to various in-country points through National Meteorological Telecom-
munications Networks (NMTN). In addition to the terrestrial network components,
several satellite systems provide weather data and bulletins in various regions.

Some NMCs collect various observational data within their territory, such as upper
air observations, surface temperature and winds, seismic sensor data, tide gage data,
and ship and aviation reports, and produce various forecast and bulletin products.
These data and messages are collated for distribution to the RTHs and WMCs via the
GTS. Through a distributed set of routing catalogs at each tier (WMCs, RTHs, and the
NMCs) of the GTS, data is routed across the GTS to every center requiring each data
set and message. The formats and routing procedures are formally defined in WMO
Manual 386, Manual on the Global Telecommunication System. There are other NMCs
that receive data from GTS but do not yet contribute locally generated messages into
GTS for distribution. It should be noted that at the present time, while sea level data
is handled acceptably by GTS, the transmission of seismic data is probably beyond its
scope and is better handled by other communications channels.

Data Formats and Contents

WMO Manual 386 defines the meteorological message format for transfer of informa-
tion and data on the GTS. Information traversing the GTS may be in alphanumeric,
binary, or pictorial form. The messages have a predefined structure consisting of a
starting line, an abbreviated heading, the bulletin text, and an end-of-message line.
This structure is illustrated in Figure 4-3, taken from WMO Manual 386.

Figure 4-3. GTS Bulletin Structure

4-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

The starting line, abbreviated heading, and end-of-message line are alphanumeric
using either the International Telegraph Alphabet No. 2 (ITA-2) or the International
Alphabet No. 5 (IA-5). Messages containing information in binary representation are
required to use IA‑5 for these fields.

To the extent that the GTS is retained as the preferred means of transmitting tide
gage data from their source (the gages) to the concerned data centers (notably, Per-
manent Service for Mean Sea Level (PSMSL), University of Hawaii Sea Level Center
(UHSLC), and national sea level data centers), the necessary data format is contained
in the WMO Manual on Codes at [Link]
Operational_Information/[Link]. See Figure 4-10 for an example of a
GTS message.

Message Switching Systems (MSS)

At the heart of the GTS routing mechanism reside hardware and software systems
called the MSS. These systems are developed and deployed by various commercial
firms and governmental agencies worldwide and must comply with the message
structure and routing procedures called out in WMO Manual 386.

An MSS is essentially a store-and-forward data filtering application. A constant stream

of data available on one or more incoming connections is monitored for the message
header information, upon which the MSS makes routing and storage decisions based
on user-configurable criteria. Messages are then typically stored in a database as well
as forwarded to predetermined destinations, which could include, but are not limited
to, local forecasting workstations, local storage devices, other organizations within the
NMC’s territory such as disaster management centers and national dissemination net-
works, and other MSSs on the GTS network. Routing of messages can occur several
ways on a variety of circuit connections such as point-to-point over a local area network
(LAN) or wide area network (WAN), dial-up, fax, email, Very Small Aperture Terminal
(VSAT) satellite ground station, internet and file transfer protocol (FTP) services, etc.

Routing of data between RTHs and NMCs is done in accordance with GTS formatted
routing catalogs accessed by, or resident on, the MSSs at each center. These routing
catalogs consist of American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) files
that can be imported into database applications. Therefore, the structure of the files
is such that each line, or record, contains a discrete routing entry consisting of the
11‑character abbreviated heading, the 4-character identifier of the GTS circuit from
which the bulletin is received, and a series of one or more 4-character identifiers of
the GTS circuit to which the bulletin is to be sent. The WMO stipulates that all centers
make their routing catalogs available on FTP servers and that they be updated, at a
minimum, every 3 months and preferably at least monthly. The prescribed format is a
comma-separated value file, with the first record containing the last date of modifica-
tion in the form YYYYMMDD. The functionality of an MSS varies based on location
(WMC, RTH, or NMC) and in-country capabilities and requirements. Many MSSs are far
more sophisticated and are linked with other software and hardware systems such as
weather display, processing, and forecasting systems and disaster management systems.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-5

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

Important Points to Remember about Data Collection

through the GTS
 GTS can be used to:
 Collect earth data observations.
 Share data and information with other NTWCs and RTWPs.
 GTS is a three-tiered system, made up of World Meteorological Centers, Regional
Telecommunications Hubs, and National Meteorological Centers.
 GTS uses message switching systems (MSS) to address, prioritize, and route
products.
 Product formats required by GTS are specified in WMO Handbook 386.
 Sea level data can be monitored through the GTS, but primary access to seismic
data should be via other means, notably the internet and dedicated circuits.

Other Data and Information Collection Communications

Channels
Several other communications options, other than GTS, are available to collect data
and information necessary for tsunami detection by NTWCs and RTWPs. These
options include the internet, dedicated WANs, telephone and broadband links, and

T
satellite systems. International seismic network and sea
level network data can be obtained through the internet
and GTS, respectively. In many cases, a tsunami warning
ip
center must collect national tide gage, buoy, and seismic Automate data collection,
data by telephone land lines or wireless technologies and make interrogation
(such as cellular phone and radio links). Whenever pos- parameters easily
modifiable during events.
sible, interrogation methods should be automated and
capable of being easily modified during events.

Seismic Data Communications—

Accessing International Seismic Networks
As noted in Chapter 3, in the section on seismic networks, NTWCs and RTWPs may
access international seismic networks to receive crucial seismic data. This section
describes methods for gaining access to the Incorporated Research Institutions for
Seismology (IRIS) Global Seismic Network (GSN).

Incorporated Research Institutions for Seismology’s Global Seismic

Network
The IRIS GSN is made up of nearly 130 stations with affiliations to the U.S. Geo-
logical Survey (USGS), University of California San Diego’s (UCSD) International
Deployment of Accelerometers (IDA), GeoForshungsZentrums Potsdam (GEOFON),
China Earthquake Administration (NCDSN), Institut de Physique du Globe de Paris

4-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

(GEOSCOPE), Germany’s Federal Institute for Geosciences and Natural Resources

(BGR), U.S. National Seismographic Network (USNSN), Berkeley Digital Seismic Net-
work (BDSN), Air Force Technical Applications Center (AFTAC), and several other
national and international networks.

The GSN was conceived as a network of digital seismographs arrayed uniformly

around the globe, a configuration that yields a station spacing of about 18 arc degrees,
or about 2000 km. Two decades after the birth of IRIS, there are about 126 stations
installed and 12 more planned. These stations are distributed over all continental land-
masses, several key island sites, and an ocean bottom location between Hawaii and
the west coast of the United States. Of the installed stations, the USGS manages 73,
and U.S. universities and affiliated institutions operate 53. When the GSN stations are
combined with stations from the Federation of Digital Seismograph Networks (FDSN)
and the International Monitoring System (IMS) of the Preparatory Commission for the
Comprehensive Nuclear-Test-Ban Treaty Organization, the number of land-based sta-
tions exceeds that called for in the original GSN plan. Although the exact number of
stations and their locations will continue to be subject to change due to the installa-
tion of a few additional stations and/or the possible closing of some stations, future
perturbations to the existing system are expected to be small.

The IRIS GSN stations continuously record seismic data from very broadband
seismometers at 20 samples per second (sps), and provide for high-frequency (40 sps)
and strong-motion (1 and 100 sps) sensors where scientifically warranted. It is also
the goal of the GSN to provide for real-time access to its data via internet or satellite.
Most of the IRIS GSN stations meet this goal. Figure 4-4 shows the distribution of
stations in the GSN network.

Figure 4-4. Global Distribution of Seismic Networks

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-7

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

Sensors Used in the IRIS GSN

The network uses a suite of sensors to capture the full range of geophysical informa-
tion in the environment surrounding an IRIS GSN site. The sensors may be grouped
into several broad categories:
 Principal broadband seismometer. At each IRIS International Deployment of
Accelerometers (IDA) station, one of two seismometers (either the STS-1 very
broadband seismometer manufactured by G. Streckeisen AG or a triaxial KS54000-
IRIS manufactured by Geotech Instruments, LLC) is employed to accurately record
very-long-period to mid-range seismic data.
 Auxiliary seismometer. Because the STS-1 and KS54000-I sensors do not record
the higher frequency portion of the seismic spectrum with the sensitivity desired
by the IRIS community, an auxiliary sensor is installed at many sites. The auxiliary
sensor is either an STS-2, also made by G. Streckeisen AG, a CMG-3T by Guralp
Systems Ltd., or a GS-13 also by Geotech Instruments, LLC.
 Strong motion accelerometer. The above seismometers will behave in a nonlin-
ear fashion when subjected to high accelerations. In order to record acceleration
up to 2g with fidelity, a strong motion instrument is installed at most sites. The
instrument in use at IRIS/IDA stations is the FBA-23, made by Kinemetrics Inc.
 Other instruments. Because of the effect of air pressure on long-period seismic
recordings and because geophysical phenomena such as volcanic eruptions gener-
ate pressure waves that are of interest to seismologists, it was decided to install
microbarographs at GSN stations. The model used at IRIS/IDA stations is the
6016‑B made by Paroscientific, Inc.

GSN Communications
Stations of the IRIS Global Seismographic Network are configured as nodes on the
internet to facilitate access to the internet and its associated long-haul telecommuni-
cations infrastructure. By developing data acquisition and transmission around the
internet’s Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) suite, the task of
data collection from remote locations is reduced to one of bringing the internet to the
station, a problem for which a multitude of off-the-shelf solutions exist.

Nodes at GSN stations shown in Figure 4-5 are connected to the internet over a
variety of circuits including:
 LAN already on the internet
 Dedicated (leased) telecommunications circuit to an internet “point-of-presence”
 Dial-up telecommunications circuit to an internet “point-of-presence”
 Satellite circuit for those stations unreachable by existing telecommunications
circuits

4-8 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

Figure 4-5. Communications Methods Used for GSN Sites

Data acquired via telemetry may be used for such diverse purposes as:
 Tsunami warning: Prompt transmission of the seismic data permits experts to
locate earthquakes quickly, assess the likelihood they have generated a tsunami,
and predict when the destructive wave will arrive. Such predictions have already
saved numerous lives.
 Emergency response: Prompt and accurate location of earthquakes allows emer-
gency personnel to better plan their response to disasters that occur in remote
regions of the world.
 Monitoring underground explosions: Seismic methods are used increasingly to
monitor adherence to nuclear test ban treaties. When a nuclear device is exploded
underground, the resulting shock wave can be detected by seismic instruments
over great distances.

In an effort to avoid huge losses in data resulting from an outage in a single network,
centers should strive to receive seismic data from several different vendors. For exam-
ple, the Pacific Tsunami Warning Center’s (PTWC) suppliers for teleseismic waveform
data are the National Earthquake Information Center (NEIC),Albuquerque Seismic

T
Laboratory, West Coast/Alaska Tsunami Warning Center, IRIS/
IDA, USGS Menlo Park, Cal. Tech, the University of Washington,
and the University of Puerto Rico, Mayaguez. ip
Critical data should be
Teleseismic waveform data flows to PTWC via two basic routes. collected from multiple
One route is over the dedicated NEIC WAN, and the other is networks via multiple
via the World Wide Web (WWW). In terms of programming, communications methods.
these differing routes can be treated the same; they have no

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-9

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

differences as far as TCP/IP is concerned. Dedicated lines have a guaranteed band-

width and are separate from the WWW. Data flowing through dedicated lines should
make fewer hops than data flowing over the WWW, resulting in less latency. Further-
more, data flowing along dedicated paths are not as susceptible to WWW outages.

Sea Level Data—Accessing International Tide Gage Networks

As noted in Chapter 3, in the section on coastal tide gage networks, numerous tide
gage networks exist around the world. Many of these networks are coordinated by
the Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission (IOC) of the United Nations Edu-
cation, Scientific, and Cultural Organization (UNESCO).

Global Sea Level Observing System

The most extensive and notable tide gage network is the Global Sea Level Observ-
ing System (GLOSS), conducted under the auspices of the Joint Technical Commission
for Oceanography and Marine Meteorology (JCOMM) of the World Meteorological
Organization (WMO) and the IOC. The main component of GLOSS is the Global Core
Network (GCN) of over 290 sea level stations around the world for long-term climate
change and oceanographic sea-level monitoring. The present definition of the GCN
(the definition is modified every few years), called GLOSS02, is shown in Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6. GLOSS Core Network Defined by GLOSS02

Permanent Service for Mean Sea Level

GLOSS data and data from numerous other networks are archived by the Perma-
nent Service for Mean Sea Level (PSMSL). Since 1933, the PSMSL has been respon-
sible for the collection, publication, analysis and interpretation of sea level data
from the global network of tide gauges. It is based in Liverpool at the Proudman

4-10 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

Oceanographic Laboratory (POL), which is a component of the UK Natural Environ-

ment Research Council (NERC). The PSMSL is a member of the Federation of Astro-
nomical and Geophysical Data Analysis Services established by the International
Council for Science (ICSU). It is supported by the Federation, the IOC, and NERC.
Figure 4-7 (a) and (b) shows the types of GLOSS stations in the PSMSL database,
along with the Indian Ocean sea level network.
a.

b.

Figure 4-7a. GLOSS Station Status Within the PSMSL Archives as of October 2006
Figure 4-7b. GLOSS in the Indian Ocean Region as of October 2006

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-11

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

Communications
Sea level data acquired by a tide gage may be required in “real time,” “near real time,”
or in “delayed mode,” depending on the application. For example, a storm surge or
tsunami warning system requires the data to be transmitted to the competent authori-
ties in a very short time. On the other hand, for some scientific research, it is often
only necessary to recover the data annually, in which case it can be stored locally and
recovered during a site visit, either by downloading the data to a personal computer
or by extracting and replacing a memory card. In any case, it is expedient to adopt
such a local procedure, even if a communication link is in operation, to prevent loss
of valuable data.

The Global Telecommunications System

As noted in the previous section, GTS is widely used by all the meteorological orga-
nizations for real-time transmission and interchange of environmental data (see
[Link]/web/www/TEM/[Link]; and also [Link]/web/www/ois/
Operational_Information/WMO386/[Link], which is the GTS Manual).
Given the development by the IOC of an Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning and Miti-
gation System, GTS is being used more and more by the sea level community. GTS
is the future for the GLOSS network, and in particular for the GLOSS Fast Data
Center (GFDC).

The Indian Ocean Intergovernmental Coordination Group and other groups have
adopted standards for core sea level stations for tsunami detection requiring data
transmission within 15 minutes of being recorded at a tide gage (IOC Technical Series
71). A 1-minute sample, 5-minute cycle may be adapted for selected sites close to tsu-
namigenic source areas. The data would be composed of 1-minute samples to achieve
the required resolution and would need to be made available on the GTS. This is in
fact the actual recommendation for sea-level data transmitted for tsunami warning
systems: making use of the GTS, which works well if geostationary meteorological
satellites are used for data transmission. If this is not the case, arrangements with the
national meteorological organizations may be needed for including and downloading
sea level data from the GTS; automatic transmission by email or FTP will probably be
required from the national sea level agency to the meteorological institute, GFDC, or
Tsunami Alert System, for including the data in GTS.

Other Satellite Communications for Data Collection

The mission of meteorological satellites is generally twofold: collection of observa-
tional data such as infrared and visible imagery, and dissemination of this data as
well as other products that are uplinked from the controlling meteorological service.
Additionally, some of these satellites receive data from various Data Collection Plat-
forms (DCP), such as tsunami buoys and tide gages. Often gage interrogation fre-
quency can be increased, and time between transmissions shortened when tsunami
warning center specified criteria are reached or exceeded.

4-12 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

There are several satellite systems that can be useful in supplementing GTS connec-
tivity. These include:
 International Satellite Communications System (ISCS)
 Emergency Manager’s Weather Information Network (EMWIN)
 EUMETCast, the UK Met Office’s Satellite Distribution (SADIS)
 India’s Satellite (INSAT) Distribution System
 Satellite-based data distribution systems like RETIM-Africa
 Radio and Internet for the Communication of Hydro-Meteorological and Climate-
Related Information (RANET)
 Global Marine Distress and Safety System (GMDSS)

The above provide options for alternate and backup communications to ensure
receipt of crucial data. The listed satellite systems are also capable of delivering warn-
ing and other products. They are discussed in detail in Chapter 8, in the section on
dissemination. Overall there are now upward of 30 orbiting satellite systems in opera-
tion dedicated to data transmission, some on a global basis. Mobile satellite systems
may be classified according to orbit altitude as follows:
GEO – geostationary earth orbit, approximate altitude: 35,000 km
MEO – mid-altitude earth orbit, approximate altitude: 10,000 km
LEO – low earth orbit, approximate altitude: <1,000 km

In all cases, when a tsunami warning center collects local seismic or sea level data via
satellite, telephone services, or wireless links, the data should be properly coded and
posted to the appropriate international databases for use by all NTWCs and RTWPs.
A local gage reading may help the tsunami warning center determine the magnitude
of a tsunami in its area of responsibility (AOR). The same data may assist a neighbor-
ing tsunami warning center in saving lives in its AOR.

Selecting a Communications System

The selection of a communication system for real time (RT) or near-real-time (NRT)
data transmission is always a compromise among a number of constraints. The princi-
pal factors guiding a decision in the adoption of a system are:
 Data rate, data-rate profile in different operational modes (if more than one)
 Power availability (power from mains or autonomous/self-powered)
 Guarantee of data transmission (private network or shared data line)
 Location and availability of telecommunication infrastructure (satellites in
field of view)
 Land or marine application (fixed or moving)
 Availability of funding.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-13

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

Two-way communications with a tide gage can be

advantageous. It can be used to update software or
calibration values at the station, to interrogate the
Tip
In the event of an earth­quake,
system for faults, to change the sampling rate and to the first losses are often the
carry out many house-keeping functions that would PSTN network, mobile telephone
otherwise wait for a site visit. This allows the system links, and electrical power.
to be flexible and improves overall reliability.

In adopting a communication system for a tide gage installation, one consideration has
to be its reliability under severe environmental conditions. For example, for tsunami
warning, some of the tide gages may have to be positioned in a tectonically active
region to provide an acceptable early warning. In the event of an earthquake, the
first losses are often the PSTN network, mobile telephone links, and electrical power.
Under such circumstances, satellite links may be the only option. Additionally, some
form of uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is necessary. This often takes the form
of a battery back-up system with an adequate reserve capacity of several hours. A
number of manufacturers, including tide gage and data logger manufacturers, produce
relatively inexpensive ready-to-use communications systems suitable for tide gages. For
a list, see the websites given on the PSMSL website: [Link]

The method of communication depends largely on the distance the data have to be
transmitted. For short links (such as harbor operations), a radio link is often conve-
nient. For countrywide links, subscriber trunk dialing or dedicated telephone lines of
the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) are an effective medium. Where fixed
lines are not practical, the growth in the use of mobile phone links using General
Switched Messaging (GSM) technology and General Packet Radio System (GPRS) pro-
tocols has extended the potential for long-distance communication. Both the fixed and
mobile telephone systems give access to the internet through an Internet Service Pro-
vider (ISP), which can greatly enhance the transmission of data. For example, many of
the GPS stations of the global network of the International Global Navigation Satellite
System Service, which has some similarities to the global tide gage network in terms
of number of sites and amount of data to be transmitted, report through the internet.

All the forms of telephony are merging into one, with telephone links provided by a
supplier for which the connection method is transparent to the user. After the tsunami
of December 26, 2004, India implemented a real-time coastal sea level data transmis-
sion by means of GPRS with continuous connection to internet, with much lower costs
than previous experiments based on Short Messaging Service and Data Call Services.

The advantages of broadband technology are:

 Continuous two-way connection allowing high-speed data sampling and near-
real-time data retrieval. Remote gage diagnostics and the ability to reprogram the
system remotely are available.
 Timing drift and operator setup error eliminated by having accurate time available
from Network Time Protocol servers on the internet.

4-14 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

 Data delivery costs are known up-front, because the subscription costs are paid
monthly or yearly.
 Real-time data collection allows malfunctions to be found and fixed, more rapidly.
 Fixed-line broadband systems can also allow backup access through a dial-up
modem.

The disadvantages of broadband technology are:

 A LAN interface is required; this is often difficult to add to existing tide gage sys-
tems. A land line is necessary for nonsatellite broadband systems.
 Serial port is generally not available, so interfacing is more difficult.
 Power requirement for broadband modems is quite high (~1 amp); this can create
problems where main power is not available.

As already noted, for more remote areas, mobile satellite links provide a viable alter-
native. There are now upward of 30 orbiting satellite systems in operation dedicated
to data transmission, some on a global basis.

Real-Time Transmission of Tsunameter Data

The real-time transmission of data from the tsunameter buoy varies depending on the
operating mode of the bottom pressure recorder (BPR) (Figure 3-26). Transmission of
real-time water level heights occurs when the Tsunami Detection Algorithm triggers
a suspected event, when the tsunameter buoy is interrogated by the tsunami warning
centers or the National Data Buoy Center,(NDBC) or at prescheduled intervals. The
BPR transmits the messages to the surface buoy via underwater acoustics systems. The
surface buoy is equipped with duplicate and independent communications systems to
transmit data to the Iridium satellite and then on to the Iridium Gateway in Tempe,
Arizona, where an Iridium Router-based Unrestricted Digital Internetworking Connec-
tivity Solution (RUDICS) routes the data to the NDBC RUDICS Server at Stennis Space
Center, Mississippi. RUDICS then routes the messages to a Data Acquisition Center
server located at the Stennis Space Center, where NDBC attaches NOAA header infor-
mation and message identifiers and sends the data to the National Weather Service’s
Telecommunications Gateway (NWSTG) in Silver Spring, Maryland for internet dis-
tribution via the global telecommunications operation center. The tsunami warning
centers and NDBC pick up the data from the NWSTG broadcast. NDBC decodes and
reformats the data for real-time web display and database storage. If the buoy is
unable to establish the connection to the NDBC RUDICS Server, information does not
move from the buoy’s communication buffer.

A tsunami warning center or NDBC can initiate an interrogative data retrieval mode,
or set the BPR in Event Mode; however, the Iridium receivers on board the surface
buoys have a limited amount of receive time. Upon receipt of the command to retrieve
high-frequency data, the BPR transmits 1 hour of 15-second pressure and temperature
data. The data parameters are in a similar format as that written to the on-board
memory card. NDBC will maintain a catalog of these data for possible archiving.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-15

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

Important Points to Remember about

Data Communications Channels
 Broadband interrogation methodology allows for faster real-time retrieval of
time-critical data. However, broadband modems have a relatively large power
requirement.
 Several satellite systems are available to serve as both primary data collection
channels and as backups for GTS and other interrogation methods.
 Interrogation methods should be automated, and easy to modify. An example is
two communications with local tide-gage networks where sampling rates can be
changed during an event.
 Locally collected data should be properly coded and posted to the appropriate
international databases for use by all NTWCs and RTWPs.

Backup Communications for Data and Information

Collection
NTWCs and RTWPs should employ backup communications for data and information
collection required to detect a tsunami. Two types of backup communications should
be employed by tsunami warning centers: alternative communication paths within a
center and backup communications by another center.

Alternate communication paths for data collection and product dissemination are
needed within an NTWC or RTWP. In the event of the failure of one of a center’s
primary communication links, information can be rerouted through a secondary
connection.

Center functionality backup by another center means that procedures are in place
for an RTWP to assume the functions of one of its NTWCs if that national center has
lost all communications links. Similarly, each RTWP must have agreements in place
for another RTWP to take over in the event of a catastrophic event at the disabled
regional center. Typically, a tsunami warning center should have connections to at
least two other centers, and RTWPs to another regional provider to provide backup
communications.

While commercial satellite systems do not directly support the GTS, it is important to
take into consideration all of these systems since they may offer diverse dissemina-
tion mechanisms of tsunami warning information that may be able to supplement pri-
mary GTS connectivity. In this regard, a suitable commercially provided service could
be used as further backup to GTS circuits.

Many other meteorological satellite systems are operated in polar orbits for observa-
tional data collection, and many perform additional functions of collecting data from
DCPs such as buoys and tide gages. The role of implementing more than one satellite

4-16 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

receiving system should be explored by an NTWC or RTWP to provide maximum

overall system reliability. Although not common, unexpected outages of satellite sys-
tems do occasionally occur and can sometimes result in total loss of a satellite plat-
form. Data reception from more than one satellite system will help ensure very high
reliability in the unlikely, but possible occurrence of loss of one satellite service com-
bined with a loss of terrestrial communications at a tsunami warning center.

Important Points to Remember about

Backup Communications
 A center should have alternate communications paths to collect crucial seismic and
sea-level data, and to disseminate warning and other products.
 To plan for possible total communications outages, each center must make
arrangements for another center to take over. This requires careful planning,
extensive coordination, and attention to numerous small details.

Data Collection Formats

Earth data observations are collected in a number of different data formats. Data for-
mats from seismometers, tide gages, and tsunameters (DART buoys) vary in the data
volume, transmission frequency, and format. NTWCs and RTWPs must be knowledge-
able of and capable of handling these data formats.

Seismic Data
The NEIC component of the Advanced National Seismic System (ANSS) acquires data
from foreign broadband stations in near-real-time. The NEIC automatically acquires
over 2,000 data channels with an aggregate data volume of about 2.5 Gbyte per day.
Of these data, about 860 Mbytes/day are archived (two copies each) onto optical stor-
age (an aggregate of nearly 4 Tbytes to date). At the same time, the NEIC distributes
data to the research community through an Automatic Data Request Manager (Auto-
DRM), autodrm@[Link], and the IRIS Data Management Center (DMC). Real-time
data are provided to ten Regional Seismic Networks including the Pacific and Alaska
tsunami warning centers to augment regional and teleseismic monitoring.

All data, whether through the USGS CrestNet or internet, are transferred between
data centers using the USGS Earthworm software, the de facto standard for seismic
data and hypocenter parameter exchange. Seismic data transfer is quite complicated.
The original data format is dependent on the manufacturer of the field equipment.
Each brand has a different format, and sometimes multiple formats by the same
vendor. The recording network (which is usually the operating network) is respon-
sible for decoding the data. Within the tsunami warning center, data are converted to
the Earthworm format and shared with other centers. Earthworm documentation is
available at [Link]

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-17

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

The primary seismic data archive for the seismic community is through the IRIS
DMC. Information on the data and data formats is available from IRIS at:
[Link] The Standard for Exchange of
Earthquake Data (SEED) manual can be found on the IRIS website at:
[Link]

Tide Gage Data

In general, sea level data are digitized and sampled at the field station. Ideally, the
data transmitted for tsunami monitoring will be 1-minute (or better) averaged data
values that are transmitted at least every 15 minutes. Currently, many stations trans-
mit every 10 to 60 minutes and data averages are at 1- to 4-minute sampling intervals.
Data are transmitted over a number of different satellites to regional telecommu-
nications hubs of the WMO, and onward to customers such as the Pacific Tsunami
Warning Center, the Japan Meteorological Agency, and to any requesting national
hydrological agency, as depicted in Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8. Data Transmission from Field Station to Tsunami Warning Centers
Source. “Display and Decode of Sea Level Data Transmitted over the WMO Global Telecommunications
System. Version 1.1, November 2005” ([Link]

Sea Level Data Reported in WMO Code Form

The two primary WMO formats, Binary Universal Form for the Representation of
meteorological data (BUFR), and Character form for the Representation and
EXchange of data (CREX), offer great advantages in comparison with the traditional
alphanumeric codes. The main features of the table-driven codes are self-description,
flexibility, and expandability, which are fundamental in times of fast scientific

4-18 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

and technical evolution. In addition, BUFR offers condensation (packing). The

alphanumeric code CREX provides simple readability but no packing. BUFR has
been used mainly, so far, for satellite, aircraft, and wind profiler observations, but
also for tropical cyclone information and for archiving of all types of observational
data. CREX is already used among meteorological centers for exchange of ozone data,
radiological data, hydrological data, tide gage data, and soil temperature data. Ideally,
BUFR should always be used to exchange observations internationally. CREX should
be used only if binary transmission is not possible. It is thought that these two codes
can satisfy all WMO needs for observation coding and are recommended for all
present and future WMO applications.

Each station and its data transmission is described by a unique set of parameters,
including Satellite Product Headers, Station Platform, method of transmission and
transmission time, and file formats. Figure 4-9 shows an example of decoding a tide
gage report in CREX format.

GTS coding requirements for

sea level data can be found in
the GTS Manual (WMO Pub-
lication 386) ([Link]
[Link]/web/www/ois/
Operational_Information/
WMO386/[Link]).

Sea Level Data Reported

in Non-WMO Code Form
Sea level data from the GLOSS
tide gage network and some
other organizations use a
non-WMO code form. The
following example is the
report received from the DCP
in Colombo, Sri Lanka, col-
lected via the Geostationary
Meteorological Satellite at the
Japan Meteorological Agency.
The report is the 1-minute
observation transmitted every
15 minutes. The message
received at the Regional Tele-
communications Hub via GTS
for the report at 0430 coordi-
nated universal time UTC on
29 March 2006 is shown in
Figure 4-9. Decoded Example of WMO CREX Format Figure 4-10.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-19

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

Figure 4-10. Example of GLOSS Non-WMO Sea Level Gage Report Code

The first line of the message depicted in figure 4-10 is the abbreviated header (TTAAii
CCCC YYGGgg) of the bulletin for identification and transmission on GTS. The date/
time group YYGGgg given in the abbreviated header is 0430 UTC on the 29th of the
month. The month and year (March 2006) are not reported in the message.

The latest observation time reported in this message is 0431 UTC, i.e. 0430 + 1 min.
Twenty-nine tidal measurements at 1-minute intervals are included in the report,
but 14 of the 29 observations have already been reported in the last bulletin. The
observations are reported in reverse order.

Time Data Value

0431 3763
0430 3761
0429 3761
0428 3759
0427 3758
. .
. .
. .
0417 3743
(15 new observations)

0416 3743
0415 3743
0414 3742
0413 3742
. .
. .
. .
0403 3737
(14 observations reported in previous bulletin and repeated in this bulletin)

4-20 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

Tsunameters (DART buoys)

DART provides internally stored high frequency data, triggered event data, and
lower frequency data for system monitoring. Pacific Marine Environmental Labora-
tory (PMEL) engineers provide system enhancements through continued research and
development efforts.

High frequency data consists of temperature and pressure averaged over 15-second
intervals for the entire bottom package deployment period. Observations are stored
on a flash card in the BPR until the bottom package is retrieved and the data recov-
ered by NDBC. These data are retrospective and in addition to data transmitted in
real time. In addition to internally recorded 15-second data, DART systems report a
combination of 15-second data and 1-minute averages when triggered to do so by the
detection of an event. These data provide the tsunami community with deep ocean
tsunami observations essential for evaluating the potential risk to coastal communi-
ties. In addition, each DART system delivers spot pressure observations at 15-minute
intervals in near-real-time for system monitoring.

Near-real-time bidirectional communication allows access to internally set system

parameters and allows centers to manually trigger event-reporting mode. Addition-
ally, bidirectional communication can be used to retrieve a 1-hour block of internally
recorded pressure and temperature frequency counts from the flash storage card. A
limited number of these after-the-fact requests are possible, due to battery life consid-
erations. In order to maintain this capability for the deployment life of a given system,
the tsunami warning centers must coordinate this activity among interested parties.

Interrogation Protocol
The tsunami warning centers coordinate DART trigger activation during events. Nor-
mally, if triggers are not activated by the earthquake or tsunami, a center can initi-
ate an interrogative data retrieval mode, or set the BPR in Event Mode. However, the
Iridium receivers on board the surface buoys have a limited amount of receive time.
Upon receipt of the command to retrieve high-frequency data, the BPR transmits
1 hour of 15-second pressure and temperature data.

The tsunami warning centers perform after-the-fact interrogation of internally

recorded 15-second data. Specific requests by interested agencies should be made no
earlier than a day or two following an event, as tsunami warning center personnel
will be focused on operations. Tsunami warning centers will advise appropriate
agencies when data have been downloaded unrelated to specific requests.

Real-Time Transmission of Data—Iridium Transmissions and Time

Series Data Formats
The real-time transmission of messages varies depending on the operating mode of
the BPR, as described above. Transmission of real-time water level heights occurs
when the Tsunami Detection Algorithm triggers a suspected event, when the buoy

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-21

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

is interrogated by the tsunami warning centers, or at pre-scheduled intervals. The

BPR transmits the messages to the surface buoy via underwater acoustics systems.
In addition to the examples given below, see a slightly different presentation of cur-
rent codes in the Description of Real Time DART System Messages, Revision 3.01 (2
August 2007), by Marie C. Elbe and Scott E. Stalin (a NOAA/PMEL publication).

Every Iridium transmission begins with a platform header followed by the message
formats as described in this document. The format of the header is:

3f 3f 3f ck ck DARTxxxP/S
3f 3f 3f = three bytes to start the transmission (always 3f hex)
ck ck = two byte checksum
DART = Indicates tsunami buoy platform ID follows
xxx = three ASCII digit platform ID
P/S = P indicates transmission from Primary side; S for Secondary side.

Standard Mode Hourly Reporting

Standard-mode hourly reporting consists of water level height data. The reports
consist of four discrete 15-minute water column height values, in millimeters, via
acoustic modem each hour, and via Iridium every 6 hours if height data are available.
In addition, a GPS Position Fix is transmitted once per day, or hourly if height data is
not available.

Height Data (Transmitted via acoustic modem every hour, via Iridium
every 6 hours if height data available)
<cr>D$1C/I d
ate time batv1 batv2 batv3 ht1 ht2 ht3 ht4 tries * checksum
<cr>D$1C/I date time batv1 batv2 batv3 ht1 ht2 ht3 ht4 tries * checksum
<cr>D$1C/I date time batv1 batv2 batv3 ht1 ht2 ht3 ht4 tries * checksum
<cr>D$1C/I date time batv1 batv2 batv3 ht1 ht2 ht3 ht4 tries * checksum
<cr>D$1C/I date time batv1 batv2 batv3 ht1 ht2 ht3 ht4 tries * checksum
<cr>D$1C/I date time batv1 batv2 batv3 ht1 ht2 ht3 ht4 tries * checksum
<cr> = 0x0D
D$1 = message id
C/I = message status, C = corrupted, I = intact
date = month day year
time = hour minute second
batv1 = BPR battery voltage in 10ths of a volt, or error code
batv2 = acoustic modem DSP battery in 10ths volts
batv3 = acoustic modem battery in volts
ht1 ... ht4 = water column height in millimeters
tries = number of tries to deliver BPR data

4-22 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

* = = checksum delimiter
checksum = exclusive OR of all characters preceding “*”,
1-byte hexadecimal
Example:
D$1I 08/17/2006 [Link] 1654147 5311813 5311758 5311703 5311652 1* 35
D$1I 08/17/2006 [Link] 1654147 5311604 5311559 5311516 5311480 1* 34
D$1I 08/17/2006 [Link] 1654147 5311445 5311414 5311389 5311369 1* 3C
D$1I 08/17/2006 [Link] 1654147 5311352 5311342 5311336 5311336 1* 36
D$1I 08/17/2006 [Link] 1654147 5311341 5311353 5311366 5311385 1* 3A
D$1I 08/17/2006 [Link] 1654147 5311407 5311433 5311466 5311499 1* 32

GPS Position Fix (Transmitted once per day or hourly if height data not available)

D$0 N/S lat_deg E/W long_deg * checksum

D$0 = message id
date = month day year
time = hour minute second
lat_deg = latitude of buoy, [Link]
N/S = North or South
long_deg = longitude of buoy, [Link]
E/W = East or West
* = checksum delimiter
checksum = exclusive OR of all characters preceding “*”,
1-byte hexadecimal

Example:
D$0 08/17/2006 [Link] 4857.0556 N 17816.8330 E* 5D

Figure 4-11. Examples of Standard-Mode Hourly Reports

Tsunami Event Mode Reporting

Examples of tsunami event-mode reports are shown in Figure 4-12. They consist of
the following types:
First Event Mode Message (Message #0). Reports the water column height that
triggered the event mode (in millimeters), along with three height deviations
(15-second height values 0.75 minutes prior to the event trigger).
Second Event Mode Message (Message #1). Reports 15-second height
values -0.75 to 3 minutes after event trigger.
Subsequent Event Mode Messages (Messages #2-14). Reports 15 1-minute
average height values from the detection of the event until event mode has ceased.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-23

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

First Event Mode Message (Message #0)

D$2 C/I msg# tt time ts begin height dev1 dev2 dev3 tries * checksum
D$2 = message id
C/I = message status, C = corrupted, I = intact
msg# = message number (0 for the first message)
time = time tsunami detected
begin = first data point time stamp
height = first data point water column height in millimeters
dev1...dev3 = deviation from height in millimeters, 2-byte hexadecimal
tries = number of tries to deliver BPR data
* = checksum delimiter
checksum = exclusive OR of all characters preceding “*”, 1-byte hexadecimal

Example:
D$2I 00 tt [Link] ts [Link] 3259892
00000044000001* 28
Subsequent Event Mode Messages (Message #1 - #14(typically))
D$2 C/I msg# tt time ts begin height dev1 dev2 dev3......dev15 tries * checksum
D$2 = message id
C/I = message status, C = corrupted, I = intact
msg# = message number
time = time tsunami detected
begin = first data point time stamp
height = first data point water column height in millimeters
dev1...dev15 = deviation from height in millimeters, 2-byte hexadecimal
tries = number of tries to deliver BPR data
* = checksum delimiter
checksum = exclusive OR of all characters preceding “*”, 1-byte hexadecimal

Example:
D$2I 01 tt [Link] ts [Link] 3259892
000000440000fffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffefffefffefffe01* 29
D$2I 02 tt [Link] ts [Link] 3259897
fffffffffffefffdfffcfffcfffb000cfffafffafff9fff9fff8fff8fff701* 2C
D$2I 03 tt [Link] ts [Link] 3259909
ffeeffeeffedffedffecffecffebffeaffeaffeaffeaffe9ffe8ffe8ffe701* 22

Figure 4-12. Examples of Event-Mode Reports

Extended Mode Hourly Reporting

Extended reporting mode consists of 120 1-minute average values, transmitted via
Iridium each hour for additional data redundancy. Extended reporting mode trans-
mits data from 1 hour prior to the next top of the hour until the Tsunami Detection

4-24 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

Algorithm is in non-triggered status. Figure 4-13 provides an example of an extended-

mode hourly report.

120, 1-minute averages transmitted via Iridium each hour

D$3 C/I tt ts height dev1 dev2 dev3..........dev119 tries * checksum
D$3 = message id
C/I = message status, C = corrupted, I = intact
tt = time tsunami detected
ts = first data point time stamp
height = water column height in millimeters
dev1...dev119 = deviation from height in millimeters, 2-byte hexadecimal
tries = number of tries to deliver BPR data
* = checksum delimiter
checksum = exclusive OR of all characters preceding “*”, 1-byte hexadecimal
Example:
D$3Itt [Link] ts [Link] 3259888
fffffffffffffffffffefffdfffdfffcfffcfffcfffbfffbfffafff9
fff9fff8fff8fff7
fff7fff6fff6fff5fff4fff4fff3fff2fff2fff1fff1fff0ffefffef
ffeeffeeffedffec

Figure 4-13. Extended-Mode Hourly Report Example

High-Resolution On-Demand Data Format

The DART High-Resolution On-Demand Data Format consists of 1-hour of high-reso-
lution 15-second data, sent via Iridium on demand by the warning centers. This data
is in ASCII-Hexadecimal Data Format. An example is shown in Figure 4-14.

(1 hour’s worth transmitted via Iridium)

D$5C/Icafedata…
D$6C/Idata…
D$7C/Idata…
D$8C/Idata…
D$5-8 = message id
I = 2-byte hexadecimal representing the beginning of the data
C/I = message status, C = corrupted, I = intact
To decipher:
1) Remove the message IDs and status (i.e. D$5I, D$6I, D$7I, and D$8I)
2) Remaining data block is decoded as Flash Card data (above)
Example:
D$5Icafe4843040a1406110000a707000180b6073fde847<snip…>
D$6I01c388ab014f903a01aa88ab0103903a019388ab00b<snip…>
D$7I003f88ab016d903a006388ab012a903a008888ab00e<snip…>
D$8I011f88ab02bb903a017188ab027b903a01c388ab023<snip…>

Figure 4-14. Example of DART High-Resolution On-Demand Data Format

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 4-25

 Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection

DART Real-time Data Formats - Reformatting Iridium Messages

NDBC reformats the received Iridium messages into SXXX46 messages for
distribution via the National Weather Service Telecommunications Gateway.

Raw Standard Mode Message from the Buoy:

D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4709825 4709819 4709819 4709824 1* 35
D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4709831 4709842 4709862 4709883 1* 07
D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4709906 4709933 4709962 4709995 1* 3B
D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4710033 4710072 4710115 4710155 1* 7F
D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4710198 4710244 4710282 4710322 1* 30
D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4710363 4710398 4710431 4710457 1* 01

NDBC applies bulletin header (SXXX46 KWBC) and Date-Time Group (230012 – 23rd
day of the month at 0012 UTC). NDBC then applies GOES1 header line (DDDDDDD0
235001256) and end-message line (00-0NN 00E) to keep the DART II data message
compatible with DART I, so that decoders can process the messages.

SXXX46 KWBC 230012

DDDDDDD0 235001256
D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4709825 4709819 4709819 4709824 1* 35
D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4709831 4709842 4709862 4709883 1* 07
D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4709906 4709933 4709962 4709995 1* 3B
D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4710033 4710072 4710115 4710155 1* 7F
D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4710198 4710244 4710282 4710322 1* 30
D$1I 08/22/2006 [Link] 1474142 4710363 4710398 4710431 4710457 1* 01
00-0NN 00E

Important Points to Remember about Data Formats

 Tide gage data for tsunami monitoring should be transmitted at 1-minute (or
better) intervals, with averaged data values transmitted at least every 15 minutes.
 Data are transmitted over a number of different satellites to regional telecommuni-
cations hubs of the WMO.
 Two primary WMO data formats are: Binary Universal Form for the Representation
of meteorological data (BUFR), and Character form for the Representation and
EXchange of data (CREX).
 DART provides internally stored high-frequency data for temperature and pressure
averaged over 15-second intervals.

4-26 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Chapter 5
Tsunami Detection
A tsunami warning center must be able to process and analyze seismic and sea
level data to detect the occurrence of a tsunami and forecast its impact (Figure 5-1).
National Tsunami Warning Centers (NTWC) and Regional Tsunami Watch Providers
(RTWP) require a variety of hardware, software, computer applications and programs,
and communication capabilities to support and maintain tsunami detection and pre-
diction capacity. Maintenance programs and backup capacity are also needed for each
center. This chapter should be read by persons who need to understand the types of
hardware and software that are necessary for a warning center to function, and the
importance of comprehensive maintenance programs and backup plans.

Local Seismic
Networks

GLOSS Tide Gage

Networks

Local Tide Gage

Networks

Figure 5-1. Components of a Tsunami Warning Center’s Tsunami Detection and Prediction Requirements

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-1

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

How Does Tsunami Detection Fit into an End-to-End

Tsunami Warning System?
A tsunami warning center functions on a day-to-day basis in a manner similar to a
seismological observatory. The center should strive to do two things as fast as pos-
sible. First, the center must locate any moderate sized or larger earthquake in its area
of responsibility (AOR) and assess its magnitude. Once that is accomplished, the
center can begin to assess any potential tsunami threat to the regions in its AOR. If
the earthquake poses a tsunami hazard, then the watch standers look for evidence of
tsunami activity using an extensive network of tide gages, and ideally, tsunameters,
at the center’s disposal. The capacity to detect a tsunami signal and predict its impact
requires both scientific expertise and on-the-job experience in order to make quick
decisions and issue products in a short period of time, especially for local tsunamis
(Figure 5-2). For this reason, a tsunami warning system cannot be fully automated.

Figure 5-2. Timeline for Issuance of a Tsunami Bulletin for a Local Tsunami
(in Seconds)
(Adapted from the Pacific Tsunami Warning Center Operating Plan)

Compared to local tsunami events, more time is available for issuing bulletins for tele-
seismic (originate more than 1000 kilometers away) events, as shown in Figure 5‑3
(minutes instead of seconds). Both timelines illustrate, however, the critical need for
the center to have reliable, redundant communications channels and effective com-
puter applications for collecting, processing, and displaying data, and creating and
disseminating voice and text bulletins. To meet these requirements a center needs
hardware (networks, workstations) and computer programs (operating systems,
applications).

Analyzing and displaying earth data for watch standers is the core of the hazard
detection and forecast component of an end-to-end tsunami warning system. The
rapid detection and characterization of tsunami-generating earthquakes by com-
puter applications programs provides the first indication of a potential tsunami in an

5-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

Figure 5-3. Timeline for Bulletin Issuance for a Teletsunami Event (in Minutes)

end‑to-end tsunami warning system. Initial seismic-based warnings based on data

from networks of seismic gages are subsequently refined by the detection of tsunami-
generated changes in sea level, measured by tide gages and buoys and analyzed by
applications programs. The refinement of initial seismic-based warnings with data on
sea level changes can greatly increase the credibility of the warnings by decreasing
false alarms.

Critical seismic and sea level data must be received and processed rapidly at tsunami
warning centers to be of any use in the warning process. Thus, data collection com-
munications systems are crucial to the success of the warning system.

What Is in this Chapter?

This chapter contains sections that discuss the following topics:
 Information technology (IT) networks required by centers. This includes Wide
Area Networks (WAN) for center connection to far-flung data gathering networks,
and Local Area Networks (LAN) for analyzing and integrating data into display
systems and computer models.
 Operating systems and hardware (workstations) that are available for use at
NTWCs and RTWPs.
 Applications programs needed to collect, analyze, integrate, and display data at
centers.
 Maintenance program requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs
 Redundancy programs and their importance.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-3

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

What Are the Most Important Points to Remember about

Tsunami Detection Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs?
 Tsunami warning centers require a variety of hardware, software, computer appli-
cations programs, and communications capabilities to process and analyze seismic
and sea level data and detect the occurrence of a tsunami.
 Computer programs that analyze and display earth data for watch standers are the
core of the hazard detection and forecast component of an end-to-end tsunami
warning system.
 Critical seismic and sea level data must be received and processed rapidly at tsu-
nami warning centers to be of any use in the warning process.
 The capacity to detect a tsunami signal and predict its impact requires both sci-
entific expertise and on-the-job experience in order to make quick decisions and
issue products in a short period of time.

Information Technology Requirements

An NTWC or RTWP requires computer power to effectively collect, process, moni-
tor, and display seismic and sea level data and produce and disseminate products.
This generally means that a tsunami warning center requires one or more connec-
tions to distant networks, notably the internet. This effectively makes the center part
of one or more WANs. Much of the information on WANs and LANs comes from the
Wikipedia article [Link] for LANs and
[Link] for WANs and is licensed under
the GNU Free Documentation License.

Wide Area Networks (WAN)

A WAN is a computer network covering a broad geographical area, in contrast to a
local area network (LAN), which is usually limited to a room, building, or campus.
The largest and best-known example of a WAN is the internet.

WANs are used to connect LANs together so that users and computers in one loca-
tion can communicate with users and computers in other locations. Many WANs are
built for one particular organization and are private. Others, built by Internet service
providers, provide connections from an organization’s LAN to the internet. WANs are
most often built using leased lines. At each end of the leased line, a router connects
to the LAN on one side and a hub within the WAN on the other. Leased lines can be
very expensive. Instead of using leased lines, WANs can also be built using less costly
circuit switching or packet switching methods. Network protocols including Trans-
mission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) deliver transport and addressing
functions. Protocols including Packet over SONET/SDH, MPLS, ATM and Frame relay
are often used by service providers to deliver the links that are used in WANs.

5-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

A WAN generally requires the crossing of public right-of-ways, and relies at least in
part on circuits provided by a common carrier. Typically, a WAN consists of a number
of interconnected switching nodes. A transmission from any one device is routed
through these internal nodes to the specified destination device. These nodes (includ-
ing the boundary nodes) are not concerned with the contents of data; rather, their
purpose is to provide a switching facility that will move the data from node to node
until they reach their destination. Several different options are available for WAN con-
nectivity, as shown in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1. Various Wide-Area Network Connectivity Options

Sample
Dis­- Bandwidth Protocols
Options Description Advantages advantages Range Used
Leased line Point-to-point Most secure Expensive Point to Point
connection between Protocol,
two computers
High Level
Data Link
Control
Synchronous
Data Link
Control

Circuit A dedicated circuit Call Setup 28 Kb/s – 144 Point to Point

switching path is created Kb/s Protocol,
between end points.
Integrated
Best example is a
Services Digital
dialup connection.
Network

Packet Devices transport X.25

switching packets via a shared Frame-Relay
single point-to-point
or point-to-multipoint
link across a carrier
inter-network.
Variable-length packets
are transmitted over
Permanent Virtual
Circuits or Switched
Virtual Circuits.

Cell relay Similar to packet Best for Overhead Asynchronous

switching, but uses simultaneous can be Transfer Mode
fixed-length cells use of voice considerable
instead of variable- and data
length packets. Data
is divided into fixed-
length cells and then
transported across
virtual circuits.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-5

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

Transmission rate usually ranges from 1200 bits per second to 6 megabits per second.
Typical communication links used in WANs are telephone lines, microwave links, and
satellite channels. Figure 5-4 shows is an example of a tsunami warning center’s WAN
setup, depicting the West Coast/Alaska Tsunami Warning Center’s (WC/ATWC) con-
nections to several WANs.

Figure 5-4. WC/ATWC Connections to WANs

Local Area Network (LAN)

NTWCs and RTWPs also require communication amongst several data monitoring,
processing, and display computers via a LAN, a computer network covering a local
area such as a home, office, or group of buildings. Current LANs are most likely to
be based on switched IEEE 802.3 Ethernet running at 10, 100 or 1,000 megabits per
second or on Wi-Fi technology.

The defining characteristics of a LAN in contrast to a WAN are their much higher data
rates and smaller geographic range, and that they do not require leased telecommu-
nication lines. Figure 5-5 shows an example of an idealized LAN. Note that the LAN
can include devices other than just personal computers (PC) or workstations, and it
should have a firewall if connected to a public WAN like the internet.

5-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

Figure 5-5. Idealized LAN

Physical Components of LANs

The physical properties of a LAN include network access interface units (or inter-
faces) that connect the personal computer to the network. These units are actually
interface cards installed on computer motherboards. Their job is to provide a con-
nection, monitor availability of access to the LAN, set or buffer the data transmission
speed, ensure against transmission errors and collisions, and assemble data from the
LAN into usable form for the computer.

The next part of a LAN is the wiring, which provides the physical connection from
one computer to another, and to printers and file servers. The properties of the
wiring determine transmission speeds. The first LANs were connected with coaxial
cable, the same type used to deliver cable television. These facilities are relatively
inexpensive and simple to attach. More importantly, they provided great bandwidth
(the system’s rate of data transfer), enabling transmission speeds initially up to 20
megabits per second.

Another type of wiring, developed in the 1980s, used ordinary twisted wire pair
(commonly used for telephones). The primary advantages of twisted wire pair are
that it is very cheap, simpler to splice than coaxial, and is already installed in many
buildings; the downside is that its bandwidth is more limited.

A more recent development in LAN wiring is optical fiber cable. This type of wiring
uses thin strands of glass to transmit pulses of light between terminals. It provides

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-7

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

tremendous bandwidth, allowing very high transmission speeds, and because it is

optical rather than electronic, it is impervious to electromagnetic interference. Still,
splicing it can be difficult and requires a high degree of skill. The primary applica-
tion of fiber is not between terminals, but between LAN buses (terminals) located on
different floors. As a result, fiber-distributed data interface is used mainly in building
risers. Within individual floors, LAN facilities remain coaxial or twisted wire pair.

When a physical connection cannot be made between two LANs, such as across a
street or between buildings, microwave radio may be used. However, it is often dif-
ficult to secure frequencies for this medium. Another alternative in this application
is light transceivers, which project a beam of light similar to fiber optic cable, but
through the air rather than over cable. These systems do not have the frequency allo-
cation or radiation problems associated with microwave, but they are susceptible to
interference from fog and other natural obstructions.

LAN Topologies
LANs are designed in several different topologies, or physical patterns to depict con-
nections between terminals. These connection patterns can range from straight lines
to a ring. Each terminal on the LAN contends with other terminals for access to the
system. When it has secured access to the system, a terminal broadcasts its message
to all the terminals at once. The message is picked up by the one or group of termi-
nal stations for which it is intended. The branching tree topology is an extension of
the bus (shared communications line), providing a link between two or more buses.

A third topology, the star network, also works like a bus in terms of contention and
broadcast. But in the star, stations are connected to a single, central node (individual
computer) that administers access. Several of these nodes may be connected to one
another. For example, a bus serving six stations may be connected to another bus
serving 10 stations and a third bus connecting 12 stations. The star topology is most
often used where the connecting facilities are coaxial or twisted wire pair.

The ring topology connects each station to its own node, and these nodes are con-
nected in a circular fashion. Node 1 is connected to node 2, which is connected to
node 3, and so on, and the final node is connected back to node 1. Messages sent
over the LAN are regenerated by each node, but retained only by the addressees.
Eventually, the message circulates back to the sending node, which removes it from
the stream.

Transmission Methods Used by LANs

LANs function because their transmission capacity is greater than any single termi-
nal on the system. As a result, each station terminal can be offered a certain amount
of time on the LAN, like a timesharing arrangement. To economize on this small
window of opportunity, stations organize their messages into compact packets that
can be quickly distributed. When two messages are sent simultaneously, they could
collide on the LAN, causing the system to be temporarily disrupted. Busier LANs

5-8 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

usually utilize special software that virtually eliminates the problem of collisions by
providing orderly, “no contention” access.

The transmission methods used on LANs are either baseband or broadband. The
baseband medium uses a high-speed digital signal consisting of square wave DC volt-
age. While it is fast, it can accommodate only one message at a time. As a result, it is
suitable for smaller networks where contention is low. It also is very simple to use,
requiring no tuning or frequency discretion circuits. This transmission medium may
be connected directly to the network access unit and is suitable for use over twisted
wire pair facilities.

By contrast, the broadband medium tunes signals to special frequencies, much like
cable television. Stations are instructed by signaling information to tune to a specific
channel to receive information. The information within each channel on a broad-
band medium may also be digital, but they are separated from other messages by
frequency. As a result, the medium generally requires higher capacity facilities, such
as coaxial cable. Suited for busier LANs, broadband systems require the use of tuning
devices in the network access unit that can filter out all but the single channel it
needs.

The File Server

The administrative software of the LAN resides in a dedicated file server, or in a
smaller, less busy LAN in a PC that acts as a file server. In addition to performing as
a kind of traffic controller, the file server holds files for shared use in its hard drives,
administers applications such as the operating system, and allocates functions.

When a single computer is used as both a workstation and a file server, response
times may lag because its processors are forced to perform several duties at once.
This system will store certain files on different computers on the LAN. As a result, if
one machine is down, the entire system may be crippled. If the system were to crash
due to lack of capacity, some data could be lost or corrupted.

The addition of a dedicated file server may be costly, but it provides several advan-
tages over a distributed system. In addition to ensuring access even when some
machines are down, its only duties are to hold files and provide access.

Other LAN Equipment

LANs are generally limited in size because of the physical properties of the network,
including distance, impedance, and load. Some equipment, such as repeaters, can
extend the range of a LAN. Repeaters have no processing ability, but simply regener­
ate signals that are weakened by impedance. Other types of LAN equipment with
processing ability include gateways, which enable LANs operating dissimilar pro­
tocols to pass information by translating it into a simpler code, such as American
Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII). A bridge works like a gateway,
but instead of using an intermediate code, it translates one protocol directly into

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-9

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

another. A router performs essentially the same function as a bridge, except that it
administers communications over alternate paths. Gateways, bridges, and routers can
act as repeaters, boosting signals over greater distances. They also enable separate
LANs located in different buildings to communicate with each other.

The connection of two or more LANs over any distance is referred to as a WAN.
WANs require the use of special software programs in the operating system to enable
dial-up connections that may be performed by a telephone lines or radio waves. In
some cases, separate LANs located in different cities—and even separate countries—
may be linked over the public network.

LAN Difficulties
LANs are susceptible to many kinds of transmission errors. Electromagnetic interfer-
ence from motors, power lines, and sources of static, as well as shorts from corrosion,
can corrupt data. Software bugs and hardware failures can also introduce errors, as
can irregularities in wiring and connections. LANs generally compensate for these
errors by working off an uninterruptible power source, such as batteries, and using
backup software to recall most recent activity and hold unsaved material. Some sys-
tems may be designed for redundancy, such as keeping two file servers and alternate
wiring to route around failures.

Security problems can also be an issue with LANs.

They can be difficult to manage and access because
Tip
Tsunami warning
the data they use is often distributed between many
centers should make
different networked sources. In addition, many
sure that firewalls and
times this data is stored on several different work- other security measures
stations and servers. Most companies have specific are in place to protect
LAN administrators who deal with these issues and the integrity of their
are responsible for the use of LAN software. They networks.
also work to back up files and recover lost files.

Important Points to Remember about IT Networks

 A WAN is a computer network covering a broad geographical area. They are used
to connect local area networks (LANs) together, so that users and computers in
one location can communicate with users and computers in other locations.
 A LAN is a computer network covering a local area, like a home, office, or group
of buildings. LANs have much higher data rates, smaller geographic range, and do
not require leased telecommunication lines like most WANs.
 A LAN should have a firewall if connected to a public WAN like the internet.

5-10 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

Operating System and Hardware Requirements for NTWCs

and RTWPs
An NTWC or RTWP requires computers and computer operating systems to effec-
tively collect, process, monitor, and display seismic and sea level data and produce
and disseminate products. Currently there are two main choices for tsunami warning
center hardware and operating systems, PCs with Windows or Mac OS X, and UNIX-
based workstations. Each has its strengths and weaknesses. Each requires significant
resources to maintain.

Operating Systems
Currently the most appropriate network operating systems for a NTWC or RTWP
utilizing PCs come from Microsoft. Microsoft’s PC operating system options include
Windows NT Advanced Server and Windows for Workgroups, and more recently
Windows XP.

UNIX computer workstation from vendors such as Sun Microsystems, Hewlett-Pack-

ard, Silicon Graphics, Intergraph, NeXT and Apollo have historically used TCP/IP
based networking. Although this market segment is now much reduced, the tech-
nologies developed in this area continue to be influential on the internet and in both
Linux and Apple/Macintosh operating system (Mac OS X) networking, and the TCP/IP
protocol has now almost completely replaced Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX),
AppleTalk, NetBIOS Extended User Interface (NETBEUI) and other protocols used by
the early PC LANs.

There are advantages and drawbacks to utilizing a Windows-based LAN. Similarly,

there are pros and cons to implementing a UNIX/Linux-based LAN in an NTWC or
RTWP environment. But in both instances there needs to be redundancy and atten-
tion to security to ensure data availability and processing at all times.

Workstations
There are two basic types of “workstations” that can be used to perform necessary
operations in a tsunami warning center, i.e., collect data, run applications, and dis-
seminate products. True high end workstations are usually coupled with some variant
of the UNIX operating system. PCs, on the other hand, usually run a version of Win-
dows or Apple/Macintosh operating system (Mac OS X), although higher end PCs can
now use Linux as the operating system.

Following the performance trends of computers in general, today’s average PC is

more powerful than the top-of-the-line workstations of one generation before. As a
result, the workstation market is becoming increasingly more specialized, since many
complex operations that formerly required high-end systems can now be handled
by general-purpose PCs. However, workstation hardware is optimized for high data
throughput, large amounts of memory, multitasking, and multithreaded computing. In

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-11

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

situations requiring considerable computing power, workstations remain usable while

traditional PCs quickly become unresponsive.

PCs use components that are often at or near the cutting edge of technology. These
days, workstations have changed greatly. Since many of the components are now
the same as those used in the consumer market, the price differential between work­
stations and consumer PCs is correspondingly much narrower than it once was. For
example, some low-end workstations use CISC (complex instruction set computer)
based processors like the Intel Pentium 4 or AMD’s Athlon 64 as their central pro-
cessing units (CPU). Higher-end workstations still use more sophisticated CPUs such
as Intel Itanium 2, AMD Opteron, IBM POWER, or Sun’s UltraSPARC, and run a vari-
ant of UNIX, delivering a truly reliable workhorse for computing-intensive tasks. This
makes deciding whether or not to purchase a true workstation very difficult for many
organizations. Sometimes these workstation systems are still required, but many orga-
nizations opt for the less-expensive, if more fault-prone, PC-level hardware. Either
route has advantages and disadvantages, but will, in general, still do the jobs an
NTWC or RTWP requires.

Under optimal conditions, all NTWCs and RTWPs

would use the same hardware, operating systems, and
applications programs. That way development, main-
Tip
NTWCs and RTWPs
tenance, trouble shooting, and operations could be should all strive to use
standardized and economies realized. The reality is the same hardware,
the operating system and hardware chosen by a center operating systems, and
is often dictated by institutional norms, staff skills and applications programs.
capabilities, and/or budget constraints.

The number of workstations needed for center operations depends on the hardware
and operating system, the number of applications, the extent of communications, and
the approach taken to ensure the redundancy of critical functions.

The Pacific Tsunami Warning Center (PTWC) utilizes UNIX Reduced Instruction Set
Computer (RISC) workstations, and the core of operations consists of 6 Sun Micro-
systems (SUN) computers. Two computers serve as loading docks. All seismic wave-
form data and most of the parametric seismic data pass through the loading docks.
Four workstations are used to process the seismic and sea-level data, and run other
software such as travel-time computations and messaging software. The PTWC opera-
tions are split into primary and redundant sides so as to avoid a single point of fail-
ure. PTWC’s hardware configuration is shown in Figure 5-6.

WC/ATWC currently uses PCs running the latest Windows operating system. The
center has two basic interconnected networks with redundant servers: “EarlyBird” for
processing seismic events, and “tide” for sea level data. Figure 5-7 illustrates the basic
topology for the WC/ATWC seismic network of ten Windows XP-based PCs that com-
prise the EarlyBird seismic processing system. Five PCs import and export data using
standard Earthworm modules. Two of the remaining PCs are the main and backup

5-12 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

Figure 5-6. PTWC Hardware Configuration as of July 2006

Figure 5-7. WC/ATWC Network for Processing Seismic Information (Note redundant servers)

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-13

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

seismic data processors. Both constantly monitor earthquake activity on approximately

200 seismic channels. Each seismic processor has an associated PC that runs the
EarthVu Geographic Information System (GIS). The GIS PCs display earthquake loca-
tions processed on EarlyBird 1 and 2 and provide a graphical interface for database
access. Many overlays of interest to the watch stander can be shown on the maps.

Important Points to Remember about

Operating Systems and Hardware
 Windows NT Advanced Server, Windows for Workgroups, and Windows XP are
currently the most appropriate network operating systems for a NTWC or RTWP
utilizing personal computers.
 There are advantages and drawbacks to using a Windows-based LAN. Similarly,
there are pros and cons to implementing a UNIX/Linux-based LAN in an NTWC or
RTWP environment.
 For both Windows and UNIX operating systems, redundancy and attention to
security are needed to ensure data availability and processing at all times.
 It would be optimal if all NTWCs and RTWPs used the same hardware, operating
systems, and applications programs. That way development, maintenance, trouble
shooting, and operations could be standardized and economies realized.

Computer Applications and Processing Requirements for

NTWCs and RTWPs
Computer programs (applications) are critical to watch stander success at maintain-
ing situational awareness. Applications can also provide processed information from
earth data observations for input to decisions on what products the tsunami warning
center needs to issue following an earthquake. The requirements for rapid character-
ization of earthquakes and determination of tsunami threat include processing speed,
sufficient observation (both seismic and sea level) network density, and sufficiently
short interrogation intervals.

Applications
Applications are groups of computer code that provide a tsunami warning center’s watch
stander with the tools needed to maintain situational awareness, collaborate, make deci-
sions, prepare products, and disseminate these products in a timely fashion. In other
words, applications help the watch stander do the required job, and most of these appli-
cations are critical to getting the job done. The center’s operating system usually dictates
what form the applications take, for example, Tool Command Language/Tool Kit (Tcl/
Tk) for UNIX-based systems, and C++ for Windows-based systems. Experience at estab-
lished NTWCs suggests that applications can be divided into several categories:
 Collect seismic and sea-level data in real time
 Process and database data in real time

5-14 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

 Automatically monitor data for exceeding criteria thresholds

 Compute parameters that must be derived from observed data
 Display data and information for the watch stander to maintain situational
awareness
 Disseminate text and graphic products to customers and other tsunami watch
centers

While each center may utilize applications developed elsewhere, or develop their own
on site, following are some applications that have been found to be needed. Some
of the programs are elaborated upon in greater detail in the PTWC and WC/ATWC
operations manuals.

Collect Seismic and Sea-level Data in Real Time

Sea-level data are normally collected from international networks via the World
Meteorological Organization’s (WMO) Global Telecommunications System (GTS), the
internet, or a country’s WAN. Seismic data applications generally utilize internet com-
munications and standard modules from the U.S. Geological Survey’s (USGS) Earth-
worm program. These applications are:
 Digitize analog data (although now done mostly in the field)
 Receive data from the Incorporated Research Institutions for Seismology’ Interna-
tional Deployment of Accelerometers (IRIS/IDA) network into Earthworm

Tip
 Gather hypocenter and trace data from other centers
 Start and restart all modules when necessary
USGS’s Earthworm is
Process and database data in real time a good program for
 Log hypocenters to disk and EarthVu processing seismic data.

 Process surface wave data for moment magnitude (Mw)

and mantle magnitude (Mm)
 Process data for moment tensor

Auto-monitor data for exceeding criteria thresholds

 Read, display, and analyze seismic data
 Archive data
 Call earthquake and tsunami databases
 Read, display, and analyze tide gage and Deep Ocean Assessment and Reporting
of Tsunami (DART) buoy readings
 Read, display, and analyze run-up detection data

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-15

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

Compute parameters that are derived from observed data

 P-picking and magnitude determination algorithm
 Interactively locate earthquake hypocenter
 Trigger processing and compute Richter magnitude, surface magnitude (Ms), mantle
magnitude (Mm), moment magnitude (Mw), p-wave moment magnitude (Mwp), etc.
 Compute and display tsunami travel times

Display data and information for situational awareness

 Display real-time, short period seismic data
 Display computed hypocenter parameters and adjust P data
 Display real-time, long period seismic data and process data for MS
 Display location and P data to screen
 Display earthquake summary to monitor
 Display epicenters on large, small, and regional-scale maps
 Overlay pertinent information such as historic tsunamis and earthquakes, volca-
noes, elevation contours, roads, pipelines, and tsunami watch/warning areas
 Display large-scale maps
 Display small-scale maps
 Display regional maps and show last 7 days’ epicenters
 Create and display tsunami travel time maps triggered by tsunami message
generation

Disseminate text and graphic products to customers and other centers

 Send hypocenter and trace data to other centers
 Send alarm messages out from a serial port (for paging system)
 Create tsunami warning and other messages based on earthquake hypocenter
parameters
 Create information maps in the background to post on website with tsunami
messages
 Create maps in background and write to disk for transfer to website
 Automatically send emails to list of subscribers

Sea Level Data Processing Requirements

Several decades of experience at a number of national and regional centers have led
to the determination of requirements for processing capabilities of sea level gage net-
works to adequately support a tsunami warning program. Guidelines were developed

5-16 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

by the Global Sea Level Observing System (GLOSS) program based on science princi-
ples, and due to the compelling requirement to issue time-critical products to protect
life and property. The following discussions are based on the very different needs
of teletsunami and local tsunami warning programs. Each nation or jurisdiction will
have to assess its needs in terms of early warning requirements.

The current specifications for the basin-wide (regional) in situ sea level component
of tsunami warning systems requires data collection and transmission standards that
include “sampling of 1 minute averages and a continuous 15 minute transmission
cycle via WMO’s GTS to the JMA (Japan Meteorological Agency), PTWC, and other
appropriate warning centers/watch providers.” These guidelines were developed in
consultation with existing tsunami warning center scientists and technicians from
PTWC and JMA, and with JMA and European Meteorological Satellite (EUMETSAT)
geostationary satellite operators.

The Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission (IOC) and GLOSS have been fol-
lowing these guidelines in establishing and/or enabling sea level stations as part of
the core network of sea level stations for the Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning System
(IOTWS). However, subsequent Intergovernmental Coordination Group (ICG) meet-
ings in Europe and the Caribbean and Concept of Operations (CONOPS) Team meet-
ings identified the need for subregional and national data collection and transmission
standards. The ICGs’ proposed standards include the following requirements:
Subregional sites (i.e., sites within 1 hour travel time of the tsunamigenic zones):
 A sampling of 15-second averages, and a continuous transmission cycle of
5 minutes.
 Immediate transmission via WMO’s GTS to JMA, PTWC, and other appropriate
warning centers. (However, it is noted that the European and Japan geostation-
ary meteorological satellites cannot be used since they are limited to a 15-minute
transmission cycle.)

National sites (i.e., sites within 100 km of tsunamigenic areas):

 A sampling of 15-second averages, and a continuous or 1-minute transmission
cycle for sites within 100 km of the tsunamigenic zones.
 Immediate transmission via WMO’s GTS to JMA, PTWC, and other appropriate
warning centers and regional watch providers.

Standards should include data reports that cover a greater time period than the
transmission frequency (to provide redundant data transmission).

Sea Level Data Processing Software

The software package TideTool provides end users with the ability to decode, display,
and manipulate sea-level data broadcast over WMO’s GTS. The software utilizes the
Tcl/Tk software package, specifically the BLT extension. Tcl/Tk is an open source,

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-17

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

Tip platform-independent software package offering a powerful shell

programming language and graphical toolkit.
The TideTool program is
The software application was developed by the PTWC to provide an
a good application to use
operational tool for real-time, continuous tsunami monitoring in the
for processing sea level
Indian Ocean. Its primary users would be national meteorological
data.
and hydrological services, or other agencies with a downlink from
the GTS or to a data file containing those data formatted in a similar
manner. It has been tested under Linux, Windows 2000, and Windows XP environ-
ments in Indonesia and Malaysia. A manual is available providing information on its
installation and use. Additional documentation on the program is available at:
[Link]
SLdecode_display_summary2.[Link]

Seismic Data Network and Processing Requirements

for Centers with a 5-Minute Response Need
To produce accurate moment magnitudes, NTWCs and RTWPs require reliable, broad-
frequency, low-noise, high-dynamic-range, digital seismic data in real time. The
timeliness of the data is crucial to issuing an initial bulletin within 5 minutes of an
earthquake. This is especially important for centers with local tsunami sources.

Seismic Network Data Density and Timing Requirements

 Twelve evenly distributed seismometers within 900 km (2-minute P-wave travel
time) of all coastal source areas.
 Assume 80 percent data availability (9 to 10 sites operating at a time)
 Up to 30 seconds of data latency
 Above conditions will provide 9 to 10 P-wave observations within 2.5 minutes after
the earthquake occurrence (or O-time). With an adequate processing system, a
correct hypocenter location can be produced at this time.
 60 seconds further to record the P-wave will provide data with which to compute
a moment magnitude.
 Moment magnitude and hypocenter available at 3.5 minutes after O-time.
 30 seconds for experienced professional analyst review.
 60 seconds to compose and send bulletin = 5 minutes total since O-time.

Seismic Data Processing Capabilities

 Process seismic data to produce P-wave arrival times and appropriate magnitude
parameters.
 Trigger alarms based on strong ground shaking at a single station or pair of
stations.

5-18 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

 Produce immediate hypocenter locations given sufficient number of P arrivals (5

to 7 arrivals).
 Support a graphical user interface which allows an analyst to review and alter data
in real time and support relocation of events interactively.
 Compute moment magnitude within 60 seconds of P-arrival for a given station.
 Interact directly with product generation software to produce bulletins with mini-
mal analyst effort.

Seismic Data Processing Software

The USGS Earthworm seismic data processing system should be used as the base pro-
cessing architecture for interoperability with other centers, availability of source code,
and easy sharing of modules and processes. The Earthworm Version 7.1 User’s Guide
can be found at: [Link]

Important Points to Remember about Applications

and Processing Requirements
 Experience at established tsunami warning centers suggests that required
applications can be divided into several categories:
 Collect, process, and database seismic and sea level data in real-time
 Automatically monitor data for exceeding criteria thresholds
 Compute parameters that must be derived from observed data
 Display data and information for the watch stander to maintain situational
awareness
 Disseminate text and graphic products to customers and other centers
 ICG and the CONOPS team identified the need for subregional and national data
collection and transmission standards.
 The software package TideTool provides end users with the ability to decode, dis-
play, and manipulate sea level data broadcast over the WMO’s GTS.
 The timeliness of seismic data is crucial to issuing an initial bulletin within 5 min-
utes of an earthquake. This is especially important for centers with local tsunami
sources.
 The USGS Earthworm seismic data processing system should be used as the base
processing architecture for interoperability with other centers.

Redundancy and Backup Capabilities

As discussed in the section on backup communications in Chapter 4, several types of
backup systems should be used by tsunami warning centers. Alternate communica-
tion paths for data collection and also for product dissemination are needed by each

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-19

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

NTWC and RTWP. In the event of the failure of one of a center’s primary communica-
tion links, information can be re-routed through a secondary connection. Similarly,
centers should not rely on a single network or single gages, but utilize redundant net-
works. Then if their primary earth data network is unavailable, either through equip-
ment failure or communications problems, the center can still function using alternate
networks.

Center functionality backup by another center means that procedures are in place
for an RTWP to assume the functions of one of its NTWCs if that national center has
lost all communications links. Similarly, each RTWP must have agreements in place
for another RTWP to take over in the event of a catastrophic event at the disabled
regional center. Typically, a tsunami warning center should have connections to at
least two other centers, and each RTWP should have agreements with at least one
other regional provider to provide backup communications.

Full backup capability by another center theoretically provides complete redundancy

of the original center’s functions. There is, however, a high price for such a capability.
The backup center must be trained in the other office’s procedures and responsibili-
ties, and additional communications channels are usually needed if the backup center
is to collect all pertinent data and reach all of the original center’s customers. And of
course, the backup site staff must test backup procedures frequently.

Because of the high cost in both funds and resources,

and the high probability of encountering problems due to
the infrequency of use, full backup should be used only
Tip
Avoid invoking full
as a last resort. A center should strive to establish on-site
backup by creating
redundancies in communications, hardware, and software redundant
so that it can continue to function in the event of a minor • communications,
system outage. • hardware, and
• software systems.
As illustrated in Figures 5-6 and 5-7, hardware redun-
dancy is an important requirement for a center. This
hardware redundancy goes hand in hand with the need
for a center to redundantly obtain seismic and sea level data from several different
networks, and via several different communications channels. Redundancy helps to
ensure that the data for applications programs will be available when most needed—
during an event. As an added bonus, the backup system can also be configured as a
training tool.

Important Points to Remember about Redundancy

and Backup Operations
 Full backup capability by another center theoretically provides complete redun-
dancy of the original center’s functions and should be established.

5-20 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

 Because of the high cost and high probability of encountering problems due to the
infrequency of use, full backup should be avoided whenever possible, and each
center should strive to establish on-site redundancies in communications, hard-
ware, and software.

Maintenance Requirements
A well coordinated and supported maintenance program is critical to the success of a
tsunami warning center. The breadth and depth of the maintenance program require-
ments will depend on the types of equipment deployed by that center, and the extent
to which the center maintains the equipment in-house. For example, if an NTWC
needs to deploy its own seismic or sea level gages, then the training and knowledge
set of the center’s electronics technicians will be different than those for a center
that relies solely on international seismic or sea-level gage networks, or one whose
national networks are maintained by another government agency or contractor. Simi-
lar conditions exist for computer and communications hardware and software.

There are strong arguments favoring use of an in-house maintenance program versus
relying on other groups to maintain critical equipment. The converse is also true;
there are good arguments, especially with regard to budgets and redundancy of
effort, for relying on “experts” to maintain the center’s critical equipment. One thing
is clear, however: Tsunami warning centers require a good computer-based program
for specifying, logging, and tracking critical equipment maintenance.

Whether a center operates with an in-house maintenance program, contracts out all
maintenance, or has a program that is a mixture of the two approaches, it must track
all maintenance activities in order to effectively manage the program. A center should
establish an Engineering and Maintenance Reporting System (EMRS) similar to those
used by many national meteorological agencies. The data collected by EMRS are vital
to achieving maximum responsiveness to the center’s mission. EMRS should be the
primary field-level-maintenance data collection, analysis, and maintenance-workflow
management tool used by the center. EMRS data allow the center to:
 Determine systems reliability and maintainability (R&M)
 Anticipate systems and facilities maintenance requirements
 Measure the effectiveness of systems and facilities upgrades and modifications
 Provide configuration data for specific systems and facilities
 Provide evidence of a system’s operational status for use in legal matters
 Monitor engineering resources expended on designated systems and facilities
 Provide program performance data
 Manage maintenance workflow at the center

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-21

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

 Assess systems and facilities maintenance requirements, and assist in planning for
future staffing levels

A center should establish what constitutes reportable maintenance events. These are
events that should be tracked in order to maintain the center’s programs. In general,
there are five types of reportable maintenance events:
 Corrective Maintenance. The remedial action to correct failures and restore
system/equipment or facility operation to prescribed capabilities and tolerances.
This includes unplanned and nonperiodic repairs, as well as systems adminis-
tration performed as a result of evidence indicating a failure has occurred or is
imminent.
 Equipment Management. The accomplishment of system, equipment, or facilities
activation, deactivation, relocation, and other similar activity.
 Modification. The authorized hardware and/or software configuration changes
required to improve or extend system, equipment, or facility operations or life, or
to satisfy new requirements.
 Special Activity. The authorized short-term or limited collection of data (special
sampling), system or equipment installation, equipment relocation, equipment
modification system test, and other similar activity for a specific purpose.
 Preventive/Routine Maintenance. Maintenance actions performed on system,
equipment, or facilities to ensure continued operation within the prescribed capa-
bilities or to minimize failure probability. Routine maintenance includes sched-
uled, planned, or periodic preventive maintenance actions.

An EMRS program is essential to maintaining critical equipment, setting staffing

levels, and formulating budgets.

Software Maintenance
Most software maintenance will fall into a few general categories:
 Loading commercial software, including operating systems and applications.
 Keeping current commercial software (operating systems and applications) up to
date. This includes loading interim patches.
 Assisting local programmers in developing, debugging, and maintaining staff
authored computer programs, and distributing such programs to other centers.
 Adapting software applications from other NTWCs and RTWPs to fit center needs,
and possibly improving the application for distribution to other centers.

Hardware Maintenance
Hardware maintenance can involve work on any of the following systems, depend-
ing on the center’s maintenance program philosophy and goals (for example, whether

5-22 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

maintenance is in-house or contracted). While this list is not exhaustive, it illustrates

the wide range of skills needed by the electronics staff at a center:
 Seismometers
 Tide gages
 DART buoys
 PCs (operational and administrative)
 RISC workstations
 Servers
 Routers
 Cabling
 Firewalls
 Telephone systems, including answering machines
 Satellite uplinks and downlinks
 UHF and VHF links
 HAM radio transmitters

Electronics Technician Training

Electronics technicians must be proficient in at least three very distinct areas:
 Mechanical devices (e.g., tide gages)
 Electronic devices, including microelectronics
 Software

International training is available for both tide gage and seismometer installation
and maintenance (see below). Training in software applications, including operating
systems and programming, is also readily available and should be utilized whenever
possible.

Training on other electronic devices like routers, satellite downlinks, and HAM radio
transmitters is more difficult to obtain but should be budgeted for, as these types of
systems are crucial to center operations.

Seismometers
In July 2003 the USA National Science Foundation released a report titled, “Review
of the Global Seismographic Network.” In this review it was stated that “the Review
Committee is obliged and pleased to note that this community enterprise, the GSN,
has been an extraordinary success. The establishment of a high-quality global digital

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-23

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

network has been achieved, and it now serves as the primary source of data for seis-
mologists worldwide.”

The sensor of choice has been the STS-1, with the KS-54000I an acceptable alternate.
Both sensors have yielded high quality data, but the STS-1 has a significantly broader
band of response. The future availability of the STS-1, however, is in question for two
reasons:
(a) The high quality and uniformity of the sensor depends on the personal skill of
the designer/assembler, who has intimated that he no longer wishes to build the
instrument.

(b) The original supply of fabrication material is nearly exhausted, and the uniformity
depends in part on use of this common material.

As the GSN begins a decade of O&M, sensor failure will become more common. The
question arises as to where replacement STS-1 instruments can be obtained, and ulti-
mately whether a suitable replacement for the STS-1 can be developed. One possibil-
ity is to close poorly performing stations and recycle their instruments; another is to
purchase spare instruments from other networks with surplus equipment. But in the
long run, a replacement broadband sensor needs to be developed.

With the above caveats it becomes evident that the decision for a NTWC to field some
of their own seismometers is not clear cut. In the short term the existing networks
will likely meet TWS needs, except in oceanic regions where the network is currently
sparse or non-existent, and underwater landslides are a significant threat. An exam-
ple of this situation is the Hawaiian Islands, where the State of Hawaii and PTWC
have installed additional seismometers. Longer term needs will depend largely on the
future actions of those operating the international networks.

If a NTWC opts to augment existing networks with their own deployed and main-
tained seismometers there are numerous references to assist the Center in the
endeavor. One such document is a USA USGS publication “Methods of Installing
United States National Seismographic Network (USNSN) Stations—A Construction
Manual, Open-File Report 02-144 2002.” The USGS has learned that after many years
of network operation some of the important design features of the US National Seis-
mograph Network include:
 Use of off-the-shelf electronic equipment when possible;
 The ability to install a seismic station in diverse environments;
 A physically protective, dry, and thermally stable environment for the broadband
sensors;
 An overall station design that is easy to maintain;
 Manageable installation costs.

5-24 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

Further guidance for NTWCs to deploy seismic stations is given by the IRIS GSN
Design Goals Subcommittee Report— Global Seismic Network Design Goals Update
August 26, 2002.

In addition to training material for seismic installations from the USA USGS and other
governments, sensor manufactures offer model specific training. For example, Guralp
Corporation offers maintenance training at [Link]
training/[Link], where they break down maintenance into electronics and
mechanics.

The Public Seismology Network website ([Link] has posted manuals

for several popular types of seismograph equipment. These are:
 Teledyne/Geotech BB-13 Long Period Sensor Operator and Maintenance Manual
 Sprengnether MEQ800 Portable Seismic System Technical Manual
 Instructions for Construction of a Lehman Seismometer by Kelly Knight

Tide Gages
International tide gage networks are coordinated by UNESCO-IOC. Data and train-
ing are administered by several sources, notably the Permanent Service for Mean Sea
Level (PSMSL) of the Proudman Oceanographic Laboratory (POL), UK, which is acces-
sible at [Link] The applicable tide gage materials are IOC
Manuals and Guides No. 14: Volumes I – IV.

Volumes I – IV comprise the IOC Manual on Sea Level Measurement and Interpreta-
tion. Volume I (Basic Principles) was published in 1985 and is based on training
courses held at the Proudman Oceanographic Laboratory (POL) on behalf of the
PSMSL and IOC. It contains information on the scientific aspects of sea level change
and on practical aspects of sea level measurement and data reduction. Volume II
(Emerging Technologies) was published in 1994 and is complementary to the earlier
volume, extending and updating the material on measurements.

In the late 1990s, it was realized that the contents of Volumes I – II were beginning to
show their age and so Volume III was constructed and finally published in 2000. A
much larger Volume IV followed in 2006. However, note that Volumes I – III are still
useful, and still provide the basic sets of information for people intending to install
and operate tide gauges.

Manuals I – IV are available in both paper and electronic forms. For paper versions,
email psmsl@[Link]. Electronic versions are provided at [Link]
psmsl/ as PDF files.
 Volume I: Basic Procedures
 Volume II: Emerging Technologies

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 5-25

 Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection

 Volume III: Reappraisals and Recommendations as of the year 2000

 Volume IV: An update to 2006

Several updates to sections of the older manuals are also available e.g.:
 List of tide gage manufacturers (updated from Vols. 1 and 2).
 Glossary of terms used in tidal measurements and analysis (updated from Vol. 1).
 Frequently used abbreviations and acronyms (updated from Vol. 1).

GLOSS (or GLOSS-related) training courses have been held a rate of approximately
one per year since 1983. These have been held in all continents and in all languages,
with the majority of the first courses held at the Proudman Oceanographic Labora-
tory. For people unable to attend courses, most of the training materials employed in
a typical course are available on the web at the PSMSL training page ([Link]
[Link]/psmsl/training/[Link]).

Another source of documentation on tide gage installation, maintenance, and use is

from the website: [Link] which provides
access to the Australian Tides Manual Special Publication No. 9.

Important Points to Remember about Maintenance

Programs for Tsunami Warning Systems
 The need for a well coordinated and supported maintenance program is critical to
the success of NTWCs and RTWPs.
 Whether a center operates with an in-house maintenance program, contracts out
all maintenance, or has a program that is a mixture of the two approaches, it must
track all maintenance activities in order to effectively manage the program.
 A center should establish what constitutes reportable maintenance events. These
are events that should be tracked in order to maintain the center’s programs.
 There is international training available for both tide gage and seismometer
installation and maintenance.
 Training on other electronic devices like routers, satellite downlinks, and HAM
radio transmitters are more difficult to obtain, but should be budgeted for as these
types of systems are crucial to center operations.

5-26 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Chapter 6
Tsunami Warning Decision Support
Once an earthquake has been detected and its magnitude and location analyzed,
tsunami warning centers use criteria and, where available, models to determine if an
initial tsunami warning should be issued. Tsunami warning centers require additional
capabilities to refine the forecast beyond the initial warning. This chapter focuses
on the tsunami warning system decision support programs that are used in watch-
stander decision making:
 Criteria for issuing warnings based upon science and historical events.
 Situational awareness software that helps watch-standers detect events in real
time.
 Computer models of tsunami wave height based upon science, historical events,
and earth observations.

Local Seismic
Networks

GLOSS Tide Gage

Networks

Local Tide Gage

Networks

Figure 6-1. Where Decision Support Fits into the End-to-End Tsunami Warning System Chain

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-1

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

 Assessment of impacts of events based upon inundation models, preparedness,

land use and mitigation programs, etc.
 Training for operational watch standers.
 Research and development to improve center operations and products.

The infrastructure required for decision support programs, including the hardware,
operating systems, communications, and maintenance programs, are discussed in
Chapter 5, Tsunami Detection. This chapter should be read by persons who need to
understand the types of programs that support operational decision making, and how
these programs are evolving.

How Does Tsunami Decision Support Fit into an End-to-End

Tsunami Warning System?
As discussed in Chapter 5, National Tsunami Warning Centers (NTWC) and Regional
Tsunami Watch Providers (RTWP) function on a day-to-day basis much as a seismo-
logical observatory does. A tsunami warning center should do two things as fast as
possible: locate any moderate or larger sized earthquake, and assess its magnitude.
Once that is accomplished, the center can begin to assess any potential tsunami
threat to the regions in its area of responsibility (AOR).

The rapid detection and characterization of tsunami-generating earthquakes by com-

puter applications programs provide the first indication of a potential tsunami in an
end-to-end tsunami warning system. Initial seismic-based warnings are subsequently
refined by the detection of tsunami-generated changes in sea level, measured by
tide gages and buoys. Computer applications programs are used to analyze sea level
data to generate forecasts of tsunami wave height and inundation for specific coastal
areas. The refinement of initial seismic-based warnings by good computer models can
greatly increase the credibility of the warnings by decreasing false alarms.

What Is in this Chapter?

This chapter contains sections that discuss the following topics:
 Bulletin threshold criteria used by some NTWCs and RTWPs
 Description of watch stander situational awareness software used at West
Coast/Alaska Tsunami Warning Center (WC/ATWC)
 Tsunami wave height models
 Computer inundation models for assessing local impacts
 Watch stander training requirements
 Research and development to support operations and product improvement

6-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

What Are the Most Important Points to Remember about

Tsunami Decision Support Requirements for NTWCs and
RTWPs?
 The rapid detection of tsunami-generating earthquakes by computer applications
programs provides the first indication of a potential tsunami.
 Situational awareness software is crucial to watch-stander efforts to respond as
quickly as possible to seismic events.
 Computer applications programs are used to analyze sea level data to generate
forecasts of tsunami wave height and inundation for specific coastal areas.
 Training programs and applied research help centers improve their performance.

Bulletin Threshold Criteria

Tsunami bulletins are initially issued solely on the basis of seismic data. Three key
earthquake parameters that can be determined quickly from seismic waveform data
for the evaluation of an earthquake’s tsunamigenic potential are:
 Location - whether the earthquake is located under or very near the sea
 Depth - whether the earthquake is located close enough to the earth’s surface to
have caused a significant displacement of that surface
 Magnitude - the size of the earthquake

Bulletins are issued as soon as the earthquake’s tsunami potential has been analyzed.
The first messages are based on earthquake magnitude and location. The type of
message issued generally depends on predetermined criteria or thresholds.

After the initial bulletin has been issued, a tsunami warning center must moni-
tor recorded tsunami effects through tide gages and tsunameters (such as the Deep
Ocean Assessment and Reporting of Tsunami [ DART™] system) to confirm the exis-
tence or nonexistence of a tsunami and its degree of severity. In coordination with
other NTWCs and RTWPs, the NTWC should issue a cancellation, extension, or final
bulletin as appropriate.

Tsunami history and pre-event modeling are taken into account along with observed
tsunami amplitudes when determining the extent of danger for the AOR. A center
may refrain from issuing a warning or may issue the warning for only selected areas
if tsunami history (and modeling, if available) indicates there is no danger, or danger
only to selected areas.

Bulletin Thresholds
Bulletin thresholds may vary somewhat due to local circumstances. Tsunami warn-
ing centers should strive, however, to adhere as closely as possible to the generally

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-3

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

accepted values recommended by the Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commis-

sion’s Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning System (IOC/IOTWS – II, January 2006) and
used by most, if not all, NTWCs and RTWPs. These are given in Table 6-1. Definitions
used in the table are:
 Earthquake Magnitude: The moment magnitude, Mw (Table 3-3), is more accu-
rate for large earthquakes than the more common Richter magnitude. It is recom-
mended that the moment magnitude to use for initial bulletins be Mwp, based on
the first arriving seismic P waves. Subsequent estimates of Mw may be made by
methods based on later-arriving seismic waves.
 Local Tsunami: A local tsunami is one with destructive or life threatening effects
usually limited to within 100 kilometers (km) of the epicenter.
 Regional Tsunami: A regional tsunami is one with destructive or life threatening
effects usually limited to within 1000 km of the epicenter.
 Ocean-wide Tsunami: An ocean-wide tsunami is one with destructive or life
threatening effects that can extend across an entire ocean basin.

Table 6-1. Product Thresholds Based on Earthquake Strength

Earthquake Description
Earthquake Earthquake Magnitude of Tsunami
Depth Location Mw or Mwp Potential Bulletin Type
< 100 km Under or very ≥ 7.9 Potential for a Tsunami Watch
near the sea destructive ocean- /Warning
wide tsunami

7.6 to 7.8 Potential for a Tsunami Watch

destructive regional /Warning
tsunami

7.0 to 7.5 Potential for a Tsunami Watch

destructive local /Warning
tsunami

6.5 to 7.0 or Very small potential Tsunami

inland for a destructive local Information
tsunami Bulletin

Inland ≥ 6.5 No tsunami potential Tsunami

Information
Bulletin

≥ 100 km ≥ 6.5 No tsunami potential Tsunami

Information
Bulletin

For events that could trigger a tsunami that poses danger across an ocean basin,
the area within 3 hours tsunami travel-time of the epicenter will be placed in a tsu-
nami warning status, with the area within a 3- to 6-hour travel-time zone placed in a
watch status. For smaller events only expected to be dangerous locally, warnings will

6-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

be fixed to a certain distance from the source with no watch, as the tsunami is not
expected to be dangerous elsewhere.

Japanese Meteorological Agency Approach

Figure 6-2, from the JMA website, graphically illustrates the basic decision process,
including criteria based upon initial earthquake magnitude, that most NTWCs and
RTWPs use when an earthquake occurs.

Figure 6-2. Basic Warning Center Response Procedures

(Source: JMA, [Link]

Thailand National Disaster Warning Center Approach

Based upon the Thailand NDWC’s Concept of Operations (Draft Version 3.3, March
2006), prepared by the Pacific Disaster Center, Thailand has slightly different stan-
dard operating procedures for the tsunami warning decision. Once NDWC receives
notification of seismic activity or of an earthquake of greater than Magnitude 7.0
Richter, from either domestic or international hazard information providers, the
supervisor (duty officer) consults with the experts of the command center. The
experts verify the information, use computer-based simulations to estimate the tsu-
nami wave’s arrival to coastal areas, and generate and analyze scenarios to assess the
potential risk. Information from various geophysical sources is collected, compared,
and analyzed to verify earthquake information, ensure redundancy, and understand
the maximum level of risk (illustrated in Figure 6-3).

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-5

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

Figure 6-3. Summary Table Showing “Levels of Risk” and the Distance of an Earthquake’s
Effective Radius from Coastal Areas of Thailand
(Source: NDWC)

Once an earthquake of Magnitude 7.0 or greater is confirmed, the NDWC immediately

informs all relevant agencies. Command Output Officers are also informed to “stand
by” and prepare to activate the warning towers. The NDWC immediately communi-
cates with officers at the Similan Island to closely monitor sea level changes, which
will indicate the presence of an approaching tsunami. Within 20 minutes of receiving
the notification, NDWC compiles, analyzes, and assesses the probable impact, based
on the hazard warning criteria shown in Figure 6-3.

In addition, NDWC has developed criteria to assess the possibility of a tsunami being
generated based on the depth of the earthquake or its hypocenter (which is used to
further refine the risk level), as shown in Figure 6-4.

Approach Used at a Center with Multiple Criteria

The thresholds listed in Table 6-1 cannot always be followed due to local circum-
stances. Figure 6-5 shows the thresholds used by the WC/ATWC for the west and east
coasts of the United States, and the Caribbean Sea. These differences are substan-
tial but necessary to meet unique circumstances in each of the areas served by this
RTWP. Such differences place a large burden on operational watch standers as they
must keep track of several different criteria during a single event. If there are mul-
tiple events occurring simultaneously, or nearly simultaneously, this complicates the
use of criteria thresholds to issue a tsunami bulletin.

6-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

Depth of Hypocenter
Magnitude less than 100 km more than 100 km

Low possibility to generate Tsunami Low possibility to generate Tsunami

5.0–6.4
Advisory Advisory

Possibility to generate Tsunami Low possibility to generate Tsunami

6.5–6.9
Alert/Watching Advisory

Possibility to generate Tsunami Possibility to generate Tsunami

7.0–7.7
Alert/Watching Alert/Watching

Very high possibility

Possibility to generate Tsunami
> 7.8 to generate Tsunami
Alert/Watching
Warning

Figure 6-4. Likelihood of Tsunami Generation Considering the Hypocenter’s Location

(Source: NDWC)

WC/ATWC-Pacific WC/ATWC-Atlantic
Area AK, BC, Bering Arctic O., Not in East Coast East Coast Gulf Mex Puerto Not AOR Not AOR Not AOR
WA, OR, Sea and Bering AOR US & Inland Gulf St. L Rico/ Western Eastern Atlantic
CA Deep Shallow Canada <400 Mile US VI Caribbean Caribbean
Mag Mag
4 TIS*** TIS*** TIS*** 4 TIS*** 4 TIS TIS
SEAK71 SEAK71 SEAK71 SEXX60 SEXX60 SEXX60
or SEUS71
5 5 TIS TIS
SEXX60 SEXX60

6 6 TIS TIS TIS TIS TIS TIS

WEXX22 WEXX22 WEXX22 WEXX22 WEXX22 WEXX22
and and and and and and
WEXX32 WEXX32 WEXX32 WEXX32 WEXX32 WEXX32
Warning *
6.4 Puerto Rico/
US VI
6.5 TIS TIS TIS TIS Warning * TIS
WEXX20/30
WEPA43 WEPA43 WEPA43 WEPA43 Puerto Rico/ WEXX22
and and and and US VI and
6.7
WEAK53 WEAK53 WEAK53 WEAK53 WEXX20 WEXX32
with 6.8 Warning * Warning * and
appropriate 350Km Gulf only WEXX30
Evaluation WEXX20 WEXX20
7
and and
7.1 Warning * Warning * WEXX30 WEXX30
350Km Pribilof/
WEPA41 Aleutian Is.
and WEPA41
WEAK51 and
7.5 WEAK51 7.5
7.6 Warning* Advisory/ 7.6 Warning*
1000Km Watch/ 1000Km
WEPA41/51 Warning WEXX20/30
7.8 7.8
WEPA41
7.9 Warning and 7.9 Warning Warning * TIS/Warn-
3W/3W WEAK51 3W/3W Puerto Rico/ ing Spec.
WEPA41/ WEXX20/ US VI area
WEXX22/32
WEAK51 WEXX30 WEXX20/30
and
WEXX20/30
10 10

Notes: TIS Tsunami Information Statement

TIB Tsunami Information Bulletin

Figure 6-5. Bulletin Thresholds Used by the WC/ATWC

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-7

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

Important Points to Remember about Bulletin Thresholds

Based Solely on Earthquake Information
 Bulletins are issued as soon as the earthquake’s tsunami potential has been
analyzed.
 Tsunami history and pre-event modeling are taken into account along with
observed tsunami amplitudes in determining the extent of danger for the AOR.
 All tsunami warning centers should use the internationally agreed-upon suite of
message products to avoid confusion, especially amongst the tourist population.
 Centers should strive to adhere as closely as possible to the generally accepted
bulletin threshold values recommended by IOC/IOTWS.
 An RTWP may require different criteria for different portions of its AOR.

Watch Stander Situational Awareness Support

EarlyBird and EarthVu, two software packages developed at WC/ATWC, are excellent
examples of an operational suite of tools that assist watch standers in maintaining
situational awareness. Situational awareness is the capacity of the watch stander to
detect seismic events in real time.

EarlyBird
WC/ATWC’s EarlyBird seismic data processing system is used for both real-time and
post-processing of seismic data. EarlyBird is a combination of standard USGS Earth-
worm modules, WC/ATWC-developed Earthworm modules, and stand-alone seismic
processing software.

EarlyBird automatically locates and sizes, using Mb, Ml, Ms, Mw, and Mwp,
(Table 3‑3) worldwide, regional, and local earthquakes. Graphical interfaces for the
Earthworm modules have been created to allow interactive additions and changes
to automatically computed parameters during initial earthquake processing, or after
the fact. Real-time data can be monitored and interacted with directly through Earth-
worm modules. Data logged to disk by the system can be analyzed immediately after
logging through stand-alone analysis programs. The automatically computed seismic
parameters are interfaced with the tsunami message generation software and the
EarthVu GIS.

Seismic data arrives at the WC/ATWC by four basic paths: digital broadband data via
leased circuits, digital broadband data transmitted via the CrestNet, digital broadband
data transmitted over the internet, and digital data transmitted via a Very Small Aper-
ture Terminal (VSAT) satellite ground station system. Data are exported to other cen-
ters using the CrestNet or internet.

6-8 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

Figure 6-6. Connections Between Import/Export and Processing Systems

at WC/ATWC

A separate PC is used to acquire data from each path and to export data and hypo-
centers to other centers. Connections between import/export and processing systems
are shown in Figure 6-6. Switches, routers, PCs, and data paths are configured to
eliminate any single points of failure.

A network consisting of eight Windows XP-based PCs comprises the EarlyBird seis-
mic processing system. Five PCs, as described above, import and export data using
standard Earthworm modules. Two of the remaining PCs are the main and backup
seismic data processors. Both constantly monitor earthquake activity on approxi-
mately 250 seismic channels. The last PC is a training/development PC that mirrors
the main EarlyBird system.

The data processing flow within EarlyBird 1 is shown in Figure 6-7. Earthworm rings
are shared memory locations. The windows icons indicate modules that accommodate
user interaction and review. Module Pick_wcatwc analyzes the signal to determine the
onset of an earthquake. Once a pick has been made, the signal is further analyzed
to determine Mb, Ml, and Mwp magnitude parameters. Alarms are triggered when
parameters have been exceeded (location and size). When a large earthquake occurs
(M>5), long period and broadband data are processed to refine the magnitude esti-
mate. Each of the modules is described in greater detail below.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-9

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

Figure 6-7. Data Processing Flow Within the WC/ATWC Earlybird Software

Earlybird uses the following standard Earthworm modules:

 adsend - digitize analog data
 copystatus - copy errors/heartbeats from one ring to another decimate - filter and
reduce the sample rate of data for export and processing
 export_generic/scn - send hypocenter and trace data to other centers
 import_generic - gather hypocenter and trace data from other centers
 import_ida - receive data from the Incorporated Research Institutions for Seis-
mology (IRIS) International Deployment of Accelerometers (IDA) network into
Earthworm
 liss2ew - receive data from the IRIS Albuquerque Seismic Laboratory (ASL) net-
work into Earthworm
 ringdup_scn/generic - copy messages from one ring to another
 statmgr - monitor modules attached to a ring
 startstop - start and restart all modules when necessary

6-10 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

Several locally developed Earthworm modules are:

 atplayer - imulate real-time events with older data
 develo - display real-time, short period seismic data in develocorder type view
 disk_wcatwc - log trace data to disk
 dumptide - log certain channels to disk (tide gage data)
 hypo_display - display computed hypocenter parameters and adjust P data
 hypo_print - log hypocenters to disk and EarthVu
 latency_mon - track data outages and latencies for all channels
 loc_wcatwc - associator/locator module
 lpproc - display real-time, long period seismic data and process data for Ms
 mm - process surface wave data for Mm (Mw)
 mtinver - process data for moment tensor
 page_alarm - send alarm messages through various interfaces
 pick_wcatwc - P-picking/magnitude determination algorithm

Four stand-alone, non-Earthworm-based programs are also part of the EarlyBird

system:
 ANALYZE - program reads, analyzes and displays seismic data previously logged
to disk, and archive data to CD-ROM
 LOCATE - watch stander can interactively locate detected earthquakes, trigger
Long Period processing in lpproc, or the watch stander can run the ANALYZE
program to determine Ms and Mw, and display location and P data to a PC screen
 MESSAGE2 - program creates tsunami warning and other messages
 SUMMARY - program displays earthquake summary and procedures to monitor

The stand-alone programs are designed to operate completely independently; that is,
one does not have to be running for the others to operate. Data are shared between
the programs through disk files, and sometimes semaphores. The Earthworm system
is modular. If one module breaks, the others should not be affected. The Earthworm
module statmgr monitors the modules and will restart them if necessary. The Earthworm
startstop module starts and stops the Earthworm modules, and gives the status of each.

All of the programs, including the Earthworm-based components of EarlyBird, run

on a PC with a graphics adapter that splits the screen into twelve monitors. The pro-
grams ANALYZE, LOCATE, and SUMMARY each display a window covering one
monitor. Earthworm modules lpproc, develo, hypo_display, mm, mtinver, and latency_
mon also have graphical displays that utilize a monitor. MESSAGE2 brings up a dialog
box when activated in LOCATE. The EarthVu system uses the other four monitors.
The EarlyBird system can be run on a single-monitor PC, but data will not be as clear
as on a twelve-monitor system.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-11

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

EarthVu

Tip
EarthVu is geographic display software developed at the
WC/ATWC. Its main functions are to:
 Display epicenters on various scale maps
EarthVu has four modes
 Overlay pertinent information such as historic tsuna- and runs in parallel with
mis and earthquakes, volcanoes, elevation contours, EarlyBird.
roads, pipelines, tsunami watch/warning areas, etc.
 Provide a graphical platform for computing tsunami
models
 Display results of previously computed models for calibration during tsunami
warnings
 Compute and display tsunami travel times
 Interface with earthquake and tsunami databases
 Create maps to link to tsunami messages issued by the center

EarthVu runs in parallel with the Early Bird seismic processing system and normally
uses four computer monitors. EarthVu is sent automatic and interactively computed
earthquake locations. As these locations are acquired, appropriate maps are shown
on the monitors.

EarthVu can be run in one of four modes:

1) Display large-scale maps and overlays
2) Interface for tsunami travel time maps
3) Display small scale maps
4) Display regional maps showing the last 7 days’ events

Overlays
Several overlays are available in EarthVu:
 Major Cities
 Tsunamis - all known Pacific basin tsunamis, from NOAA National Geographic
Data Center (NGDC)
 Earthquakes - all known quakes with magnitude > 5, 1900-present, from USGS
National Earthquake Information Center (NEIC)
 Volcanoes - from Global Volcanism Program
 Seismometers - seismometer data processed at WC/ATWC
 Tide Gages - tide gage sites recorded at WC/ATWC
 Watch/Warning Areas - present tsunami watch/warning status

6-12 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

 Lat/Lon Grids - meridians and parallels at specifiable intervals

 Cities - from U.S. Department of Defense (DOD) Digital Chart of the World
 Contours - from DOD Digital Chart of the World
 Geographic Names - from DOD Digital Chart of the World
 Airports, roads, pipelines, power lines, trails, railroads - from DOD Digital Chart
of the World

Other interactive options available in EarthVu are: display detailed data on a tsunami,
volcano, tide gage, or seismometer with a mouse click; re-draw a map with color
coded elevations/bathymetries; turn on/off voice option (says location as displayed);
call historic databases; and specify an area of the map to expand in the small-scale
map program.

Historic tsunami and earthquake data are queried with program HISTORY, which
is called from EarthVu. HISTORY retrieves information from the databases by date,
location, and magnitude. The output can be in summary form or in great detail, and
is written to the screen and/or printer. The earthquake database is from the USGS/
NEIC. It contains all earthquakes between 1900 and the present over magnitude 5
(more than 70,000 quakes). The tsunami database is taken mostly from NOAA/NGDC
studies (such as Lander et al., 1993; Lander, 1996). It contains more than 1,000 Pacific
basin tsunamis dating back to 47 BC. The same information accessed by program
HISTORY is also used by EarthVu and the other programs when displaying tsunamis
and earthquake data on maps.

Tsunami Travel Times and Models

Tsunami travel time and tsunami model computations can also be performed and
displayed through the EarthVu interface. Tsunami travel time results are displayed
on an EarthVu map. EarthVu acts as a graphic interface where model areas are speci-
fied and results are displayed. EarthVu also displays pre-computed model results and
provides a method to scale the results based on recorded tsunamis during a warning.
Far-field tsunami amplitude forecasts can be made using the Model/Results option
in the EarthVu program. These forecasts are based on pre-computed tsunami models
scaled by observed sea level data. Over 300 pre-computed models are available. For
WC/ATWC, maximum amplitudes (zero-to-peak in meters) are saved at 99 places
along the coasts of Alaska, British Columbia, Washington, Oregon, California, Hawaii,
and at all DART buoys. Models are run with grid increments of 5 feet over the deep
ocean, 1 foot over the shelf, and, where necessary to describe local shoreline configu-
ration. Nonlinear, shallow-water equations are used with friction effects over the finer
grids included. Inundation is not taken into account. The basic technique is described
by Kowalik and Whitmore (1991, Science of Tsunami Hazards). The methodology of
utilizing pre-computed models during tsunami warnings is described by Whitmore
and Sokolowski (1996, Science of Tsunami Hazards).

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-13

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

Important Points to Remember about

Using WC/ATWC’s EarthVu and EarlyBird Software
to Maintain Situational Awareness
 EarthVu runs in parallel with the EarlyBird seismic processing system and
normally uses four computer monitors.
 EarlyBird automatically locates and sizes (using Mb, Ml, Ms, Mw, and Mwp) world-
wide, regional, and local earthquakes.
 EarthVu can be run in one of four modes and several GIS overlays are available for
the watch stander to use.
 Tsunami travel time and tsunami model computations can be performed and
displayed through the EarthVu interface.
 EarthVu also displays precomputed model results and provides a method to scale
the results based on recorded (by tide gages and DART buoys) tsunamis during a
warning.

Tsunami Wave Height and Inundation Computer Models

The current focus at established tsunami warning centers is to develop a fast, accu-
rate operational tsunami forecast system that provides an optimal interpretation of
the available earthquake and sea-level data, and quantifies the potential tsunami
impact on coastal communities. Such a system is critical to decision-makers at tsu-
nami warning centers, who must rapidly assess the hazard to coastal communities.
The stakes are high: A missed warning could result in devastating fatalities, while
needless evacuations are dangerous, expensive, and erode confidence in the warn-
ing system. Tsunami forecasting technology under development at NOAA and JMA
is based on the well-tested approach used in most hazard forecast systems—i.e., the
integration of real-time measurement and modeling technologies.

Model-based interpretation of the tsunami, such as those by the Method of Splitting

Tsunamis (MOST) model developed at NOAA’s Pacific Marine Environmental Laboratory
(PMEL), occurs in two stages. First, a pre-computed database of deep-ocean model simu-
lations is exploited to formally invert the real-time tsunameter (DART buoy) data stream
and produce a linear best-fit solution in deep water; this step is completed within a few
minutes of data acquisition. Second, the deep-water values just offshore are used to initi-
ate real-time execution of nonlinear inundation models to provide community-specific
forecasts of tsunami inundation; this step is completed in less than 10 minutes.

The MOST Model

The evolution of earthquake-generated tsunami waves has three distinctive stages:
generation, propagation, and runup. The MOST numerical model (NOAA Technical

6-14 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

Memorandum ERL PMEL-112, 1997) computes all three stages,

providing a complete tsunami simulation capability. Tip
The MOST model uses a
Generation precomputed database
of deep-ocean tsunami
The generation stage of tsunami evolution includes the formation
simulations.
of the initial disturbance of the ocean surface due to the earth-
quake-triggered deformation of the seafloor. This initial water
surface disturbance evolves into a long gravity wave radiating
from the earthquake source. Modeling of the initial stage of tsunami generation is
therefore closely linked to studies of earthquake source mechanisms.

The tsunami generation process is based on a fault plane model of the earthquake
source (Gusiakov, 1978; Okada, 1985), which assumes an incompressible liquid
layer on an underlying elastic half-space to characterize the ocean and the Earth’s
crust. The implementation of this elastic fault plane model (Titov, 1997) utilizes a
formula for static sea-floor deformation to calculate the initial conditions required for
subsequent computations of tsunami propagation and inundation.

Propagation
A tsunami can propagate long distances before it strikes a shoreline hundreds or
thousands of kilometers from the earthquake source. To accurately model tsunami
propagation over such large distances, the Earth’s curvature should be taken into
account. Other factors, such as Coriolis forces and dispersion, may also be important.

Dispersion changes the wave shape due to slightly different propagation speeds
of waves with different frequencies. This effect can be taken into account even
without the explicit use of dispersive terms in the governing equations; Shuto (1991)
suggested that this process could be simulated by exploiting the numerical dispersion
inherent in finite-difference algorithms. This method accounts for dispersive
effects, but allows the use of non-dispersive linear or nonlinear equations for wave
propagation modeling. The MOST propagation model uses a numerical dispersion
scheme and the nonlinear shallow-water wave equations in spherical coordinates,
with Coriolis terms (Murty, 1984):

(uh)λ + (vhcosφ)φ
ht + = 0
Rcosφ

uuλ vuφ ghλ gdλ

ut + + + = + fv
Rcosφ R Rcosφ Rcosφ

uvλ vvφ ghφ gdφ

vt + + + = - fu
Rcosφ R R R

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-15

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

where λ is longitude, φ is latitude, h = h(λ,φ,t) + d(λ,φ,t) is the amplitude, d(λ,φ,t) is

the undisturbed water depth, u(λ,φ,t), v(λ,φ,t) are the depth-averaged velocities in
the longitude and latitude directions, respectively, g is the gravity accelration, f is the
Coriolis parameter ( f = 2ωsinφ), and R is the Earth radius. In the MOST model, these
equations are solved numerically using a splitting method similar to that described by
Titov (1997).

Inundation
Runup of a tsunami onto dry land is probably the most underdeveloped part of any
tsunami simulation model, primarily because of a serious lack of two major types of
data: high-quality field measurements for testing of the models, and fine-resolution
bathymetry/topography data. The first major obstacle to improving simulations of the
inundation process, i.e., the lack of high-quality experimental and field measurements
of runup, has been especially severe. Recently, this problem has been somewhat allevi-
ated by a series of large-scale runup experiments conducted at the Coastal Engineer-
ing Research Center (CERC) of the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (Briggs et al. 1995)
and by several post-tsunami surveys that provided high-quality field data (Yeh et al.,
1993; Synolakis et al., 1995; Imamura et al., 1995; Yeh et al., 1995; Borrero et al., 1997).

The second serious obstacle to accurate inundation model simulations is the require-
ment for high-resolution bathymetry and topography data in critical near-shore areas;
in most cases, 10- to 50-meter horizontal resolution of gridded bathymetry and topog-
raphy data are essential. Such high-resolution data are not easily obtained. Where
adequate bathymetric and topographic data are available, the MOST model inunda-
tion computations are sufficiently accurate to develop useful hazard mitigation tools
and guidance products such as inundation maps.

Asteroid-Generated Tsunami Model

A model of an asteroid-generated tsunami was developed by Robert Weiss, Kai
Wünnemann, and Heinrich Bahlburg (2006) in Geophysical Journal International.
This numerical model estimates the generation, propagation, and runup of tsunamis
caused by oceanic impacts.

Hypervelocity impacts of asteroids in marine environments produce tsunami waves

independent of the water depth and the diameter of the projectile, although the char-
acteristics of induced waves are affected by these parameters. The authors present a
model, consisting of the well-known impact model and a nonlinear wave propagation
model, to study the generation and subsequent spread-out of the initial wave pattern
caused by the strike of an asteroid or comet in the ocean. The numerical simula-
tion of oceanic impacts requires some changes and extensions to the original impact
model code. The handling of different materials (water and solid rocks) is particularly
crucial due to the cratering process.

For the simulation of the propagation of tsunami waves generated by the impact pro-
cess, they use a newly developed wave propagation model, which is based on the

6-16 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

nonlinear shallow water theory with boundary conditions derived from the impact
model. The runup of the tsunami wave on the coastline is handled as a special case
of reflection and is realized by the well-established MOST code. Besides the model
description, the authors illustrate the capability of the modeling scheme by the simu-
lation of the strike of an asteroid 800 meters in diameter on a 5000-meter-deep ocean
at 10.2 kilometers per second, the subsequent propagation of the induced tsunami
waves over an artificial bathymetry, and the runup of the wave on the coast.

Other Inundation Models

Several other inundation models are being developed in addition to the inundation
component of the MOST model. For example, The FLO-2D® model by FLO-2D Soft-
ware, Inc., can be used to create detailed overland inundation mapping for ocean
storm surge or tsunami hazards and is particularly effective in urban areas where
buildings, obstructions, streets and channels can affect the flood wave progres-
sion. The modeling detail provided by FLO-2D® exceeds that of other hydrodynamic
models, and the results include predicted flow depths, velocities, discharge hydro-
graphs, dynamic and static pressure, specific energy, and area of inundation. The
specific input data required for a FLO-2D® ocean storm surge model is wave height
or water surface elevation as a function of time (time-stage data pairs) for the coastal
grid elements.

Important Points to Remember about Tsunami Modeling

 NTWCs and RTWPs should strive to implement a fast, accurate, operational tsu-
nami forecast system that provides an optimal interpretation of the available earth-
quake and sea-level data, and quantifies the potential tsunami impact on coastal
communities.
 The evolution of earthquake-generated tsunami waves has three distinctive stages:
generation, propagation, and runup. The NOAA MOST numerical model computes
all three stages, providing a complete tsunami simulation capability.
 Runup of a tsunami onto dry land is probably the most underdeveloped part of
current tsunami simulation models, primarily because of a lack of two major types
of data: high-quality field measurements for testing of the models, and fine-resolu-
tion bathymetry/topography data.
 Models for asteroid-generated tsunamis are also available in addition to models for
earthquake-generated tsunamis
 Other inundation models exist in addition to the MOST inundation model

Watch Stander Training

A scientist in the position of watch stander must possess the professional judgment
necessary to gather and evaluate appropriate information for accuracy and complete-
ness, and to implement the correct response in a timely manner for the protection of

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-17

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

lives and property. He/she must be able to make obser-

vations, calculations, and interpretations, using all avail-
able geophysical, oceanographic, and geographic data,
Tip
A tsunami warning
obtained by diverse methods of communications, to center should have
locate an earthquake, determine its magnitude, evaluate both geophysicists and
its potential for tsunami generation, evaluate appropri- oceanographers on staff.
ate tsunami data for degree of potential threat, and issue,
with follow-up, a tsunami watch, a tsunami warning, or
other information messages as necessary.

The ability to take appropriate actions is based on an expert knowledge of theoretical

and applied geophysics, volcanology, sedimentology, regional tectonics, geography,
and oceanography of both the source region as well as potential impact areas. These
skills and this knowledge are not all acquired during study in a single academic dis-
cipline; a long period of on-the-job training is required for geophysicists and
oceanographers to perform at an optimum level.

A center should have a mix of geophysicists and oceanographers on staff. Further,

the center should have a rigorous on-station training program that provides periodic
training on the end-to-end procedures for obtaining and processing data and issuing
test bulletins. One effective way to do this is to utilize historic data from past events.
Some NTWCs and RTWPs have developed computer simulation programs (notably the
WC/ATWC’s EarlyBird system) to facilitate this type of training. These simulators can
provide watch standers with many years of experience in a short period of time.

In addition to providing experience for watch standers, periodic operational end-

to-end training also exercises the communications paths that a center uses to col-
lect data and disseminate bulletins. This is very important as these communications
channels are crucial to proper performance in actual events, which are relatively
infrequent.

Important Points to Remember about

Watch Stander Training
 A scientist in the position of watch stander must possess excellent professional
judgment.
 A long period of on-the-job training is required for geophysicists and oceanogra-
phers to perform at an optimum level.
 Periodic operational end-to-end training provides experience for watch standers
and also exercises the communications paths that a center uses to collect data and
disseminate bulletins.

6-18 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

Research and Development

Applied research and program development activities at RTWPs and NTWCs generally
fall into three broad categories:
 Science: Applied oceanographic and seismic research that leads to better models
of parameters like hypocenter location, earthquake tsunami generation character-
istics, tsunami wave speed and amplitude, inundation maps, etc. The emerging
“what if” technology falls in this category.
 Processing: Development of computer methods for speeding the processing of
seismic and sea level data, disseminating products to new technologies, and pro-
grams that assist watch standers in maintaining situational awareness.
 Social science: Developing education programs, warning messages, and other com-
munications that produce the desired reactions by constituents.

T
Each RTWP and NTWC can function acceptably without
a rigorous research and development program. A center ip
can rely on improvements and new techniques developed
A tsunami warning
at other NTWCs, RTWPs, and academic and government
center’s local research
research institutions. However, a center can often better
and development
address its own unique local problems. Additionally,
program can often best
a local research and development program creates an address local problems.
atmosphere of progress within a tsunami warning center.
A mix of oceanographers, seismologists, computer
programmers, and networking/communications experts is
optimal as it gives the center the skills needed to address research and development
in all three of the above categories.

In additional to building a multi-disciplinary staff, tsunami warning centers are urged

to establish and exercise strong links with academic institutions and other profes-
sional research groups such as the Asian Disaster Preparedness Center (ADPC) and
the Pacific Disaster Center (PDC). These links often lead to advances in procedures
and help the center remain on the cutting edge of new technology and techniques.
Collaborative ties can be established at nearby or co-located institutions, or by staff
who are alumni, or through contacts made at meetings and workshops.

Experimental Products
The four basic international products (warning, watch, advisory, and statement) may
not meet all the needs of an RTWP or a NTWC. For example, an RTWP may need
to develop or modify a specialized product to meet the needs of one or more of the
NTWCs it serves. A NTWC may need to develop or modify a specialized product to
meet unique conditions or requirements of one or more of its customers. Similarly,
RTWPs and NTWCs may contemplate providing a new, or changing an existing ser-
vice. In all these cases the warning center should establish and follow an a priori
process that has been thought through and discussed with the center’s customer base

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-19

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

well before the change process begins. Such an approach will help the center avoid
many of the pitfalls associated with making changes.

A new or changed product or service begins as a concept, which is developed into a

proposal. Once the proposal has been articulated but before development begins, the
tsunami warning center should ensure that implementing the new or changed prod-
uct or service would be acting in a fair and evenhanded manner with respect to all
stakeholders, and accomplished in a manner that maximizes fairness and openness.
Figure 6-8 describes the process to follow in developing and implementing a new or
enhanced product or service. Products and services in this process can be national or
local in scope. The six guiding principles outlined below should be followed when
considering whether a new product or service or change to an existing product or
service can be made.

Figure 6-8. Steps to Implementing an Experimental Product (from National Weather Service
Instruction 10-102 May 18, 2006)

6-20 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

Six guiding principles when considering beginning or changing an existing product

or service:
1. Mission connection - The product or service must be connected to the center’s
mission.
2. Life and property first - Protection of life and property must be placed first in
the allocation of resources and the development and dissemination of products
and services.
3. No surprises - All users, including those in the private sector, must be provided
adequate notice and opportunity for input into decisions regarding the develop-
ment and dissemination of products and services.
4. The stakeholders own the data - Open and unrestricted dissemination of pub-
licly funded information is good policy and may be the law.
5. Equity - All dealings with various constituents must be equitable and not show
favoritism to particular partners, particularly those in the academic and commer-
cial sectors. A service to a segment of the user community should not be provided
that cannot be provided to all similar types of users.
6. Maintain and explain the routine - When faced with requests for specifically tai-
lored services, make sure the user fully understands the products which the center
“routinely” provides.

Product Improvement Program

The objective of tsunami modeling research is to develop numerical models for faster
and more reliable forecasts of tsunamis propagating through the ocean and strik-
ing coastal communities. Forecast modeling software products specifically designed
to support the tsunami warning center’s forecasting operations are invaluable. In
addition to this, inundation modeling designed to assist coastal communities in
their efforts to assess the risk and mitigate the potential of tsunami hazard are also
invaluable.

Tsunami Wave Forecast Modeling

The main objective of a forecast model is to provide an estimate of wave arrival time,
wave height, and inundation area immediately after a tsunami event. Tsunami fore-
cast models are run in real time while a tsunami is propagating in the open ocean.
Consequently they are designed to perform under very stringent time limitations.

Given the time constraints of this type of study, the process of computing the three
stages of tsunami modeling, namely, wave generation, propagation, and inundation, is
usually expedited by generating a database of pre-computed scenarios. The pre-com-
puted database contains information about tsunami propagation in the open ocean
from a multitude of potential sources. When a tsunami event occurs, an initial source
is selected from the pre-computed database. In the initial stages of the tsunami, this
selection is based only on the available seismic information for the earthquake event.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-21

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

As the wave propagates across the ocean and successively reaches the sea level gages
and DART systems, these report the recorded sea level information back to the tsu-
nami warning centers, which, in turn, process the information and produce a new
and more refined estimate of the tsunami source. The result is an increasingly accu-
rate forecast of the tsunami that can be used to issue watches, warnings, or recom-
mend evacuations.

When an event similar to one of the pre-computed scenarios occurs, the avail-
able propagation information is used to compute the last stage of the study, wave
inundation.

Inundation Modeling
An inundation modeling study attempts to recreate the tsunami generation in deep or
coastal waters, wave propagation to the impact zone, and inundation along the study
area. High-resolution bathymetric and topographic grids are used in this type of
study to reproduce the correct wave dynamics during the inundation computations.
The high-quality bathymetric and topographic data sets needed for development of
inundation maps require maintenance and upgrades as better data become available
and coastal changes occur.

Inundation studies can be conducted taking a probabilistic approach in which mul-

tiple tsunami scenarios are considered, and an assessment of the vulnerability of the
coast to tsunami hazard is evaluated, or they may focus on the effect of a particular
“worst-case scenario” and assess the impact of such a particularly high-impact event
on the areas under investigation.

The results of a tsunami inundation study should include information about the maxi-
mum wave height and maximum current speed as a function of location; maximum
inundation line; and time series of wave height at different locations, indicating wave
arrival time. This information can be used by emergency managers and urban plan-
ners primarily to establish evacuation routes and the locations of vital infrastructure.
Additionally, emergency managers and other officials are in urgent need of opera-
tional tools that will provide accurate tsunami forecasts as guidance for rapid, critical
decisions in which lives and property are at stake. The more timely and precise the
warnings are, the more effective the actions that local emergency managers can take
and the more lives and property can be saved.

Combined, measurement and modeling techniques can provide reliable tsunami fore-
casts. To forecast inundation from early tsunami waves, seismic parameter estimates
and tsunami measurements are used to sift through a pre-computed generation/prop-
agation forecast database and select an appropriate (linear) combination of scenarios
that most closely matches the observational data. This produces estimates of tsunami
characteristics in deep water, which can then be used as initial conditions for a site-
specific (nonlinear) inundation algorithm. A statistical methodology has been devel-
oped to forecast the maximum height of later tsunami waves that can threaten rescue

6-22 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

and recovery operations. The results are made available through a user-friendly inter-
face to aid hazard assessment and decision making by emergency managers.

The MOST model performed computations of generation/propagation scenarios for

the forecast database. The nonlinear high-resolution model will provide the inunda-
tion forecasts. This methodology is the foundation of the next-generation forecast
tools for tsunami warning and mitigation that are being developed in close collabo-
ration with tsunami warning centers and academia. These new tools will provide
site- and event-specific forecast of tsunami amplitudes to assist emergency managers
during tsunami warning and mitigation procedures.

Important Points to Remember about Research and

Development Programs at NTWCs and RTWPs
 Applied research and program development activities at RTWPs and NTWCs gen-
erally fall into three broad categories: geophysical science, processing, and social
science.
 A tsunami warning center’s research and development program creates an atmo-
sphere of progress.
 Collaboration with other institutions helps a center remain on the cutting edge of
new technology and techniques.
 A new product should pass a rigorous testing program before becoming
operational.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 6-23

 Chapter 6: Tsunami Warning Decision Support

6-24 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Chapter 7
Warnings and Other Products
National Tsunami Warning Centers (NTWC) and Regional Tsunami Watch Providers
(RTWP) should strive to adhere to internationally agreed-upon public products. If these
public products are similar in name and content from one center to the next, confusion
among users will be minimized. This is especially relevant for tourists and other visi-
tors to coastal areas. As noted in Chapter 6, the basic public product suite consists of:
 WARNING: A tsunami was or may have been generated, which could cause
damage; people in the warned area are strongly advised to evacuate.
 WATCH: A tsunami was or may have been generated, but is at least 2 hours travel
time to the area in watch status. Local officials should prepare for possible evacua-
tion if their area is upgraded to a warning.
 ADVISORY: An earthquake has occurred in the area of responsibility (AOR)
basin, which might generate a tsunami. The tsunami watch center should issue
hourly bulletins updating the situation.
 INFORMATION STATEMENT: An earthquake that is not expected to generate
a tsunami has been recorded; a bulletin with information regarding the event is
issued. Usually only one bulletin is issued.

Local Seismic
Networks

GLOSS Tide Gage

Networks

Local Tide Gage

Networks

Figure 7-1. Warnings and Other Products in the End-to-End Chain

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 7-1

 Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

Tsunami bulletins should be issued by NTWCs and RTWPs when an earthquake with
a magnitude of 6.5 or greater occurs. To prevent unnecessary local evacuations, infor-
mation statements should also be issued for lower magnitude events that may have
been felt near the coast.

The Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission’s Intergovernmental Coordination

Group (IOC/ICG) has agreed that warning, watch, advisory, and information state-
ment products should contain at least the following information:
 World Meteorological Organization (WMO) Headers
This is crucial for transmission on WMO’s Global Telecommunications System
(GTS) because:
 The heading provides a means by which communication data managers
recognize a bulletin for telecommunication “switching” purposes.
 The heading permits a uniqueness for a bulletin, which is sufficient enough to
control the data for selective transmission required to meet the needs of the
receiving end.
 The heading is for accountability in the transmission delivery process by the
switching system for data management purposes.
 The heading is not intended for the data processing systems, as the first few
lines of the text (bulletin content) further defines it for processing. (ref. WMO
Codes Manual 306)

 Earthquake information
a) Origin time (in Coordinated Universal Time [UTC])
b) Coordinates (latitude and longitude) of the epicenter
c) Location (name of geographical area)
d) Magnitude (M)
e) Depth (only for an earthquake occurring at a depth of 100 kilometers [km] or
more) below the ocean floor

 Tsunami information
a) Evaluation of tsunamigenic potential based on the empirical relationship
between magnitude (M) of earthquake and generation/nongeneration of tsu-
nami in the tsunami warning center’s AOR basin(s)
b) Estimated tsunami travel times to reach the respective coasts in the center’s
AOR (only for earthquakes of M greater than 7.0). This is best handled by
specifying forecast points that are well known to emergency managers and
the populace.

It is also suggested that definitions, call-to-action statements, and other pertinent

information be included in bulletins if time allows.

7-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

How Do Warnings and Other Products Fit into an End-to-

End Tsunami Warning System?
Once an earthquake has occurred and been analyzed, and a decision has been made
on its potential impact on a center’s AOR, information must be provided to govern-
ment agencies, the media, the public, and other persons and groups that will be
affected by the event. Information, especially that contained in life-saving warning
messages, will have a much better chance of being understood if it is conveyed in
concise, easy-to-understand language, in a predictable (and hence, familiar) format.
Based upon many years of experience, the established NTWCs and RTWPs have set-
tled on several standardized products, all with somewhat standardized structure and
content.

These products issued by a tsunami warning center are crucial to the success of that
center’s end-to-end system. If the information presented is not understood, it is less
likely that the proper actions will be taken by recipients.

Thus, both incoming data collection communications systems and outgoing commu-
nication of critical information are crucial to the success of the warning system for
those affected by an event.

What Is in this Chapter?

This chapter contains sections that discuss the following topics:
 Definition and example of a warning product.
 Definition and example of a watch product.
 Definition and example of an advisory product.
 Definition and example of an information statement.

What Are the Most Important Points to Remember about

Tsunami Product Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs?
 NTWCs and RTWPs should strive to adhere to internationally agreed-upon names
and contents for public products.
 If the information that a product contains is not understood then it is less likely
that the proper actions will be taken by recipients.
 The core NTWC product suite should consist of:
 Warning products
 Watch products
 Advisory products
 Information statements

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 7-3

 Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

Warnings: The Highest Level of Tsunami Alert

A tsunami warning is issued by tsunami warning centers when a potential tsunami
with significant widespread inundation is imminent or expected to occur in the
center’s AOR. Warnings alert the public that widespread, dangerous coastal flooding
accompanied by powerful currents is possible and may continue for several hours
after arrival of the initial wave. Warnings also alert emergency management officials
to take action for the entire tsunami hazard zone. Appropriate actions to be taken by
local officials may include the evacuation of low-lying coastal areas, and the reposi-
tioning of ships to deep waters when there is time to do so safely. Warnings may be
updated, adjusted geographically, downgraded, or canceled. To provide the earliest
possible alert, initial warnings are normally based only on seismic information. The
following is an example of a tsunami warning product:

WEAK51 PAAQ 030202

TSUNAMI BULLETIN NUMBER 004
PACIFIC TSUNAMI WARNING CENTER
0902 PM HST 03 SEP 2005

TO - CIVIL DEFENSE IN THE STATE OF HAWAII

SUBJECT - TSUNAMI WARNING BULLETIN

A TSUNAMI WARNING IS ISSUED FOR THE STATE OF HAWAII EFFECTIVE AT 0902 PM

HST.

AN EARTHQUAKE HAS OCCURRED WITH THESE PRELIMINARY PARAMETERS

ORIGIN TIME - 0112 PM HST 03 SEP 2005

COORDINATES - 16.0 SOUTH 73.3 WEST
LOCATION - NEAR COAST OF PERU
MAGNITUDE - 8.2 MOMENT

MEASUREMENTS OR REPORTS OF TSUNAMI WAVE ACTIVITY

GAUGE LOCATION LAT LON TIME AMPL PER

Arica, Chile 18.1S 178.4W 0050Z 0.88M 12MIN
Antofagasta, Chile 17.8S 168.3E 0220Z 0.91M 10MIN

TIME - TIME OF THE MEASUREMENT

AMPL - AMPLITUDE IN METERS FROM MIDDLE TO CREST OR MIDDLE TO TROUGH OR

HALF OF THE CREST TO TROUGH

PER - PERIOD OF TIME FROM ONE WAVE CREST TO THE NEXT

EVALUATION

7-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

A TSUNAMI HAS BEEN GENERATED THAT COULD CAUSE DAMAGE ALONG

COASTLINES OF ALL ISLANDS IN THE STATE OF HAWAII. URGENT ACTION SHOULD
BE TAKEN TO PROTECT LIVES AND PROPERTY.

A TSUNAMI IS A SERIES OF LONG OCEAN WAVES. EACH INDIVIDUAL WAVE CREST

CAN LAST 5 TO 15 MINUTES OR MORE AND EXTENSIVELY FLOOD COASTAL AREAS.
THE DANGER CAN CONTINUE FOR MANY HOURS AFTER THE INITIAL WAVE AS
SUBSEQUENT WAVES ARRIVE. TSUNAMI WAVE HEIGHTS CANNOT BE PREDICTED
AND THE FIRST WAVE MAY NOT BE THE LARGEST. TSUNAMI WAVES EFFICIENTLY
WRAP AROUND ISLANDS. ALL SHORES ARE AT RISK NO MATTER WHICH DIRECTION
THEY FACE. THE TROUGH OF A TSUNAMI WAVE MAY TEMPORARILY EXPOSE THE
SEAFLOOR BUT THE AREA WILL QUICKLY FLOOD AGAIN. EXTREMELY STRONG
AND UNUSUAL NEARSHORE CURRENTS CAN ACCOMPANY A TSUNAMI. DEBRIS
PICKED UP AND CARRIED BY A TSUNAMI AMPLIFIES ITS DESTRUCTIVE POWER.
SIMULTANEOUS HIGH TIDES OR HIGH SURF CAN SIGNIFICANTLY INCREASE THE
TSUNAMI HAZARD.

THE ESTIMATED ARRIVAL TIME IN HAWAII OF THE FIRST TSUNAMI WAVE IS

0221 AM HST 04 SEP 2005

BULLETINS WILL BE ISSUED HOURLY OR SOONER AS CONDITIONS WARRANT.

$$

Note in the example that all of the following recommended pieces of information are
readily apparent in the product:
Earthquake information
a) Origin time (UTC)
b) Coordinates (latitude and longitude) of the epicenter
c) Location (name of geographical area)
d) Magnitude (M)

Tsunami information
a) Evaluation of tsunamigenic potential based on the empirical relationship
between magnitude (M) of earthquake and generation/nongeneration of tsu-
nami in the tsunami warning center’s AOR basin(s).
b) Estimated tsunami travel times to reach the respective coasts in the center’s
AOR (only for earthquakes of M greater than 7.0).

Watches: The Second Level of Tsunami Alert

A Tsunami Watch is issued by RTWPs and NTWCs to alert other centers, emergency
management officials, and the public of an event that may later impact the watch
area. The watch may be upgraded to a warning or advisory (or canceled) based on
updated information and analysis. Therefore, emergency management officials and
the public should prepare to take action. Watches are normally issued based on

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 7-5

 Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

seismic information without confirmation that a destructive tsunami is under way.

The following is an example of a tsunami watch product:
WEAK51 PAAQ 030159
TSUNAMI BULLETIN NUMBER 001
PACIFIC TSUNAMI WARNING CENTER
0859 PM HST 03 SEP 2005

TO - CIVIL DEFENSE IN THE STATE OF HAWAII

SUBJECT - TSUNAMI WATCH BULLETIN

A TSUNAMI WATCH IS ISSUED FOR THE STATE OF HAWAII EFFECTIVE AT 0859 PM

HST.

AN EARTHQUAKE HAS OCCURRED WITH THESE PRELIMINARY PARAMETERS

ORIGIN TIME - 0112 PM HST 03 SEP 2005

COORDINATES - 16.0 SOUTH 73.3 WEST
LOCATION - NEAR COAST OF PERU
MAGNITUDE - 8.2 MOMENT

MEASUREMENTS OR REPORTS OF TSUNAMI WAVE ACTIVITY

GAUGE LOCATION LAT LON TIME AMPL PER

Arica, Chile 18.1S 178.4W 0250Z 0.88M 12MIN
Antofagasta, Chile 17.8S 168.3E 0420Z 0.91M 10MIN

TIME - TIME OF THE MEASUREMENT

AMPL - AMPLITUDE IN METERS FROM MIDDLE TO CREST OR MIDDLE TO TROUGH OR

HALF OF THE CREST TO TROUGH

PER - PERIOD OF TIME FROM ONE WAVE CREST TO THE NEXT

EVALUATION

BASED ON ALL AVAILABLE DATA A TSUNAMI MAY HAVE BEEN GENERATED BY THIS
EARTHQUAKE THAT COULD BE DESTRUCTIVE ON COASTAL AREAS EVEN FAR FROM
THE EPICENTER. AN INVESTIGATION IS UNDER WAY TO DETERMINE IF THERE IS A
TSUNAMI THREAT TO HAWAII.

IF TSUNAMI WAVES IMPACT HAWAII THE ESTIMATED EARLIEST ARRIVAL OF THE

FIRST TSUNAMI WAVE IS

0221 AM HST 04 SEP 2005

BULLETINS WILL BE ISSUED HOURLY OR SOONER AS CONDITIONS WARRANT.

$$

7-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

The following is an example of a product containing a watch for one area and a
warning for another area:
WEAK51 PAAQ 011310
BULLETIN
PUBLIC TSUNAMI MESSAGE NUMBER 1
NWS WEST COAST/ALASKA TSUNAMI WARNING CENTER PALMER AK
510 AM AKDT SAT JUL 1 2006

...A TSUNAMI WARNING IS IN EFFECT WHICH INCLUDES THE ALASKA

COASTAL AREAS FROM CORDOVA ALASKA TO ATTU ALASKA...

...A TSUNAMI WATCH IS IN EFFECT FOR THE CALIFORNIA -– OREGON

- WASHINGTON - BRITISH COLUMBIA AND ALASKA COASTAL AREAS FROM THE

CALIFORNIA-MEXICO BORDER TO CORDOVA ALASKA...

A TSUNAMI WARNING MEANS... ALL COASTAL RESIDENTS IN THE WARNING

AREA WHO ARE NEAR THE BEACH OR IN LOW-LYING REGIONS SHOULD MOVE
IMMEDIATELY INLAND TO HIGHER GROUND AND AWAY FROM ALL HARBORS AND
INLETS INCLUDING THOSE SHELTERED DIRECTLY FROM THE SEA. THOSE FEELING
THE EARTH SHAKE... SEEING UNUSUAL WAVE ACTION... OR THE WATER LEVEL
RISING OR RECEDING MAY HAVE ONLY A FEW MINUTES BEFORE THE TSUNAMI
ARRIVAL AND SHOULD EVACUATE IMMEDIATELY. HOMES AND SMALL BUILDINGS
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND TSUNAMI IMPACTS. DO NOT STAY IN THESE
STRUCTURES.

ALL RESIDENTS WITHIN THE WARNED AREA SHOULD BE ALERT FOR INSTRUCTIONS
BROADCAST FROM THEIR LOCAL CIVIL AUTHORITIES. THIS TSUNAMI WARNING IS
BASED SOLELY ON EARTHQUAKE INFORMATION—THE TSUNAMI HAS NOT YET BEEN
CONFIRMED.

A TSUNAMI WATCH MEANS...ALL COASTAL RESIDENTS IN THE WATCH AREA SHOULD

PREPARE FOR POSSIBLE EVACUATION. A TSUNAMI WATCH IS ISSUED TO AREAS
WHICH WILL NOT BE IMPACTED BY THE TSUNAMI FOR AT LEAST THREE HOURS.
WATCH AREAS WILL EITHER BE UPGRADED TO WARNING STATUS OR CANCELED.

AT 500 AM ALASKAN DAYLIGHT TIME ON JULY 1 AN EARTHQUAKE WITH

PRELIMINARY MAGNITUDE 7.9 OCCURRED 70 MILES SOUTHEAST OF NIKOLSKI
ALASKA.

THIS EARTHQUAKE MAY HAVE GENERATED A TSUNAMI. IF A TSUNAMI

HAS BEEN GENERATED THE WAVES WILL FIRST REACH NIKOLSKI ALASKA AT 540
AM ADT ON JULY 1.

ESTIMATED TSUNAMI ARRIVAL TIMES AND MAPS ALONG WITH SAFETY RULES AND
OTHER INFORMATION CAN BE FOUND ON THE WEB SITE

[Link]

TSUNAMIS CAN BE DANGEROUS WAVES THAT ARE NOT SURVIVABLE. WAVE

HEIGHTS ARE AMPLIFIED BY IRREGULAR SHORELINE AND ARE DIFFICULT TO
PREDICT. TSUNAMIS OFTEN APPEAR AS A STRONG SURGE AND MAY BE PRECEDED

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 7-7

 Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

BY A RECEDING WATER LEVEL. MARINERS IN WATER DEEPER THAN 600 FEET

SHOULD NOT BE AFFECTED BY A TSUNAMI. WAVE HEIGHTS WILL INCREASE
RAPIDLY AS WATER SHALLOWS. TSUNAMIS ARE A SERIES OF OCEAN WAVES WHICH
CAN BE DANGEROUS FOR SEVERAL HOURS AFTER THE INITIAL WAVE ARRIVAL. DO
NOT RETURN TO EVACUATED AREAS UNTIL AN ALL CLEAR IS GIVEN BY LOCAL CIVIL
AUTHORITIES.

THE PACIFIC TSUNAMI WARNING CENTER WILL ISSUE MESSAGES

FOR HAWAII AND OTHER AREAS OF THE PACIFIC OUTSIDE CALIFORNIA/ OREGON/
WASHINGTON/ BRITISH COLUMBIA AND ALASKA.

ADDITIONAL MESSAGES WILL BE ISSUED HALF-HOURLY OR SOONER IF

CONDITIONS WARRANT. THE TSUNAMI WARNING AND WATCH WILL REMAIN IN
EFFECT UNTIL FURTHER NOTICE. FOR FURTHER INFORMATION STAY TUNED TO
NOAA WEATHER RADIO... YOUR LOCAL TV OR RADIO STATIONS... OR SEE THE WEB
SITE [Link].

$$

Advisories: The Third Level of Tsunami Alert

A tsunami advisory is issued by tsunami warning centers for the threat of a potential
tsunami that may produce strong currents or waves dangerous to those in or near the
water. Coastal regions historically prone to damage due to strong currents induced by
tsunamis are at the greatest risk. The threat may continue for several hours after the
arrival of the initial wave, but significant widespread inundation is not expected
for areas under an advisory. Appropriate actions to be taken by local officials may
include closing beaches, evacuating harbors and marinas, and the repositioning of
ships to deep waters when there is enough time to do so safely. Advisories are nor-
mally updated to continue the advisory, expand or contract affected areas, upgrade to
a warning, or cancel the advisory. The following is an example of an advisory product:
WEAK51 PAAQ 231516
TSUNAMI BULLETIN NUMBER 001
PACIFIC TSUNAMI WARNING CENTER
11:16 AM HST 23 JUN 2001

TO: CIVIL DEFENSE IN THE STATE OF HAWAII

SUBJECT: TSUNAMI ADVISORY BULLETIN

A WATCH OR WARNING IS NOT IN EFFECT FOR THE STATE OF

HAWAII AT THIS TIME. HOWEVER, THE PACIFIC TSUNAMI
WARNING CENTER HAS ISSUED A TSUNAMI WATCH AND WARNING
FOR OTHER PARTS OF THE PACIFIC, AND THERE IS THE
POSSIBILITY THAT A WATCH OR WARNING MAY BE ISSUED FOR
HAWAII IN THE NEAR FUTURE.

AN EARTHQUAKE HAS OCCURRED WITH THE FOLLOWING PRELIMINARY

PARAMETERS:

7-8 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

ORIGIN TIME - 10:33 AM HST, 23 JUN 2001

COORDINATES - 16.0 SOUTH, 73.3 WEST
LOCATION - NEAR COAST OF PERU
MAGNITUDE - 8.0 (RICHTER)
MAGNITUDE - 8.2 (MOMENT)

EVALUATION: THIS ADVISORY IS BASED MAINLY ON EARTHQUAKE

DATA. IT IS NOT KNOWN AT THIS TIME WHETHER A PACIFIC-WIDE DESTRUCTIVE
TSUNAMI HAS BEEN GENERATED. AN INVESTIGATION IS UNDER WAY TO DETERMINE
THE TSUNAMI THREAT.

IF A TSUNAMI HAS BEEN GENERATED, THE ESTIMATED EARLIEST

TIME OF ARRIVAL IN HAWAII OF THE FIRST TSUNAMI WAVE IS:

11:52 PM HST, 23 JUN 2001

BULLETINS WILL BE ISSUED HOURLY OR SOONER AS CONDITIONS WARRANT.

$$

Information Statements
An information statement is issued to inform emergency management officials and
the public that an earthquake has occurred. In most cases, information statements
are issued to indicate there is no threat of a destructive tsunami affecting the issu-
ing tsunami warning center’s AOR and to prevent unnecessary evacuations as the
earthquake may have been felt in coastal areas. An information statement may, in
appropriate situations, caution about the possibility of destructive local tsunamis.
Information statements may be reissued with additional information, though normally
these messages are not updated. However, a watch, advisory or warning may be
issued for the area, if necessary, after analysis and/or updated information becomes
available. The following is an example of an information statement:
WEAK53 PAAQ 011308
PUBLIC TSUNAMI INFORMATION STATEMENT NUMBER 1
NWS WEST COAST/ALASKA TSUNAMI WARNING CENTER PALMER AK
608 AM PDT SAT JUL 1 2006

...A STRONG EARTHQUAKE HAS OCCURRED BUT A TSUNAMI IS NOT

EXPECTED ALONG THE CALIFORNIA/ OREGON/ WASHINGTON/
BRITISH COLUMBIA OR ALASKA COASTS...

NO - REPEAT NO - TSUNAMI WARNING OR WATCH IS IN EFFECT FOR

THESE AREAS.

BASED ON THE EARTHQUAKE MAGNITUDE AND HISTORIC TSUNAMI

INFORMATION A DAMAGING TSUNAMI IS NOT EXPECTED ALONG
THE CALIFORNIA/ OREGON/ WASHINGTON/ BRITISH COLUMBIA AND ALASKA
COASTS. AT COASTAL LOCATIONS WHICH HAVE EXPERIENCED

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 7-9

 Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

STRONG GROUND SHAKING LOCAL TSUNAMIS ARE POSSIBLE DUE TO UNDERWATER

LANDSLIDES.

AT 600 AM PACIFIC DAYLIGHT TIME ON JULY 1 AN EARTHQUAKE WITH PRELIMINARY

MAGNITUDE 7.2 OCCURRED 300 MILES SOUTHWEST OF BERING I. KOMANDORSKI.

THE PACIFIC TSUNAMI WARNING CENTER WILL ISSUE MESSAGES

FOR HAWAII AND OTHER AREAS OF THE PACIFIC OUTSIDE CALIFORNIA/OREGON/
WASHINGTON/ BRITISH COLUMBIA AND ALASKA.

THIS WILL BE THE ONLY STATEMENT ISSUED FOR THIS EVENT BY THE WEST COAST
AND ALASKA TSUNAMI WARNING CENTER UNLESS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
BECOMES AVAILABLE.

SEE THE WEB SITE [Link] FOR BASIC TSUNAMI INFORMATION -

SAFETY RULES AND TSUNAMI TRAVEL TIMES.

$$

Cancellation of Tsunami Alert

Example of a cancellation of a Tsunami Watch bulletin that was issued for the Indian
Ocean region on September 12th for the Southern Sumatra region earthquake:
WEIO21 PHEB 121505
TSUNAMI BULLETIN NUMBER 005
PACIFIC TSUNAMI WARNING CENTER/NOAA/NWS
ISSUED AT 1505Z 12 SEP 2007

THIS BULLETIN IS FOR ALL AREAS OF THE INDIAN OCEAN.

... FINAL INDIAN-OCEAN-WIDE TSUNAMI WATCH ...

THIS THE FINAL TSUNAMI WATCH FOR

INDONESIA / AUSTRALIA / INDIA / SRI LANKA / THAILAND /

UNITED KINGDOM / MALDIVES / MYANMAR / MALAYSIA / BANGLADESH /
MAURITIUS / REUNION / SEYCHELLES / MADAGASCAR / SOMALIA / OMAN /
PAKISTAN / IRAN / YEMEN / COMORES / CROZET ISLANDS /
MOZAMBIQUE / KENYA / TANZANIA / KERGUELEN ISLANDS /
SOUTH AFRICA / SINGAPORE

THIS BULLETIN IS ISSUED AS ADVICE TO GOVERNMENT AGENCIES. ONLY

NATIONAL AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT AGENCIES HAVE THE AUTHORITY TO MAKE
DECISIONS REGARDING THE OFFICIAL STATE OF ALERT IN THEIR AREA AND
ANY ACTIONS TO BE TAKEN IN RESPONSE.

AN EARTHQUAKE HAS OCCURRED WITH THESE PRELIMINARY PARAMETERS

ORIGIN TIME - 1110Z 12 SEP 2007

COORDINATES - 4.5 SOUTH 101.3 EAST
LOCATION - SOUTHERN SUMATERA INDONESIA
MAGNITUDE - 8.2

7-10 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

MEASUREMENTS OR REPORTS OF TSUNAMI WAVE ACTIVITY

GAUGE LOCATION LAT LON TIME AMPL PER

SIBOLGA ID 1.7N 98.8E 1434Z 0.09M / 0.3FT 52MIN
PADANG ID 0.9S 100.4E 1348Z 0.98M / 3.2FT 34MIN
COCOS CC 12.1S 96.9E 1236Z 0.11M / 0.4FT 22MIN
DART 23401 8.9S 88.5E 1421Z 0.02M / 0.1FT 15MIN

LAT - LATITUDE (N-NORTH, S-SOUTH)

LON - LONGITUDE (E-EAST, W-WEST)
TIME - TIME OF THE MEASUREMENT (Z IS UTC IS GREENWICH TIME)
AMPL - TSUNAMI AMPLITUDE MEASURED RELATIVE TO NORMAL SEA LEVEL.
IT IS ...NOT... CREST-TO-TROUGH WAVE HEIGHT.
VALUES ARE GIVEN IN BOTH METERS(M) AND FEET(FT).
PER - PERIOD OF TIME IN MINUTES(MIN) FROM ONE WAVE TO THE NEXT.

EVALUATION

SEA LEVEL READINGS INDICATE A TSUNAMI WAS GENERATED. IT MAY HAVE

BEEN DESTRUCTIVE ALONG COASTS NEAR THE EARTHQUAKE EPICENTER.

FOR THOSE AREAS - WHEN NO MAJOR WAVES HAVE OCCURRED FOR AT LEAST
TWO HOURS AFTER THE ESTIMATED ARRIVAL TIME OR DAMAGING WAVES HAVE
NOT OCCURRED FOR AT LEAST TWO HOURS THEN LOCAL AUTHORITIES CAN
ASSUME THE THREAT IS PASSED. DANGER TO BOATS AND COASTAL
STRUCTURES CAN CONTINUE FOR SEVERAL HOURS DUE TO RAPID CURRENTS.
AS LOCAL CONDITIONS CAN CAUSE A WIDE VARIATION IN TSUNAMI WAVE
ACTION THE ALL CLEAR DETERMINATION MUST BE MADE BY LOCAL AUTHORITIES.

BASED ON AVAILABLE DATA THIS CENTER DOES NOT EXPECT MORE WIDESPREAD
DESTRUCTIVE EFFECT. HOWEVER ...
DUE TO ONLY LIMITED SEA LEVEL DATA FROM THE REGION IT MAY NOT
BE POSSIBLE FOR THIS CENTER TO RAPIDLY NOR ACCURATELY EVALUATE
THE STRENGTH OF A TSUNAMI IF ONE HAS BEEN GENERATED.

ESTIMATED INITIAL TSUNAMI WAVE ARRIVAL TIMES AT FORECAST POINTS

WITHIN THE WARNING AND WATCH AREAS ARE GIVEN BELOW. ACTUAL
ARRIVAL TIMES MAY DIFFER AND THE INITIAL WAVE MAY NOT BE THE
LARGEST. A TSUNAMI IS A SERIES OF WAVES AND THE TIME BETWEEN
SUCCESSIVE WAVES CAN BE FIVE MINUTES TO ONE HOUR.
LOCATION FORECAST POINT COORDINATES ARRIVAL TIME
INDONESIA BENGKULU 3.9S 102.0E 1123Z 12 SEP
SIBERUT 1.5S 98.7E 1203Z 12 SEP
PADANG 0.9S 100.1E 1214Z 12 SEP
BANDAR LAMPUNG 5.7S 105.3E 1242Z 12 SEP
SIMEULUE 2.5N 96.0E 1243Z 12 SEP
CILACAP 7.8S 108.9E 1307Z 12 SEP
BANDA ACEH 5.5N 95.1E 1329Z 12 SEP
BALI 8.7S 115.3E 1345Z 12 SEP

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 7-11

 Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

LOCATION FORECAST POINT COORDINATES ARRIVAL TIME

KUPANG 10.0S 123.4E 1453Z 12 SEP
BELAWAN 3.8N 99.0E 1703Z 12 SEP
AUSTRALIA CHRISTMAS IS 10.4S 105.4E 1220Z 12 SEP
COCOS ISLAND 12.1S 96.7E 1234Z 12 SEP
NORTH WEST CAPE 21.5S 113.9E 1429Z 12 SEP
CAPE INSPIRATIO 25.9S 113.0E 1526Z 12 SEP
CAPE LEVEQUE 16.1S 122.6E 1542Z 12 SEP
PERTH 32.0S 115.3E 1545Z 12 SEP
AUGUSTA 34.3S 114.7E 1559Z 12 SEP
GERALDTOWN 28.6S 114.3E 1603Z 12 SEP
ESPERANCE 34.0S 121.8E 1726Z 12 SEP
KINGSTON SOUTH 37.0S 139.4E 1906Z 12 SEP
EUCLA MOTEL 31.8S 128.9E 1934Z 12 SEP
DARWIN 12.1S 130.7E 1948Z 12 SEP
HEARD ISLAND 54.0S 73.5E 1955Z 12 SEP
HOBART 43.3S 147.6E 2015Z 12 SEP
INDIA GREAT NICOBAR 7.1N 93.6E 1338Z 12 SEP
LITTLE ANDAMAN 10.7N 92.3E 1421Z 12 SEP
PORT BLAIR 12.0N 92.5E 1440Z 12 SEP
NORTH ANDAMAN 13.3N 92.6E 1453Z 12 SEP
CHENNAI 13.4N 80.4E 1540Z 12 SEP
KAKINADA 17.2N 82.7E 1604Z 12 SEP
TRIVANDRUM 8.3N 76.9E 1608Z 12 SEP
BALESHWAR 21.6N 87.3E 1701Z 12 SEP
MANGALORE 13.3N 74.4E 1732Z 12 SEP
BOMBAY 18.8N 72.6E 2005Z 12 SEP
GULF OF KUTCH 22.7N 68.9E 2019Z 12 SEP
SRI LANKA DONDRA HEAD 5.8N 80.5E 1447Z 12 SEP
TRINCOMALEE 8.7N 81.3E 1502Z 12 SEP
COLOMBO 6.9N 79.8E 1515Z 12 SEP
JAFFNA 9.9N 80.0E 1625Z 12 SEP
THAILAND PHUKET 8.0N 98.2E 1508Z 12 SEP
KO PHRA THONG 9.1N 98.2E 1554Z 12 SEP
KO TARUTAO 6.6N 99.6E 1626Z 12 SEP
UNITED KINGDOM DIEGO GARCIA 7.3S 72.4E 1526Z 12 SEP
MALDIVES GAN 0.6S 73.2E 1528Z 12 SEP
MALE 4.2N 73.6E 1544Z 12 SEP
MINICOV 8.3N 73.0E 1614Z 12 SEP
MYANMAR PYINKAYAING 15.8N 94.2E 1537Z 12 SEP
CHEDUBA ISLAND 18.9N 93.4E 1554Z 12 SEP
SITTWE 20.0N 92.9E 1629Z 12 SEP
MERGUI 12.8N 98.4E 1647Z 12 SEP
YANGON 16.2N 96.5E 1713Z 12 SEP
MALAYSIA GEORGETOWN 5.4N 100.1E 1704Z 12 SEP
PORT DICKSON 2.5N 101.7E 2048Z 12 SEP

7-12 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

LOCATION FORECAST POINT COORDINATES ARRIVAL TIME

BANGLADESH CHITTAGONG 22.5N 91.2E 1801Z 12 SEP
MAURITIUS PORT LOUIS 20.0S 57.3E 1803Z 12 SEP
REUNION ST DENIS 20.8S 55.2E 1820Z 12 SEP
SEYCHELLES VICTORIA 4.5S 55.6E 1847Z 12 SEP
MADAGASCAR TOAMASINA 17.8S 49.8E 1900Z 12 SEP
ANTSIRANANA 12.1S 49.5E 1905Z 12 SEP
MANAKARA 22.2S 48.2E 1919Z 12 SEP
CAP STE MARIE 25.8S 45.2E 2009Z 12 SEP
MAHAJANGA 15.4S 46.2E 2009Z 12 SEP
TOLIARA 23.4S 43.6E 2034Z 12 SEP
SOMALIA HILALAYA 6.5N 49.2E 1922Z 12 SEP
CAPE GUARO 11.9N 51.4E 1933Z 12 SEP
MOGADISHU 2.0N 45.5E 1938Z 12 SEP
KAAMBOONI 1.5S 41.9E 2004Z 12 SEP
OMAN SALALAH 17.0N 54.2E 1930Z 12 SEP
DUQM 19.7N 57.8E 1939Z 12 SEP
MUSCAT 23.9N 58.6E 1943Z 12 SEP
PAKISTAN GWADAR 25.1N 62.4E 1937Z 12 SEP
KARACHI 24.7N 66.9E 2031Z 12 SEP
IRAN GAVATER 25.0N 61.3E 1943Z 12 SEP
YEMEN AL MUKALLA 14.5N 49.2E 2003Z 12 SEP
ADEN 13.0N 45.2E 2100Z 12 SEP
COMORES MORONI 11.6S 43.3E 2006Z 12 SEP
CROZET ISLANDS CROZET ISLANDS 46.4S 51.8E 2009Z 12 SEP
MOZAMBIQUE CABO DELGADO 10.7S 40.7E 2034Z 12 SEP
ANGOCHE 15.5S 40.8E 2044Z 12 SEP
QUELIMANE 18.0S 37.1E 2213Z 12 SEP
MAPUTO 25.9S 32.8E 2218Z 12 SEP
BEIRA 19.9S 35.1E 2246Z 12 SEP
KENYA MOMBASA 4.0S 39.7E 2039Z 12 SEP
TANZANIA LINDI 9.8S 39.9E 2039Z 12 SEP
DAR ES SALAAM 6.7S 39.4E 2047Z 12 SEP
KERGUELEN ISLAN PORT AUX FRANCA 49.0S 69.2E 2049Z 12 SEP
SOUTH AFRICA PRINCE EDWARD I 46.6S 37.6E 2146Z 12 SEP
DURBAN 29.8S 31.2E 2205Z 12 SEP
PORT ELIZABETH 33.9S 25.8E 2256Z 12 SEP
CAPE TOWN 34.1S 18.0E 2359Z 12 SEP
SINGAPORE SINGAPORE 1.2N 103.8E 0048Z 13 SEP

THE JAPAN METEOROLOGICAL AGENCY MAY ISSUE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

FOR THIS EVENT. IN THE CASE OF CONFLICTING INFORMATION...THE
MORE CONSERVATIVE INFORMATION SHOULD BE USED FOR SAFETY.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 7-13

 Chapter 7: Warnings and Other Products

7-14 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Chapter 8
Dissemination and Notification
The tsunami warning system end-to-end chain of events, from collecting data to issu-
ing an alert, will only protect the people within a center’s area of responsibility (AOR)
if individuals and groups receive the message in a timely fashion, understand its
meaning, and take appropriate action. The initial link in the chain, earth data observa-
tions, requires partnerships between a tsunami warning center and the international
community to access global seismic and sea level networks. Similarly, the dissemi-
nation and notification link requires partnerships between the center and the many
national and local groups and individuals within its AOR. This chapter will discuss the
distinctions between dissemination, (the process of physically getting the message to
customers within a center’s AOR) and notification (the understanding of the received
message), along with the methods for each. Outreach and education focus on methods
to increase the likelihood that customers will take appropriate actions. This chapter
should be read by persons who need to understand this difference between dissemi-
nation and notification, and what a National Tsunami Warning Center (NTWC) or
Regional Tsunami Watch Provider (RTWP) needs to do to be successful at these tasks.

Local Seismic
Networks

GLOSS Tide Gage

Networks

Local Tide Gage

Networks

Figure 8-1. Notification and Dissemination Requirements for a Tsunami Warning Center

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-1

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

How Do Warnings and Other Products Fit into an End-to-

End Tsunami Warning System?
As noted above, once a warning or other forecast/advisory product has been pro-
duced by a center, it must be conveyed to the many groups and individuals in the
center’s AOR. Once received, the product must be understood and acted upon appro-
priately. National and local emergency management officials and other government,
academic, and private sector individuals usually play a major role in educating the
populace, and helping local groups establish resilient communities, evacuation routes,
and other procedures.

NTWCs and RTWPs play a significant and crucial role in this outreach and education
effort too, especially with regard to receiving valuable feedback on product formats
and dissemination methods. This feedback can assist the center in designing products
that better meet customer needs. Feedback can also assist in identifying problems
with dissemination channels.

What Is in this Chapter?

This chapter contains sections that discuss the following topics:
 Regional dissemination methods, including the Group on Earth Observa-
tions’ (GEO) GEONETCast, Emergency Manager’s Weather Information Network
(EMWIN), and Radio and Internet for the Communication of Hydro-Meteorological
and Climate-Related Information (RANET)
 Notification procedures, including warning system design, warning channels,
and warning message content
 Community preparedness, including the TsunamiReady and Coastal Community
Resilience programs
 Training resources

What Are the Most Important Points to Remember about

Dissemination and Notification Requirements for NTWCs
and RTWPs?
 Dissemination refers to the process of physically getting the message to partners
and customers, while notification refers to the understanding of the received mes-
sage by these same partners and customers.
 National and local emergency management officials and other government, aca-
demic, and private sector individuals usually play a major role in educating the
populace.
 NTWCs and RTWPs also play a significant and crucial role in the outreach and
education effort.

8-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Dissemination
Dissemination refers to the process of physically getting the message to RTWP and
NTWC customers. This is in contrast to notification, which is the understanding of
the received message and, through outreach and education, customers taking appro-
priate actions. Warnings about events that are seconds, minutes, or hours away need
to be disseminated rapidly through special warning systems using messages that have
been designed during calmer times to encourage the desired behaviors. They may be
for hazards that people can clearly perceive, such as a hurricane, or they may be for
hazards that cannot be perceived without specialized equipment or access to intel-
ligence information. In these latter cases, it is critical that the warning system and its
operators have a high level of credibility so that people feel compelled to take action
based solely on the warning message.

Some of the discussion in this section is based on the Partnership for Public Warn-
ing (PPW) publication, “Developing a Unified All-Hazard Public Warning System,
a Report by the Workshop on Effective Hazard Warnings,” Emmetsburg, Maryland,
November 25, 2002 (PPW Report 2002-02).

Warnings are primarily a local government responsibility. Disasters are local,

and local government has the primary responsibility to look after the welfare of its
citizens. Thus local government has the primary responsibility to warn its citizens
and help them to prepare for, respond to, and recover from disasters. However, it is
beyond the capability or capacity of local governments to see that a unified, multi-
channel, nationally standardized system is available to them for delivering warnings
to their citizens.

Most warnings originate from government organizations. Some state and many
Federal agencies develop warnings through extensive research and instrument or
intelligence networks. In these cases, warnings are often issued by Federal agen-
cies, but usually in close cooperation with state and local emergency managers. For
example:
 National meteorological services issue warnings of severe weather and flooding
focused on specific localities throughout their countries, and have done so for
many years.
 National geological survey agencies issue warnings of earthquakes, volcanic erup-
tions, and landslides.

Most public disaster warnings are issued by government agencies because in the
absence of clear standards of best practice, private organizations could incur signifi-
cant liability. Many private organizations do issue warnings, for example for weather,
but these are usually covered by contracts that limit liability. Media weathermen may
refine local warnings for their community but must remain mindful of standards of
best practice.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-3

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Warning systems require a national partnership between government and

industry. Mass warning devices, such as sirens, are typically owned and operated by
local government or managers of critical facilities. Warnings can be issued through
telephones, pagers, computers, and many other personal
communications devices, wired and unwired. The media
play an important role in disseminating warnings. Thus,
most warning delivery systems need government input,
T ip
The MEDIA play a crucial
but are manufactured, owned, and operated by private role in disseminating
industry and individuals. The government cannot afford warnings.
to provide the devices that reach every person at risk.
Industry can and will provide such devices, or include
this capability in all types of devices sold primarily for other purposes, if there are
clear national standards that create a national market. There must be an effective
public-private partnership between government and industry to deliver warnings.

The private sector offers complementary resources and necessary infrastructure (e.g.,
telecommunications networks) that are needed for disseminating warnings. Civil soci-
ety provides social infrastructure at the grass roots (from [Link]
2005/03/national-early-warning-system/, National Early Warning System: Sri Lanka
(NEWS:SL), A Participatory Concept Paper for the Design of an Effective All-Hazard
Public Warning System (Version 2.1), Rohan Samarajiva, et al., LIRNEasia, Sri Lanka).
The use of already existing capacities is not only cost-effective, but ensures the con-
tinuity and maintenance of the system during periods where there are no hazard
events. The cost to the government of implementing a nationwide warning system is
significantly less when all stakeholders shoulder the costs for maintenance, manage-
ment, and service.

Successful partnerships can be fostered by identifying the key beneficiaries of a

warning system, such as the hotel industry and the insurance industry, in addition
to the general public. The government can work with such partners in developing
and implementing a warning system. The government can provide authority for the
system, while the private and civil society sectors provide the mechanisms to get
the warning out as fast as possible to all the potentially affected people. There is an
ongoing role that the private sector, especially the media, can play in raising educa-
tion and awareness. The tasks of education and trust-building at the community level
are often best done by civil society organizations like the International Red Cross,
television channel and newspaper environmental reporters, etc.

Authority is something that has to come from the government. The government must
take the ultimate responsibility for the issuance of a warning. People need assurance
that a warning message is legitimate before making the sudden decision to abandon
their possessions and evacuate the area. They cannot afford to waste precious min-
utes verifying warning messages to ensure that they are making the right decision.
False alarms cost money, breed cynicism, and undermine the credibility of the warn-
ing organization.

8-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Warning Message Timing

Centers should be prepared to disseminate specific warnings even if there is a high
level of uncertainty about the threat, because the information needed to reduce that
uncertainty might arrive only shortly before the incident occurs. In such cases, casu-
alties could occur because an official warning could not be received and acted upon
in time by all of those at risk.

Authorities must not withhold information because of concerns for public panic
(which is commonly anticipated by authorities but almost never occurs). If authori-
ties do not provide information, people will seek it from other—usually less
reliable—sources.

Repeated warning messages at regular intervals ensure that those who missed an ear-
lier warning will have another chance to receive it, and those who ignored an earlier
warning will have another opportunity to respond. Repetition also provides those
who did not understand an earlier warning another opportunity to comprehend it
and those who did not believe an earlier warning another opportunity to reconsider.

Information must be updated quickly when conditions change significantly so that

people can adapt their responses to the new situation.

Bulletin Dissemination
Each center needs to inventory all international, national, and local government agen-
cies, and media that require timely receipt of its tsunami bulletin messages. Recipi-
ents and communication methods should be identified, established, and tested on a
routine basis. Dissemination processes should not be manual; they should be auto-
mated as much as possible in order to improve efficiencies that decrease the time
required to issue warnings. Automation also decreases elements of human error.
Whenever possible, centers should use redundant communications paths to ensure
the receipt of critical data and dissemination of important bulletins.

The center should establish protocols between domestic organizations for acquiring
information in a timely manner. Improved protocols must be established for seamless
transfer of information and data between agencies to ensure the warning system is
efficient and effective.

Interagency coordination, operations, and policy issues must be addressed by the

NTWC or RTWP. This includes, but is not limited to:
 Developing a “Matrix of Roles and Responsibilities for Key Agencies” supporting
the center for tsunami forecasting
 Solidifying political commitment regarding interagency coordination to improve
data sharing and agency support to the center
 Allocating sufficient personnel to develop and sustain the national early warning
system

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-5

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

 Avoiding duplication by delineating clear lines of agency support. A Memorandum

of Understanding between pertinent organizations is useful in delineating roles
and responsibilities.

To meet international standards, the following national and local dissemination chan-
nels should be used to disseminate bulletins:
 Global Telecommunications System of the World Meteorological Organization
(WMO GTS)
 Internet (Frame Relay)
 Internet email
 Telefax
 Internet websites
 RANET
 GEONETCast

The WMO Global Telecommunications Service is the backbone of the international

hydrometeorological data dissemination system, but telefax and email are also widely
utilized. Two levels of product are distinguished and given separate WMO identifiers:
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) maintains an international
network of global aeronautical telecommunications circuits for the relay of aero-
nautical and meteorological data, forecasts, and warnings, for the benefit of the
aeronautical users. The Aeronautical Fixed Telecommunications Network (AFTN),
used for collection and dissemination of aeronautical and meteorological informa-
tion for aviation users, is being replaced by higher-speed aeronautical circuits that
can be utilized for dissemination of multi-hazard warning messages.

GEONETCast, a planned global multi-hazard dissemination system within the

Global Earth Observation System of Systems (GEOSS), shows promise as a reliable
primary dissemination method for tsunami products and warning messages.

Warning centers have found that it is important to limit the number of primary dis-
semination channels and steer customers to those methods. It is recommended that
NTWCs and RTWPs use the WMO GTS as the primary dissemination channel for
tsunami watch, warning, and advisory products, with

T
secondary and complementary communications systems,
such as the satellite-based GEONETCast, EMWIN, and
ip
RANET broadcasts as backup. Figures 8-2a and 8-2b
show dissemination channels used by the West Coast/ Tsunami warning centers
should strive to limit
Alaska Tsunami Warning Center (WC/ATWC) and Pacific
dissemination channels to
Tsunami Warning Center (PTWC), respectively.
a manageable number.

8-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

West Coast/Alaska Tsunami Warning Center Message Dissemination Routes

Sea Level data

State telecomms. to State Emergency

Seismic data
local emergency Service Offices
management FAA Offices,
Foreign contacts
FEM
A
Sys Natio
tem nal IN2
(N War NAD
AW nin FAA
AS
) g Local Emergency
Mgmt, Media, Public,
West Coast/ Military
USCG Radio, etc. US Coast Guard Alaska Tsunami Internet - Email
Warning Center
NOAA Weather Wire
Local Emergency
Mgmt
Internet - Digital Cell Phone

5
22
uit
EMWIN Circ
NWS
Family of Services N WS
Telecommunications
GTS Gateway
Military Public Web Site

AWPS NWS Coastal State Dept. Operations

Forecast Offices Center

Notify foreign
countries as
appropriate

NOAA Weather Emergency Alert

Radio System

Figure 8-2a. WC/ATWC Dissemination Channels

Figure 8-2b. PTWC Dissemination Channels

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-7

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

NTWCs should also strive to establish ways to confirm that both automatic and
manual tsunami watch, warning, advisory, and test messages are received by respon-
sible national, regional, and local government agencies. Dissemination techniques
need to take advantage of new communications technologies, including cell phone
text messaging via Short Messaging Service (SMS), syndicated news feeds via Really
Simple Syndication (RSS), Extensive Markup Language (XML/CAP), and Enhanced
Multilevel Precedence and Pre-emption Services (EMLPP).

Warning Receivers
Warning message electronic receivers should be used on a daily basis, or they will
be put away and forgotten by the public. Ideally, warning capabilities will be found
in commonly used appliances, such as radios, cell phones, and telephones, in the
near future.
 Receivers must take into account the fact that many people are not adept in the
use of advanced technology.
 Warning alerts must be distinct, attention grabbing, and not appear to be another
common occurrence. Ideally the alert will provide an indication of the hazard
threat level.
 Receivers should provide individuals with the opportunity to test the system them-
selves; for example, calling a toll free number which sends an alert message only
to their receiver.

Warning System Reliability

Even the most carefully designed warning system requires continual maintenance to
ensure that it will be effective. Critical phases of maintenance include training, evalu-
ation, and development. Core elements must be used every day, with regular testing
by the end user.

Important Points to Remember about

Dissemination of Tsunami Warnings
 The WMO GTS is the backbone of the international dissemination of hydrometeo-
rological data products and watch, warning, and advisory messages, and is both
point-to-point, and point-to-multi-point. Telefax and email are also widely utilized.
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Aeronautical Fixed Telecom-
munications Network/Aeronautical Telecommunications Network (AFTN/ATN)
is the backbone for dissemination of aeronautical and meteorological data, and
because of its reliability for use by air traffic agencies, is suitable for dissemination
of tsunami products to aeronautical users.
 Secondary and complementary communications systems, such as the satellite-
based GEONETCast, EMWIN, and RANET broadcasts should be established as
backup dissemination channels, although it is acknowledged that in some develop-
ing countries, they may be a primary means for receipt of tsunami messages.

8-8 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

 Centers have found that it is important to limit the number of primary dissemina-
tion channels and steer customers to those methods, if they are readily available.
 Dissemination techniques should take advantage of new communications
technologies.
 The media play an important role in distributing warnings.
 Repeated warning messages at regular intervals ensure those who missed an
earlier warning will have another chance to receive it, and those who ignored an
earlier warning will have another opportunity to respond.
 The dissemination processes should be automated as much as possible to decrease
the time required to issue warnings.

The Emergency Managers Weather Information

Network (EMWIN)
Damage from powerful weather and tsunami events, and the threat of serious civil
disasters, has illuminated the pressing need to keep the emergency management
community up-to-date with the latest information. NOAA’s National Weather Service,
aided by the National Environmental Satellite Data Information Service (NESDIS)
Geostationary Operational Environmental Satellite (GOES) satellites, is using EMWIN
to supply vital information to computers throughout North and South America, the
Caribbean, and much of the Pacific Ocean basin. The popularity of EMWIN has flour-
ished from its inception, with support from public and private organizations.

What is EMWIN?
EMWIN is a weather warning
and data broadcast system that
provides rapid dissemina­tion of
warnings, forecasts, graphics,
and imagery to a desktop
computer. The goal of EMWIN
is to give emergency managers
the capability to respond faster
to tsunamis, severe weather,
and other threats. That means
Figure 8-3. GOES West and East Satellites Coverage
greater lead times to warn and
possibly evacuate communities.
Faster response time improves the likelihood of sparing lives and property. The
primary dissemination method is an L-band broadcast via the GOES East and West
satellites. This allows the EMWIN signal to cover over half of the earth’s surface.
EMWIN is used both nationally and inter­nationally, and the use of both satellites
allows signal redundancy for many areas. The primary audience of EMWIN is the
emergency management community; however, its low cost, no recurring fees, and
ease of use has made it widely used by the general public.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-9

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

How EMWIN Works

The National Weather Service (NWS) gathers live weather and emergency informa-
tion from sources across the globe, and the EMWIN system broadcasts that data. As
depicted in Figure 8-4, a satellite downlink enables users to access the EMWIN data
stream of real-time weather information and other data. This provides a very reliable
data receipt method that can function with little or no infrastructure, making it more
reliable than wire and fiber optic systems in disaster situations. This fact has made
EMWIN especially useful to island countries, prone to devastating hurricanes and
tsunamis.

Figure 8-4. EMWIN Configuration

In addition to the GOES satellite broadcast, portions of the EMWIN data stream are
also rebroadcast via very high frequency (VHF) radio by dedicated volunteers in certain
areas. In the Pacific, the EMWIN signal is rebroadcast on the Pan-Pacific Education and
Communication Experiments by Satellite (PEACESAT), operated by the University of
Hawaii, thus extending the coverage to the eastern edge of Australia. The rebroad-
cast technologies allow local emergency management groups and municipal agencies
to tailor the information to fit their specific area by filtering the products that do not
apply and then allowing the insertion of additional products pertinent to the locality.

The broadcast is also available through the internet in its entirety via internet “push”
technology. With this method, users with the appropriate software connect to one of
the many EMWIN data servers and begin to receive the broadcast. They are then free
to use the data and may also decide to allow connections to their personal computer
(PC) if they wish to become part of the distributed network of EMWIN data servers.

Several vendors market EMWIN end user software with many outstanding features.
The packages allow the users to display the text products, graphics, and imagery.

8-10 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Some of the software packages allow users to configure their computer to trigger an
alarm when a certain product arrives. Alarm features include automatic activation of
lights, sirens, printers, pagers, electronic mail, and other forms of notification. The
mail and paging options are extremely powerful. They allow users to receive email
alerts and messages to telephones or handheld computers. One package even allows
users to send mail to an internet paging service that will then convert the message to
speech and call a list of phone numbers. Persons on the phone list will receive a call
and a spoken alert.

International Use of EMWIN

A number of countries outside the United States have also begun to use EMWIN to
assist with emergency management. This is particularly true in the Pacific Ocean,
where EMWIN enjoys a robust partnership with many Pacific island nations through
the dedication and coordination of the NWS Pacific Region. EMWIN is a major com-
ponent of NOAA’s contribution to assist the Caribbean region too. Part of the effort
focuses on disaster preparedness and mitigation efforts to shield critical commercial
and environmental infrastructure in the Caribbean from natural disasters, such as tsu-
namis and hurricanes.

Based on the feedback from countries initially utilizing the EMWIN capability, addi-
tional deployments throughout the Caribbean and South and Central America are
planned. The Bahamas purchased a dozen EMWIN systems to ensure coverage for
some of its 700 islands. Trinidad and Tobago also plans to deploy the EMWIN capa-
bility as part of its ongoing tsunami warning program. EMWIN can also be used as a
template for other countries to develop a similar capability in order to tap into their
own meteorological satellites.

Unfortunately, EMWIN satellite coverage on the NOAA GOES satellites does not reach
into the Indian Ocean region. The orbital position of the GOES West satellite is 135°
west longitude and the orbital position of PEACESAT is 175° west. As a result, the
usable range of a global beam from GOES West extends to approximately 155° east, and
a global beam from PEACESAT extends to approximately 110° east longitude for sta-
tions located near the equator. The longitude of Malé and Colombo are 73° 30’ and 79°
52’, respectively, so the EMWIN system does not provide coverage to these countries.

In addition on the current NOAA GOES satellites, there are brief satellite outages
ranging from several minutes up to 60 minutes during each 3- to 4-day satellite
eclipse period, each spring and fall. Since tsunami warning information is of a time-
critical nature, such outages pose a threat to warning delivery of what is presumed
to be the backup system for a terrestrial link. Any loss of terrestrial communications
during the eclipse periods would potentially put a station at risk of not receiving a
timely warning if EMWIN were to be used as the sole satellite backup to the terres-
trial line. Of note is that EMWIN serves as the most reliable source of critical weather
information for many Pacific Island countries.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-11

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

The Future of EMWIN

EMWIN will undergo a transition to remain compatible with the next series of GOES
satellites, the GOES-N through P constellation. A transponder dedicated for EMWIN
use has been provided on this constellation. Sometime before 2011, the current GOES
satellite will be replaced by the new series. All current EMWIN users will need to
migrate to newer technologies due to frequency, power, and modulation changes. To
meet these future needs, NWS has teamed with NESDIS to develop the EMWIN-N
proof-of-concept receive system. Moving to the EMWIN-N broadcast will allow the
NWS to make use of improved technologies and will double the current data rate, as
well as allow for the use of additional product compression. The EMWIN team is also
currently in discussions with NESDIS regarding specifications for the EMWIN broad-
cast in the GOES-R series of satellites. This collaboration will ensure EMWIN’s contin-
ued availability well into the future.

Transmission Protocol
EMWIN is designed to be an open system. The format of the EMWIN data-stream
transmissions is in the public domain and presented here. This format is intentionally
simple to enable reception by a wide range of user hardware. This format, called the
Quick Block Transfer protocol, is used across all of the EMWIN dissemination meth-
ods, whether radio, satellite, internet or direct cable.

The EMWIN data stream consists of NWS products and other data files. Each prod-
uct or file, whether American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)
text or binary data, is divided into 1-kilobyte (KB) packets and sent as a series of
asynchronous (async) 8-bit bytes, N parity. For example, most current EMWIN radio
broadcasts are receivable, when demodulated, as async 1200,8,N,1, while the satellite
broadcasts are async 9600,8,N,1.

Each product or file is sent as one or more packets, which are numbered 1...N within
the given product. Because the data is packetized, a particular product can be grace-
fully interrupted by a high-priority warning or alert product and then resume. Note
that because the broadcast is receive-only, the receiver has no means of notifying the
transmitter of any block errors or of requesting retransmission of individual blocks.
Instead, each product is usually transmitted at least twice, to “fill in” any blocks
received in error.

Each packet of data contains 1116 bytes, in the following fields:

1. 6 bytes of ASCII 0 (null) to clear the receiver buffer.
2. “/PF” followed by an 8-character file name, a period, and a 3-character file type.
3. “/PN” followed by the block number—the number of this block (1..N) within this
file.
4. “/PT” followed by the total number of blocks (N) being sent for this file.

8-12 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

5. “/CS” followed by a checksum number—the sum of all bytes in the 1024-byte

data portion of this packet, as a 16-bit unsigned decimal.
6. “/FD” followed by the date/time stamp of this file—in the format of: MM/DD/YY
HH:MM:SS AM, without space padding.
7. ASCII 32 (SP) fill—to pad the total bytes in fields 2..8 to a full line of 80 bytes.
8. ASCII 13 (CR) and ASCII 10 (LF) to enhance readability.
9. The data, as a 1024-byte block; if the remaining data of the product is less than
1024 bytes, this block is null-filled so that each packet’s data block is always 1024
bytes long.
10. 6 bytes of ASCII 0 (nullNUL) to clear the receiver buffer.

An example of a typical packet header is:

/[Link]/PN 3 /PT 5 /CS 63366 /FD2/10/95 [Link] PM

The content of the NWS products (in the 1024-byte blocks) may be plain ASCII text or
graphics or imagery. The products are not encrypted, but will often be compressed.
Interpretation of the content of the products is up to the receiver’s software. Details
of the particular text, graphics, imagery, and compression formats are given below.

Text. Text products are transmitted in English and are usually public forecasts.
However, some products may contain a variety of abbreviations or weather-specific
acronyms, or may simply be “readable” tables of computer-summarized data. The
content is generally 7-bit printable ASCII text, but often also contains hex bytes C5,
80, 03, or 83.

The first line of text of a product is the “WMO” heading, which includes a 4- to 6-
character product identifier, a 4-character source site code, and a 6-digit origina-
tion date/time in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The next line may contain an
Advanced Weather Information Processing System (AWIPS) identifier, of 4 to 6 charac-
ters portion. In some products, the next line (or embedded lines) may be a Universal
Generic Code (UGC) line, giving the specific states, zones, or counties to which the
product applies, plus a product-purge date/time (UTC).

Graphics. Graphic products are transmitted in NWS Universal Transmission Format

(UTF), a display-independent format. The UTF format includes vectors, characters,
and gridded data, but not bitmaps or rasters. It was originally designed to be closely
compatible with low end display monitors. The EMWIN UTF products are typically
national or regional coarse radar images that can be zoomed by the display software.

Imagery. Satellite weather images (products from GOES) and other interesting
pictures are transmitted in standard formats as indicated by the file type/extension.
Currently, .GIF and .JPG are used.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-13

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Compression. Local data and watches/warnings/advisories are transmitted as clear

text and not compressed. Other national data products, such as all surface observa-
tions (METARs) for a given hour, are first packed into one “file” and then compressed
and transmitted. The EMWIN “UNPACKER” software task will decompress these files
upon receipt, and then unpack the constituent data products as if received normally.

The compression/decompression software used is the standard PKUNZIP Data Com-

pression format.

For more information. News updates and additional EMWIN background informa-
tion can be found on the EMWIN website at: [Link]
[Link].

Important Points to Remember about EMWIN

 EMWIN is a warning and data broadcast system that provides rapid dissemination
of warnings, forecasts, graphics, and imagery to a desktop computer.
 EMWIN can supply vital information to computers throughout North and South
America, the Caribbean, and much of the Pacific Ocean basin.
 In addition to the GOES satellite broadcast, portions of the EMWIN data stream
are also rebroadcast via VHF radio by dedicated volunteers in certain areas.
 The broadcast is also available through the internet in its entirety via internet
“push” technology.

Radio and Internet Technologies for the Communication

of Hydro-Meteorological and Climate-Related Information
(RANET) to Rural and Remote Communities
RANET is a collaborative effort of many national hydro-meteorological services, non-
governmental organizations (NGO), and communities. These varied partners come
together to make weather and climate information available to rural and remote pop-
ulations, which are often among the most in need of environmental forecasts, obser-
vations, and warnings. While significant advances have been made in our ability to
predict and observe our environment, much of this
valuable information remains inaccessible to those
outside major cities. Tip
RANET has a simple mission:
RANET works with partners to identify new and Help national and regional
existing technologies that can be utilized by rural organizations get useful
communities in a sustainable way. RANET there- information that is locked in
fore engages in system development and network urban areas to rural and remote
deployment, but also stresses training and commu- places in the hope of promoting
nity ownership to ensure that the networks it helps sustainable development and
to create are long-lasting. reducing disaster impacts.

8-14 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

The RANET Approach

The concept and program of RANET was articulated by a number of national agen-
cies and the African Center of Meteorological Applications for Development in the
late 1990s. By 2001 the program had begun setting up networks and working with
a number of communities. It began in Africa to address real infrastructure problems
that face national meteorological and hydrologic services (NMHS) and the develop-
ment community, but those working on RANET soon found that while the issue of
rural communication may be pronounced in Africa, it is in fact a common challenge
throughout the globe. As a result, RANET has been working in parts of Africa, Asia,
and the Pacific for a number of years. New projects in the United States and else-
where in Latin America and the Caribbean are likely to emerge in the future. While
technology offers a number of solutions to the communication challenges in all these
regions, RANET believes that its success is due to a community-based approached
that stresses scalability, local ownership, and multi-purpose systems.

Many in the development community would refer to RANET as a “last mile” initiative
from the hydro-meteorological community, meaning that the program attempts
to deliver information directly to communities and bridge the access gap. There
are many “last miles,” so to be effective RANET has stressed
scalability in its program. What does scalability mean? It means
identifying solutions that are very inexpensive to initially
deploy, that do not require much if any training, and that can
T ip
SCALABILITY =
be maintained and serviced with local resources. Whether it • inexpensive
is a satellite ground station, a community FM radio station, an • uncomplicated
HF (High Frequency radio frequencies between 3 and 30 mega
• locally maintained
Hertz), email network, or other system, RANET works with
partners to develop solutions that meet its scalability criteria.

Local ownership is also key to sustainability. Simply put, equipment will not be main-
tained or utilized if ownership is not encouraged. To that end, RANET stresses commu-
nity listening groups and encourages community associations be established that take
on ownership and commitment to maintain equipment and networks. RANET may
maintain the satellite platform as a public communications commons, but in the end
the program is directed at the national level and equipment owned at the local level.

Finally, RANET encourages its networks to be utilized for other education and
humanitarian purposes beyond that of earth science and services. Resources are too
scarce to establish communication networks dedicated solely to weather, tsunami,
and climate information. Moreover, often communities will not be interested in utiliz-
ing hydro-meteorological services and products until their other information needs in
agriculture, health, and general education are met. RANET therefore seeks partner-
ships with organizations that provide useful information and that can share develop-
ment of a joint network. While new technologies are helping to reduce barriers to
knowledge, these technologies can only be of long-term use if community participa-
tion and dialogue are encouraged.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-15

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

RANET Activity Areas and Programs

 Training: Communications technology has undergone significant change in just
the last decade. Even in rural areas, new technologies allow for new ways of
accessing knowledge. RANET provides training to the NMHS community on how
to utilize these new systems and technologies.
 Operations: On behalf of the meteorological community, RANET maintains a
number of operational systems that provide service to a number of countries
and regions. These include satellite platforms and a mobile phone messaging
infrastructure.
 RANET Internet Presence Initiative (RIPI): While the internet and World Wide
Web does not reach rural communities, the technologies underpinning the inter-
net are increasingly common across multiple platforms. Moreover, it is important
for NMHSs to maintain a web presence that serves the regional and international
communities. RANET therefore provides NMHSs with server capacity and train-
ing, such that they can maintain a web presence and build capacities utilizing such
technologies.
 RANET Satellite Broadcast Services (RSBS): RANET works with national agen-
cies to ensure that their information can be broadcast over various satellite plat-
forms, which are appropriate for rural communities or intermediaries such as field
extension workers. Traditionally, RANET has utilized capacity on the WorldSpace
AfriStar and AsiaStar satellites through an agreement with First Voice Interna-
tional. Such capacity is used to send daily forecasts and agricultural bulletins, and
even as part of a tsunami warning system.
 [Link]: Mobile phones have become one of the most effective means to
reach areas previously underserved by terrestrial communications. RANET is using
mobile phone and has developed its own backbone infrastructure to support the
collection of remote field data (under the Community Reporter Program), to send
alerts to key decision makers, allow users to dynamically queue material on satel-
lite broadcasts, and to allow NMHSs to provide forecasts and similar information
through mobile messaging.
 RANET Alert Watcher: Utilizing mobile phone SMS (text messages) RANET is
providing notification services to key emergency managers and other officials
throughout Asia, the Pacific, and Caribbean regions. As a “heads up” system,
RANET passes warnings, such as for tsunami, from regional centers to these key
decision makers so that they know to seek additional information through official
communications.

RANET Organization and Support

RANET is an international collaboration based upon the partnership and resources of
many national weather services and related agencies, NGOs and private sector part-
ners, as well as the communities in which RANET works. Base budgetary and techni-
cal support for RANET is provided by the U.S. Agency for International Development

8-16 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

(USAID) Office of U.S. Foreign Disaster Assistance (OFDA), the NWS, the Austra-
lian Bureau of Meteorology, the Australian Agency for International Development
(AusAID), the New Zealand Meteorological Service Ltd., and New Zealand’s interna-
tional aid and development agency (NZAID). Many other donor nations and orga-
nizations have provided specific and significant project support. The communities
in which RANET works, however, provide an invaluable resource of dedication and
time, which in the end is what makes RANET work.

RANET is organized at the country level and most often through an NMHS. Each
participant country appoints an individual or team to oversee the development and
maintenance of communication infrastructure within the country. Additionally, the
national points of contact work with communities to determine information needs
and develop field sites. Eventual ownership of field equipment, however, is passed to
the recipient community. Generally such ownership is through an existing local NGO
or community association. RANET Global consists of a number of technicians and
project managers who help to maintain common infrastructure, such as the satellite
broadcasts, as well as coordinate resources to support national programs. Each region
(Africa, Pacific, etc.) also organizes itself into leadership teams. Such teams consist
of the national managers and other relevant individuals. The regional teams come
together to mobilize resources, identify need, and articulate a shared vision forward.

News, updates, and further details on the RANET programs are available at
[Link]

International Satellite Communications System (ISCS)

The ISCS is a satellite data distribution system operated by NOAA and the Federal Avia-
tion Administration in support of the World Area Forecast System. The system is oper-
ated by MCI Corporation under a NOAA National Weather Service contract. The ISCS
support of WAFS is on behalf of the ICAO program for distribution of data to support
international civil aviation. ISCS/WAFS provides the worldwide aviation community
with operational meteorological forecasts and information about meteorological phe-
nomena required for flight planning and safe, economic, and efficient air navigation.

ISCS support for RMTN is part of a cooperative effort between U.S. NWS and WMO
to improve the GTS in WMO Region IV (North and Central America). The RMTN
allows for a two-way exchange of meteorological information between the United
States and nations in the Caribbean and Central America. The GTS component of
ISCS replaced the WMO Caribbean and Central America distribution and collection
land line systems for Region IV and makes use of two-way (send/receive) Very Small
Aperture Terminal (VSAT) satellite systems. Since the satellite protocols are propri-
etary, the receiving equipment (2.4-meter parabolic antenna and satellite receiver)
must be purchased from MCI, and access to the satellite broadcast is controlled by the
meteorological authority of each contracting state.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-17

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

The system operates a Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

multicast broadcast of data in BUFR (Binary Universal Form for the Representa-
tion of meteorological data)., GRIB (GRIdded Binary), and alphanumeric formats,
with several daily scheduled pushes of large quantities of graphical WAFS data and
model data. However, the system can be configured to interrupt the transfer of large,
time‑consuming files in order to insert high-priority messages such as a tsunami
warning. The forward bandwidth of the IP multicast is 128 kilobytes per second
(kbps) with capacity up to 512 kbps. The return VSAT links are a minimum of 4 kbps
with capacity up to 128 kbps. The ISCS uses commercial C-band satellites operated
by Intelsat to broadcast to the Atlantic Ocean Region and to the Pacific Ocean Region,
including eastern Asia. The system originates meteorological information from the
NWS Telecom Gateway (NWSTG) in Silver Spring, MD, which relays the data for
uplink by MCI from Andover, ME, to Intelsat 903 over the Atlantic Ocean Region and
from Yacolt, WA, to Intelsat 701. Figure 8-5 shows the ISCS configuration.

Figure 8-5. International Satellite Communications System (ISCS) Configuration

8-18 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Important Points to Remember about the International Satellite

Communications System
 ISCS is a satellite distribution system operated by NOAA to support WAFS and the
WMO Region IV Meteorological Telecommunications Network.
 ISCS allows for a two-way exchange of meteorological information between the
United States and nations in the Caribbean and Central America.
 The system can be configured to interrupt the transfer of large, time-consuming
files in order to insert high-priority messages such as a tsunami warning.

UK Met SADIS and India Meteorological Department

INSAT Satellite Distribution Systems
In addition to US satellite distribution systems like ISCS, EMWIN, and RANET, numer-
ous other countries extend the footprint of areas served by supporting other satellite
delivery programs. Two of those programs are the UK Meteorological Office’s SADIS
and India’s INSAT system.

UK Met Office’s Satellite Distribution (SADIS) System

The United Kingdom, on behalf of ICAO, operates the SADIS system to broadcast
WAFS data to the European, African, Middle Eastern, and Indian Ocean regions not
included in the coverage of the ISCS. The SADIS coverage area and the ISCS coverage
area are intentionally overlapped to assure continuous worldwide coverage for WAFS.
SADIS is uplinked from Whitehall, UK, to Intelsat 904 located at 60° east over the
Indian Ocean, and is downlinked using the satellite’s C-band global beam. Coverage
is from the eastern Atlantic, Cape Verde (20° W) to central Australia (140° E), provid-
ing contiguous coverage of the Indian Ocean region.

The SADIS system is a fee-based system with the collected revenue going to offset
costs incurred by the UK Met Office for personnel salaries, hardware and software
maintenance and replacement, and satellite bandwidth. As with ISCS, the suite of data
products may be excessive compared to what is necessary to fulfill the basic require-
ments for tsunami warning centers.

India’s INSAT Distribution System

The Indian Space Research Organization operates several multipurpose satellites in its
INSAT fleet. In addition to standard C-band and Ku-band data and video services, part
of the INSAT fleet is equipped with S-band capabilities and meteorological observa-
tion payloads. In particular, in cooperation with the India Meteorological Department
(IMD), INSAT 3A gathers observational data such as infrared and visual observations
and distributes this data through the S-band downlink along with additional products
uplinked by the IMD from New Delhi. This broadcast of meteorological information
essentially constitutes an extension of the GTS throughout India via satellite.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-19

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

The INSAT distribution system can carry tsunami warning information and may be a
good option for satellite reception by national meteorological centers within its foot-
print. Available footprint plots indicate the satellite’s power is concentrated on the
country of India and falls off sharply outside the country.

The INSAT feed is also provided by the IMD to WorldSpace, which broadcasts it using
the westernmost AsiaSat satellite. This offers a much wider potential distribution
area, as this satellite was specifically designed to cover India, parts of Asia, and the
Middle East. The general coverage footprint for the three operational AsiaSat satellites
is shown in Figure 8-6. The WorldSpace system was designed to deliver multiplexed
audio and data services to small, portable, inexpensive consumer receivers with small
patch antennas. To receive the INSAT meteorological data feed via WorldSpace, the
user needs a WorldSpace receiver, a small data interface unit that forwards data from
the receiver to a PC, the associated PC software, and a WorldSpace subscription. In
addition, the INSAT data feed is offered only to a closed user group, and authoriza-
tion is required by the IMD.

Figure 8-6. WorldSpace’s AsiaSat Satellite Coverage Footprint

Important Points to Remember about SADIS and INSAT

 SADIS broadcasts WAFS data to the European, African, Middle Eastern, and Indian
Ocean regions not included in the coverage of the U.S.-operated ISCS.
 The INSAT feed is provided by the IMD to WorldSpace, which broadcasts it using
its AsiaSat satellite. This provides a wide distribution area, as this satellite was
specifically designed to cover India, Asia, and the Middle East.

8-20 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

GEONETCast — the Dissemination Component of GEOSS

GEONETCast is an initiative within the United Nations’ GEO framework. Led by
NOAA, WMO, the Chinese Meteorological Agency (CMA), and the European Orga-
nization for the Exploitation of Meteorological Satellites (EUMETSAT), GEONETCast
addresses the global dissemination needs of the GEOSS environmental data in a coor-
dinated way.

Based on discussions between EUMETSAT and the United States NOAA, U.S. Co-
Chair retired Navy Vice Admiral Conrad C. Lautenbacher, Jr, Ph.D., undersecretary of
commerce for oceans and atmosphere and NOAA administrator, presented the con-
cept to the GEO Executive Committee on September 30, 2005. EUMETSAT and NOAA
then presented it to the second GEO plenary meeting in December 2005, which
adopted the concept in principle. GEO members and participating organizations
recognized that GEO could add value to existing operational
and prototype technological efforts that were already under way
to enhance the delivery of data and information to users. ipT GEONETCast: a worldwide,
Participation in GEONETCast as a data provider, end user, or operational, end-to‑end
dissemination infrastructure provider is voluntary. The intergov- Earth observation
ernmental GEO has defined the GEONETCast task as Capacity data collection and
Building Task #CB-06-04, with oversight by the GEO Architec- dissemination system.
ture and Data Committee. It is critical, however, that the task
also work with the GEO User Interface and Capacity Building
Committees and others to identify additional data, products, and
services.

GEONETCast builds on the experience gained by EUMETSAT with the EUMETCast

operational dissemination system, and on the WMO Integrated Global Data Dissemina-
tion Service (IGDDS) concept. GEONETCast is a truly global dissemination system by
which environmental in situ, airborne, and space-based observations, products, and
services posted to the GEOSS are transmitted to users through a global network of
communications satellites, using a multicast, access-controlled, broadband capability.

Overview
GEONETCast uses the multicast capability of a global network of communications
satellites to transmit environmental satellite and in situ data and products from provid-
ers to users within GEO (see Figure 8-7). Commercially available technology provides
cost-efficient solutions with easy-to-implement terminals, which are widely used for
direct-to-home digital television. The multicast capability allows different datasets to
be handled in parallel, regardless of the source. The use of a key access capability
enables the data policy of each data provider to be respected, and also allows for the
distribution to individuals or groups of users, as appropriate, to be targeted within the
footprint of each satellite (see Figures 8-8 and 8-9). This capability is especially useful
in parts of the world where high speed land lines and/or internet are not available.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-21

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Figure 8-7. Structure of GEONETCast

GEONETCast consists of three major components:

 Existing dissemination infrastructure
 Data providers/sources
 The global environmental user community

Currently, EUMETCast, operated by EUMETSAT, provides the dissemination infra-

structure that hosts GEONETCast. This provides geographic coverage of Europe, the
Middle East, Africa, and South, Central and most of North America. The Chinese
Meteorological Administration (CMA) is integrating FengYunCast into GEONETCast.
This provides geographic coverage of the Asia/Pacific region. FengYunCast is planned
as an evolution of an existing CMA-operated dissemination system that provides
geographic coverage of China and a number of neighboring countries, including the
Southwest Pacific. Additionally, NOAA is establishing a dissemination system that
provides comprehensive coverage of the Americas, called GEONETCast Americas.
The draft GEONETCast in the Americas: A Vision and Concept Document provides an
overview of the GEONETCast Americas concept developed within NOAA. Users in
the region will, with GEONETCast Americas, be provided with a long-term perspec-
tive for access to GEONETCast.

Together, these three regional systems (EUMETCast, FengYunCast, and GEONETCast

Americas) form GEONETCast, and have the capability to provide near global geo-
graphic coverage as shown in Figures 8-8 and 8-9. The added value that GEONETCast
brings is to facilitate and enhance access, particularly for developing countries, to key
environmental data of GEO by applying standards across, and encouraging the devel-
opment of, regional systems. These three regional systems are seen as the minimum
required to establish global geographic coverage. Should additional regional systems

8-22 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Figure 8-8. Initial and Final Coverage for GEONETCast Americas

Figure 8-9. Coverage of EUMETCast and FengYunCast

be made available, the GEONETCast concept is flexible and scalable enough to easily
accommodate them.

These systems will utilize uplink ground stations and available telecommunication
technology from geostationary satellites so that costs can be kept affordable for users
through the purchase of existing off-the-shelf equipment. Data from each region
can be disseminated outside the originating region through the utilization of data-
exchange links between the regions. This inter-region data exchange can take place

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-23

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

using a number of possible methods such as dedicated data-exchange links, overlap-

ping satellite footprints, or some existing network such as the GTS or the internet.

This satellite-based dissemination system is one component of a larger GEO data

distribution network that may utilize the internet and/or high-speed fiber optic land
lines; however, these methods are not specifically addressed by the current GEONET-
Cast concept. The scope of GEONETCast may evolve over time to include these data
distribution methods as a means to distribute data to users as required.

Service Standards
Each of the dissemination systems which together form GEONETCast (and any future
regional systems) are recommended to comply with a number of service standards:
 Each regional system provides a single entry point, known as a network center.
 The network centers can be linked together to provide data exchange between
them.
 Each network center should provide connectivity and system capacity to data
providers from all GEO Societal Benefit Areas (SBA) within the region.
 Each network center should provide bandwidth to support data dissemination
from outside the region.
 Network center operators are responsible for managing and interfacing with users
in coordination with data providers located within the region.
 Network center operators are responsible for managing and interfacing with users
in coordination with the other network center operators (who are representing the
data providers of their respective regions).

Technical Standards
At the technical level, a number of standards have emerged as forming the baseline
for dissemination systems that contribute to the GEONETCast infrastructure:
 Contributing dissemination systems should be generic, multi-service dissemination
systems, based on standard Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) technology.
 Use of commercial broadcast channels on television, direct-to-home
telecommunication satellites is encouraged.
 Use of commercial, off-the-shelf, commonly available reception equipment is
encouraged.
 Use of IP is encouraged over DVB standard coding.
 Systems should support transparent transfer of files (files should be received
exactly as sent).
 Use of standard, openly described file formats is encouraged; examples currently
in use are L/HRIT, BUFR, GRIB, HDF, netCDF.

8-24 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

 Contributing systems should provide secure access control at individual file and
user level.
 The systems should be open, flexible, and scalable at both the network center and
user terminal levels.
 Quality of service should be ensured and regularly monitored.
 Catalogues of transmitted data should be maintained and made available for
consultation by users in order to facilitate data discovery and subscription.
 Dissemination should be organized in multiple multicast channels corresponding
to product categories, which are associated with Program Identifiers.

Important Points to Remember about GEONETCast

 GEONETCast is a truly global dissemination system by which environmental
in situ, airborne, and space-based observations, products, and services from
contributions to the GEOSS are transmitted to users through a global network
of communications satellites, using a multicast, access-controlled, broadband
capability.
 Commercially available technology provides cost-efficient solutions with easy-to-
implement terminals, which are widely used for direct-to-home digital television.
 Three regional systems (EUMETCast, FengYunCast and GEONETCast Americas)
form GEONETCast, and have the capability to provide near global geographic
coverage.
 Inter-region data exchange can take place using a number of possible methods
such as dedicated data-exchange links, overlapping satellite footprints, or some
existing network such as the GTS or the internet.
 Dissemination systems are generic, multi-service dissemination systems, based on
standard DVB technology.
 Countries being serviced by a GEONETCast distributor should initiate contact and
establish communications paths for the uplink of their environmental data, includ-
ing data and products used by NTWCs and RTWPs, as a reliable method to dis-
seminate tsunami warnings, forecasts, and advisories.

Notification
Notification encompasses the understanding of the received message by the target
audience, and additionally the implementation of appropriate actions by those at risk.
In many ways notification is more difficult than dissemination, which involves simply
physically getting the message to stakeholders.

Much of the discussion in this section is based on the Partnership for Public Warning
publication, “Developing a Unified All-Hazard Public Warning System, a Report by

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-25

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Tip
the Workshop on Effective Hazard Warnings,” Emmets-
burg, Maryland, November 25, 2002 (PPW Report
2002-02).
The goal of warning is
to prevent hazards from
Warnings seek action. A warning system is an orga-
becoming disasters.
nized process for detecting a hazard and rapidly dis-
seminating information about the threat and about
appropriate protective actions. An effective warning
system is one that causes the maximum appropriate protective actions to be taken
for a given commitment of resources, because it has been designed to be compatible
with the context in which it operates. Understanding this context requires knowledge
of the other participants in the warning system for a given hazard, the other types
of hazards faced by those participants, and the warning systems that are currently in
use for those other hazards.

The warning process consists of people with information communicating with people
at risk, and others such as emergency responders, in advance of or during a hazard-
ous event, with the intent that those at risk will take appropriate action to reduce
casualties and losses. The success of a warning is measured by what actions people
take. A warning might recommend immediate action or it might simply encourage
people to seek more information.

Many people are involved in the warning process. Warnings must be received and
understood by a complex target audience including the general public, institutional
decision makers (in business, state and local government, and NGOs), and emergency
responders (firefighters, law enforcement officers, paramedics, public health workers,
and emergency managers).

The news media and the emergency management community frequently act as inter-
mediaries between those issuing warnings and households (or other information
end-users). These intermediaries—together with independent experts in university
research institutes, national laboratories, and other agencies—critically evaluate the
information disseminated by the technical experts to determine if it is accurate, inter-
nally consistent, consistent with other sources’ messages, complete, specific, timely,
relevant, and important. If a warning is judged to be inadequate in any of these
respects, it will be challenged, supplemented with additional information, or ignored.

Moreover, end users evaluate the warnings they receive from all sources in terms
of their prior knowledge about the hazard and the recommended response actions.
Finally, end users also evaluate the warnings they receive about any given hazard in
terms of their knowledge about other safety and health hazards and recommended
actions for those other hazards. It is also important to remember that “the general
public” is really “publics” since it involves:
 Decision makers at all levels in the community
 People with many different levels of education

8-26 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

 People with many different levels of financial ability and responsibility

 People of different races and beliefs
 People with many different primary languages
 People with widely varying experience with the hazard
 People with varying levels of physical ability

It is critically important for centers to test their message dissemination communica-

tion channels frequently, and identify dissemination problems, so the tsunami mes-
sages reach the end users when a real tsunami event occurs.

Warning System Design

NTWCs and RTWPs should not assume that there will be immediate reception of
a warning, unlimited attention to the warning message, perfect comprehension of
message content based upon accurate prior knowledge about the threat, and perfect
compliance with the recommended actions. None of these conditions will occur, even
though reception, attention, comprehension, and personalization increase when there
is an imminent threat. Consequently, warning systems and warning strategies must
be carefully designed to make it more likely that warnings will be as effective as pos-
sible. Effective warning system design consists of four main steps:
 Define the desired message effects, especially the behavioral objectives of the
system. What actions do authorities want the end-users to take?
 Identify any distinctively different segments of the target population. How
do people differ in terms of their abilities to receive a warning, attend to it,
comprehend its content, personalize the threat, choose an appropriate protective
action, and implement that protective action?
 Identify the channels through which warning messages will be transmitted. What
technologies and what intermediate sources are needed?
 Define who the initial message sources will be and develop their perceived
credibility by taking steps to ensure their expertise and trustworthiness.

Warning Channels
As noted in the section on dissemination, centers should identify all the commu-
nications channels to which different segments of the population have access. It is
especially important to identify the channels that people monitor routinely, as well
as those that can reach people rapidly during emergencies. Use multiple methods
and channels to disseminate messages. These include print and electronic media, the
Internet, and even face-to-face presentations from credible original and intermediate
sources. Encourage people to tune to reliable sources of local broadcast news.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-27

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Warning Message Content

NTWCs and RTWPs should be as specific as possible about the nature of the threat,
the anticipated impact location, and the expected time of impact. Decision makers
in business, government, and NGOs need to have as much information as possible
so they can weigh the consequences of alternative
actions (including inaction) before expending significant
resources on protective measures. ipT Create standard forms for
Recommend one or more specific protective actions. text messages and oral
One of the major incentives is protection of persons and messages for use in times
property from the hazard. Determine how to describe the of emergency.
hazard so that the message generates a high level of pro-
tection motivation. Explain to those who are not at risk
why they are not believed to be at risk and why they do
not need to take protective action. Use terminology in warning messages that is con-
sistent across time for a given hazard and, to the greatest extent possible, compatible
with the terminology that is used for other hazards Let people know when the threat
has ended so they can resume normal activities as soon as possible. As much as possi-
ble, RTWPs and NTWCs should create standard forms for text messages and oral mes-
sages and store them for future use during events. Figure 8-10 provides an example of
a preformatted message for watch standers to read directly on radio, television, etc.

Warning Sources
Centers must recognize that no single source has complete credibility regarding all
aspects of the threat and protective actions. Federal, state, and local government
agencies vary in their credibility, as do news media, business, and NGOs. Identify
in advance which organizations (and individuals within those organizations) will be
responsible for communicating with those at risk, as well as with other population
segments that are not at risk. Identify procedures by which information from different
sources can be combined to ensure that each individual source’s messages are consis-
tent with all other sources’ messages and that, together, all official sources’ messages
are accurate, complete, specific, internally consistent, timely, novel, and relevant.

Recognize that source credibility can be established initially by credentials such as

agency mission and educational degrees, but is enhanced by preparing objective

T
(transparent) procedures in advance rather than impro-
vising during an incident, by obtaining endorsement by
external experts (peer review), and by establishing a ip
satisfactory record of performance over time. Build cred- Develop and utilize
ibility and understanding that the warnings are based on trusted personalities who
the best available professional practice. Develop credible, the public know and
articulate authorities to use consistently. respect.

8-28 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Local Tsunami Informatin Bulletin

Attention all stations. Repeat. Attention all stations.

This is the Pacific Tsunami Warning Center.

A local earthquake has just occurred.

epicenter location – for example, “on the southeast coast of the Big Island”

No tsunami is expected. Repeat. No tsunami is expected.

Once Again.

This is the Pacific Tsunami Warning Center.

A local earthquake has just occurred.

epicenter location – for example, “on the southeast coast of the Big Island”

No tsunami is expected. Repeat. No tsunami is expected.

A hardcopy message with more detailed information will be transmitted shortly.

State Warning Point, Contact All County Warning Points. Please Acknowledge.

Time Read on HAWAS: ___________________ Initial: _______

___ Notify State Civil Defense Duty Person (see current SCD Emergency Notification Sheet)

___ Notify __________________________________________________________

___ Notify __________________________________________________________

Source: Pacific Tsunami Warning Center Operations Manual

Figure 8-10. Example of a Preformatted Oral Message (Information Bulletin)

Warning System Context

Federal authorities who are responsible for warning frequently think only of dissemi-
nating threat information to the general public, but it is important to recognize that
the target audience is much more complex than this. Centers need to recognize that
“the public” is not a homogeneous entity. Households, businesses, government agen-
cies, and NGOs vary in size, demographic composition, geographic location, and eco-
nomic resources.

Centers should identify the ways in which population segments differ in their percep-
tions of the credibility of different sources, their access to different warning channels,

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-29

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

their reactions to warning message content, and the incentives, disincentives, and
constraints they are likely to experience in attempting to take protective actions.

Important Points to Remember about Notification

 An effective warning system is one that causes the maximum appropriate
protective actions to be taken.
 The news media and the emergency management community frequently act as
intermediaries between the center issuing warnings and a complex target audi-
ence including the general public, institutional decision makers, and emergency
responders.
 It is critically important for centers to test their message dissemination communi-
cation channels frequently, and identify dissemination problems, so the tsunami
messages reach the end users when a real tsunami event occurs.
 RTWPs and NTWCs should create standard forms for text messages and oral mes-
sages and store them for future use during events.

NTWC and RTWP Community Preparedness Programs

Community preparedness can be thought of as the advance capacity of a community
to respond to the consequences of a tsunami (or other adverse event) by having plans
in place so that people know what to do and where to go if a tsunami warning is
issued or a tsunami is observed. This result can be achieved through the development
of programs like the United States’ TsunamiReady program, in which

Tip
communities have plans, enhanced communications, and heightened
awareness among their citizens. This type of program will increase
resilience to tsunami events, reduce economic losses, and shorten
Preparedness is having
plans in place to respond recovery periods.
properly to a warning.
Effective community preparedness programs also address hazard miti-
gation: sustained actions taken to reduce or eliminate the long-term
risk to human life and property based on tsunami risk assessments.
This includes planning and zoning to manage development in areas particularly at
risk for tsunami, embracing tsunami resistant construction, and protecting critical
facilities and infrastructure. The United States’ concept of tsunami resilient commu-
nities, and the Coastal Community Resilience (CCR) program are an example of this
type of tsunami mitigation program.

Outreach and communication with the public is crucial to their understanding of the
nature of the tsunami hazard, the risks to personal safety and property, and the steps
to reduce those risks. Key components include raising public awareness and effect-
ing behavioral change in the areas of mitigation and preparedness; the deployment of
stable, reliable, and effective warning systems; and the development of effective mes-
saging for inducing favorable community response to mitigation, preparedness, and
warning communications.

8-30 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Many tsunami warning system requirements (data communications, data processing,

products, dissemination, etc.) are, in part, driven by the characteristics of a center’s
partners and customer base. Since partners and customers can vary significantly from
center to center, it is difficult here to precisely identify these groups. However, some
general guidelines and techniques apply to most situations, as described below.

Much of the discussion in this section is based on the publication, “Tsunami Risk
Reduction for the United States: A Framework for Action by the National Science and
Technology Council, A Joint Report of the Subcommittee on Disaster Reduction and
the United States Group.”

Identifying Partners and Customers

Partners are generally other government and nongovernmental groups that play
some role in the end-to-end tsunami warning system chain. These will include:
 Domestic and international data providers
 Government and private groups (including the mass media) that serve as commu-
nications conduits for product dissemination
 Government and private-sector groups that train and educate other center partners
and customers

Customers are those groups and individuals that rely on a tsunami warning center
and its partners for timely and accurate tsunami watches and warnings for protection
of their lives and the opportunity to minimize the impact on their property.
Customers include:
 The general public
 NGOs and other private-sector groups that must respond to events
 Government agencies that must respond to events

A center’s outreach and education program must recognize these two distinct classes
of constituents since each has unique requirements. The center may even have to
employ different techniques to identify and deal with the

Tip major groups that comprise each of these two categories.

The goal and focus of outreach should be to educate the

A center needs a PUBLIC public and other partners about tsunami safety and prepared-
AFFAIRS OFFICER to
ness and promote the center’s tsunami warning program
coordinate with the
through public events, media workshops, and the public
media during events.
school system. During actual tsunami events, the center should
have a designated public affairs officer to coordinate media
response. During annual tsunami exercises, the public affairs
officer is responsible for notifying the media.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-31

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

A center’s public affairs officer should also provide media training and guidance to
agency representatives, respond to media requests, organize news conferences, coor-
dinate briefings and tours at the warning centers, develop informational materials,
assist with congressional briefings, and plan outreach activities.

Hawaii Tsunami Technical Review Committee

In Hawaii, for example, a Tsunami Technical Review Committee composed of tsunami
experts from academia, government, and the private sector meets on a regular basis to
review research, exchange information, and coordinate projects. Several committees
have been formed, including a Public Affairs Working Group. The public affairs group
meets regularly to plan and coordinate outreach events. Membership includes technical
experts and public affairs, outreach, and education officers from government agencies,
the Hawaii Tourism Board, the Pacific Tsunami Museum, and academia. This com-
mittee plays an important role in coordinating tsunami-related projects, community
awareness events, etc., and could serve as a model forum for use in other countries.

Media training workshops should be held on a regular basis to keep media informed
about changes and improvements in the tsunami warning program; help media
understand the operations of the NTWC or RTWP and the end-to-end system, includ-
ing the relationship between the warning center and emergency managers; and help
media understand the differences in the watch and warning messages, and how the
information should be presented to the public.

Well coordinated plans and procedures for working with the media and public/gov-
ernmental officials are essential for the staff at a center. Providing media outreach
training to the operational staff should be routine, and should not wait until a major
tsunami has occurred. This may require coordination of public outreach/affairs per-
sonnel from within different agencies at all levels of government.

Important Points to Remember about Community Preparedness

Programs
 Outreach and communication with the public is crucial to their understanding the
nature of the tsunami hazard, the risks to personal safety and property, and the
steps to reduce those risks.
 During actual tsunami events, a tsunami warning center should have a designated
public affairs officer to coordinate media response.
 Well coordinated plans and procedures for working with the media and public/
governmental officials are essential for the operational staff at a center.

U.S. TsunamiReady Program

The United States’ TsunamiReady program promotes tsunami hazard readiness as an
active collaboration among Federal, state and local emergency management agen-
cies, the public, and the National Weather Service’s tsunami warning system. This

8-32 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

collaboration supports better and more consistent

tsunami awareness and mitigation efforts among
communities at risk.

TsunamiReady Program Objectives

The main goal of TsunamiReady is improvement of
public safety during tsunami emergencies. To meet
this goal, the following objectives need to be achieved:
 Create minimum standard guidelines for a community to follow for adequate
tsunami readiness.
 Encourage consistency in educational materials and
response among communities and states.
 Recognize communities that have adopted TsunamiReady
guidelines.
 Increase public awareness and understanding of the
tsunami hazard.
 Improve community preplanning for tsunami disasters.

TsunamiReady Benefits
Benefits of becoming a TsunamiReady community include:
 Increased community preparedness.
 Regularly scheduled education forums.
 Increased contact with experts (emergency managers, researchers, NWS
personnel).
 Identification of community readiness resource needs.
 Improved positioning to receive State and Federal funds.
 Enhanced core infrastructure to support other community concerns.
 Transparency in hazard program use of public tax money.

TsunamiReady Community Requirements

TsunamiReady establishes minimum guidelines for a community to be awarded
the TsunamiReady recognition. Communities that accept the challenge to become
tsunami ready and meet requirements set by the program are designated as Tsuna-
miReady communities. Table 8-1 presents the guidelines to achieve TsunamiReady
recognition. Each guideline is discussed in detail following the table. Four community
categories (based on population) are used to measure tsunami readiness.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-33

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Table 8-1. Requirements for Recognition as a TsunamiReady Community

Population
2,500– 15,000–
Guideline < 2,500 14,999 40,000 > 40,000

1: Communications & Coordination

24 hr Warning Point (WP) X1 X1 X X

Emergency Operations Center (EOC) X1 X1 X X

2: NWS Warning Reception

Number of ways for EOC/WP to receive NWS tsunami 3 4 4 4
messages (If in range, one must be NWR with tone-alert,
NWR‑SAME is preferred)
3: Hydrometeorological Monitoring2
Number of systems to monitor hydrometeorological data 1 2 3 4

4: Warning Dissemination
Number of ways for EOC/WP to disseminate warnings to public 1 2 3 4

NWR tone-alert receivers in public facilities (where available) X X X X

For county/borough warning points, county/borough

communication network ensuring information flow between X X X X
communities

5: Community Preparedness
Number of annual tsunami/weather safety programs 1 2 3 4

Designate/establish tsunami shelter/area in safe zone X X X X

Designate tsunami evacuation areas and evacuation routes, and

X X X X
install evacuation route signs

Provide written, locality specific, tsunami hazard response

X X X X
material to public

Schools: encourage tsunami hazard curriculum, practice

X X X X
evacuations, and provide safety material to staff and students

6: Administrative2
Develop formal tsunami hazard operations plan X X X X

Yearly meeting/discussion by emergency manager with NWS X X X X

Yearly meeting/discussion by emergency manager with NWS X X X X

Notes:
1. For cities or towns with fewer than 15,000 people, a 24-hour warning point and EOC are required; however,
another jurisdiction within the county may provide that resource. For smaller communities in Alaska and
Pacific Regions with fewer than 2,500 residents and no county agency to act as a 24-hour warning point, the
community must designate responsible persons who are able to receive warnings 24 hours per day and have the
authority to activate local warning systems.
2. In 2002, the NWS approved a new TsunamiReady application form that combines both the U.S. NWS
StormReady and TsunamiReady programs. Since that time, all communities applying for TsunamiReady
recognition must pass both StormReady and TsunamiReady requirements. The StormReady requirements that
were not part of the original TsunamiReady program are Guideline 3, and part of Guideline 6.

8-34 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Guideline 1: Communications and Coordination Center

A key to effective hazards management is effective communication. This is especially
true in tsunami emergencies, since wave arrival times may be measured in just min-
utes. Such a “short-fused” event requires an immediate but careful, systematic, and
appropriate response. To ensure such a proper response, communities must have
established the following:
1. 24-Hour Warning Point. To achieve recognition under the TsunamiReady Pro-
gram, an applying agency will need to have a 24-hour warning point that can receive
NWS tsunami information and provide local reports and advice. Typically, this might
be a law enforcement or fire department dispatching point. For cities or towns with-
out a local dispatching point, another jurisdiction within the county could act in that
capacity for them. For communities in the Alaska and Pacific Regions with fewer than
2,500 residents and no county agency to act as a 24-hour warning point, the commu-
nity must designate responsible persons who are able to receive warnings 24 hours
per day and have the authority to activate local warning systems. The warning point
will need to have:
 24-hour operations.
 Warning reception capability.
 Warning dissemination capability.
 Ability and authority to activate local warning system(s).

2. Emergency Operations Center. All agencies must have an emergency operations

center (EOC). For communities with fewer than 15,000 residents, the EOC may be
provided by another jurisdiction within the county. The EOC must be staffed during
tsunami events to execute the warning point’s tsunami warning functions. Tsunami-
related requirements of an EOC include:
 Must be activated based on predetermined guidelines related to NWS tsunami
information and/or tsunami events.
 Must be staffed with emergency management director or designee.
 Must have warning reception/dissemination capabilities equal to or better than the
warning point.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-35

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

 Must be able to communicate with adjacent EOCs/warning points.

 Must be able to communicate with the local NWS office or tsunami warning center.

Guideline 2: NWS Warning Reception

Warning points and EOCs each need multiple ways to receive NWS tsunami warn-
ings. TsunamiReady guidelines to receive NWS warnings in an EOC or warning point
require a combination of the following, based on population:
 NOAA Weather Radio (NWR) receiver with tone alert: Specific Area Message
Encoding (SAME) is preferred. Required for recognition only if within range of
transmitter.
 NOAA Weather Wire drop: Satellite downlink data feed from NWS.
 EMWIN receiver: Satellite feed and/or VHF radio transmission of NWS products.
 Statewide Telecommunications System: Automatic relay of NWS products on
statewide emergency management or law enforcement system.
 Statewide warning fan-out system: State authorized system of passing message
throughout warning area.
 NOAA Weather Wire via internet NOAAport Lite: Provides alarmed warning mes-
sages through a dedicated Internet connection.
 Direct link to NWS office: e.g. amateur or VHF radio.
 Email from tsunami warning center: Direct email from warning center to
emergency manager.
 Pager message from tsunami warning center: Page issued from warning center
directly to EOC or warning point.
 Radio/TV via Emergency Alert System: Local Radio/TV or cable TV.
 U.S. Coast Guard broadcasts: EOC/warning point monitoring of Coast Guard
marine channels.
 National Warning System (NAWAS) drop: Federal Emergency Management
Association (FEMA)-controlled civil defense hotline.

Guideline 3: Hydrometeorological Monitoring

This Guideline relates solely to the StormReady requirements for the combined Storm/
TsunamiReady program. While receipt of warnings is crucial to the success of any
EOC or warning point, there should also be a means of monitoring weather informa-
tion, especially radar data. To obtain combined Storm/TsunamiReady recognition,
each EOC/WP (based on population) should have some combination of the following
recommended means of gathering weather information:
 Internet
 Television/Cable TV/Radio

8-36 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

 Two-way radio
 EMWIN
 Local systems for monitoring weather

Guideline 4: Warning Dissemination

Upon receipt of NWS warnings or other reliable information suggesting a tsunami is
imminent, local emergency officials should communicate the threat with as much of
the population as possible. To be recognized as Storm/TsunamiReady, a community
must have NOAA Weather Radio in the following facilities (when in range of an NWR
transmitter):
Required Locations:
 24-hour warning point
 Emergency operations center
 City Hall
 School superintendent office

Recommended Locations:
 Courthouses
 Public libraries
 Hospitals
 All schools
 Fairgrounds
 Parks and recreation areas
 Public utilities
 Sports arenas
 Transportation departments

In addition, recognition will be contingent upon having one or more of the following
means (based on population) of ensuring timely warning dissemination to citizens:
 Cable television audio/video overrides.
 Local flood warning systems with no single point of failure.
 Other locally controlled methods like a local broadcast system or sirens on emer-
gency vehicles.
 Outdoor warning sirens.
 Phone messaging (dial-down) systems.
 Counties only: A countywide communications network that ensures the flow of
information between all cities and towns within its borders. This would include
acting as a warning point for the smaller towns.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-37

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Guideline 5: Community Preparedness

Public education is vital in preparing citizens to respond properly to tsunami
threats. An educated public is more likely to take steps to receive tsunami warnings,
recognize potentially threatening tsunami events, and respond appropriately to those
events. Communities seeking recognition in the Storm/TsunamiReady Program must:
 Conduct or sponsor tsunami and weather safety awareness programs in schools,
hospitals, fairs, workshops, and community meetings (number of talks per year is
based on population). These may be part of multi-hazard presentations affecting
local communities or regions (e.g., flood, tsunami, wildfire).
 Define tsunami evacuation areas and evacuation routes, and
install evacuation route signs.
 Designate a tsunami shelter area outside the hazard zone.
 Provide written tsunami hazard information to the
populace, including:
 Hazard zone maps
 Evacuation routes
 Basic tsunami information

These instructions can be distributed through

mailings (e.g., utility bills and within phone
books), and posted at common meeting points
such as libraries and public buildings throughout the community.

In addition, local schools should be encouraged to meet the following guidelines:

 Include tsunami information in primary and secondary school curriculums. (NWS
will help identify curriculum support material.)
 Practice tsunami evacuation drills at least once every 2 years when located within
the defined hazard zone.
 Provide written safety material to all staff and students.

Guideline 6: Administrative
No program can be successful without formal planning and proactive administration.
To be recognized in the StormReady/TsunamiReady Program:
1. Tsunami warning and hazardous weather plans must be in place and approved by
the local governing body. These plans must address the following:
 Hazard/risk assessment.
 Warning point procedures.

8-38 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

 EOC activation guidelines and procedures.

 Tsunami hazard zone map with evacuation routes.
 Procedures for canceling an evacuation for less-than-destructive tsunamis.
 Procedures for reporting storm and tsunami damage to the local NWS office in
near real-time.
 Storm spotter activation criteria and reporting procedures, if applicable.
 Storm spotter roster and training record, if applicable.
 Guidelines and procedures for activation of sirens, cable TV override, and/or
local system activation in accordance with state Emergency Alert System (EAS)
plans, and warning fan-out procedures, if necessary.
 Annual exercises.

2. Local community officials must conduct a biyearly visit/discussion with local NWS
Forecast Office Warning Coordination Meteorologist or tsunami warning center
personnel. This can be a visit to the NWS office, phone discussion, or email
contacts.

Why Do We Need a TsunamiReady Program?

 To create minimum standard guidelines for a community to follow for adequate
tsunami readiness.
 To encourage consistency in educational materials and response among communi-
ties and states.
 To recognize communities that have adopted TsunamiReady guidelines.
 To increase public awareness and understanding of the tsunami hazard.
 To improve community pre-planning for tsunami disasters.

Who Decides if a Community Is TsunamiReady?

 In the United States, oversight of the TsunamiReady program is accomplished
within the NWS by the National StormReady Board.
 The Board is responsible for changes in community recognition criteria. Proposed
criteria changes shall be directed to the Board for action.
 Local boards decide if a community has attained Storm/TsunamiReady status. The
local board consists of the local NWS office Meteorologist-in-Charge and Warning
Coordination Meteorologist, the tsunami warning center Director, a representative
from the state department of emergency services, and a representative from the
National Tsunami Hazard Mitigation Program.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-39

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Important Points to Remember about the TsunamiReady Program

 TsunamiReady promotes tsunami hazard readiness as an active collaboration
among Federal, state and local emergency management agencies, the public, and
the NWS tsunami warning system.
 TsunamiReady creates minimum standard guidelines for a community to follow for
adequate tsunami readiness.
 TsunamiReady encourages consistency in educational materials and response
among communities and states.

Coastal Community Resilience Program

The US Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning System (US IOTWS) Program as part of it’s
contribution to an end-to-end warning system for the Indian Ocean region worked with
partner organizations to enhance coastal community resilience in the region. Enhanc-
ing coastal community resilience requires integrating and maintaining an optimal
balance of three community-based frameworks typically viewed as independent and
separate domains: community development, coastal management, and disaster manage-
ment. Community development provides the enabling governance and socioeconomic
and cultural conditions for
resilience. Coastal management
establishes the environmental
and natural resource conditions
for resilience and its relation-
ship to the human and built
environment. Disaster manage-
ment focuses on preparedness,
response, recovery and miti-
gation to reduce human and
structural losses from disaster
events.

Coastal community resilience

serves as a unifying frame-
work for community-based
plans and programs. One of
the products of the US IOTWS
Program is a guide to coastal community resilience (US IOTWS 2007). This section
describes the resilience elements and tools used in the program and Guide.

Elements of Coastal Community Resilience

Resilient coastal communities take deliberate action to reduce risk from coastal haz-
ards with the goal of avoiding disaster, accelerate recovery in the event of a disaster,
and adapt to changes through experience and applying lessons learned. A resilient
coastal community is one that can carry out recovery activities in ways that minimize

8-40 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

social disruption and mitigate the effects of future events and impacts. Eight elements
of resilience are considered essential for coastal community resilience. Enhancing
resilience in each of these elements is needed to reduce risk from coastal hazards,
accelerate recovery, and adapt to change. The desired outcome or overarching vision
for each element of coastal community resilience can be described as follows:
A. Governance: Leadership, legal framework, and institutions provide enabling con-
ditions for resilience through community involvement with government.
B. Society and Economy: Communities are engaged in diverse and environmentally
sustainable livelihoods resistant to hazards.
C. Coastal Resource Management: Active management of coastal resources sustains
environmental services and livelihoods and reduces risks from coastal hazards.
D. Land Use and Structural Design: Effective land use and structural design com-
pliment environment, economic and community goals and reduce risks from
hazards.
E. Risk Knowledge: Leadership and community members are aware of hazards risk
and the risk information is utilized when making decisions.
F. Warning and Evacuation: Community is capable of receiving notifications and
alerts of coastal hazards, warning at-risk populations, and acting on alert.
G. Emergency Response: Emergency response mechanisms and networks are
established and maintained to respond quickly to coastal disasters and address
emergency needs at the community level.
H. Disaster Recovery: Plans are in place to accelerate disaster recovery, engage
communities in the recovery process, and minimize negative environmental,
social, and economic impacts from recovery.

Each resilience element is associated with benchmarks that define four core capacities
of resilient communities: policy and planning, physical and natural features, social
and cultural conditions, and technical and financial resources. These benchmarks
serve as the basis for conducting assessments of coastal community resilience.

CCR Assessment
A coastal community assessment can serve as a powerful tool that allows the stake-
holders of a given community together with government, nongovernmental orga-
nizations, and other stakeholders to begin the process of enhancing resilience.
Assessment is the first step in providing inputs to planning to address one or more
of the primary issues of concern of a community. Keeping the eight elements of
resilience in the forefront during the assessment and planning process ensures that
a balanced approach to development implementation will ensue. For example, if a
community is primarily concerned about minimizing the impacts of storm surge to
which it is vulnerable, by assessing the elements of resilience, all the factors that can
minimize the impact of storm surge will be brought into the planning discussion.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-41

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Mangroves may be at risk from various forces that need to be addressed to restore
their role in minimizing storm surge and inundation.

A coastal community resilience assessment provides an opportunity to initiate dia-

logue among key stakeholders in the area. Dialogue is crucial to encourage the
stakeholder community to recognize the need for better resilience and to better
understand what forces need to be addressed to lessen vulnerability through plan-
ning. Such dialogue is also an educational process whereby the various stakeholders
can learn together through a guided assessment of coastal community resilience.

The CCR Guide provides an assessment approach to evaluating coastal community

resilience. CCR assessments are conducted to highlight strengths and identify weak-
nesses and gaps in resilience that can be addressed by the community together with
government and nongovernmental organizations.

Reasons to Conduct an Assessment of Coastal Community Resilience

• Initiate a dialogue between the community, government and non-governmental institutions,
and other stakeholders on the goals and key elements of coastal community resilience
• Increase awareness and understanding of the risks associated with both episodic and chronic
coastal hazards and the need to build resilience capacity at the community level
• Characterize the resilience status and trends at the community level
• Determine the capacity of your organization to provide assistance in each resilience element
• Provide input to local and national planning for community development, coastal
management, and disaster management measures to enhance the resilience of coastal
communities
• Identify strengths, weaknesses, and gaps in resilience capacity that need to be addressed to
achieve the long-term desired outcome of coastal community resilience

Community Vulnerability Assessment Tool

The NOAA Community Vulnerability Assessment Tool (CVAT) is a peer-reviewed
methodology for conducting multi-hazard risk and vulnerability assessments at the
community level. The general methodology of CVAT is a tutorial that steps the user
through a “community-level” process of analyzing the vulnerability factors with
respect to multiple hazards: physical, social, environmental, and economic. In addi-
tion to demonstrating the vulnerability assessment methodology, GIS is illustrated as
a valuable resource for conducting hazards-related analyses in a case study format.
CVAT follows a seven-step process:
1. Hazard identification
2. Hazard analysis
3. Critical facilities analysis
4. Societal analysis
5. Economic analysis

8-42 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

6. Environmental analysis
7. Mitigation opportunities analysis

These tools have been applied at various NOAA Coastal Services Center funded
assessments, such as:
 Maui County, Hawaii, USA–County-wide Assessment
 Oregon and Washington, USA–Community Assessment focused on Ports and
Harbors
 Rhode Island, USA–Statewide Assessment
 Brevard and Volusia Counties, Florida, USA–County-wide Assessments
 Tutuila, American Samoa–Island-wide Assessment

And in various independent assessments such as:

 Caribbean–Grenada and Barbuda National Assessments
 New Hampshire, USA–Statewide and County-wide Assessment
 Hawaii, USA–Statewide and County-wide Assessments

Important Points to Remember about the Coastal Community

Resilience Program
 Under the USAID-funded IOTWS Program, CCR promotes tsunami and other
hazard readiness as an active collaboration among national, provincial, and local
emergency management agencies and the local communities.
 A resilient coastal community is a community with the ability to mitigate tsunamis
and other hazards and recurring coastal risks.
 The NOAA CVAT is a methodology for conducting multi-hazard risk and
vulnerability assessments at the community level.

Training Materials for Outreach and Education

There are several excellent sources of training information that are invaluable to
NTWC and RTWP education and outreach efforts. The most comprehensive train-
ing comes at the international level through the UNESCO/IOC International Tsunami
Information Center (ITIC) “Tsunami Teacher” program.

As a contribution to the building of training to support the communication of

tsunami risk to the public, the IOC of UNESCO has developed the TsunamiTeacher
Information and Resource Toolkit. The Toolkit brings together a wealth of new and
existing information on tsunamis into a single, reliable, and verified global resource
that is widely accessible to people, groups, and governments around the world.
TsunamiTeacher aims to build awareness and capacity to respond and mitigate the
impact of tsunamis through the sharing of knowledge, research, and best practices.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-43

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

Materials are available that can be adapted to develop

locally relevant responses. A feature of the Toolkit is
the ability to customize training modules for different
audiences.

Training modules target the media, educational systems,

and the public and private sectors, including govern-
ments, NGOs, businesses, and community groups. Within
the government sector, a large amount of training mate-
rial has been assembled on earthquake and tsunami sci-
ence and research, tsunami events, and the building of
tsunami warning and mitigation systems. These topics
include hazard and risk assessment; operational warning
and dissemination systems; tsunami emergency response,
alerting, and preparedness; environmental and engineer-
ing mitigation and policy; and education and outreach.
Resource materials are provided as examples and guidance
for decision-makers.

TsunamiTeacher is supported both as a dynamic, electronic, on-line resource

([Link] that will be continually reviewed, updated,
and added to by experts, and as an off-line set of DVDs which will run on PC and Mac­
intosh platforms. The base language is English, with translations presently planned
into Bahasa Indonesia, Bangladesh Bangla, French, Spanish, and Thai. Other training
materials are also available on the ITIC website at [Link]
This site also has a searchable library of training materials. Additionally, ITIC has pro-
duced a CD with educational materials. The CD can now be downloaded directly from
[Link]

ITIC partnered with Servicio Hidrografico y Oceanografico de la Armada de Chile to

publish a high school level text book titled “Earthquakes and Tsunamis.” This book is
also available on-line for downloading.

At the national level, several nations, including the Japan Meteorological Agency, the
Chilean Navy, and NOAA have on-line training materials. Some websites include:
 [Link]
 [Link]
 [Link]

8-44 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

At state and local levels, several western U.S. states have extensive outreach and train-
ing materials. The state of Washington has published a media training guidebook
titled “Broadcasters Tsunami Emergency Guidebook” which contains, in addition to
definitions and examples of warning products, detailed inundation maps for major
towns and cities on the Washington coast. Additional information can be found on
numerous websites. Here are a few:
 [Link]
 [Link]
 [Link]
 [Link]
 [Link]
 [Link]
pare_for_Tsunami.html
 [Link]
 [Link]
 [Link]
 [Link]

Important Points to Remember about Training Materials

for Outreach and Education
 The UNESCO/IOC International Tsunami Information Center has developed excel-
lent outreach and education materials called the “Tsunami Teacher” program.
 At the national level, several countries have training materials posted on the
internet.
 Training materials are also available at the state and local levels. One example is
the state of Washington, USA, “Broadcasters Tsunami Emergency Guidebook.”

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 8-45

 Chapter 8: Dissemination and Notification

8-46 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Chapter 9
Community Connections
Community connections can be defined as the relationships necessary to develop,
implement, and maintain an effective end-to-end tsunami warning system. A tsunami
warning center can only be successful if the warnings it produces reach individuals at
risk and are easy to understand and respond to. To assure the most effective communi-
cation of warnings, staff of the tsunami warning center must establish trusted partner-
ships among international organizations, governmental agencies, community leaders
and organizations, businesses, and local citizens prior to any warning being issued.

The purpose of this chapter is to provide tsunami warning center staff, including
personnel from both the operations and policy sides, with guidance on developing
community education and outreach tools in order to create more effective tsunami
warning systems. Specifically, this chapter provides insight on ways to identify and
establish community partnerships that can lead to better, more effective education
and outreach. It also highlights communication models and case studies helpful in
increasing a community’s knowledge about tsunami risks and warnings.

Local Seismic
Networks

GLOSS Tide Gage

Networks

Local Tide Gage

Networks

Figure 9-1. Components of a National Tsunami Warning Center’s Community Connections

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 9-1

 Chapter 9: Community Connections

Concepts in this chapter build upon current knowledge and research in risk communi-
cation as well as successful communication and outreach models both within and out-
side the hazards field in the United States. Examples of communication and outreach
models may or may not apply in every community as each one has unique qualities.
Figure 9-1 highlights how warning messages are disseminated through a community.

How Do Community Connections Fit into an End-to-End

Tsunami Warning System?
A tsunami warning system cannot be effective unless the end users of the warn-
ing know what to do with the information. This local awareness and understanding
can only come from community partnerships and proactive education and outreach
efforts BEFORE warnings are issued. Effective education and outreach can best be
achieved by fostering partnerships among community organizations and local agen-
cies that can help the tsunami warning center educate the public about the warning
system and how to respond.

What Is in this Chapter?

This chapter contains sections that discuss the following topics:
 The communication model: This section describes a simple communication
model that is the basis for the chapter’s discussion about education and outreach.
 Developing partnerships: This section describes the importance of developing
both media and community partnerships and also outlines steps on how to go
about forming these partnerships.
 Connecting with the public: This section uses the communication model to
describe how to reach the public with tsunami warning messages and outreach.
 Designing and implementing warning system outreach: This section outlines
sample strategies for reaching certain audiences in any community.
 Making it local: This section provides insight on how to take the general
concepts in this chapter and apply them to the specific needs and issues in your
community.
 Resources: This section briefly describes existing resources on public outreach/
stakeholder involvement, gender and vulnerable populations, and tsunami resources.

9-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 9: Community Connections

What Are the Most Important Points to Remember about

Community Connections for NTWS and RTWPS?
 Tsunami warnings can only be effective if the audience receives and understands
the warning message.
 Community partnerships, developed before the event, can help create a warning
system that is effective in reaching the public.
 Partnerships with the media are required for an effective warning system.
 Existing communication models and strategies can be used to quickly and
effectively reach target audiences.
 No one message can reach everyone in a community. Messages and message
delivery strategies must be specialized and diverse at the same time.

The Communication Model

Effective education and outreach must be based on a thorough understanding of the
process that individuals go through when they make decisions about modifying their
personal behavior. Warning specialists must understand human behavior in order
to design and implement better tsunami warnings. Figure 9-2 shows the key stages
in the continuum of persuasive communication that leads to behavior change. The
success of tsunami warning rests in the public’s and a given individual’s awareness,
understanding, and acceptance of their risk.

For example, in order to motivate residents to heed tsunami evacuation warnings, the
residents must first be aware of their risk with regard to tsunamis. Second, they must
understand the impacts a tsunami may have on their family and their community.
Third, they must accept the idea that not following a warning message can result in
injury or death. Finally, they must take action and heed the warning to evacuate. If
the intent is behavior change or ACTION, then public outreach must focus on moving
the public through the initial stages of awareness—understanding and acceptance.

Figure 9-2. Stages of Persuasive Communication

(Source: Nichols, Mary. 1993. Lessons from Radon. EPA Journal 19(4): 36–37)

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 9-3

 Chapter 9: Community Connections

Developing Partnerships and Connecting to the Public

The development of community partnerships and creation of education and outreach
information are tasks that may not typically be led by tsunami warning center staff.
In some cases, other government agencies or an outside contractor might be involved
in any outreach activities related to the tsunami warning center. This chapter empha-
sizes the importance of creating specialized education and outreach efforts that take
local needs, characteristics, and issues into consideration. Because of the impor-
tance of this community-based approach, local tsunami warning center staff must be
actively involved in the partnership and education and outreach efforts.

Developing Media Partnerships

Effective community outreach starts with partnerships. Beginning with agencies and
organizations that have an established and trusted relationship with the public can
simplify the process of moving through the communications continuum and persuad-
ing the public to respond to warnings. Further, community organizations may be
better able to get warning messages and outreach directly to residents, visitors, and
businesses in the community. Community partners can also help create messages in
formats and languages their clients will understand. An essential partner in the warn-
ing system is the media.

Media personnel are experts in communication and can help tsunami warning center
staff develop effective outreach. Media can also serve as a link between scientific

Figure 9-3. Print and Broadcast Media Roles

(Source: Rydell 2007)

9-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 9: Community Connections

experts and the community. Without the media, rapid dissemination of warnings
cannot occur. This community partner can also relay, interpret, and supplement
warning information from the warning center. The media also has the ability to local-
ize the preparedness and warning message for individual communities.

Following are tips on establishing relationships with the media from (Rydell 2007):
 Meet your media partners and get to know them before an emergency. Exchange
contact information, invite them to visit the office and meet your staff, and
establish a working relationship.
 Educate media partners about the hazard. Provide them with scientific informa-
tion. Provide detailed warning process information, including desired responses
and outcomes, as well as workshops, pamphlets, brochures, fliers and handouts.
 Working with news directors and editors can be fruitful as these are the
individuals who make decisions about what gets air time. In Hawaii, during
Tsunami Awareness month, outreach efforts focused on directors and editors and
resulted in increased coverage of the issue.
 Include media partners in practice drills.
 Anticipate the story. Create and provide background video and canned interviews
with scientists for later use. Coordinate who will be knowledgeable and available
to speak with media during an emergency.
 If experts don’t provide information in an emergency, others will.

Tip
Media Guidebook
The State of Washington developed a Broadcasters Tsunami Emergency guidebook that
provides a concise overview of the notification process used to send tsunami alerts to
public information broadcasters, local jurisdictions, and the public. It includes a Tsunami
Warning Flow Chart that shows how information is sent to broadcasters, a contact list of
tsunami experts who can provide credible tsunami information during a tsunami event, and
Washington coastal community maps of regions most susceptible to tsunamis. Two DVDs
accompanied the guidebook: Tsunamis in Washington (running time: [Link]); and U.S.
National Tsunami Hazard Mitigation Program Selected Interviews.

Building Broad Community Partnerships

In addition to working with the media, it is critical that the right community partners
are identified. They must represent the full range of a community demographically.
One place to start in thinking about how to target the right organizations is to con-
sider the elements that make a community function on a day-to-day basis. If all of
these day-to-day functions can continue after an event, the community will truly be

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 9-5

 Chapter 9: Community Connections

disaster resilient. The Coastal Community Resilience Guide (US IOTWS Program 2007)
developed as part of the U.S. Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning System Program pro-
vides a framework for enhancing coastal community resilience through collaboration
and partnerships with government, nongovernmental organizations, and communities.
The eight elements of coastal community resilience defined in the Guide are:
A. Governance: Leadership, legal framework, and institutions provide enabling con-
ditions for resilience through community involvement with government.

B. Society and Economy: Communities are engaged in diverse and environmentally

sustainable livelihoods resistant to hazards.

C. Coastal Resource Management: Active management of coastal resources sustains

environmental services and livelihoods and reduces risks from coastal hazards.

D. Land Use and Structural Design: Effective land use and structural design com-
pliment environment, economic and community goals and reduce risks from
hazards.

E. Risk Knowledge: Leadership and community members are aware of hazards risk
and the risk information is utilized when making decisions.

F. Warning and Evacuation: Community is capable of receiving notifications and

alerts of coastal hazards, warning at-risk populations, and acting on alert.

G. Emergency Response: Emergency response mechanisms and networks are estab-

lished and maintained to respond quickly to coastal disasters and address emer-
gency needs at the community level.

H. Disaster Recovery: Plans are in place to accelerate disaster recovery, engage com-
munities in the recovery process, and minimize negative environmental, social,
and economic impacts from recovery.

Developing partnerships with the organizations that either have authority or that
work in these fields on a daily basis would give the tsunami warning center a good
start on developing diverse community partnerships.

Creating relationships with community organizations will not occur overnight: it is a

deliberate process that requires commitment over time. It will require staff from the
tsunami warning center to meet with the various organizations to discuss the mutual
benefits of the partnership. Taking the time to establish these relationships early on
will result in more effective outreach strategies that reach the identified audience and
ultimately help create a more effective tsunami warning system.

Key Components to Developing Partnerships. An important step in developing

community partnerships is to identify what community planning activities are taking
place in the area. Specifically, the tsunami warning center will want to identify activi-
ties being overseen by diverse committees or working groups. These committees or
working groups do not have to be engaged in activities directly related to hazards;

9-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 9: Community Connections

any diverse committee or working group addressing any community issue may be
a helpful partner. It may be useful to meet with local government representatives
to identify these groups. Committees addressing various community activities could
include those listed below. (This is merely an example list; there may be a different
set of active organizations in a given tsunami watch center’s community.)
 Emergency response and planning committees
 Natural hazard mitigation steering committees
 Planning commission (land use)
 Citizen advisory boards
 School boards
 Others Tip
By working with these entities, the tsunami Trust & Partnerships
warning center may be able to reach more than Building partnerships requires trust.
one segment of the community at once. For Often, it is not as easy as, “if you build
instance, a local emergency response or plan- it, they will come.” It will benefit the
ning committee might be made of up individu- tsunami warning center to do research
als from the local governments, private sector, before meeting with potential partners.
media, state or federal agencies, schools, and It is important to set the stage and
private citizens. convince the organization that joining
in the partnership is also in their best
If there are no diverse committees or working interest. A successful “sales pitch”
groups actively working in the community, the involves knowing what motivates
tsunami warning center should begin to identify that particular organization and
other community organizations or social service demonstrating the benefits of working
providers such community nongovernmental with the tsunami warning center.
organizations that work with specific commu-
nity groups or focus on specific community
issues such as health, economic development,
housing, and/or legal services that may meet on
a regular basis. These groups may include:
 Regular meetings of local elected officials
 Downtown business associations or Chambers of Commerce
 Service organizations such as Rotary, Lions, or Kiwanas Clubs
 Associations of churches or ministers
 Social service provider agencies or advocacy groups
 Homeowners, renters, or builder’s associations
 Others

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 9-7

 Chapter 9: Community Connections

Tip
First Impressions and Partnerships
The initial meetings held with potential community organizations are critical in establishing lasting relationships
that will benefit both the tsunami warning center and the organization. Select the appropriate staff to be involved
in these meetings. Individuals representing the tsunami warning center should be able to translate technical infor-
mation into a form that will be understandable by the organization. It is a good idea to utilize the tsunami warning
center’s public affairs officer, as this individual is trained in communicating with the public. The tsunami warning
center may want to consider hiring a public affairs officer with a background in communications and public relations
rather than training a technical staff person to fill the position.

Initial Partnership Meeting Tips

Whether meeting with the local media or other community partners, being prepared
for the initial partnership meeting requires that tsunami warning center staff pull
together some information and practice their sales pitch. When the active community
committees and organizations have been identified, tsunami warning center staff can
contact the organizations to arrange a meeting. At the initial meeting, tsunami warn-
ing center staff should present the following in a clear and concise manner:
 What the tsunami warning center does: Community partners may be unaware
of what a tsunami warning center is and what its purpose is. Staff should be pre-
pared to describe, in a clear and concise manner, what the tsunami warning center
does and why it exists. Staff may choose to use the overall warning system graphic
used in this document to talk about the components of the system. In addition
to meeting with community committees and organizations, the tsunami warning
center could host an open house and invite all potential partners to come together
to learn more about the tsunami warning center and to discuss opportunities for
partnerships.
 Why the tsunami warning center is interested in partnering: Tsunami warn-
ing center staff must clearly present to the potential partner why the partnership is
important. When talking with the media, the reasons for partnering are fairly clear:
The media is a component of the dissemination of tsunami warnings. The media
can also help disseminate outreach messages about the tsunami warning system
so that residents are better prepared to heed warnings in the future. Describing
partnerships between the center and community organizations may not be as clear.
Staff should focus on how the organization can help the center conduct outreach or
disseminate warning messages. For example, when meeting with a nonprofit that
works with the elderly, focus on why the center is interested in getting messages to
the elderly. When the potential partner sees that you are also interested in helping
their clients, they may be more likely to want to help.
 How the tsunami warning center can help the organization do its job: Orga-
nizations are more likely to partner when they know that the partnership does
not create additional work, but helps them do their existing work. For the media,

9-8 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 9: Community Connections

giving them examples of the types of stories you can provide for them helps direc-
tors or editors do their job. Staff can also provide contact lists of technical experts
that media can contact for future stories. For community organizations, staff can
offer to provide content for the organization’s newsletters or websites.
 What the organization might gain from partnering with the tsunami warn-
ing center: Benefits to an organization may include increased visibility within the
community, ability to assist in saving lives by participating in a vital link in a tsu-
nami warning system, and providing clients a new or different service.

Connecting with the Public: Communication Model

Establishing connections with community partners is an important first step in con-
necting with the public because it creates new channels for distributing warning mes-
sages. Once those channels are established, how can the warning message be crafted
and delivered effectively? A simple communication model can help establish local
strategies for effectively distributing tsunami warning information to the public. The
following is a brief explanation of key components of a communication model and an
explanation of how it can be used to build awareness and understanding of tsunami
warnings prior to an event.

As the model illustrates, for a warning message to be credible, it must have the
following five essential components:
 The source of the message must be credible.
 The message must be appropriately designed.
 The channel for communicating the message must be carefully selected.
 The audience must be clearly defined.
 The recommended action must be clearly stated, and a feedback channel
established for questions, comments and suggestions.

Figure 9-4. Communication Model

(Source: Adapted from EPA Radon Division outreach program)

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 9-9

 Chapter 9: Community Connections

Applying the concepts of this model to tsunami warnings is an important step in

developing a warning system. In order for education and outreach about the warning
system to be effective, all of these components must be clearly defined, established,
and exercised prior to an event. When developing warning system education and out-
reach strategies, it is best to start by defining the audience (e.g. tourist, local businesses,
school-age children, etc.). Defining the audience will assist the tsunami warning center
and community partners in determining the appropriate message and channel. In the
case of the tsunami warning system, it is assumed that the primary source of the infor-
mation will come from the tsunami warning center. The following defines the compo-
nents in greater detail, starting with the audience and working back to the source.

Audience
When a tsunami occurs and an evacuation order is issued, all people in the path of the
tsunami must respond to the order. However, the people in the path of the tsunami
will not be one homogenous group: they will include tourists from multiple countries
speaking multiple languages, permanent residents who know the landscape and trans-
portation systems of the area, permanent residents who lack the financial resources to
heed an evacuation order, and others. Each of these audiences requires messages sent
in slightly different channels in order to be able to make informed decisions about
evacuation if a warning is issued. In addition, audiences can be broken into subsets
related to language, knowledge of tsunami risk, work schedules, or physical capabili-
ties, among others. There is no one message or channel that is going to effectively
distribute the message to all people in the community.

Tip
Understand Vulnerable Populations
In effect, populations are vulnerable when they have lesser capabilities than oth-
ers around them. Some populations experience greater risk from hazard events
not because of their geographic proximity to the hazard, but because of decreased
resources and capabilities arising from their socioeconomic status and/or physical
abilities. People living near or below the poverty line, the elderly, disabled, women,
children, ethnic minorities, and renters have all been shown to experience, to some
degree, more severe effects from disasters than the general population. They are
more likely to die in an event and, if they survive, they are less likely to recover finan-
cially. Thinking about vulnerable populations when developing tsunami warning
system related education and outreach tools is extremely important because these
groups may require specialized messages.

9-10 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 9: Community Connections

Channel
The channel is the method in which outreach messages are distributed to the audi-
ence. Channels may include the media (TV and radio, billboards, etc.), social service
providers, schools, churches, and other community organizations that work with
community members on a daily basis. Select-

T
ing an appropriate and trusted channel helps
ensure that the intended audience will receive
the message.
ip
Identify and Use Existing Channels
The most effective outreach efforts use Some communities may have already
existing channels in the community. For developed and implemented tsunami-
instance, organizations that work with a cer- related outreach strategies. If so, this
tain subset of the population on a daily basis can serve as a good starting point for
typically make good channels because they creating an outreach program about
already have communication methods (bro- the tsunami warning system. There may
chures, newsletters, websites, phone lists) in be opportunities to partner with those
place and have established a trusting relation- organizations that have already taken
ship with the subset. As an example, a social the lead on educating the public about
service organization that provides services to tsunamis.
the elderly would be a good organization to
partner with to get tsunami related messages
out to the elderly.

Message
Messages should be targeted to the specific audience and packaged in a way that is
clear and understandable for the selected audience. Having diversified community
partnerships can assist the tsunami warning center as it creates and disseminates
clear messages that reach the intended audience.

An example of an ineffective message would be to only provide information in the

community’s native language. Oftentimes, a community is composed of people who
speak many different languages and dialects. In tourist communities, the range
of languages can be even wider. Staff must consider the languages spoken in the
community when designing tsunami warning messages.

Tip
Craft Audience-Appropriate Messages
Crafting messages that are audience appropriate can be difficult. It is a good idea to
enlist a professional with marketing or public relations expertise to help design the
message. These professionals can help translate technical or scientific information into a
format and language that is understandable for the intended audience.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 9-11

 Chapter 9: Community Connections

Source
The source is the entity or entities that provide the information for the outreach
campaign. In this case, the tsunami warning center is one of the primary sources of
education and outreach messages because it is the technical expert on the warning
system. Local and State government emergency management departments may also
be sources for tsunami warning system education and outreach.

Model of a Multi-Stakeholder Outreach Source

Example: In Hawaii, a Tsunami Technical Review Committee composed of tsunami experts from
academia, government, and the private sector meets on a regular basis to review research, exchange
information, and coordinate projects. Several committees have been formed, including a Public Affairs
Working Group that meets regularly to plan and coordinate outreach events. Membership includes
technical experts and public affairs, outreach, and education officers from government agencies, the
Hawaii Tourism Board, the Pacific Tsunami Museum, and academia. This committee plays an important
role in coordination of tsunami-related projects, community awareness events, etc. and could serve as a
model forum for use in other countries.

Designing and Implementing Warning System Outreach

This section outlines strategies for designing and implementing warning system
outreach to various audiences in the community. The ideas presented below are
provided as examples only. The communities in which the tsunami warning center
operates may have additional audiences to think about and plan for.

Strategies by Sample Audience

Once community partnerships have been established, the tsunami warning center
should begin to identify the audiences that need to be reached. As described earlier,
this is best done by working with local government departments and other commu-
nity partners to identify the types of audiences present in the community. Potential
audiences might include:
 Elderly
 Children
 Local businesses
 Visitors
 Non-native speakers
 Residents

In this part of the chapter, possible strategies for reaching these audiences are
provided merely as an example of how the tsunami warning center might accomplish

9-12 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 9: Community Connections

the creation and dissemination of an appropriate message. In general, the tsunami

warning center should think creatively about how to leverage partnerships to assure
that the message is reaching as many people as possible.

Elderly
The elderly in the community often lack the ability to evacuate quickly and may lack
the financial resources necessary to recover from a catastrophic disaster. Ensuring that
the elderly are aware of and understand what to do when a tsunami warning is issued
may be a priority in the community. The following is a list of potential channels for
getting education and outreach messages to elderly populations in the community.
 Senior centers: The communities in which the tsunami warning center works
may have senior centers that provide a place for seniors to gather and to partici-
pate in various activities. These centers typically provide information in the form
of brochures and fliers, and may have regular meetings that the tsunami warning
center could attend to directly provide information to seniors. Alternatively, the
senior center could host an open house where tsunami warning center staff could
talk about the warning system and what steps elderly residents can take to be
better prepared to evacuate when a warning is issued. At a minimum, outreach to
the senior center’s leadership about how to assist seniors with evacuation should a
warning be issued during the senior center’s hours of operation would be useful.
 Churches: Many of the community’s elderly population may be members of the
various churches in the community. Churches often provide a number of social
services to their congregations, and they could be used to distribute tsunami warn-
ing outreach as well.

The following figure illustrates an example communication strategy for reaching the
elderly using the communication model.

Source Message Channel Audience

Workshop for seniors

Tsunami Special evacuation
on how to interpret
Warning
Center
 considerations for
the elderly
 and react to warnings  Elderly
and evacuations

Children
Children are also considered a vulnerable population because they typically rely upon
adults to assist them in emergencies and may not have the capacity to make informed
decisions. Ensuring that children are aware of and understand warnings is critical

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 9-13

 Chapter 9: Community Connections

because children are the community’s future. The following is a list of potential chan-
nels for getting education and outreach messages to children in the community.
 Schools: Children can be one of the easier audiences to reach because they typi-
cally attend school on a regular basis. Schools can be used to distribute outreach
materials about tsunami warnings. The messages for children may take the form of
classroom curriculum, poster contests, coloring books, cartoons, or special assem-
blies. Often, children will take information home to their parents, an additional
benefit of implementing outreach.
 Parks and Recreation Departments: Parks can be an effective means of get-
ting tsunami warning outreach to children. Partnering with Parks and Recreation
Departments to develop public information centers or kiosks in parks would be an
effective means of reaching children. These centers or kiosks should be designed
using language and images that children can relate to, such as cartoons.

The following figure illustrates an example communication strategy for reaching

children using the communication model.

Source Message Channel Audience

Tsunami
Warning
Tsunami hazard
Center
and Local
 awareness  Poster contest  Children

Schools

Local Businesses
Local businesses are a key audience to reach. Collectively, they can employ large
numbers of the community’s residents; in addition, they provide goods and services
to the community. When local businesses are informed about the tsunami warning
system, they can serve as educators to visitors and residents who might patronize the
business. The following is a list of potential channels and modes for getting educa-
tion and outreach messages to local businesses in communities.
 Business associations/chambers of commerce: Partnering with business asso-
ciations and chambers can allow the tsunami warning center to reach a large busi-
ness audience in one effort. These organizations often provide training to their
members. Tsunami warning center staff could work with the association or the
chamber to host a training or seminar. The associations and chamber could also
provide information to their members through websites.
 Banks: Most businesses conduct daily business transactions with banks (making
deposits, getting change, etc). The banking industry provides an opportunity to
reach businesses on a one-on-one level. Banks can provide information in the
form of brochures or fliers about the tsunami warning process and how it relates

9-14 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 9: Community Connections

to running a business. Banks might also be a potential partner with the ability to
fund the development and dissemination of tsunami warning education and out-
reach material.

The following figure illustrates an example communication strategy for reaching busi-
nesses using the communication model.

Source Message Channel Audience

Brochure distributed
Tsunami
Business’ role in to businesses when
Warning
Center
 evacuation  completing banking  Businesses
transactions

Visitors
Visitors or tourists should be considered because they may not be familiar with the
tsunami hazard or the warning system and they most likely would not know what to
do if a warning was issued. The following is a list of potential channels and modes
for getting education and outreach messages to visitors in the community.
 Visitor’s bureaus: Some communities have a visitor’s bureau where potential visi-
tors can get information about the community. This presents an opportunity to
provide potential visitors with information about the tsunami warning system. The
bureau’s website could be used to provide information about the warning system.
This can be done in a way that does not dissuade people from visiting the commu-
nity. Developing relationships with visitor’s bureaus and the tourism industry early
on is important because of the perception that providing risk information will
negatively impact tourism.
 Local businesses: Local businesses that would be patronized by visitors may
serve as an effective channel for getting information out to visitors. Brochures or
fliers could be available at local businesses. Employees of local businesses can also
be trained to assist visitors with evacuation if a warning is issued.

The following figure illustrates an example communication strategy for reaching visi-
tors using the communication model.

Source Message Channel Audience

Tsunami
Warning Awareness Inundation and
Center
and Local
 of tsunami
inundation area
 evacuation maps in
hotel rooms
 Visitors

Government

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 9-15

 Chapter 9: Community Connections

Non-Native Speakers
Non-native speakers can be considered vulnerable populations because they may
not have access to warning information in an understandable language. Information
about warnings that is not translated is like not having any information at all. The fol-
lowing are potential methods for reaching non-native speakers.
 Local government agencies: Local government agencies can be a channel for
getting information out to non-native speakers. Agencies can provide brochures
or fliers in their offices, can post information on their websites, or can host open
houses along with tsunami warning center staff to educate residents about the
warning system. All of this information can be translated into the languages com-
monly spoken in the community.
 Social service providers: There may be groups or organizations, typically non-
profit or culture-based organizations, that already provide services to non-native
speakers. These groups can serve as a channel for getting the message out. Exam-
ples of social service providers could include a nonprofit groups that provide legal
services, housing assistance, or financial advice to non-native speakers.

The following figure illustrates an example communication strategy for reaching non-
native speakers using the communication model.

Source Message Channel Audience

Tsunami
Warning Brochures translated
Tsunami
Center and distributed when Non-native
and Social  evacuation
information
 individuals visit social  Speakers
Service service providers
Providers

Residents
In addition to the vulnerable populations described above, it is also important to
ensure the average citizen in the community is aware of the warning system and
what to do when a warning is issued. Again, it is best to try to segment the general
population into specific audiences, but in general, the following are example channels
and methods for reaching the average citizen.
 Media: The local newspaper or television station may be a potential channel for
getting outreach messages to residents in the community. The messages may take
the form of a newspaper article, a story on the evening news, or a public service
announcement.
 Utility companies: Utility companies can make good channels because they can
often include outreach information, such as brochures, in monthly bills that are
sent out to customers. This method could assist the tsunami warning center in
reaching the general population.

9-16 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Chapter 9: Community Connections

 Local government agencies: Local government agencies can be a channel for get-
ting information out to residents. Agencies can provide brochures or fliers in their
offices, can post information on their websites, or can host open houses along
with tsunami warning center staff to educate residents about the warning system.

The following figure illustrates an example communication strategy for reaching resi-
dents using the communication model.

Source Message Channel Audience

Media sponsored
Tsunami Steps individuals
website with
Warning and homeowners
Center and  can take to be  information
accompanying news
 Residents
Media better prepared
series/stories

Elected Officials
Elected officials can be an asset during an emergency, so they must be informed
before the event ever happens. Officials are often seen as a trusted source of infor-
mation for the general public. The following are example channels and methods for
reaching the elected officials.
 Elected official work session: One of the best ways to reach elected officials is
to schedule a work session with them. In this case, tsunami warning center staff
would have their direct attention and could talk one on one about the roles that
elected officials can play in providing the public with information about tsunamis.
 Associations for elected officials: In some cases, elected officials may be mem-
bers of an association or professional group. For instance, in Oregon, County
elected officials are often members of the Association or Oregon Counties. This
organization holds an annual conference and regularly sends out newsletters.
Tsunami warning center staff could take advantage of these existing channels to
provide elected officials with information about their role in tsunami warning and
preparedness.

The following figure illustrates an example communication strategy for reaching

elected officials using the communication model.

Source Message Channel Audience

Role of elected
Tsunami Article in elected
officials in tsunami Elected
Warning
Center
 warning and  official association
newsletter or website
 Officials
preparedness

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide 9-17

 Chapter 9: Community Connections

Making it Local
The example audiences and channels discussed above may or may not be appropriate
in the communities in which the tsunami warning center operates. The audiences and
channels are provided as an example to help the center think about strategies that
make sense for the local characteristics. Tsunami warning center staff should meet
with community partners to identify the various audiences that exist within the com-
munity. Once the audiences have been identified, appropriate channels and messages
can be assigned.

9-18 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Appendix A
Acronmyns
ADPC Asian Disaster Preparedness Center
AFTAC Air Force Technical Applications Center
AIT Asian Institute of Technology
ANSS Advanced National Seismic System
AOR area of responsibility
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASL Albuquerque Seismic Laboratory
AusAID Australian Agency for International Development
AWIPS Advanced Weather Information Processing System
BDSN Berkeley Digital Seismic Network
BGR Federal Institute for Geosciences and Natural Resources in
Hannover, Germany.
BODC British Oceanographic Data Centre
BPR bottom pressure recorder
BUFR binary universal form for the representation of meteorological
data
CCR Coastal Community Resilience
CERC Coastal Engineering Research Center
CONOPS concept of operations
CREX character form for the representation and exchange of data
CTBT Comprehensive Nuclear Test Ban Treaty
CVAT Community Vulnerability Assessment Tool
DAC data assembly centers
DART™ Deep Ocean Assessment and Reporting of Tsunami™
DCP Data Collection Platforms
DMC Data Management Center
DOD Department of Defense
EMLPP Enhanced Multilevel Precedence and Pre-emption Services

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide A-1

 Appendix A: Acronyms

EMRS Engineering and Maintenance Reporting System

EMWIN Emergency Manager’s Weather Information Network
ET electronics technician
ETA estimated time of arrival
EUMETSAT European Organisation for the Exploitation of Meteorological
Satellites
FMCW frequency modulated continuous waves
FTP file transfer protocol
GCN Global Core Network
GEO Group on Earth Observations
GEOFON GeoForshungsZentrums Potsdam
GEONETCAST GEONETCast is a Task in the GEO Work Plan and is led
by EUMETSAT, the United States, China, and the World
Meteorological Organization (WMO)
GEOSCOPE Institut de Physique du Globe de Paris
GEOSS Global Earth Observation System of Systems
GFDC GLOSS Fast Data Center
GIS Geographic Information Systems
GLOSS Global Sea Level Observing System
GMDSS Global Marine Distress and Safety System
GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
GOES Geostationary Operational Environmental Satellite
GPRS General Packet Radio System
GPS Global Positioning System
GSM General Switched Messaging
GSN Global Seismic Network
GTS Global Telecommunications System
Guide Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide
Hz hertz
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
ICG Intergovernmental Coordination Group
ICG/PTWS Intergovernmental Coordination Group for the Pacific Tsunami
Warning and Mitigation System
ICSU International Council for Science

A-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix A: Acronyms

ID identification
IDA International Deployment of Accelerometers
IMD India Meteorological Department
IMS/CTBTO International Monitoring System of the Comprehensive Nuclear
Test Ban Treaty Organization
INMARSAT BGAN International Mobile Satellite Organization Broadband Global
Area Network
INSAT India Satellite
IOC Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission
IOTWS Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning and Mitigation System
IRIS Incorporated Research Institutions for Seismology
ISCS International Satellite Communications System
ISP Internet Service Provider
IT information technology
ITO information technology officer
JCOMM Joint Technical Commission for Oceanography and Marine
Meteorology
JMA Japan Meteorological Agency
KB kilobyte
kbps kilobytes per second
Km kilometer
LAN local area network
LEO low earth orbit
M magnitude
Mac OS X Apple/Macintosh operating system
Mb megabyte
MD Maryland
MEO Mid-altitude earth orbit
Mm millimeter
MOST Method of Splitting Tsunamis
MSS message switching system
MTN Main Telecommunications Network
NCDSN China Earthquake Administration
NDBC National Data Buoy Center

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide A-3

 Appendix A: Acronyms

NDMO National Disaster Management Office

NDWC National Disaster Warning Center
NEIC National Earthquake Information Center
NERC Natural Environment Research Council
NESDIS National Environmental Satellite Data Information Service
NGDC NOAA National Geophysical Data Center
NGO nongovernmental organization
NGWLMS Next-Generation Water Level Measurement System
NMC national meteorological centers
NMHS national meteorological and hydrological services
NMTN National Meteorological Telecommunications Network
NPT network time protocol
NRT near-real-time
NOAA National Oceanic and Administration
NOS National Ocean Service
NTHMP National Tsunami Hazard Mitigation Program
NTP network time protocol
NTWC National Tsunami Warning Center
NWS National Weather Service
NWSTG National Weather Service’s Telecommunications Gateway
NZAID New Zealand’s international aid and development agency
OFDA Office of U.S. Foreign Disaster Assistance
OTT OTT Messtechnik Company
PC personal computer
PDC Pacific Disaster Center
PEACESAT Pan-Pacific Education and Communication Experiments by
Satellite
PMEL Pacific Marine Environmental Laboratory
POL Proudman Oceanographic Laboratory
PSMSL Permanent Service for Mean Sea Level
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PTWC Pacific Tsunami Warning Center
PTWS Pacific Tsunami Warning and Mitigation System

A-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix A: Acronyms

QC quality control
R&M reliability and maintainability
RANET Radio and Internet for the Communication of Hydro-
Meteorological and Climate-Related Information
RISC Reduced Instruction-Set Computer
RMTN Regional Meteorological Telecommunications Networks
RSS Really Simple Syndication
RT real time
RTH Regional Telecommunications Hubs
RTQC real-time quality control
RTWP Regional Tsunami Watch Provider
RUDICS Router-based Unrestricted Digital Internetworking Connectivity
Solution
SADIS Satellite Distribution System
SEBA name of a radar tide gauge
SEED Standard for Exchange of Earthquake Data
SHOA Chilean Hydrographic and Oceanographic Service of the Chilean
Navy
SMS Short Message Service
SOP Standard Operating Procedure
Sps Samples per second
SRD Sonar Research and Development
TCC Tsunami Coordination Committee
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
UCSD University of California, San Diego
UCSD/IDA University of California San Diego/ International Deployment of
Accelerometers
UHF ultra high frequency
UHSLC University of Hawaii Sea Level Center
UNESCO United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultural Organization
UPS Uninterruptible power supply
USAID United States Agency for International Development
USGS U.S. Geological Survey
USNSN United States National Seismographic Network

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide A-5

 Appendix A: Acronyms

UTC Coordinated Universal Time

UTF Universal Transmission Format
VEGA VEGA Controls, Ltd.
VHF very high frequency
VPN virtual private network
VSAT Very Small Aperture Terminal satellite ground station
WC/ATWC West Coast/Alaska Tsunami Warning Center
WAFS World Area Forecast System
WAN wide area network
WMC World Meteorological Center
WMO World Meteorological Organization
WOCE World Ocean Circulation Experiment
WWW World Wide Web
XML eXtensive Markup Language
XML/CAP eXtensive Markup Language/Common Alerting Protocol

A-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Appendix B
Glossary
A
Arrival time
Time of the first maximum of the tsunami waves.

B
Breaker
A sea-surface wave that has become so steep (wave steepness of 1/7) that the crest
outraces the body of the wave and it collapses into a turbulent mass on shore or over
a reef. Breaking usually occurs when the water depth is less than 1.28 times the wave
height. Roughly, three kinds of breakers can be distinguished, depending primarily
on the gradient of the bottom:
 Spilling breakers (over a nearly flat bottom) which form a foamy patch at the crest
and break gradually over a considerable distance.
 Plunging breakers (over fairly steep bottom gradients) which peak up curl over
with a tremendous overhanging mass and then break with a crash.
 Surging breakers (over very steep bottom gradients) which do not spill or plunge
but surge up the beach face.
 Waves also break in deep water if they build too high while being generated by
the wind, but these are usually short-crested and are termed whitecaps.

Breakwater
An offshore or onshore structure, such as a wall, water gate, or other in-water wave-
dissipating object that is used to protect a harbor or beach from the force of waves.

C
Cotidal
Indicating equality with the tides or a coincidence with the time of high or low tide.

Crest length
The length of a wave along its crest. Sometimes called crest width.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide B-1

 Appendix B: Glossary

Deep-ocean Assessment and Reporting of Tsunamis (DART)

An instrument for the early detection, measurement, and real-time reporting of tsu-
namis in the open ocean. Developed by the US NOAA Pacific Marine Environmental
Laboratory, the DART system consists of a seafloor bottom pressure recording system
capable of detecting tsunamis as small as one cm, and a moored surface buoy for
real-time communications. An acoustic link is used to transmit data from the seafloor
to the surface buoy. The data are then relayed via a satellite link to ground stations,
which demodulate the signals for immediate dissemination to the NOAA tsunami
warning centres. The DART data, along with state-of-the-art numerical modelling
technology, are part of a tsunami forecasting system package that will provide site-
specific predications of tsunami impact on the coast.

Drop
The downward change or depression in sea level associated with a tsunami, a tide or
some long term climatic effect.

E
EarlyBird
Seismic data processing system used for both real-time and post-processing of seismic
data by RTWPs and NTWCs. EarlyBird is a combination of standard USGS Earthworm
modules, WC/ATWC-developed earthworm modules, and stand-alone seismic process-
ing software.

EarthVu
Geographic display software developed at the WC/ATWC and used by RTWPs and
NTWCs.

Eddy
By analogy with a molecule, a “glob” of fluid within a fluid mass that has a certain
integrity and life history of its own; the activities of the bulk fluid being the net result
of the motion of the eddies.

Elapsed time
Time between the maximum level arrival time and the arrival time of the first wave.

Estimated time of arrival (ETA)

Time of tsunami arrival at some fixed location, as estimated from modeling the speed
and refraction of the tsunami waves as they travel from the source. ETA is estimated
with very good precision if the bathymetry and source are well known (less than a
couple of minutes).

B-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix B: Glossary

Evacuation map
A drawing or representation that outlines danger zones and designates limits beyond
which people must be evacuated to avoid harm from tsunami waves. Evacuation
routes are sometimes designated to ensure the efficient movement of people out of
the evacuation zone to evacuation shelter.

Epicenter
This is the point on the Earth’s surface directly above the focus (or hypocenter).

Earthquake (Magnitude)
This is a measure of the relative size of an earthquake. A number of different mag-
nitude scales exist besides the Richter scale, including the moment magnitude,
which measures the energy released and gives the most reliable estimate for large
earthquakes.

Because the scale is logarithmic, an increase in one unit of magnitude corresponds

to a 10-fold increase in seismic wave amplitude and a 30-fold increase in released
energy. And a change of 0.3 units equals a three-fold increase in intensity.

In other words, the 9.3 Sumatra earthquake that generated the 2004 Indian Ocean
tsunami was three times more powerful than the 9.0 earthquake it was originally
thought to be.

Moment magnitude is measurable nearly immediately thanks to the advent of modern

seismometers, digital recording, and real-time communication links. It allows warning
centers to provide initial tsunami advisories within minutes of an earthquake occur-
rence. In Japan, earthquake warnings get broadcast to the public within 30 seconds
of them happening.

End-to-end
In recent years new shorthand terminology has been used to describe the entire pro-
cess required to detect, warn, and elicit protection measures for a natural hazard.
Increasingly this comprehensive process is referred to as “end to end”, meaning from
initial to final steps required for a successful system. The term “end to end” does
not always translate accurately, and some cultures prefer to refer to the process as
“beginning to end”. In the case of a tsunami system this of course means from the
beginning, i.e. earthquake detection, to the end, i.e. evacuation or cancellation of the
warning.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide B-3

 Appendix B: Glossary

F
Fault
A fault is a fracture or zone of fractures between two blocks of rock. Faults allow
the blocks to move relative to each other. This movement may occur rapidly, in the
form of an earthquake—or may occur slowly, in the form of creep. Faults may range
in length from a few millimeters to thousands of kilometers. Most faults produce
repeated displacements over geologic time.

Focus
The point within the Earth where a rupture first occurs and where the first seismic
waves originate. It is also referred to as the hypocenter. The epicenter lies above the
focus, on the surface of the earth.

Forecast Point
The location where the Tsunami Warning Centre may provide estimates of tsunami
arrival time or wave height.

G
Gravity wave
A wave generated in a fluid or at the interface between two mediums (e.g. the atmo­
sphere or ocean) which has the restoring force of gravity or buoyancy. When a fluid
parcel is displaced on an interface or internally to a region with a different density,
gravity restores the parcel toward equilibrium resulting in an oscillation about the
equilibrium state. Gravity waves on an air-sea interface are called surface gravity
waves or surface waves while internal gravity waves are called internal waves. A
tsunami is an example of a gravity wave.

GTS
Global Telecommunications System of the World Meteorological Organization (WMO)
that directly connects national meteorological and hydrological services worldwide.
The GTS is widely used for the near real-time transmission of sea level data for tsu-
nami monitoring. The GTS and other robust communications methods are used for
the transmission of tsunami warnings.

H
Historical tsunami
A tsunami documented to occur through eyewitness or instrumental observation
within the historical record.

B-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix B: Glossary

Historical tsunami data

Historical data are available in many forms and at many locations. These forms
include published and unpublished catalogs of tsunami occurrences, personal nar-
ratives, marigraphs, tsunami amplitude, runup and inundation zone measurements,
field investigation reports, newspaper accounts, film, or video records.

Hypocenter
The point within the earth where an earthquake rupture starts. The epicenter is the
point directly above it at the surface of the Earth. The hypocenter is also commonly
termed the focus.

I
Initial rise
Time of the first minimum of the tsunami waves.

Intensity
Extreme strength, force, or energy.

Inundation
The horizontal distance inland that a tsunami penetrates, generally measured
perpendicularly to the shoreline.

Inundation (maximum)
Maximum horizontal penetration of the tsunami from the shoreline. A maximum
inundation is measured for each different coast or harbour affected by the tsunami.

Inundation area
Area flooded with water by the tsunami.

Inundation line
Inland limit of wetting, measured horizontally from the mean sea level (MSL) line.
The line between living and dead vegetation is sometimes used as a reference. In
tsunami science, the landward limit of tsunami runup.

L
Leading wave
First arriving wave of a tsunami. In some cases, the leading wave produces an initial
depression or drop in sea level, and in other cases, an elevation or rise in sea level.
When a drop in sea level occurs, sea level recession is observed.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide B-5

 Appendix B: Glossary

Local tsunami
A tsunami from a nearby source for which its destructive effects are confined to
coasts within 100 km of the source. A local tsunami is usually generated by an earth-
quake, but can also be caused by a landslide or a pyroclastic flow from a volcanic
eruption.

Low water
The lowest water level reached during a tide cycle. The accepted popular term is low
tide.

M
Magnitude
A number assigned to a quantity by means of which the quantity may be compared
with other quantities of the same class.

Master Plan
The principal long-term guide for improving the TWS. The Plan provides a summary
of the basic elements which comprise the TWS, a description of its existing compo-
nents, and an outline of the activities, data sets, methods, and procedures that need
to be improved in order to reduce tsunami risk. The first edition of the ICG/PTWS
Master Plan was released in 1989. The second edition was released in 1999.

Magnitude (Earthquake)
This is a measure of the relative size of an earthquake. A number of different magni-
tude scales exist besides the Richter scale, including the moment magnitude, which
measures the energy released and gives the most reliable estimate for large earth-
quakes. Because the scale is logarithmic, an increase in one unit of magnitude cor-
responds to a 10-fold increase in seismic wave amplitude and a 30-fold increase in
released energy. And a change of 0.3 units equals a three-fold increase in intensity.
In other words, the 9.3 Sumatra earthquake that generated the 2004 Indian Ocean
tsunami was three times more powerful than the 9.0 earthquake it was originally
thought to be. Moment magnitude is measurable nearly immediately thanks to the
advent of modern seismometers, digital recording, and real-time communication
links. It allows warning centers to provide initial tsunami advisories within minutes
of an earthquake occurrence. In Japan, earthquake warnings get broadcast to the
public within 30 seconds of them happening.

Maremoto
Spanish term for tsunami

B-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix B: Glossary

Mareogram or Marigram
1) Record made by a mareograph.
2) Any graphic representation of the rise and fall of the sea level, with time as
abscissa and height as ordinate, usually used to measure tides, may also show
tsunamis.

Mareograph
A recording sea level gauge. Also known as a marigraph or tide gauge.

Mean height
Average height of a tsunami measured from the trough to the crest after removing the
tidal variation.

Mean sea level

The average height of the sea surface, based upon hourly observation of tide height on
the open coast or in adjacent waters which have free access to the sea. These observa-
tions are to have been made over a “considerable” period of time. In the United States,
mean sea level is defined as the average height of the surface of the sea for all stages
of the tide over a 19-year period. Selected values of mean sea level serve as the sea
level datum for all elevation surveys in the United States. Along with mean high water,
mean low water, and mean lower low water, mean sea level is a type of tidal datum.

Microtsunami
A tsunami of such small amplitude that it must be observed instrumentally and is not
easily detected visually.

MOST Model
A numerical model that computes all three stages of an earthquake-generated
tsunami—generation, propagation, and run-up—providing a complete tsunami
simulation capability.

O
Ocean-wide tsunami
A tsunami capable of widespread destruction, not only in the immediate region of its
generation but across an entire ocean. All ocean-wide tsunamis have been generated
by major earthquakes. Synonym for teletsunami or distant tsunami.

Ocean-wide Tsunami Warning

A warning issued to all participants after there is confirmation of tsunami waves
capable of causing destruction beyond the local area. Ocean-Wide Tsunami Warnings

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide B-7

 Appendix B: Glossary

contain estimated tsunami arrival times (ETAs) at all Forecast Points. Ocean-Wide
Tsunami Warning Bulletins also normally carry information on selected wave heights
and other wave reports. The Warning will be cancelled when it is determined that
the tsunami threat is over. As local conditions can cause wide variations in tsunami
wave action, the all-clear determination should be made by the local action agencies
and not the TWC. In general, after receipt of a Tsunami Warning, action agencies can
assume all-clear status when their area is free from damaging waves for at least two
hours, unless additional ETAs have been announced by the TWC (for example for
a significant aftershock) or local conditions, that may include continued seiching or
particularly strong currents in channels and harbours, warrant the continuation of the
Tsunami Warning status.

Overflow
A flowing over, inundation.

P
Paleotsunami
Tsunami occurring prior to the historical record or for which there are no written
observations. Paleotsunami research is based primarily on the identification, map-
ping, and dating of tsunami deposits found in coastal areas, and their correlation
with similar sediments found elsewhere locally, regionally, or across ocean basins.
In one instance, the research has led to a new concern for the possible future occur-
rence of great earthquakes and tsunamis along the northwest coast of North America.
In another instance, the record of tsunamis in the Kuril-Kamchatka region is being
extended much further back in time. As work in this field continues it may provide a
significant amount of new information about past tsunamis to aid in the assessment
of the tsunami hazard.

Post-tsunami survey
Tsunamis are relatively rare events and most of their evidence is perishable. There-
fore, it is very important that reconnaissance surveys be organized and carried out
quickly and thoroughly after each tsunami occurs, to collect detailed data valuable
for hazard assessment, model validation, and other aspects of tsunami mitigation.
In recent years, following each major destructive tsunami, a post-tsunami reconnais-
sance survey has been organized to make measurements of runups and inundation
limits and to collect associated data from eyewitnesses such as the number of waves,
arrival time of waves and which wave was the largest. The surveys have been orga-
nized primarily on an ad-hoc basis by international academic tsunami researchers. A
Post-Tsunami Survey Field Guide ([Link]
has been prepared by the PTWS to help with preparations of surveys, to identify
measurements and observations to be taken, and to standardize data collections. The
Tsunami Bulletin Board e-mail service has also been used for quickly organizing
international surveys and for sharing of the observations from impacted areas.

B-8 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix B: Glossary

Probable maximum water level

A hypothetical water level (exclusive of wave run-up from normal wind-generated
waves) that might result from the most severe combination of hydrometeorological,
geoseismic and other geophysical factors that are considered reasonably possible in
the region involved, with each of these factors considered as affecting the locality in
a maximum manner. This level represents the physical response of a body of water to
maximum applied phenomena such as hurricanes, moving squall lines, other cyclonic
meteorological events, tsunamis, and astronomical tide combined with maximum
probable ambient hydrological conditions such as wave level with virtually no risk of
being exceeded.

R
Recession
Drawdown of sea level prior to tsunami flooding. The shoreline moves seaward,
sometimes by a kilometer or more, exposing the sea bottom, rocks, and fish. The
recession of the sea is a natural warning sign that a tsunami is approaching.

Reference sea level

The observed elevation differences between geodetic benchmarks are processed
through least-squares adjustments to determine orthometric heights referred to a
common vertical reference surface, which is the reference sea level. In this way,
height values of all benchmarks in the vertical control portion of a surveying agency
are made consistent and can be compared directly to determine differences of eleva-
tion between benchmarks in a geodetic reference system that may not be directly
connected by lines of geodetic leveling. The vertical reference surface in use in the
United States, as in most parts of the world, approximates the geoid. The geoid was
assumed to be coincident with local mean sea level at 26 tidal stations to obtain the
Sea Level Datum of 1929 (SLD 290). National Geodetic Vertical Datum of 1929 (NGVD
29) became a name change only, the same vertical reference system has been in use
in the United States since 1929. This important vertical geodetic control system is
made possible by a universally accepted, reference sea level.

Refraction diagrams
Models using water depths, direction of wave, separation angle, and ray separation
between two adjacent rays as input, produce the path of wave orthogonals, refraction
coefficients, wave heights, and travel times.

Regional tsunami
A tsunami capable of destruction in a particular geographic region, generally within
about 1,000 kilometers (625 miles) of its source. Regional tsunamis also occasionally
have very limited and localized effects outside the region. Most destructive tsunami
can be classified as local or regional, meaning their destructive effects are confined
to coasts within a 100 km, or up to a 1,000 km, respectively, of the source—usually
an earthquake. It follows many tsunami related casualties and considerable prop-
erty damage also comes from these tsunamis. Between 1975 and 2005 there were 22
Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide B-9
 Appendix B: Glossary

local or regional tsunamis in the Pacific and adjacent seas that resulted in deaths and
property damage. For example, a regional tsunami in 1983 in the Sea of Japan or East
Sea, severely damaged coastal areas of Japan, Korea, and Russia, causing more than
$800 million in damage, and more than 100 deaths. Then, after nine years without
an event, 11 locally destructive tsunamis occurred in just a seven year period from
1992 to 1998, resulting in over 4,200 deaths and hundreds of millions of dollars in
property damage. In most of these cases, tsunami mitigation efforts in place at the
time were unable to prevent significant damage and loss of life. However, losses from
future local or regional tsunamis can be reduced if a denser network of warning cen-
ters, seismic and water-level reporting stations, and better communications are estab-
lished to provide a timely warning, and if better programs of tsunami preparedness
and education can be put in place.

Rise
The upward change or elevation in sea level associated with a tsunami, a tropical
cyclone, storm surge, the tide, or other long term climatic effect.

Run-up
1) Difference between the elevation of maximum tsunami penetration (the inundation
line) and the sea level at the time of the tsunami.
2) Elevation reached by seawater measured relative to some stated datum such as
mean sea level, mean low water, sea level at the time of the tsunami attack, etc.,
and measured ideally at a point that is the local maximum of the horizontal
inundation.
3) In practical terms, runup is only measured where there is clear evidence of the
inundation limit on the shore.

Run-up distribution
Set of tsunami run-up values measured or observed along a coastline.

S
Sea level
The height of the sea at a given time measured relative to some datum, such as mean
sea level.

Sea level station

A system consisting of a device such as a tide gauge for measuring the height of sea
level, a data collection platform (DCP) for acquiring, digitizing, and archiving the sea
level information digitally, and often a transmission system for delivering the data
from the field station to a central data collection center. The specific requirements of
data sampling and data transmission are dependent on the application. The GLOSS

B-10 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix B: Glossary

program maintains a core network of sea level stations. For local tsunami monitor-
ing, one-second sampled data streams available in real-time are required. For distant
tsunamis, warning centers may be able to provide adequate warnings using data
acquired in near-real time (one-minute sampled data transmitted every 15 minutes).
Sea level stations are also used for sea level rise and climate change studies, where
an important requirement is for the very accurate location of the station as acquired
through surveying techniques.

Seiche
A seiche may be initiated by a standing wave oscillating in a partially or fully
enclosed body of water. It may be initiated by long period seismic waves (an earth-
quake), wind and water waves, or a tsunami. The resonant oscillation of the water is
a seiche.

Seismic sea wave

Tsunamis are sometimes referred to as seismic sea waves because they are most often
generated by earthquakes.

Seismic waves
When an earthquake fault ruptures, it causes two types of deformation: static; and
dynamic. Static deformation is the permanent displacement of the ground due to the
event. The second type of deformation, dynamic motions, are essentially sound waves
radiated from the earthquake as it ruptures. While most of the plate-tectonic energy
driving fault ruptures is taken up by static deformation, up to 10% may dissipate
immediately in the form of seismic waves. The dynamic, transient seismic waves
from any substantial earthquake will propagate all around and entirely through the
Earth. There are several different kinds of seismic waves, and they all move in differ-
ent ways. The two main types of waves are body waves and surface waves. Body
waves can travel through the earth’s inner layers, but surface waves can only move
along the surface of the planet like ripples on water. Earthquakes radiate seismic
energy as both body and surface waves.

Seismometer
An instrument that measures ground motion (caused by seismic waves) at a specific
location.

Significant wave height

The average height of the one-third highest waves of a given wave group. Note that
the composition of the highest waves depends on the extent to which the lower
waves are considered. In wave record analysis, the average height of the highest one-
third of a selected number of waves, this number being determined by dividing the
time of record by the significant period. Also called characteristic wave height.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide B-11

 Appendix B: Glossary

Spreading
When referring to tsunami waves, it is the spreading of the wave energy over a wider
geographical area as the waves propagate away from the source region. The reason
for this geographical spreading and reduction of wave energy with distance traveled,
is the sphericity of the earth. The tsunami energy will begin converging again at a
distance of 90 degrees from the source. Tsunami waves propagating across a large
ocean undergo other changes in configuration primarily due to refraction, but geo-
graphical spreading is also very important depending on the orientation, dimensions,
and geometry of the tsunami source.

Subsidence (uplift)
The permanent movement of land down (subsidence) or up (uplift) due to geologic
processes, such as during an earthquake.

T
Teletsunami or distant tsunami
A tsunami originating from a far away source, generally more than 1,000 km away.
Less frequent, but more hazardous than regional tsunamis, are ocean-wide or distant
tsunamis. Usually starting as a local tsunami that causes extensive destruction near
the source, these waves continue to travel across an entire ocean basin with sufficient
energy to cause additional casualties and destruction on shores more than 1,000 kilo-
meters from the source. In the last 200 years, there have been at least 21 destructive
ocean-wide tsunamis. The most destructive Pacific-wide tsunami of recent history
was generated by a massive earthquake off the coast of Chile on 22 May 1960. All
Chilean coastal towns between the 36th and 44th parallels were destroyed or heav-
ily damaged by the action of the tsunami and the quake. The combined tsunami and
earthquake toll included 2,000 killed, 3,000 injured, two million homeless and $550
million damage. Off the coast of Corral, Chile, the waves were estimated to be 20
meters (67 feet) high. The tsunami caused 61 deaths in Hawaii, 20 in the Philippines
and 138 in Japan. Estimated damages were US $50 million in Japan, US $24 million in
Hawaii and several millions of dollars along the west coast of the United States and
Canada. Distant wave heights varied from slight oscillations in some areas to 12 meters
(40 feet) at Pitcairn Island, 11 meters (37 feet) at Hilo, Hawaii, and six meters (20 feet)
at some places in Japan. The worst tsunami catastrophe in history occurred in the
Indian Ocean on 26 December 2004, when a M9.3 earthquake off the northwest coast
of Sumatra, Indonesia, produced an ocean-wide tsunami that hit Thailand and Malay-
sia to the east, and Sri Lanka, India, the Maldives, and Africa to the west as it tra-
versed across the Indian Ocean. Nearly 250,000 people lost their lives and more than
a million people were displaced, losing their homes, property, and livelihoods. The
magnitude of death and destructiveness caused immediate response by the world’s
leaders and led to the development of the Indian Ocean tsunami warning and mitiga-
tion system in 2005. The event also raised awareness of tsunami hazards globally,
and new systems were established in the Caribbean, the Mediterranean, and Atlantic.

B-12 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix B: Glossary

Tidal wave
1) The wave motion of the tides.
2) Often incorrectly used to describe a tsunami, storm surge, or other unusually high
and therefore destructive water levels along a shore that are unrelated to the tides.

Tide
1) The rhythmic, alternate rise and fall of the surface (or water level) of the ocean,
and of bodies of water connected with the ocean such as estuaries and gulfs,
occurring twice a day over most of the Earth and resulting from the gravitational
attraction of the moon (and, in lesser degrees, of the sun) acting unequally on dif-
ferent parts of the rotating Earth.
2) The periodic movements of the seas which have a coherent amplitude and phase
relationship to some periodic geophysical force.

Tide amplitude
One-half of the difference in height between consecutive high water and low water;
hence, half of the tidal range.

Tide gauge
A device for measuring the height (rise and fall) of the tide. Especially an instrument
for automatically making a continuous graphic record of tide height versus time.

Tide station
A place where tide observations are obtained.

Travel time
Time required for the first tsunami wave to propagate from its source to a given point
on a coastline.

Travel time map

Map showing isochrons or lines of equal tsunami travel time calculated from the
source outwards toward terminal points on distant coastlines.

Tsunameter
An instrument for the early detection, measurement, and real-time reporting of tsu-
namis in the open ocean. Also known as a tsunamimeter. The DART system is a
tsunameter.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide B-13

 Appendix B: Glossary

Tsunami
Japanese term meaning wave (“nami”) in a harbor (“tsu”). A series of traveling waves
of extremely long length and period, usually generated by disturbances associated
with earthquakes occurring below or near the ocean floor. (Also called a seismic
sea wave and, incorrectly, tidal wave). Volcanic eruptions, submarine landslides,
and coastal rock falls can also generate tsunamis, as can a large meteorite impact-
ing the ocean. These waves may reach enormous dimensions and travel across entire
ocean basins with little loss of energy. They proceed as ordinary gravity waves with
a typical period of between 10 and 60 minutes. Tsunamis steepen and increase in
height on approaching shallow water, inundating low- lying areas, and where local
submarine topography causes the waves to steepen, they may break and cause great
damage. Tsunamis have no connection with tides; the popular name, tidal wave, is
entirely misleading.

Tsunami amplitude
Usually measured on a sea level record, it is:
1) the absolute value of the difference between a particular peak or trough of the
tsunami and the undisturbed sea level at the time.
2) half the difference between an adjacent peak and trough, corrected for the change
of tide between that peak and trough. It is intended to represent the true ampli-
tude of the tsunami wave at some point in the ocean. However, it is often an
amplitude modified in some way by the tide gauge response.

Tsunami bore
A steep, turbulent, rapidly moving tsunami wave front, typically occurring in a river
mouth or estuary.

Tsunami damage
Loss or harm caused by a destructive tsunami. More specifically, the damage caused
directly by tsunamis can be summarized into the following:
1) Deaths and injuries.
2) Houses destroyed, partially destroyed, inundated, flooded, or burned.
3) Other property damage and loss.
4) Boats washed away, damaged or destroyed.
5) Lumber washed away.
6) Marine installations, destroyed.
7) Damage to public utilities such as railroads, roads, electric power plants, water
supply installations etc.

B-14 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix B: Glossary

Indirect secondary tsunami damage can be:

1) Damage by fire of houses, boats, oil tanks, gas stations, and other facilities.
2) Environmental pollution caused by drifting materials, oil, or other substances.
3) Outbreak of disease of epidemic proportions, which may be serious in densely
populated areas.

Tsunami dispersion
Redistribution of tsunami energy, particularly as a function of its period, as it travels
across a body of water.

Tsunami earthquake
An earthquake that produces an unusually large tsunami relative to the earthquake
magnitude (Kanamori, 1972). Tsunami earthquakes are characterized by a very shal-
low focus, fault dislocations greater than several metres, and fault surfaces smaller
than those for normal earthquakes. They are also slow earthquakes, with slippage
along their faults occurring more slowly than in normal earthquakes. The last events
of this type were in 1992 (Nicaragua) and 1996 (Chimbote, Peru).

Tsunami edge wave

Wave generated by a tsunami that travels along the coast.

Tsunami forerunner
A series of oscillations of the water level preceding the arrival of the main tsunami
waves, mainly due to the resonance in bays and shelves that could occur before the
arrival of the main tsunami.

Tsunami generation
Tsunamis are most frequently caused by earthquakes, but can also result from land-
slides, volcanic eruptions, and very infrequently by meteorites or other impacts upon
the ocean surface. Tsunamis are generated primarily by tectonic dislocations under
the sea which are caused by shallow focus earthquakes along areas of subduction.
The upthrusted and downthrusted crustal blocks impart potential energy into the
overlying water mass with drastic changes in the sea level over the affected region.
The energy imparted into the water mass results in tsunami generation, i.e. energy
radiating away from the source region in the form of long period waves.

Tsunami generation theory

The theoretical problem of generation of the gravity wave (tsunami) in the layer of
elastic liquid (an ocean) occurring on the surface of elastic solid half-space (the crust)
in the gravity field can be studied with methods developed in the dynamic theory
of elasticity. The source representing an earthquake focus is a discontinuity in the

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide B-15

 Appendix B: Glossary

tangent component of the displacement on some element of area within the crust.
For conditions representative of the Earth’s oceans, the solution of the problem dif-
fers very little from the joint solution of two more simple problems: the problem of
generation of the displacement field by the given source in the solid elastic half-space
with the free boundary (the bottom) considered quasi-static and the problem of the
propagation of gravity wave in the layer of heavy incompressible liquid generated by
the known (from the solution of the previous problem) motion of the solid bottom.
There is the theoretical dependence of the gravity wave parameters on the source
parameters (depth and orientation). One can roughly estimate the quantity of energy
transferred to the gravity wave by the source. In general, it corresponds to the esti-
mates obtained with empirical data. Also, tsunamis can be generated by other dif-
ferent mechanisms such as volcanic or nuclear explosions, landslides, rock falls, and
submarine slumps.

Tsunami hazard
The probability that a tsunami of a particular size will strike a particular section of
coast.

Tsunami hazard assessment

Documentation of tsunami hazards for a coastal community is needed to identify
populations and assets at risk, and the level of that risk. This assessment requires
knowledge of probable tsunami sources (such as earthquakes, landslides and vol-
canic eruptions), their likelihood of occurrence, and the characteristics of tsunamis
from those sources at different places along the coast. For those communities, data
on earlier (historical and paleotsunamis) tsunamis may help quantify these factors.
For most communities, however, only very limited or no past data exist. For these
coasts, numerical models of tsunami inundation can provide estimates of areas that
will be flooded in the event of a local or distant tsunamigenic earthquake or a local
landslide.

Tsunami impact
Although infrequent, tsunamis are among the most terrifying and complex physical
phenomena and have been responsible for great loss of life and extensive destruc-
tion to property. Because of their destructiveness, tsunamis have important impacts
on the human, social and economic sectors of societies. Historical records show that
enormous destruction of coastal communities throughout the world has taken place
and that the socio-economic impact of tsunamis in the past has been enormous. In
the Pacific Ocean where the majority of these waves have been generated, the his-
toric record shows tremendous destruction with extensive loss of life and property. In
Japan, which has one of the most populated coastal regions in the world and a long
history of earthquake activity, tsunamis have destroyed entire coastal populations.
There is also a history of severe tsunami destruction in Alaska, the Hawaiian Islands,
and South America, although records for these areas are not as extensive. The last

B-16 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix B: Glossary

major Pacific-wide tsunami occurred in 1960. Many other local and regional destruc-
tive tsunamis have occurred with more localized effects.

Tsunami intensity
Size of a tsunami based on the macroscopic observation of a tsunami’s effect on
humans, objects including various sizes of marine vessels and buildings. The original
scale for tsunamis was published by Sieberg (1923), and later modified by Ambraseys
(1962) to create a six-category scale. Papadopoulus and Imamura (2001) proposed a
new 12-grade intensity scale which is independent of the need to measure physical
parameters like wave amplitude, sensitive to the small differences in tsunami effects,
and detailed enough for each grade to cover the many possible types of tsunami
impact on the human and natural environment. The scale has 12 categories, similar
to the Modified Mercalli Intensity Scale used for macroseismic descriptions of Earth-
quake intensity.

Tsunami magnitude
Size of a tsunami based on the measurement of the tsunami wave on sea level gauges
and other instruments. The scale, originally descriptive and more similar to an inten-
sity, quantifies the size by using measurements of wave height or tsunami runup.
Iida et al. (1972) described the magnitude (m) as dependent in logarithmic base 2 on
the maximum wave height measured in the field, and corresponding to a magnitude
range from -1 to 4:
m = log2 Hmax

Hatori (1979) subsequently extended this so-called Imamura-Iida scale for far-field
tsunamis by including distance in the formulation. Soloviev (1970) suggested that
the mean tsunami height may be another good indicator of tsunami size, so that the
mean tsunami height is equal to 1/square root (Hmax), and the maximum intensity
would be that measured nearest to the tsunami source. A variation on this is the
Imamura-Soloviev intensity scale I (Soloviev, 1972). Shuto (1993) has suggested the
measurement of H as the height where specific types of impact or damage occur,
thus proposing a scale which can be used as a predictive quantitative tool for macro-
scopic effects. Tsunami magnitudes have also been proposed that are similar in form
to those used to calculate earthquake magnitudes. These include the original formula
proposed by Abe (1979) for tsunami magnitude, M t:
M t = logH + B

where H is the maximum single crest or trough amplitude of the tsunami waves (in
meters) and B is a constant, and the far-field application proposed by Hatori (1986)
which adds a distance factor into the calculation.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide B-17

 Appendix B: Glossary

Tsunami numerical modeling

Mathematical descriptions that seek to describe the observed tsunami and its effects.
Often the only way to determine the potential run-ups and inundation from a local
or distant tsunami is to use numerical modeling, since data from past tsunamis is
usually insufficient. Models can be initialized with potential worst case scenarios
for the tsunami sources or for the waves just offshore to determine corresponding
worst case scenarios for run-up and inundation. Models can also be initialized with
smaller sources to understand the severity of the hazard for less extreme but more
frequent events. The information is the basis for creating tsunami evacuation maps
and procedures. At present, numerical modeling has only been carried out for a small
fraction of coastal areas at risk. Sufficiently accurate modeling techniques have only
been available in recent years, and the models require training to understand and use
correctly, as well as input of detailed bathymetric and topographic data in the area
being modeled. Numerical models have been used in recent years to simulate tsunami
propagation and interaction with land masses. Such models usually solve similar
equations but often employ different numerical techniques and are applied to differ-
ent segments of the total problem of tsunami propagation from generation regions
to distant areas of run-up. For example, several numerical models have been used to
simulate the interaction of tsunamis with islands. These models have used finite dif-
ference, finite element, and boundary integral methods to solve the linear long wave
equations. The models solve these relatively simple equations and provide reasonable
simulations of tsunamis for engineering purposes. Historical data are often very lim-
ited for most coastlines. Consequently, numerical modeling may be the only way to
estimate potential risk. Techniques now exist to carry out this assessment. Computer
software and the training necessary to conduct this modeling are available through
programs such as the IOC Tsunami Inundation Modeling Exchange (Time) Program.

Tsunami observation
Notice, observation or measurement at a particular point in time of sea level
fluctuation caused by the incidence of a tsunami on a specific point.

Tsunami period
Amount of time that a tsunami wave takes to complete a cycle. Tsunami periods
typically range from five minutes to two hours.

Tsunami period (dominant)

Difference between the arrival time of the highest peak and the next one measured
on a water level record.

Tsunami preparedness
Readiness of plans, methods, procedures, and actions taken by government officials
and the general public for the purpose of minimizing potential risk and mitigat-
ing the effects of future tsunamis. The appropriate preparedness for a warning of

B-18 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix B: Glossary

impending danger from a tsunami requires knowledge of areas that could be flooded
(tsunami inundation maps) and knowledge of the warning system to know when to
evacuate and when it is safe to return.

Tsunami propagation
Tsunamis travel outward in all directions from the generating area, with the direc-
tion of the main energy propagation generally being orthogonal to the direction of
the earthquake fracture zone. Their speed depends on the depth of water, so that the
waves undergo accelerations and decelerations in passing over an ocean bottom of
varying depth. In the deep and open ocean, they travel at speeds of 500 to 1,000 km
per hour (300 to 600 miles per hour). The distance between successive crests can be
as much as 500 to 650 km (300 to 400 miles). However, in the open ocean, the height
of the waves is generally less than a meter (three feet) even for the most destructive
teletsunamis, and the waves pass unnoticed. Variations in tsunami propagation result
when the propagation impulse is stronger in one direction than in others because of
the orientation or dimensions of the generating area and where regional bathy metric
and topographic features modify both the waveform and rate of advance. Specifi-
cally, tsunami waves undergo a process of wave refraction and reflection throughout
their travel. Tsunamis are unique in that the energy extends through the entire water
column from sea surface to the ocean bottom. It is this characteristic that accounts for
the great amount of energy propagated by a tsunami.

Tsunami resonance
The continued reflection and interference of tsunami waves from the edge of a harbor
or narrow bay which can cause amplification of the wave heights, and extend the
duration of wave activity from a tsunami.

Tsunami Response Plan (TRP)

The Tsunami Response Plan describes the actions taken to ensure public safety by
responsible agencies after notification by the Tsunami Warning Focal Point (TWFP),
typically the national Tsunami Warning Centre. It includes Standard Operating Proce-
dures and Protocols for emergency response and action, organizations and individu-
als involved and their roles and responsibilities, contact information, timeline and
urgency assigned to action, and means by which both ordinary citizens and special
needs populations (physically or mentally handicapped, elderly, transient, and marine
populations) will be alerted. For tsunami response, emphasis is placed on the rapid-
ness, efficiency, conciseness, and clarity of the actions and instructions to the public.
A Tsunami Response Plan should also include post-tsunami actions and responsibili-
ties for search and rescue, relief, rehabilitation, and recovery.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide B-19

 Appendix B: Glossary

Tsunami risk
The probability of a particular coastline being struck by a tsunami multiplied by the
likely destructive effects of the tsunami and by the number of potential victims. In
general terms, risk is the hazard multiplied by the exposure.

Tsunami sediments
Sediments deposited by a tsunami. Finding tsunami sediment deposits within strati-
graphic soil layers provides information on the occurrence of historical paleotsuna-
mis. The discovery of similarly dated deposits at different locations, sometimes across
ocean basins and far from the tsunami source, can be used to map and infer the dis-
tribution of tsunami inundation and impact.

Tsunami simulation
Numerical model of tsunami generation, propagation and inundation.

Tsunami source
Point or area of tsunami origin, usually the site of an earthquake, volcanic eruption,
or landslide that caused large-scale rapid displacement of the water to initiate the tsu-
nami waves.

Tsunami velocity (or shallow water velocity)

The velocity of an ocean wave whose length is sufficiently large compared to the
water depth (i.e., 25 or more times the depth) can be approximated by the following
expression:
c = sqrt (gh)

Where:
c: is the wave velocity

g: the acceleration of gravity

h: the water depth.

Thus, the velocity of shallow-water waves is independent of wave length L. In water

depths between ½ L and 1/25 L it is necessary to use a more precise expression:
c = sqrt ( (gL/2p)[tahh(2 p h/l)] )

Tsunami Warning
The highest level of tsunami alert. Warnings are issued by the NTWCs due to confir-
mation of a destructive tsunami wave or the threat of an imminent tsunami. Initially
the warnings are based only on seismic information without tsunami confirmation as
a means of providing the earliest possible alert to at-risk populations. Warnings ini-

B-20 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix B: Glossary

tially place a restricted area in a condition that requires all coastal areas in the region
to be prepared for imminent flooding. Subsequent text products are issued at least
hourly or as conditions warrant to continue, expand, restrict, or end the warning.
In the event a tsunami has been confirmed which could cause damage at distances
greater than 1,000 kilometers (625 miles) from the epicenter, the warning may be
extended to a larger area.

Tsunami Watch
The second highest level of tsunami alert. Watches are issued by the RTWPs and
NTWCs based on seismic information without destructive tsunami confirmation. The
watch is issued as a means of alerting the affected populations located, for example,
one to three hours tsunami travel time beyond the warned area. Subsequent text
products are issued at least hourly to expand the watch and warning area, upgrade
all areas to a warning, or end the watch and warning. A Tsunami Watch may be
included in the text of the message that disseminates a Tsunami Warning.

Tsunami wave length

The horizontal distance between similar points on two successive waves measured
perpendicular to the crest. The wave length and the tsunami period give informa-
tion on the tsunami source. For tsunamis generated by earthquakes, the typical wave
length ranges from 20 to 300 km. For tsunamis generated by landslide, the wave
length is much shorter, ranging from hundreds of meters to tens of kilometers.

Tsunami zonation (tsunami zoning)

Designation of distinctive zones along coastal areas with varying degrees of tsunami
risk and vulnerability for the purpose of disaster preparedness, planning, construc-
tion codes or public evacuation.

Tsunamic
Having features analogous to those of a tsunami or descriptive of a tsunami.

Tsunamigenic
Having generated a tsunami; a tsunamigenic earthquake, a tsunamigenic landslide.

W
Water level (maximum)
Difference between the elevation of the highest local water mark and the elevation
of the sealevel at the time of the tsunami. This is different from maximum runup
because the water mark is often not observed at the inundation line, but maybe half-
way up the side of a building or on a tree trunk.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide B-21

 Appendix B: Glossary

Wave crest
1) The highest part of a wave.
2) That part of the wave above still water level.

Wave trough
The lowest part of a wave.

B-22 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Appendix C
Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and
RTWPs
As noted in Chapter 2, NTWCs and RTWPs require at least 17 persons to conduct
twenty-four hour, seven day per week operations plus other required activities such
as maintenance, outreach, training and personal development, research, and product
development. The extent of these additional activities beyond simply staffing shifts
around the clock may necessitate greater staffing numbers at some centers.

This appendix will describe each of the positions depicted in the organizational chart
in Chapter 2. These positions include:
 Center Director/Deputy Director
 Warning Coordination Scientist
 Science Officer
 Administrative Assistant
 Watch Stander (at least 10 are needed for 24 by 7 coverage)
 Electronics Technician
 Information and Communications Technology Officer

Warning Center Director/Deputy Director

The Center Director should possess a multi-disciplinary knowledge of earthquake
seismology, physical oceanography, communications, computer technology, and have
good organizational and managerial skills. The Director manages and provides over-
sight of the day-to-day operations at the center. All operational systems, procedures,
and products must be kept in operational status, and staff must be trained in proper
response actions. Additional responsibilities include overseeing the maintenance of a
large array of electronics and electro-mechanical equipment necessary in support the
tsunami warning system; operational research aimed at developing a better under-
standing of the physical processes involved in generation of tsunamis; development
of integrated computer and ocean modeling systems for acquiring and processing
data related to tsunamis and for disseminating messages to users; and community
outreach and preparedness activities aimed at educating communities in protecting
themselves against the effects of tsunamis.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide C-1

 Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

The Director is responsible for providing supervision and leadership to the TWC
staff. To issue immediate tsunami warnings at any time during the day or night, it is
vital that all electronic equipment, systems, and computers function as expected. The
center’s electronic staff is responsible for maintaining, monitoring, integrating, and
enhancing complex electronic equipment at the remote sites and at the center. The
centers operate and maintain remote sites within their Area of Responsibility (AOR).
Each of these remote systems contains subsystems and other electronic components
that are monitored frequently to ensure continuous transmission of quality data. At an
operations center, there are numerous pieces of electronic equipment, such as: com-
munication systems, satellite dishes, micro computer systems, un‑interruptible backup
power systems, recording and archiving systems, alarm systems, seismometers, data
acquisition systems, calibrators, data telemetry radios, and numerous display monitors
which must be maintained in proper working condition.

The Director supervises the scientific staff that responds to potentially tsunamigenic
events, and must be expert in tsunami warning communications, real-time seismic
analysis, long wave dynamics, and tsunami history and forecasting.

Warning Coordination Scientist (WCS)

The WCS works under the general supervision of the Center Director, who provides
general administrative and policy direction defining the assignment in terms of broad
mission statements. The WCS plans, designs, executes and evaluates the overall pre-
paredness program, independently determining the methods and approaches to be
used. The preparedness program is evaluated in terms of results achieved and objec-
tives met. Decisions and plans are accepted as technically authoritative.

The WCS serves as the principal interface between the center and the users of tsu-
nami bulletins. He/She leads the effort to insure their evaluation, adjustment, and
improvement. The WCS should be fully responsible for planning, coordinating, and
carrying out the center’s area-wide public awareness and tsunami readiness program
designed to educate the public to ensure the mitigation of death, injury and property
damage or loss caused by severe tsunami events. The WCS also leads and coordi-
nates staff outreach efforts and provides direction, guidance, instructions, and assis-
tance to the staff regarding center operational procedures. The WCS must possess an
interdisciplinary knowledge of earthquake seismology, physical oceanography, com-
munications, computer technology and have good organizational skills. Incumbent
must possess a thorough understanding of the complex processes involved in seismic
investigation and analysis as well as in the earth-ocean interaction involving tsunami
generation, propagation, and runup. In order to function effectively, the incumbent
must keep up to date on current state of the art advances in seismology, tsunami-
oceanography, and computer science. The incumbent must also fulfill the tasks of a
senior tsunami watch stander when necessary.

He/She is responsible for verifying that message communication paths are sound, and
for determining the problems when problems arise.

C-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

Major Duties
1. Develops operational procedures and in-house procedural training, and
conducts area-wide evaluations of TWC products and services:
 Responsible for the development of detailed operational procedures for ensur-
ing an effective and responsive tsunami warning program at the TWC. Since
rapid response, accuracy of work and competent professional judgments under
extreme pressure are all critical to the success of the program, procedures must
constantly be evaluated, tested and revised. Provides training to staff on event
procedures and thresholds.
 Reviews center-produced products and services for adherence to established
policy. Interfaces with all users of tsunami products and services (e.g., public,
media, foreign, national, state, and local emergency management, and military)
to evaluate the adequacy and usefulness of the services provided.
 Collaborates with the center director and with state/local agencies in develop-
ing, proposing, and implementing plans to develop, modify, or tailor prod-
ucts and services with the goal of service improvement or increased product
usefulness.

2. Conducts an AOR-wide preparedness program.

 Identifies priority community preparedness objectives and develops area-wide
warning projects to meet those objectives. In coordination with the center
director, establishes schedules for outreach activities.
 Reviews area-wide warning efforts and determines the adequacy of prepared-
ness activities.
 Ensures the maintenance and accuracy of communication dissemination within
the Tsunami Warning System. The WCS must be familiar with the overall com-
munication plan and routing to understand the internal communication work-
ings of the Tsunami Warning System. Conducts drills, exercises, and regularly
scheduled communication tests.
 Develops center plans and procedures to address the community emergency
action needs for dealing with tsunami events to ensure that local communities
have become as prepared as possible. The WCS works closely with foreign,
national, state, county, and local emergency management agencies and other
related agencies concerned with disasters to ensure a planned, coordinated,
and effective preparedness effort in the AOR.
 The WCS will answer inquiries about geophysical events and maintain favorable
relations with local and national press. Incumbent will be frequently quoted by
the press and tape recorded for broadcast.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide C-3

 Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

 Serves as technical advisor and resource for the center director on pre­
paredness measures. Interfaces with regional and national agencies on broad
preparedness activities.
 Maintains close liaison and coordination with the directors of civilian agencies,
commanders of military units, and community emergency preparedness
officials in order to develop and maintain an effective system for the
dissemination of tsunami warnings or potential earthquake/tsunami hazards.
 Conducts an ambitious public education program to promote individual recog-
nition of the threat of tsunamis and related phenomena, and to advise on and
promote the exercise of appropriate recommended individual-specific actions
for the protection of life and property.
 Addresses conventions, conferences, and meetings of emergency manage-
ment agencies and community groups; appears on local radio or television as a
spokesperson and expert on tsunami-related hazards.
 Encourages, promotes, and assists in the planning and conduct of community
drills to test and exercise local disaster plans and center-local government
interaction.
 Leads or participates in the conduct of local staff geophysical events studies
and developmental projects designed to capitalize on or incorporate the
benefits of new science/technology/local techniques towards enhancing
preparedness objectives.

3. Serves as Senior Scientist on shift duty, performing the full range of

responsibilities of that position. This work may comprise approximately 25%
of the time.
 Stand-by duty may be required. This requires five minute response to the office
at all times while on duty. The incumbent must carry a pager system and office
cell phone while on duty. This requirement will influence where the employee
lives.
 Exercises judgment on behalf of the center director as to the need for addi-
tional staff during the shift or in preparation for the upcoming shift. Handles
general office administrative matters which may occur on shift. Exercises call-
back authority and authorizes expenditures of funds for overtime for additional
or augmenting center staff, as appropriate.

4. When designated, acts for the site manager during his/her absence, with
full technical, managerial, and administrative responsibility for center
programs, products, and services.

C-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

Knowledge Required by the Position:

 Professional knowledge of the principles, practices, and theory of physical ocean-
ography and seismology as they relate to the tsunami phenomena including gen-
eration, propagation, and run-up.
 Knowledge of historic and potential earthquake and tsunami events, potential
tsunami source mechanisms, and their occurrence on an area-by-area basis. This
knowledge must be integrated in the planning and development of operational
procedures.
 Knowledge of computers, computer systems, and functional ability with scientific
programming languages.
 Must have knowledge of the NTWC or RTWP procedures, abilities required to
evaluate potential tsunami-generating events, and be able to issue the proper tsu-
nami product.
 Knowledge of the operation of all military, governmental, and community pre-
paredness agencies which receive tsunami warnings from the center.
 Knowledge of the operation and interaction with other government and non-gov-
ernment agencies that are engaged in seismological and tsunami studies.
 Mastery of the principles, methods, practices and techniques of tsunami bulletin
communication in order to function as the technical authority for the center within
the service area, and to design, plan and execute a preparedness program of major
scope and significance which conveys information about complex programs affect-
ing a large and diverse number of people throughout the population. This includes
exceptional skill in written and oral communication, particularly the ability to
translate highly technical geophysical concepts into non-technical terms.
 A basic understanding of the organization and functions of the national, state, and
local agencies concerned with disaster preparedness.
 Thorough knowledge of operational characteristics of complex equipment utilized
in data acquisition, communications, and service programs assigned to the center.
This includes the skills necessary to properly utilize sophisticated equipment and
to interpret and apply its output in a real-time operational environment.
 Knowledge of applied research methods and data management techniques suffi-
cient to participate in development efforts designed to develop or incorporate the
latest advances into center operations.
 A basic understanding of the psychology of human response to emergency situa-
tions, especially relating to tsunami phenomena and official warnings calling for
governmental and citizen action.
 Highly developed tact and diplomacy to function in difficult public contact
situations.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide C-5

 Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

Science Officer (SO)

The primary focus of the Science Officer (SO) is to ensure the scientific integrity of
the products and services provided to the public by the center, to lead or participate
in joint research projects and developmental efforts conducted with universities and
research centers, and to implement new techniques and processes to the operational
systems. The incumbent works under the general direction of the Center Director, but
has considerable freedom in carrying out responsibilities, and in the daily operation
of the office. Assignments are broad in nature with the SO initiating assignments and
developing and modifying the objectives of the work. The incumbent will exercise
a high degree of originality and judgment to define complex problems, to develop a
plan of attack to perform the required research and training, and to develop results.
New technologies and techniques may have little or no precedents. Therefore, the SO
must exercise originality and judgment to devise best approaches for integrating new
technologies into operations or suggesting new research or techniques.

The incumbent must possess a multi-disciplinary knowledge of earthquake seismol-

ogy, physical oceanography, communications, computer technology and have good
organizational skills The incumbent is expected to initiate and oversee the transfer
of new technologies from the research community to the operational environment,
to promote operational research aimed at developing a better understanding of the
physical processes involved in tsunami generation mechanisms, to develop inte-
grated computer systems for acquiring and processing seismic and sea level data
related to tsunamis, to establish professional staff enrichment activities, and to evalu-
ate and improve the professional operational activities of the center. The SO moni-
tors and evaluates the accuracy and scientific basis of tsunami bulletins provided by
the center. When so designated, the SO serves as Director of the facility during the
absence of the Center Director with full technical and administrative responsibility
for all operational programs, products, and services of the center.

Major Duties
1. Technology Transfer/Development Activities:
 Directs and participates in research and special studies concerned with
the operation of the center including development of new techniques in
seismic and tide data retrieval and processing, earthquake source studies,
tsunamigenesis, tsunami forecasting and defining tsunami terminal effects.
 Prepares and presents technical papers on all aspects of the Tsunami Warning
System and represents the center at technical meetings held for the purpose of
exchanging scientific information.
 Provides technical and scientific leadership and training to the staff in such
areas as analyzing seismic and tide data, earthquakes, tsunamis, computer
programming, techniques development, and operational development. Assess

C-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

continuing and future training needs required to successfully incorporate new

technology and science into the TWC operations.
 Ensures that center facilities and staff resources are available for full participa-
tion in developmental projects, as appropriate. Coordinates with the Center
Director, channeling the results of investigations, establishing test beds, and
applications mechanisms to evaluate project output.
 Coordinates and consults with scientists in other agencies, academia and the
private sector worldwide to identify and/or develop opportunities for enhanced
warning procedures and techniques to be used at the center. Integrates new
scientific/technological advances and techniques into center operational
procedures and operations.
 Maintains and enhances real-time seismic and sea level operational software at
the center.

2. Evaluation and Improvement Activities:

 Evaluates the technical and scientific adequacy of all center products and ser-
vices by conducting a product verification effort targeted to improving the sci-
entific basis of products produced. Devises local evaluation methodologies and
develops evaluation reports. Identifies scientific shortcomings, recommends
improvement actions to the center director, and devises plans for implementing
those corrective actions.
 Monitors established performance metrics which gage the accuracy and
response time of tsunami warning center products. Ensures accurate verifica-
tion data and analyses and facilitates the development of local verification pro-
cedures designed to assist national and local programs, developmental efforts,
and new technology implementation.

3. Serves as Senior Scientist on shift duty, performing the full range of

responsibilities of that position.
 Exercises judgment on behalf of the site manager as to the need for additional
staff during the shift or in preparation for the upcoming shift. Handles gen-
eral office administrative matters which may occur on shift. Exercises call-back
authority and authorizes expenditures of funds for overtime for additional or
augmenting TWC staff, as appropriate.
 Routinely collaborates with the center director in assessing subordinate staff
performance from a scientific and technical perspective. Provides input to
performance ratings of subordinate staff and recommends recognition as
appropriate.

4. When designated, acts for the center director during his/her absence,
with full technical, managerial, and administrative responsibility for all
programs, products, and services.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide C-7

 Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

Knowledge Required by the Position

 Professional knowledge of the principles, practices and theory of physical ocean-
ography and seismology as they relate to the tsunami phenomena including gen-
eration, propagation, and run-up.
 Knowledge of historic and potential earthquake and tsunami events, potential tsu-
nami source mechanisms, and their occurrence on an area-by-area basis around
the Pacific. This knowledge must be integrated in the planning and development
of operational procedures.
 Knowledge of computers, computer systems, and ability to develop new opera-
tional techniques from start to finish with scientific programming languages.
 Must have knowledge of the center procedures, abilities required to evaluate
potential tsunami-generating events, and be able to issue the proper tsunami
product.
 The ability to remain calm and work effectively under stressful situations is essen-
tial. An ability to conduct surveys of the scientific literature, identify appropriate
techniques and apply them to improve tsunami warning operations is required.
The incumbent must understand program policy and the inter-relationship of the
center and it’s participants.
 Knowledge of real-time seismic processing systems and the ability to configure the
systems, and the ability to create software which enhances the system for tsunami
warning purposes.
 Knowledge of long wave modeling techniques along with the ability to create
and modify such techniques as necessary to improve the forecasting ability of the
center.
 Thorough knowledge of operational characteristics of complex equipment utilized
in data acquisition, communications, and service programs assigned to the center.
This includes the skills necessary to properly utilize sophisticated equipment and
to interpret and apply its output in a real-time operational environment.
 Must be able to work well with colleagues of differing abilities and temperaments.

Administrative Assistant (AA)

As principal administrative assistant to the center director, the AA performs a wide
range of administrative functions for the staff management team, including: technical
aspects of all administrative programs and activities for the office related to budget,
funds control, purchasing, procurement requests, contract monitoring, bankcard, con-
venience check program, property, vehicles, travel, training, personnel actions, time
and attendance, mail, office supplies and equipment, etc.

C-8 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

Major Duties
1. Administrative Programs. Applies knowledge of the purposes, objectives,
and requirements of various administrative programs to track progress in
meeting objectives.
 For each program, establishes and maintain files, spreadsheets, or other records
for forecasting milestones and tracking progress and relevant expenditure cat-
egories such as funds, work hours, materials, maintenance, and energy.
 Prepares recurring and special reports and keeps management staff informed
of changing requirements and trends that may lead to potential problems. Like-
wise, requests explanations from them when milestones and requirements are
not being met. Upon completion of cycles or programs, calculates total expen-
ditures, prepares reports and graphs as appropriate to show planned versus
actual accomplishments, to be sent to higher levels.

2. Human Resources.
 Maintains a program that ensures the completion of planned personnel actions
for the foreseeable future.
 Tracks plans and requirements such as completion of probationary periods,
time-in-grade, and leave category, retirement eligibility, required training, etc.
 Based upon knowledge of HR and unit requirements, obtains relevant forms,
position descriptions, and other documents necessary and assembles complete
packages with background, and insures routing through higher levels, for
approvals and processing in a timely manner.

Knowledge Required by the Position

 Sufficient knowledge of human resources, supply, budget, travel and related pro-
cedures, contract administration, and reports preparation to carry out the admin-
istrative functions of the office, provide credible guidance to management officials
on processes to be followed, and to conduct necessary research into appropriate
regulations or policy statements.
 Practical knowledge and understanding of fundamental center operations, prac-
tices, methods, techniques and terminology and mission, policies, and procedures
to receive and answer or refer requests for information in person, telephone, or on
paper, and to complete assignments to meet organization needs and goals.
 Knowledge of grammar, punctuation, spelling, style, format, filing, travel, time and
attendance, and related requirements, procedures, and processes.
 Skill in office automation techniques including PC usage, database management,
spreadsheets, word processing, and related graphics.

The Administrative Assistant (AA) provides the only administrative and secretarial
support for an office of 15 staff members and must coordinate and handle a wide

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide C-9

 Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

variety of tasks and responsibilities independently. The AA must be able to work

independently and often under great demands and expectations. The office has sig-
nificant responsibilities for coordinating with and providing information to other
public and private organizations, the general public, and the media. The AA must
be able to adequately represent the Center Director in the discharge of a significant
degree of the required coordination and liaison work.

Watch Standers (at least ten for twenty-four hour

coverage)
The responsibilities of a center watch stander are of broad national and international
scope. The Geophysicist in this position plays a vital role in the issuance of tsunami
warnings and watches for the Tsunami Warning Center. The incumbent must possess
a multi-disciplinary knowledge of earthquake seismology, physical oceanography,
communications, and computer technology. Areas of involvement include telecom-
munications hardware and software; numerical modeling; historical databases for
earthquakes and tsunamis; tsunami generation mechanisms such as earthquakes, vol-
canoes, aerial and submarine landslides; geography; long-wave propagation theory;
earthquake seismology; and geomagnetism. The Geophysicist in this position must
possess the professional judgment necessary to gather and evaluate appropriate infor-
mation for accuracy and completeness, and to implement the correct response in a
timely manner for the protection of lives and property.

Major Duties
Tsunami Warning System Operations: The watch stander may serve as the Shift
Leader on a rotational basis as part of a tsunami and earthquake investigation team
with other members of the staff. If a Lead Geophysicist, the watch stander acts as a
team leader, supervises the investigation, and provides technical guidance to others
on the team. He/she must be able to make all observations, calculations, and interpre-
tations, using all available geophysical, oceanographic, and geographic data, obtained
by diverse methods of communications, to locate an earthquake, determine its magni-
tude, evaluate its potential for tsunami generation, evaluate appropriate tsunami data
for degree of potential threat, and issue, with follow-up, a tsunami watch, a tsunami
warning, or other information messages as necessary. Appropriate actions are based
on an expert knowledge of theoretical and applied geophysics, volcanology, sedimen-
tology, regional tectonics, geography, and oceanography of both the source region as
well as potential impact areas. The Lead Geophysicist must complete any investiga-
tion with accurate and objective documentation through preparation of a Tsunami
Warning Log for distribution to national and international Tsunami Warning System
participants.

The watch stander is independently responsible for understanding and using a variety
of communication networks applicable to different situations and for understanding
and using a variety of computer hardware platforms ranging from micro-comput-

C-10 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

ers to mini-computers, as well as a suite of software programs designed for different

situations.

The watch stander maintains favorable relations with representatives of the news
media and answers questions about geophysical events. He/she seeks to upgrade
the quality of tsunami warning services by conceiving and implementing original
improvements.

Operational Support (Technology Transfer): The watch stander keeps informed

of improvements in the theory and practice of earthquake seismology, volcanism,
oceanography, geophysical fluid dynamics, remote sensing, and telecommunications
as it effects operations and program policy. He/she is expected to incorporate this
information into improved methods and techniques which contribute to the increased
effectiveness of the Tsunami Warning System. In this respect, the watch stander may
act as a technical liaison with outside academic or governmental institutions, both
national and international, to effect technology transfer of mutual benefit.

Applied Research: Due to the unique operational requirements of the NTWC or

RTWP, existing methods and techniques may not be applicable to many phases of
operations. The watch stander conducts applied research in which original theories
and conceptual models are tested against available data to evaluate their applicabil-
ity to the Tsunami Warning System. This effort is expected to ultimately provide the
tsunami warning system with a quantitative forecast capability. This will include
more detailed and accurate travel time predictions, tsunami spectral energy propaga-
tion models which can identify coastal areas that are at higher risk, and broad band
tsunami models, both linear and nonlinear, which will aid in the interpretation of
remotely situated water level instruments.

Seismology Program: In addition to operational requirements of working with real

time seismic data in support of tsunami warning services, the watch stander may
provide support to center’s mission as a seismological observatory when appropri-
ate. Some centers may coordinate operational requirements and data submission with
international seismology centers. The watch stander actively monitors local, national
and international operations and seismic network research programs and periodically
forwards appropriate data to the concerned agencies. The incumbent is expected to
work with professional colleagues, national and international, and the data associated
with these networks to advance the state of seismic research knowledge and to pro-
mote applications within the Tsunami Warning System.

National and International Interactions: As the mission of the center is interna-

tional in scope, the watch stander will directly interact with participants of the Tsu-
nami Warning System on both national and international levels. The watch stander
is expected to be thoroughly familiar with all TWS components for seismic/tsunami
data acquisition and for information dissemination, the International Tsunami Infor-
mation Center (ITIC), and IOC/ICG and national policy to ensure knowledgeable,

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide C-11

 Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

accurate, and authoritative representation of the center with domestic and inter-
national agencies and governments. Interactions may take the form of direct and
extended training, briefing of visiting TWS participants, correspondence, or visits to
other national and international activities.

Communications: The watch stander must know and be capable of modifying com-
munications software in the absence of the computer systems programmer. The
incumbent must be familiar with communication protocols, formats, hardware, and
pathways. The he/she must use this knowledge in the event of communication fail-
ures to maintain the flow of data and information. On a regular basis, the watch
stander should conduct and document communication tests with TWS participants,
and take appropriate action to resolve any operational difficulties.

Station Management: The watch stander assists in administrative projects as the

need arises. He/she also assists in facilities projects and public education activities as
required. Since there is a continuing need for public education and community pre-
paredness regarding the hazards of a tsunami, the incumbent is frequently required
to provide tours or briefings at center, or at schools, agencies, or other institutions
throughout the AOR. The watch stander may serve as Acting Center Director in the
absence of all members of the management team.

Other: The watch stander is expected to document projects of scientific value in the
form of technical reports and scientific journal articles.

From time to time, as workload and optimum utilization of employees dictates, the
incumbent may be required to perform duties other than those described above.

Knowledge Required by the Position

Mastery of the theories, principles, and practices of classical physics; applied math-
ematics; physical oceanography with particular emphasis on long wave theories;
earthquake seismology; electricity and magnetism; acoustics; time series analysis;
digital signal progressing; numerical modeling of dynamic systems; Fortran, C, and
Basic computer language programming; UNIX, DOS, and AOS computer operating
systems; telecommunication practices; administration and management are required
by the incumbent. These skills and this knowledge are not all acquired during study
in a single academic discipline; a long period of on-the-job training is required for
the Geophysicist to perform at an optimum level.

The ability to remain calm and work effectively under stressful situations is essen-
tial. An ability to conduct surveys of the scientific literature, identify appropriate
techniques and apply them to improve tsunami warning operations is required. The
incumbent must understand program policy and the inter-relationship of all RTWPs
and NTWCs.

C-12 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

Electronics Technicians (ETs)

Center ETs provides expert-level support for scientific operations research, serving as
a specialist in a narrow aspect of electronic engineering, specifically support to tide
gages, seismic gages, communications equipment, computers (workstations and PCs),
and Local Area Networks (LANs).

Major Duties and Responsibilities

 Develop and devise improvements and alterations to the most complex technical
equipment, instruments or software; modifies and conducts complex tests, and
analyzes results.
 In a research environment, perform development work and conduct research by
application of established experimental and empirical methods and techniques,
 Interpret results and select or recommend approaches to design problem solutions.
 May plan, organize and execute limited projects which require the solution of both
design and operational problems; and advise engineering and technical support
staff on design and operational problems relating to equipment and processes.
 Specifically, the ETs maintain center recording and analysis equipment
 Provide required emergency maintenance at local and remote sites
 Make regular inspections throughout the year of all remote sites
 Cooperate with telecommunications vendors to correct telemetry and circuit
problems
 Provide technical expertise in evaluation, design, specification, and installation
of the center’s communication/data acquisition equipment, micro computers, and
associated equipment
 Provide technical expertise, coordinated with appropriate scientist, for electronics
related projects
 Maintain and upgrade computer networking hardware and connections.

Knowledge Required by the Position

Knowledge of theories, concepts, practices, methods and techniques of electronics
engineering gained through intensive practical applications and experience, and of
the capabilities, limitations, operations, design characteristics and functional use of
a wide variety of types and models of electronic equipment and systems. Knowledge
of specialized techniques and practices in order to: function as a recognized expert,
develop innovative approaches and techniques for specialized applications, modify,
adapt and design equipment, systems and instruments; complete and execute testing
programs and to analyze the results of tests.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide C-13

 Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

Information and Communications Technology (ICT) Officer

This position is established to analyze/perform work necessary to plan, design,
develop, acquire, document, test, implement, integrate, maintain, or modify systems
for solving problems or accomplishing center work processes by using computers.

Major Duties and Responsibilities

 Analyzes and evaluates work concerned with integrated systems of computer pro-
grams and/or computer equipment.
 Applies available technologies and basic management principles to adapt computer
methods to a variety of subject matter situations.
 Supports subject matter users by developing or designing applications for comput-
ers and/or in selecting, or assisting in selecting computer equipment.
 Oversees/performs equipment installation or relocation, testing and acceptance
processes.
 Responds to and resolves problems with software, hardware and systems
management.
 Integrates several hardware, software, and/or computer related services to provide
an integrated information system.
 May evaluate vendor or employee developed software to assure that it will provide
the desired results and operate properly on assigned equipment systems.

Knowledge Required by the Position

 Knowledge at a level to serve as an expert in a specialty area, e.g., applications
system design, computer equipment analysis, etc., or of general data processing
covering a wide range of technology and applications.
 Ability to plan advanced systems projects or resolve critical problems in existing
systems which require innovative solutions, etc.
 Ability to advise top management on new developments and advanced techniques.
 Ability to plan/organize/direct studies to develop long-range forecasts and
recommendations.
 Ability to coordinate development of automated data processing standards, guide-
lines, or policy.
 Skill to plan, organize, and direct team study work and to negotiate effectively
with management to accept and implement recommendations.
 Skill in applying national/international policies and data processing standards and
knowledge of technical data to evaluate alternate approaches to problem solutions.

C-14 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

Unique Position Requirements

In addition to the in-depth computer knowledge required as an Information Technol-
ogy Specialist, it is often desirable that the incumbent have a scientific background
and the ability to function as a member of a tsunami investigation team. In these
instances the following additional duties are required in this position:

 Stand-by duty supporting a scientist on shift duty may be required. This requires
five minute response to the office at all times while on duty. The incumbent must
carry a pager system and office cell phone while on duty. This requirement will
influence where the employee lives.
 Assists the SO maintaining and enhancing the real-time seismic and sea level
operational software at the center.
 Assists the center by computer programming and software maintenance of the
communication systems.
 Responsible for computer security, and firewall and router upkeep and program-
ming. Installs the latest patches and upgrades system software and application
programs as necessary.
 Works with the electronics technicians to ensure that the seismic and sea level
acquisition software is working properly. Software will be created as necessary to
enhance the data acquisition systems.
 Maintains and develops products for the center’s web site.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide C-15

 Appendix C: Descriptions of Staff Positions at NTWCs and RTWPs

C-16 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Appendix D
Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and
RTWPs
In June 2007 the UNESCO IOC Tsunami Co-ordination Unit recommended that
NTWCs and RTWPs include, at a minimum, the following documentation:

NTWC/RTWP Concept of Operations. This is a document that is global, basin, or

country in scope depending upon the AOR of the center. It should be a high level
document for decision-makers and describe the system and how it functions in
general terms. It should identify who is involved and clearly define their roles and
responsibilities. It should be maintained by the IOC or the applicable country.

Operations Manual. This document details how a particular NTWC or Disaster

Management Office (DMO) Emergency Operations Center (EOC) works to carry out
its roles and responsibilities. The manual should be designed to be used by the duty
people at that center. It should include information on emergency management plans
and standard operating procedures (SOPs), such as criteria for action, data streams,
communications links, analysis software, messaging software, notification and dis-
semination methods, and general troubleshooting. It should be maintained by the
NTWC or EOC as appropriate. Standard Operating Procedures:
 Are a set of written instructions describing a routine, or repetitive activity con-
ducted by an organization. The instructions are stakeholder agreed-upon steps
that will be used in coordinating the Who, What, When, Where, and How aspects
of the Tsunami Emergency Response Plan (TERP) described later in this chapter.
 Are a mechanism for operating effective and reliable warning systems and disaster
management systems. The NTWC SOPs must be linked at all levels from interna-
tional to national to local warning institutions, and must be simultaneously con-
nected to the corresponding DMO SOPs, and vice versa.
 Cover a number of concept-of-operations activities to enable an end-to-end
response process. SOPs can range from data processing, analysis and warning
communication procedures to action checklists for conducting public coastal evac-
uations, coordinating stakeholders organizations, and establishing the roles and
jurisdictions for government, non-government, and the private sector agencies.
 Should facilitate good decision-making by describing in detail the actions taken
by an agency to carry out its responsibilities, as defined in the system’s concept
of operations document. The existence and use of SOPs are especially essential
for rapid, efficient tsunami response since tsunamis are rapid-onset disasters with

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide D-1

 Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

little time to prepare. Because of this, all responses need to be pre-planned, well
practiced, and automatically enacted to minimize loss of life through quick public
notification.

Examples are PTWC and WC/ATWC Operations Manual (2006); USGS NEIC Earth-
quake Response Plan (2006); JMA Manual on Operations and Systems for Tsunami
Warning Service (2007).

EOC examples are The Guide to the National Civil Defence Emergency Management
Plan - New Zealand (2006); The British Columbia (Canada) Tsunami Warning and
Alerting Plan (2001); California (USA) Local Planning Guidance on Tsunami Response
(Second Edition, 2006); Wakayama Prefecture (Japan) Plan of Mobilization and
Transmittal of Tsunami Forecast (2007); and Kushimoto City (Japan) Municipal Local
Tsunami Response Procedures (2007).

Operations Troubleshooting Manual. This document should provide details on

what actions to take when a system has failed. This can be computer hardware
failure, communications link failure, software problem etc. It should be maintained
by the NTWC or RTWP as appropriate.

Examples are from PTWC, and USGS NEIC Earthquake Analysts Manual (Draft 2006)

Tsunami Warning System Users Guide. This guide should contain general informa-
tion for customers on tsunamis and the tsunami threat, on NTWC procedures and the
criteria for action, along with sample messages. It should include a general descrip-
tion of that NTWC’s system—seismic data, sea level data, warning centre, message
dissemination, public safety actions and responses, including evacuation. Guidance
on what the user or customer can expect from the NTWC, including how to inter-
pret messages for action, definitions/lexicon of terms, what to do when warnings
are issued. For RTWPs the document may be maintained by the IOC. For a national
system, it should be maintained jointly by the NTWC and partners. The Users Guide
can be divided into 2 parts, with each part published separately. A Local response
Users Guides should supplement a National Guide.

Examples are PTWS Users Guide (new edition in August 2007), currently WC/ATWC
Operations Plan (Users Guide), Communications Plan (Users Guide) for the PTWS
(Apr 2006), Users Guide for the IOTWS (Feb 2007).

NTWC/RTWP Stakeholder Contacts. This document is generally comprised of con-

tacts responsible for overall tsunami mitigation, for tsunami warning operations, and
for tsunami emergency response operations.
 For RTWPs these are Tsunami Warning Focal Points (TWFP) for 24x7 action on
tsunami emergencies and National stakeholders or ICG Tsunami National Contacts
(TNC) responsible for tsunami mitigation. The document should be maintained by
IOC for the global system—an efficient means will be by secure web site that is

D-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

password protected, or other easily accessed secure method.

At the international level, the stakeholder group is the ICG.
 For NTWCs, the document should be similar but involve emergency response as
well. Documents should be maintained by the NTWC and EOC national, provin-
cial, district, and/or local levels of government.

Tsunami Warning System Directives. Official, authoritative documents covering

national or local procedures and responsibilities. Descriptions are in more detail than
Concept of Operations, but less detail than Operations Manuals. Directives describe
authority, coordination, roles, and responsibilities of services and organizations
involved. They should be maintained by each country, or local authority that carries
out procedures.

Examples are NOAA NWS Tsunami Directives (2006) which can be found at:
[Link] NDS 10-7 Tsunami Warning
Services

Tsunami Emergency Response Plans (TERP). NTWCs and their associated DMOs
must create and customize written Tsunami Emergency Response Plans (TERP) to
meet their specific needs. The documents form the basis on which to conduct rou-
tine drills to ensure response procedures can be effectively enacted by a 24x7 duty
staff. These can range from stakeholder familiarization workshops, agency and multi-
agency drills, tabletop scenario exercises, and functional communications tests, to
full-scale response agency field deployment exercises, which may or may not include
public evacuations. Documents and drills also ensure the consistency of actions as
duty staff may turn over several times between actual tsunami events.

NTWC and DMO TERPs, and their accompanying Standard Operating Procedures
(SOP) and Checklists should also describe procedures, protocols, and expected
actions for tsunami emergencies. For the TWC, this may mean procedures followed
when a tsunami alert is received from international RTWPs, or how a NTWC moni-
tors earthquakes and evaluates their tsunamigenic potential. The goal of the NTWC is
to then issue an urgent local / regional / and/or distant tsunami warning to its DMO
and/or its citizens.

For the DMO, this means the immediate alerting of communities and households, and
as required, the evacuation of people out of the pre-designated tsunami evacuation
zone. For a local tsunami warning and evacuation order, these decisions and actions
may have to take place immediately, within minutes after earthquake ground shaking.

Together, these are the minimum requirements for establishing a fully functioning,
efficient end-to-end tsunami warning system.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide D-3

 Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

D-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

 Appendix E
References and Resources
Chapter 2: Tsunami Warning Center Requirements Overview
IOC (2006), Second Session of the Intergovernmental Coordination Group for the
Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning and Mitigation System (ICG/IOTWS-II), Hyderbad
India, Dec. 2005.

UNESCO (2006), IOC Executive Council 39th Session, June 2006. Available at:
[Link]

United Nations (2006), Global Survey of Early Warning Systems, A report prepared at
the request of the Secretary-General of the United Nations. Third International Con-
ference on Early Warning, Bonn 27-29 March 2006.

Chapter 3: Earth Data Observation References

Seismology References
Ammon, Charles J. (2001). Seismic Waves and the Earth’s Interior. Saint Louis Univer-
sity EAS-A193 Class Notes. Available at the Pennsylvania State University web site:
[Link]

Andresen, Arild (2007). at [Link] a University of Oslo,

Norway web site.

Baxter, S.J. (2000). Earthquake Basics. Delaware Geological Survey Publication

Number 23.

Braile, L.W. 2006. Seismic Waves and the Slinky: A Guide for Teachers. Department
of Earth and Atmospheric Sciences, Purdue University West Lafayette, IN. web site:
[Link]

Dziewonski, A.M. and J.H. Woodhouse, (1983). Studies of the seismic source using
normal-mode theory, in Kanamori, H. and E. Boschi, eds., Earthquakes: observation,
theory, and interpretation: notes from the International School of Physics “Enrico
Fermi” (1982: Varenna, Italy), North-Holland Publ. Co., Amsterdam, pp. 45-137, 1983.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide E-1

 Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

Dziewonski, A.M. and J.H. Woodhouse, (1981). An experiment in the systematic study
of global seismicity: centroid-moment tensor solutions for 201 moderate and large
earthquakes of 1981, J. Geophys. Res., 88: 3247-3271, 1983.

Dziewonski, A.M., T.-A. Chou and J.H. Woodhouse, (1981). Determination of earth-
quake source parameters from waveform data for studies of global and regional seis-
micity, J. Geophys. Res., 86: 2825-2852, 1981.

Havskov, Jens, and Geraldo Alguacil, (2004) Instrumentation in Earthquake Seismol-

ogy Series: Modern Approaches in Geophysics, Vol. 22 1st ed. 2004. Corr. 2nd print-
ing, 2004, XII, 360p. ISBN 1402029683Springer Verlag 2004.

International Handbook of Earthquake and Engineering Seismology, Academic Press,

ed. W. H. Lee et al., July 2003.

Kanamori, Hiroo, Jim Mori, Egill Hauksson, Thomas H. Heaton, L. Katherine Hutton,
and Lucile M. Jones (1993). Determination of Earthquake Energy Release and ML
Using TERRASCOPE. Bull. Seism. Soc. Am, Vol. 83, No. 2, pp. 330-346.

Kious, W. Jacquelyne and Robert I. Tilling (2001). This Dynamic Earth. U.S. Govern-
ment Printing Office Superintendent of Documents, Mail Stop SSOP Washington, DC
20402-9328.

Louie, John N. (1996). Mackay School of Earth Sciences and Engineering College of
Science, The University of Nevada. [Link]

Simkin, Tom, [Link]. (2006). This Dynamic Planet. World Map of Volcanoes, Earth-
quakes, Impact Craters, and Plate Tectonics. U.S. Geological Survey, Information
Services, Box 25286, Federal Center, Denver, CO 80225.

Richter, C.F., 1958. Elementary Seismology. W.H. Freeman and Company, San
Francisco, pp. 135-149; 650-653.

Tsuboi, Seiji (2000). Application of Mwp to tsunami earthquake. Geophys. Res. Ltrs. 27
No.19, pp. 3105-3108.

Tsuboi, Seiji, Paul M. Whitmore and Thomas J. Sokolowski (1999). Application of Mwp
to Deep and Teleseismic Earthquakes. Bull. Seism. Soc. Am., 89, No.5, pp 1345-1351.

Tsuboi, S., K. Abe, [Link], and Y. Yamanaka (1995). Rapid Determination of Mw

from Broadband P Waveforms. Bull. Seism. Soc. Am., 85, No.2, pp 606-613.

Uhrhammer, Bob and Bill Karavas (1997). Guidelines for Installing Seismic Broadband
Stations. At web site: [Link]
html or [Link]

E-2 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

University of Washington Pacific Northwest Seismic Network web site at

[Link]

Whitmore, Paul M., S. Tsuboi, B. Hirshorn, and T.J. Sokolowski (2002). Magnitude-
Dependent Correction for Mwp. Science of Tsunami Hazards, Vol.20, No.4 pp 187-192.

Wielandt, Erhard (Nov 2002). Seismic Sensors and their Calibration. Institute of
Geophysics, University of Stuttgart at web site: [Link]
wielandt/

Woodhouse, J.H. and A.M. Dziewonski, Mapping the upper mantle: three dimensional
modelling of Earth structure by inversion of seismic waveforms, J. Geophys. Res., 89:
5953-5986, 1984.

Additional Seismology Resources

Agnew, D. C., Berger, J., Farrell, W. E., Gilbert, J. F., Masters, G. & Miller, D., 1986.
Project IDA: A decade in review, EOS, 67(16), 203-212.

Anderson, J. A. & Wood, H. O., 1925. Description and theory of the torsion seismom-
eter, Bull. Seism. Soc. Am., 15(1), 72p.

Bath. M “Intro. to Seismology”, John Wiley 1980

Center for Earthquake Research. [Link]/usgs

Doyle, Hugh. Seismology. John Wiley and Sons: New York, 1995.

Erickson, Jon. Plate Tectonics: Unraveling the Mysteries of the Earth. New York: Facts
on File, 1992.

Ewing, J. A., 1884. Measuring earthquakes, Nature, 30, 149-152, 174-177.

Geology: Plate Tectonics (Web site).

[Link]

Hauksson, E., L. M. Jones, and A. F. Shakal (2003). International Handbook of Earth-

quake and Engineering Seismology, Volume B, Chapter 78, pp. 1275-1284. Academic
Press.

IRIS, 1985. The design goals for a new global seismographic network. Incorporated
Research Institutions for Seismology, Washington, DC.

National Earthquake Information Center.

[Link]/neis/states/mssour/[Link]

Newton, David E. Earthquakes. New York: Franklin Watts, c1993.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide E-3

 Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

Plate Tectonics (Web site). [Link]

Scherbaum, F., 1996. Of Poles and Zeros, Fundamentals of Digital Seismology. Kluwer
Academic.

Scholtz, C.H. The Mechanics of Earthquakes and Faulting. Cambridge; New York:
Cambridge University Press, 1990.

Silverstein, Alvin, Virginia B. Silverstein, and Laura Silverstein Nunn. Plate Tectonics.
Brookfield, CT: Twenty-First Century Books, 1998.

Simon, Seymour. Earthquakes. New York: Morrow Junior Books, 1991.

Steinbrugge, Karl V. Earthquakes, Volcanoes, and Tsunamis: An Anatomy of Hazards.

New York: Skandia America Group, 1982.

Tarbuck, Edward J and Frederick K. Lutgens. Earth: An Introduction to Physical

Geology. Prentice Hall: New Jersey, 1996.

Uhrhammer, R. A. & Karavas, W., 1997. Guidelines for installing broadband seismic
instrumentation. Tech. rep., Seismographic station, University of California at Berkeley,
[Link]

U.S. Geological Survey Internet web site: [Link]

U.S. Geological Survey Internet web site:

[Link]

U.S. Geological Survey National Earthquake Information Center Internet web site:
[Link]

Wielandt, E. & Steim, J. M., 1986. A digital very-broad-band seismograph, Annales

Geophysicae, 4 B(3), 227-232.

Yeats, Robert S., Kerry Sieh and Clarence R. Allen. The Geology of Earthquakes.
Oxford University Press: Oxford, 1997.

Sea Level Data References

Gill, S.K., Mero, T.N. and Parker, B.B. 1992. NOAA operational experience with acous-
tic sea level measurement. pp.13-25 in, IOC Workshop Report No. 81, Joint IAPSO-
IOC workshop on sea level measurements and quality control. Intergovernmental
Oceanographic Commission, Paris.

Gill, S.K. and Mero, T.N. 1990a. Next generation water level measurement system
implementation into the NOAA National Water Level Observation Network. pp.133-
146 in, Towards an integrated system for measuring long term changes in global

E-4 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

sea level, (ed. H.F. Eden). (Report of a workshop held Woods Hole Oceanographic
Institution, May 1990). Washington, DC.: Joint Oceanographic Institutions Inc. (JOI).
178pp. & Appendix.

Gill, S.K. and Mero, T.N. 1990b. Preliminary comparisons of NOAA’s new and old
water level measurement system. pp 172-180 in Oceans ‘90, New York: IEEE, 604pp.

Lennon, G.W., Woodland, M.J. and Suskin, A.A. 1992. Acoustic sea level measure-
ments in Australia. pp.26-39 in, IOC Workshop Report No.81, Joint IAPSO-IOC
workshop on sea level measurements and quality control. Intergovernmental Oceano-
graphic Commission, Paris.

Lennon, G.W. 1971. Sea level instrumentation, its limitations and the optimisation of
the performance of conventional gauges in Great Britain. International Hydrographic
Review, 48(2), 129-147.

Milburn, H.B., A.I. Nakamura, and F.I. Gonzalez (1996): Real-time tsunami report-
ing from the deep ocean. Proceedings of the Oceans 96 MTS/IEEE Conference, 23-26
September 1996, Fort Lauderdale, FL, 390-394.

Noye, B.J. 1974a. Tide-well systems I: some non-linear effects of the conventional tide
well. Journal of Marine Research, 32(2), 129-135.

Noye, B.J. 1974b. Tide-well systems II: the frequency response of a linear tide-well
system. Journal of Marine Research, 32(2), 155-181.

Noye, B.J. 1974c. Tide-well systems III: improved interpretation of tide-well records.
Journal of Marine Research, 32(2), 193-194.

Shih, H.H. and Baer, L. 1991. Some errors in tide measurement caused by dynamic
environment. In Tidal Hydrodynamics (editor Bruce B. Parker) pp 641-671.

UNESCO (2006). Manuals and Guides 14, Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commis-

sion, Manual on Sea Level Measurement and Interpretation Volume IV: An Update to
2006.

UNESCO (1985). Manual of Sea Level Measurement and Interpretation Vol. 1–Basic
Procedures.

University of Tennessee (2007). web course: Astronomy 161 at:

[Link]

Additional Sea Level Data Resources

Chambers, D. P., J. C. Ries, C. K. Shum, and B. D. Tapley: On the use of tide gauges
to determine altimeter drift, J. Geophys. Res., 103(C6), 12885-12890.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide E-5

 Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

Chao, B. F., 1991:Man, water, and global sea level, EOS Trans. Am. [Link],
72(45), 492.

D. Arnold, Tides and Currents (1987). Fernhurst Books., John Wiley and Sons Publish-
ers. SBN: 978-0-906754-24-5.

Emery, K. O., and D. G. Aubrey, 1991: Sea levels, land levels, and tide gauges,
Springer-Verlag.

Forrester, W.D., 1983; Canadian Tidal Manual, Department of Fisheries and Oceans,
Ottawa.

Goldreich, P., 1972, Tides and the earth-moon system: Scientific American, v. 226, no.
4, p. 43-52.

Marchuk, G. and B. A. Kagan, (1989). Dynamics of Ocean Tides. Kluwer Academic

Publishers Group (Netherlands). ISBN: 9789027725523.

Murray, M.T., 1964 A general method for the analysis of hourly heights of the tide.
International Hydrographic Review, 41(2), 91-101.

Peltier, W.R., 1988. Global sea level and Earth rotation, Science, 240, 895-901.

Pugh, D.T. 1987 Tides, Surges, and Mean Sea-Level, John Wiley & Sons, Chichester,
472 pages.

Wagner, C. A., and R. E. Cheney, 1992: Global sea level change from satellite altim-
etry, J. Geophys. Res., 97(C10), 15607-15615.

World Meteorological Organization Technical Regulations Vol. 1 General Meteorologi-

cal Standards and Recommended Practices 1988.

World Meteorological Organization, Commissions for Instruments and Methods of

Observation -Abridged Final Report of the Eleventh Session; Geneva 21 February–4
March 1994, WMO-No 807.

Additional DART Buoy Resources

Artru, J., Ducic, V., Kanamori, H., Lognonne, P., & Murakami, M. (2005). Ionospheric
detection of gravity waves induced by tsunamis. [atmospheres, GPS, ionosphere, tsu-
namis]. Geophysical Journal International, 160, 840-848. Retrieved September 21,
2005, from the [Link] database.

Bernard, E.N. (2005, May). The U.S. National Tsunami Hazard Mitigation Program: A
Successful State-Federal Partnership. Natural Hazards, 35(1), 5-24. Springer Science
and Business Media B.V., Formerly Kluwer Academic Publishers B.V. Retrieved
September 20, 2005 from SpringerLink database.

E-6 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

“Deep Ocean Assessment and Reporting of Tsunamis.” National Data Buoy Center.
Retrieved 10/11/2005 from [Link]

Dever, Ed and Paul Harvey, (2001). “CoOP/WEST Buoy Deployment and Recovery
Procedures.” Retrieved 10/11/2005 from [Link]
nh_2003/dever/[Link]

Eguchi, T., Fujinawa, Y., Fujita, E., Iwasaki, S., Watabe, I., & Fujiwara, H. (1998). Real-
time observation network of ocean-bottom-seismometers deployed at the sagami
trough subduction zone, central japan. Marine Geophysical Researches, 20(2), 73-94.

Gates, P. D., Preston, G. L., Chapman, L. B. Preston. (1998). Roberts, M. (Ed.) (1999).
“Fish Aggregating Device (FAD) Manual: Volume III: Deploying and Maintaining
FAD Systems.” Noumea, New Caledonia: Government of Taiwan/ROC. Retrieved
10/11/2005 from [Link]

Global Tsunami Detection and Warning System Act of 2005, HR 499 IH, 109th Con-
gress, 1st Session Cong. (2005). Retrieved September 23, 2005.

Gonzalez, F. I., Bernard, E. N., Meinig, C., Eble, M. C., Mofjeld, H. O., & Stalin, S.
(2005). The NTHMP tsunameter network. Natural Hazards, 35(1), 25.

Kasahara, J., Shirasaki, Y., & Momma, H. (2000). Multidisciplinary geophysical mea-
surements on the ocean floor using decommissioned submarine cables: VENUS proj-
ect. IEEE Journal of Oceanic Engineering, 25(1), 111-120.

Meinig, C., Stalin, S.E., Nakamura, A.I. and Milburn, H.B. (2005), Real-Time Deep-
Ocean Tsunami Measuring, Monitoring, and Reporting System: The NOAA DART II
Description and Disclosure. Retrieved September 20, 2005 from
[Link]

Mofjeld, H. O., Gonzalez, F.I., Bernard, E. N., Newman, J.C. (2000). Forecasting the
Heights of Later Waves in Pacific-Wide Tsunamis. Natural Hazards, 22, 71-89.

Momma, H., Kawaguchi, K., & Iwase, R. (1999). New approach for long-term seafloor
monitoring and data recovery. Proceedings of the International Offshore and Polar
Engineering Conference, 4, 603-610.

Momma, H., Fujiwara, N., Kawaguchi, K., Iwase, R., Suzuki, S., & Kinoshita, H. (1997).
Monitoring system for submarine earthquakes and deep sea environment. Proceed-
ings of the 1997 oceans conference. part 2 (of 2), oct 6-9 1997, 2, 1453-1459.

Morrissey, W. A. (2005). Tsunamis: Monitoring, detection and early warning systems

(CRS Report for Congress No. Order Code RL32739). The Library of Congress: Con-
gressional Research Services. Retrieved September 21, 2005.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide E-7

 Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

Okal, E. A., Oiatnesi, A., Heinrich, P. (1999). Tsunami detection by satellite altimetry.
Journal of Geophysical Research, B. Solid Earth and Planets. 104 (1), 599-615.

Patzig, R., Shapiro, S., Asch, G., Giese, P., & Wigger, P. Seismogenic Plane of the
Northern Andean Subduction Zone from Aftershocks of the Antofagasta (Chile) 1995
Earthquake–American Geophysical Union.

Taft, B., Meinig, C., Bernard, L., Teng, C., Stalin, S., & O’Neil, K. et al. (2003). Transi-
tion of the deep-ocean assessment and reporting of tsunamis network—A technol-
ogy transfer from NOAA research to NOAA operations. Celebrating the past...teaming
toward the future, Sep 22-26 2003, 5, 2582-2588.

Chapter 4: Data and Information Collection References

Earthworm Documentation Version 7.1 (2007) available from U.S. Department of
Interior, USGS, at: [Link]

Incorporated Research Institutions for Seismology (2007): Numerous manuals, tool-

kits, display programs, processing programs, etc. available at web site:
[Link]

Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning and Mitigation System IOTWS. Implementation Plan.

Fourth Session of the Intergovernmental Coordination Group for the Indian Ocean
Tsunami Warning and Mitigation System (ICG/IOTWS-IV), Mombasa, Kenya, 28 Feb-
ruary-2 March 2007, IOC Technical Series No. 71. UNESCO 2007, (English).

UNESCO/IOC (2007). Display and Decode of Sea Level Data Transmitted over the
WMO Global Telecommunications System. Version 1.1, November 2005. Available on
web site: [Link]

World Meteorological Organization (2007). Manual on the Global Telecommunications

System, WMO No. 386, Vol. I–Global Aspects, and Vol. II–Regional Aspects (Annex III
to WMO Technical Regulations) ISBN ISBN 92-63-12386-1.

Chapter 5: Tsunami Detection References

Earthworm Documentation Version 7.1 (2007) available from U.S. Department of
Interior, USGS, at: [Link]

McMillan, John R. (2002). Methods of Installing United States National Seismographic

Network (USNSN) Stations—A Construction Manual, Open-File Report 02-144 U.S.
DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY 2002.

National Science Foundation (2003). Review of the Global Seismographic Network.

Prepared for the Instrumentation and Facilities Program, Earth Sciences Division,

E-8 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

National Science Foundation, David Lambert, Program Officer. Available at:

[Link]

Proudman Oceanographic Laboratory, PSMSL (2007). IOC Manuals and Guides No.
14: Volumes I–IV, IOC Manual on Sea Level Measurement and Interpretation. available
in both paper and electronic forms. For paper versions, e-mail psmsl@[Link].
Electronic versions are provided at web site: [Link]

UNESCO/ IOC (2007). NOAA NWS Pacific Tsunami Warning Center TideTool
computer program. Available at: [Link]
TWCOpsSeminar/InformationTools/SLdecode_display_summary2.[Link]

Chapter 6: Tsunami Decision Support References

Borrero, J., M. Ortiz, V. Titov, and C.E. Synolakis (1997): Field survey of Mexican
tsunami produces new data, unusual photos. Eos Trans. AGU, 78(8), 85, 87-88.

Briggs, M.J., C.E. Synolakis, G.S. Harkins, and D.R. Green (1995): Laboratory experi-
ments of tsunami runup on circular island. Pure Appl. Geophys., 144(3/4), 569-593.

Gusiakov, V.K. (1978): Static displacement on the surface of an elastic space. Ill-posed
problems of mathematical physics and interpretation of geophysical data, Novosibirsk,
VC SOAN SSSR, 23-51 (in Russian).

Imamura, F., C.E. Synolakis, E. Gica, V. Titov, E. Listanco, and H.G. Lee (1995):
Field survey of the 1994 Mindoro Island, Philippines tsunami. Pure Appl. Geophys.,
144, 875-890.

Murty, T.S. (1984): Storm surges–meteorological ocean tides. Bull. 212, Fish. Res.
Board, Canada, Ottawa, 897 pp.

National Disaster Warning Center, Thailand Concept of Operations (DRAFT Version

3.3, March, 2006) prepared by the Pacific Disaster Center

Okada, Y. (1985): Surface deformation due to shear and tensile faults in a half space.
Bull. Seism. Soc. Am., 75, 1135-1154.

Shuto, N. (1991): Numerical simulation of tsunamis. In Tsunami Hazard, Bernard, E.

(ed.), Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht, The Netherlands, 171-191.

Synolakis, C.E., F. Imamura, [Link], Y. Tsuji, H. Matsutomi, B. Cooke, and M. Usman

(1995): The East Java tsunami of July 4, 1994. Eos Trans. AGU, 76(26), 257, 261-262.

Titov, V.V. (1997): Numerical modeling of long wave runup. Ph.D. thesis, University of
Southern California, Los Angeles, California, 141 pp.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide E-9

 Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

Weiss, Robert and Kai Wünnemann, and Heinrich Bahlburg (2006) Numerical model-
ling of generation, propagation and run-up of tsunamis caused by oceanic impacts:
model strategy and technical solutions. Geophysical Journal International, Volume 167
Issue 1 Page 77-88, October 2006.

Yeh, H., V. Titov, V.K. Gusiakov, E. Pelinovsky, V. Khramushin, and V. Kaistrenko

(1995): The 1994 Shikotan earthquake tsunami. Pure Appl. Geophys., 144(3/4),
569-593.

Yeh, H., F. Imamura, C.E. Synolakis, Y. Tsuji, P.L.-F. Liu, and S. Shi (1993): The Flores
island tsunamis. Eos Trans. AGU, 7(33), 369, 371-373.

Additional Tsunami Decision Support Resources

Anderson, William A. 1969. “Disaster Warning and Communication Processes in Two
Communities.” Journal of Communication 19 (2):92-104.

Atwood, L. Erwin and Ann Marie Major. 1998. “Exploring the “Cry Wolf” Hypothesis.”
International Journal of Mass Emergencies and Disasters 16:279-302.

Ayre, Robert S., Mileti and Trainer, Earthquakes and Tsunami Hazards in the United
States, a research assessment, Institute of Behavioral Science, University of Colorado,
149 pp., 1975 (LL, RB).

Barlow, David P., Tsunami Hazards, A Background to Regulation, Province of British

Columbia, 1993, 48 pp. (ML).

Blakely, W.J., Some Observations on Planning for Tsunami Prone Areas, prepared for
the City of Port Alberni, May 14, 1979, 33 pp. (FL).

California, A Guide for Developing a Pre-flood Hazard Mitigation Plan for California
Communities, Division of Flood Management, Dept. of Water Resources, State of Cali-
fornia, December, 1985 (FL).

Fukuchi, T., and K. Mitsuhashi, Tsunami Counter measures in Fishing Villages along
the Sanriku Coast, Japan. in Tsunamis—Their Science and Engineering, Terra Scien-
tific Publishing Company, Tokyo, pp. 389-396, 1983, (IOS).

Horikawa, K., and N. Shuto, Tsunami Disasters and Protection Measures in Japan, in
Tsunamis- Their Science and Engineering, Terra Pub. 1983, pp. 9-21,(IOS).

Jennings, Michael, The benefits of emergency notification systems; Disaster recovery

journal, Vol. 15, No. 4, 2002, pp. 54-55.

Mileti, Dennis S. and Colleen Fitzpatrick. 1991. “Communication of Public Risk: Its
Theory and its Application.” Sociological Practice Review 2 (1): 20-28.

E-10 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

Morgan, G.C., et al., Evaluating Total Risk to Communities from Large Debris Flows,
Geo Hazards 92, pp. 225-236, 1992 (FL).

Rogers, George O. and John H. Sorensen. 1988. “Diffusion of Emergency Warnings.”

The Environmental Professional 10:281-294.

Talandier, J., French Polynesia, Tsunami Warning Center in Natural Hazards 7: 237-
256, Kluwer, 1993.

Chapter 8: Notification and Dissemination References

National Science and Technology Council (2005). Tsunami Risk Reduction for the
United States: A Framework for Action. A Joint Report of the Subcommittee on Disas-
ter Reduction and the United States Group on Earth Observations.
Available at: [Link]

Partnership for Public Warning (PPW) (2002). Report 2002-02 Developing A Unified
All-Hazard Public Warning System. A Report by The Workshop on Effective Hazard
Warnings Emmitsburg, Maryland November 25, 2002. Available at:
[Link]

Samarajiva, Rohan [Link] National Early Warning System (2007). Sri Lanka (NEWS:SL)_A
Participatory Concept Paper for the Design of an Effective All-Hazard Public Warning
System (Version 2.1)_., LIRNEasia, Sri Lanka).

UNESCO/IOC (2006). TsunamiTeacher. Developed and maintained by the Interna-

tional Tsunami Information Center at: [Link]

Additional Resources for Notification and Dissemination

Burkhart, Ford N. 1991. Media, Emergency Warnings, and Citizen Response. Boulder,
CO:Westview Press.

Carlberg, Ken, et al. Preferential Emergency Communications: From Telecommunica-

tions to the Internet. Boston: Kluwer Acedemic Publishers, 2003.

Carter, Michael T. 1980. “Community Warning Systems: The Interface Between the
Broadcast Media, Emergency Service Agencies and the National Weather Service.” Pp.
214-228 in Disasters and the Mass Media. Washington, D.C.: Committee on Disasters
and Mass Media, National Academy of Sciences.

Crawford, George L. “NOAA Weather Radio (NWR)? A Coastal Solution to Tsunami

Alert and Notification.” Natural Hazards Volume 35, Number 1 (May 2005): 163-171.

Foster, H.D., and Vilho Wuorinen, British Columbia’s Tsunami Warning System; an
Evaluation, pub. University of Victoria Syesis, 9:113-122, June 1976 (FL).

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide E-11

 Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

FSM Telecommunications Corporation (2005). The homepage of Micronesia’s cell

phone service provider. Retrieved Sept. 21, 2005 from World Wide Web:
[Link]

Gruntfest, E. and M. Weber. 1998. “Internet and Emergency Management: Prospects

for the Future.” International Journal of Mass Emergencies and Disasters 16 (1):55-72.

Hammer, Barbara and Thomas W. Schmidlin. 2002. “Response to Warnings During

the 3 May 1999 Oklahoma City Tornado: Reasons and Relative Injury Rates.” Weather
and Forecasting 17:577-581.

Lehto, Mark R. and James M. Miller. 1986. Warnings, Volume I: Fundamentals, Design
and Evaluation Methodologies. Ann Arbor, MI: Fuller Technical Publications.

Lindell, Michael K. and Ronald W. Perry. 1987. “Warning Mechanisms in Emergency

Response Systems.” International Journal of Mass Emergencies and Disasters 5
(2):137-153.

Lindell, Michael K., Ronald W. Perry, and Majorie R. Greene. 1980. “Race and Disaster
Warning Response.” Seattle, WA: Battelle Human Affairs Research Centers.

Liu, Simin, Lynn E. Quenemoen, Josephine Malilay, Eric Noji, Thomas Sinks, James
Mendlein.1996. “Assessment of a Severe-Weather Warning System and Disaster
Preparedness, Calhoun County, Alabama, 1994.” American Journal of Public Health
86 (1):87-89.

Mileti, Dennis S. and E. M. Beck. 1975. “Communication in Crisis: Explaining Evacua-

tion Symbolically.” Communication Research 2(1):24-49.

Neto, I. (2004). Wireless Networks for the Developing World: The Regulation and Use
of License-Exempt Radio Bands in Africa. Cambridge: DSpace at MIT.

Ortega, C. & Romero, C. (1977). Communication Policies in Peru: A Study. Paris:

UNESCO.

Ramirez, F. Jorge, and P. Carlos Perez. “The Local Tsunami Alert System (‘SLAT’): A
Computational Tool for the Integral Management of a Tsunami Emergency “Natural
Hazards” Volume 31, Number 1 (January 2004): pp 129-142.

Rich, Richard C. and W. David Conn. 1995. “Using Automated Emergency Notification
Systems to Inform the Public: A Field Experiment.” Risk Analysis 15:23-28.

Salter, John, John Bally, Jim Elliott, and David Packham. 1993. “Vulnerability and
Warnings.” Macedon Digest 8:1-6.

Tierney, K. J. Implementing a seismic computerized alert network (SCAN) for South-

ern California: Lessons and guidance from the literature on warning response and

E-12 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

warning systems. (2000) University of Delaware Disaster Research Center.

[Link]

Chapter 9: Community Connection References and Resources

Building Media Partnerships for Education, Mitigation and Response. Nezette Rydell,
Warning Coordination Meteorologist, National Weather Service.

U.S. Contribution to the Indian Ocean Tsunami Warning System. 2007. Coastal Com-
munity Resilience: A Guide for Planning and Action to Address Tsunami and Other
Coastal Hazards.

Public Outreach/Stakeholder Involvement Resources

Brevard County MPO Public Involvement Evaluation Handbook
[Link]
PIP_eval_handbook.pdf
This handbook outlines the steps to be taken to evaluate public involvement tech-
niques, identifies measures to quantify success rates, and outlines strategies to
improve the Metropolitan Planning Organization’s public involvement process.

Getting in Step: A Guide for Conducting Watershed Outreach Campaigns

[Link]
This U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) module offers advice on how
local governments, watershed organizations, and others can maximize the effective-
ness of public outreach campaigns to reduce nonpoint-source pollution and protect
waterways.

Community Culture and the Environment: A Guide to Understanding a Sense

of Place
[Link]
This technical document identified tools and methods for understanding the human
dimensions of environmental protection and was designed to provide a means for
better understanding community values.

Stakeholder Involvement and Public Participation at the USEPA. Lessons

Learned, Barriers and Innovative Approaches
[Link]
This document presents lessons learned based on the review of formal and informal
evaluations of the public involvement process conducted by the EPA.

Engaging the American People. A Review of the EPA’s Public Participation

Policy and Regulations with Recommendations for Action
[Link]
This EPA report has information about using the internet, databases, training,

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide E-13

 Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

evaluations, and innovative involvement efforts, and analyzing agency policies,

statutes, and practices

The Model Plan for Public Participation

[Link]
model_public_part_plan.pdf
This report includes critical elements for public participation and also includes a
checklist for public participation.

International Association for Public Participation Website

[Link]
The International Association for Public Participation, working through its members,
helps organizations and communities around the world improve their decisions by
involving those people who are affected by those decisions.

Participation Tools and Practices Website

[Link]
This website provides an introduction to some basic participation concepts and offers
a brief history of citizen participation in the United States.

Vulnerable Population Resources

FEMA Preparing People with Disabilities Publication
[Link]
This preparedness booklet, Preparing for Disaster for People with Disabilities and
Other Special Needs, from the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) is a
supplement to FEMA’s Are You Ready program.

How to Engage Low-Literacy and Limited English-Proficiency Populations

[Link]
This report documents “best practices” in identifying and engaging low-literacy and
limited-English-proficiency populations in transportation decision making.

[Link]
[Link]
The Community Preparedness Website Project was undertaken to insure that
the needs and concerns of vulnerable populations are addressed in the area of
emergency preparedness and response. To achieve this, the PrepareNow website
attempts to integrate community-based organizations into emergency planning and
management.

HELPU Website
[Link]
Similar to the PrepareNow site mentioned above, the HELPU website is intended to
serve all members of the disabled community, their care-givers, attendants, fire and

E-14 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

rescue personnel, and emergency services departments. The site offers numerous
pages with tips on emergency/disaster preparedness for various hazards.

National Organization on Disability’s Emergency Preparedness Initiative

[Link]
The National Organization on Disability’s Emergency Preparedness Initiative has
released this “virtual binder” of materials related to the National Capital Region Con-
ference on Emergency Preparedness for People with Disabilities.

DOT Emergency Preparedness and Individuals with Disabilities

[Link]
In response to a 2004 executive order directing federal agencies to support safety
and security for individuals with disabilities during disasters, the U.S. Department of
Transportation (DOT) launched a web site containing information to help ensure safe
and secure transportation for persons with disabilities in the event of a disaster or
emergency.

Gender and Disaster Sourcebook

[Link]/
The Gender and Disaster Sourcebook is an electronic compilation of international
resources on policy, practice, and research designed to address gender concerns in
disaster risk reduction.

Nobody Left Behind Project

[Link]/~rrtcpbs/
This site describes the Nobody Left Behind project, a 3-year study by researchers at
the University of Kansas on how 30 U.S. counties and cities identified and planned
for people with mobility impairments during disasters.

Women’s Participation in Disaster Relief and Recovery

[Link]
This publication features detailed case studies from three earthquake-stricken areas
in India and Turkey that exemplify how low-income women who have lost everything
can form groups and become active participants in the relief and recovery process.

Benfield Hazards Research Centre—Disabilities and Disasters

[Link]
The Benfield Hazard Research Centre developed this Web page on disability and
disasters. The primary aim is to identify publications and unpublished material on the
subject (in print or online), field initiatives, and people working in the field. An anno-
tated list of publications, outlines of known research and field projects, and details of
key contacts will be updated periodically on this web page. This work will be ongo-
ing. Details of publications, initiatives, and people working in the field are therefore
welcome.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide E-15

 Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

Ready New York for Seniors and People with Disabilities

[Link]
This guidebook was prepared by the New York City Office of Emergency
Management as part of its ongoing effort to help all New Yorkers better prepare for
emergencies.

Risk Communication in Southern California: Ethnic and Gender Response to

1995 Revised, Upgraded Earthquake Probabilities
[Link]
The purpose of this study was to visit one ethnically diverse community in southern
California, gather some preliminary data on the background and initial impact of the
revised earthquake probabilities for southern California, and observe the role that
the new information handbook played in educating the public of its risk to the earth-
quake hazard. This report also assessed the response of ethnic and minority groups
to the revised warning message, and captured the gender response as well.

Vulnerability Network & Observatory

[Link]
This site provides an online knowledge portal to link researchers and practitioners
in various sectors of the vulnerability field. The “Document Hotel” contains hundreds
of searchable journal papers, reports, and briefing notes that cover a range of topics,
including vulnerability, adaptation, climate change impacts, food security, water man-
agement, renewable energy, and socio-environmental modeling.

Tsunami Information Resources

International Tsunami Training Institute Archive
[Link]
This website contains archived information and resources developed for the Interna-
tional Tsunami Training Institute. Resources are categorized into the following catego-
ries: Incident Command System, Coastal Community Resilience, Tsunami Alert Rapid
Notification System, and Seismic.

American Red Cross Tsunami Webpage

[Link]
This website includes a variety of tsunami-related information provided by the Ameri-
can Red Cross.

Prepare for Tsunamis in Coastal British Columbia

[Link]
Prepare_for_Tsunami.html
This provincial website provides information on the tsunami hazard including warn-
ing and risk information.

California Seismic Safety Commission Tsunami Webpage

[Link]

E-16 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide

Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

This state website provides tsunami-related information for residents of the state of
California.

Sitka Tsunami Preparedness Information

[Link]
This city website provides tsunami-related information for residents of the city of
Sitka, Alaska.

Tsunamis in Oregon
[Link]
This state website provides tsunami-related information for residents of the state of
Oregon.

Washington Military Department, Emergency Management Division Tsunami

Program Website
[Link]
This state website provides tsunami-related information for residents of the state of
Washington.

Washington Military Department, Emergency Management Division Tsunami

Evacuation Brochures
[Link]
This state website provides tsunami related information for residents of the state of
Washington.

Tsunami Teacher
[Link]
The TsunamiTeacher Information and Resource Toolkit brings together a wealth of
new and existing information on tsunamis into a single global resource that is widely
accessible to people, groups, and governments around the world. TsunamiTeacher
aims to build awareness and the capacity to respond to and mitigate the impact of
tsunamis through the sharing of knowledge, research, and best practices.

National Weather Service TsunamiReady Program

[Link]
This National Weather Service website provides information on the TsunamiReady
Program, including application forms as well as publications.

Pacific Disaster Center Tsunami Hazard Webpage

[Link]
The Pacific Disaster Center’s mission is to provide applied information research and
analysis support for the development of more effective policies, institutions, programs
and information products for the disaster management and humanitarian assistance
communities of the Asia Pacific region and beyond.

Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide E-17

 Appendix D: Documentation Requirements for NTWCs and RTWPs

Pacific Tsunami Warning Center

[Link] Warning Center/
This website provides information on tsunami messages that have been broadcast in
the past 90 days.

Wave that shook the world

[Link]
This Public Broadcasting Service website reconstructs the 2004 Indian Ocean tsunami
in an effort to prepare for the next big one.

Coastal Community Resilience: A Guide for Planning and Action to Address

Tsunami and Other Coastal Hazards
The Coastal Community Resilience (CCR) initiative is one component of the US Indian
Ocean Tsunami Warning System (IOTWS) Program. CCR provides a holistic frame-
work to address the increasing risks from coastal hazards and to vulnerable commu-
nities living in coastal areas.

International Strategy for Disaster Reduction (ISDR), Asia–Pacific

[Link]/asiapacific/
This website of the United Nations’ ISDR provides basic information on disaster
risk reduction in the Asia and Pacific Islands region. The region faces a regular and
increased frequency of typhoons, tsunamis, floods, droughts, fires, and other natu-
ral hazards, and the new website aims to establish an interactive relationship with
regional partners throughout the Asian and Pacific region, who are invited to provide
information on a regular basis.

E-18 Tsunami Warning Center Reference Guide